XaiJu
Karmatic

Karmatic

patreon


Karmatic posts

A New Sun Chapter 37

Chapter 37

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

I wheeze as my hand finally touches the peak of the newly formed mountain.

My body is splayed out, clinging to the rock and fucking snow desperately.

Luckily, I don't feel the chill, despite the blizzard raging around me.

I open my mouth, gasping desperately for air, but barely anything fills my young.

What little does, is pushed out by my lungs, as my chest and stomach are pressed hard against the mountainside.

Fucker added an artificial atmosphere and increased the gravity.

By the end, I had to use my Touki to give me the strength necessary to finish the trek!

And I'm pretty sure if I couldn't regenerate at all, I'd be dead from crushed everything!

All of my hate!

I barely manage to tilt my head up as a light sipping noise overcomes the bellowing icy winds.

There, dear old grandpa on my mother's side sits, floating right above the peak.

Spear held lazily in one hand, beer in the other.

He clicks his tongue.

“Took you longer than expected, didn't it?” He muses aloud, shaking his mostly empty bottle, “Especially once you start losing your ability to breathe, hmm?”

I would love to respond, but all I manage is a ragged hiss.

“Oh. Right.” He taps the end of the spear against my forehead.

Suddenly, the constant suffocating gravity and atmosphere seem to vanish as I float up, level with him.

My mouth devours air in a long, deep, breath, the likes of which even Kirby would be jealous to witness!

I…Haaahhnn…hate…Hahnnn-! You…!”

I take several, just for really good measure, in between words.

Izanagi merely looks at me, a quaint smirk across his face. “Surely you understand why I put you through that, right?”

“Yeah, yeah…” I huff that sweet sweet air, “my breathing technique gives me pretty much unlimited stamina while I can use it, and on top of that, it improves my healing and physical abilities.”

He nods, content with my answer, his beer bottle long gone, as he scratches his beard, “Yes…good. Without it, you aren't nothing per se, but you are most certainly much worse without it.

“While your mastery of the technique to the point of unconsciously using it is certainly impressive, for training purposes, it's…detrimental, in a sense.” Izanagi adds.

I quirk my eyebrow at that, “How so?”

He chuckles, “To use modern…lingo, as it were, that technique is like a mask over your ‘base form’, not an incorporation to it, as I've shown and I'm sure you've nearly experienced…it can be for all intents and purposes, turned off.”

I tilt my head to the side, truly thinking about the effects my breathing technique has on my body.

Then facepalm as it finally clicks, and Izanagi's smirk grows smug.

“Breathing techniques enhance my strength constantly. When I train, it's not my base muscles that get affected, it's my enhanced ones.” I explained aloud, to which Izanagi nodded, pleased.

To go further in depth as to why that's an issue, it's because of the enhancement itself affecting the efficiency of the training.

The idea is, that as you are weaker, you get a tougher workout, grind harder than you could in a stronger state, and get more gains.

Then the gains applied to your unenhanced base make the transformation, or in my case enhanced state, stronger, than if you trained in said enhanced state.

Luckily for me, I haven't been focusing on my physical strength and body all that much, instead abusing the infinite stamina from breathing to quickly speed through my swordsmanship forms.

It actually would be pretty good endurance training for my body, going through the Sun Breathing forms without using the proper breathing methods, something those from Demon Slayer simply can't do as they are closer to normal humans.

Holding that thought for another time, I look at Izanagi once again, “While that's a nice epiphany, physical training?” I ask, bemused, “I thought you were going to teach me Kami stuff?”

He snorts at that, “For you, it is.”

I blink at that.

He sighs, elaborating, “As Arahitogami, you are a Living God. The important word there is living. In a sense, you are your own God, enshrined in your own human body.

“Your Shrine is, for all intents and purposes, your human body. That comes with all the advantages and disadvantages of being human, along with…other benefits we'll talk about later.” He waves the topic off.

I frown, “No no, go back. Disadvantages? Like what?”

He sighs, “As a human being, you possess a human mind, a human brain…which means mental magics or powers still affect you. Stuff like that boy, you can figure out the rest for yourself.”

Ah. Like the Shinigami’s suicide aura, huh?

Yeah, alright. I see what he means.

Though I'm also kind of curious about those ‘other benefits’ he was talking about.

“Now, before you continue to ask more pesky questions,” my eyebrow twitches as he suddenly continues, “you have a mountain to climb down.”

I click my tongue and move to turn around, only for Izanagi to chuckle at me.

I turn back, eyebrow raised.

He points his spear up, “I didn't say back, now did I?”

I look up, only to behold a whole other upside-down mountain.

However, it didn't remain upside down for long, as gravity reasserted itself abruptly, causing me to flip over and flop into another snow-capped mountaintop.

Yay.

I pull myself from the snow and glare up at the primordial creator god who seems to be having far too much fun with this.

“Descend the mountain,” he commands with a smirk and wave of his spear, “although, be sure not to fall off...or you'll start over, right from the peak.”

My glare intensifies, “I hate you.”

He snorts, “I care little, boy, you'll be grateful in time, and at present? I haven't had so much fun in a long time.”

“Oh really?” I snark, standing up, “Couldn't tell.” I huff, before putting a hand to my chest, and actively forcing my breathing rhythm to change.

It feels…very wrong, to be honest.

Having gotten used to breathing to the limits my lungs could take, normal breathing almost makes me feel short of breath.

Almost. I can live with this.

With that out of the way, I start walking forward–

The side of the ice-capped mountain cracks, breaks, and falls off. Dragging me down with it like I was in some sort of Oversimplified video comedy sketch.

“Bhahahaha!!”

Even Izanagi's fucking laughter sounds like his!!

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

That mountain was fucking cursed.

Not literally, mind, but it may as well have been.

Spots where gravity got wack, parkour courses galore, and fucking puzzles.

I actively stopped myself from using Touki, my mark, and any ability enhancers whatsoever this time.

Needless to say, I couldn't do it. There was this one part, where gravity reversed three times, and I couldn't make the long jump across a gorge in the middle.

Gravity was simply too strong.

So I kept throwing myself at it, until Izanagi came down, saw me barely held together, and dragged me out of the mountain.

Apparently, we're giving my body a chance to rest before going back to the mountains.

I'm going to have to climb the first one, but honestly, I'm okay with that.

For now.

My body's loving it, my patience, not so much.

Fucking…puzzles.

What am I living in now, a Bethesda sandbox?

“We are here.” Izanagi suddenly started, drawing me from my internal whining musing.

I blink, looking around to see an almost perfect replica of the Shinkai.

Forest and foliage of bright, vivid color, spreads out as far as the eyes can see under a pure glistening white sky.

Izanagi taps the ground, causing mats to appear, he sits in one, and waves for me to sit in the one across from him.

I do so, plopping my tired body down on the comforting cushion.

“When your body has been properly worked, and resting, only then shall we work on one aspect of your spirit.” He began, his eyes glowing eerily, “The Divine part.”

A pristine, perfect, pure white slowly hums around Izanagi to enunciate his words.

At first, I thought he was drawing upon light powers at first, it was so bloody bright, it took a moment for me to realize what it truly is.

Life…” I slowly gasped out.

Specifically, his Holy Spirit Power. It's all suffused with life.

The aura clung to his body, flowing around him like water, even moving his hair slightly as he nodded.

“Yes, good…I see you recognize Holy Spirit Power then?” I nod back at him, half dazed still by the sheer purity of life in my eyes and senses, “Tell me what you know of it if anything.”

It admittedly takes a moment to focus enough to pull on the memory of what Inari told me back then…

Feels like months since then, but it only has been a single one, give or take a week or two.

Damn.

Do I need a vacation already?

Putting that aside, I recall Inari's explanation about Holy Spirit Power, and to Izanagi's slight shock, Musubi.

Quick refresh I run through; Kami are manifestations of Musubi, the interconnected energy of the universe, which grants us our Holy Spirit Powers, to govern and hold authority over natural laws and phenomena within certain domains.

Izanagi grumbled as I finished, “That's a very good base to start with, Inari told you all that?”

I nod, and he hums with approval, “Then, building off that. Beyond what we specialize in, all Kami or Gods can do a list of basic things with their powers. I will give you a short list of said abilities, ready?”

I nod, “Hit me.”

My stare gets blanker, and blanker, as he goes on.

Causality Manipulation. Probability Manipulation.

Dimension Creation.

Power Bestowal, or blessings, technically.

Power Creation. I recall Uzume mentioning this as something my mother was tinkering with.

On the flip side, Power Negation.

Divinity Bestowl, Artifact Creation, Instant Win Pow–

“Wait. Hol’ up.” I hold up my hand, he raises an eyebrow at my interruption, “Instant Win Power…?” I parrot back, completely taken aback.

He snorts, “Of course. Any God should win instantly against any mortal. If they don't, then they don't deserve the power vested in them by creation.”

I had to hold back immediately countering that entire statement with just…

Loki.

I also had to hold back a snicker at that thought in its entirety.

Though now that I got his attention, “Also,” I add on, before exclaiming, “basic!?

Izanagi chuckles, “I may have exaggerated the term there, I suppose. Though granting minor powers or blessings are truly very simple to grant, for even the most fledgling divine.”

I sigh at that, “Okay, is there anything divine beings can't do?”

Izanagi’s gaze suddenly sharpens, “Plenty, boy…for instance, a fire god can't create or manipulate the seas. We are beings of great power, but we aren't all-powerful.

Of course, Gods can be clever, using their holy powers to cause a knock-on effect to ‘manipulate’ other domains.”

“Like a sea god, manipulating groundwater to create localized earthquakes?” I try to give an example.

“Precisely!” Izanagi affirms, “Some gods possess wider reaching powers, such as magic gods, but not even their reach is all-encompassing.”

“So, what about Gods of the Universe then?” I ask with a slight frown.

“Ah, like Ama, or Indra…” he muses whilst scratching his beard, “No, not even they control all. They certainly hold sway over small things, minor acts of creation, as I'm sure you've inherited that much.

“But in our case, Goddess of the Universe does not mean Goddess of Musubi. Her connection is deeper than most, and it shows most prominently within the vastness of Holy Spirit Power she possesses.”

He looks at me curiously, “Something I'm curious you didn't also inherit, truth be told.”

I shrug off that last statement, and press forward with a new thought, “So… to hold control over everything, you need to be able to manipulate Musubi directly?”

Izanagi nods to that, “In our Pantheon, yes. I do not know what the conditions are in others to achieve a similar feat, although I do know one who has achieved it. I'm sure you know of Him as well, that jealous god.” Izanagi states with a spiteful hiss.

Dear old Grandpa really doesn't like the Angel Daddy, huh?

“But enough of this, too much of the more advanced stuff too soon.” Izanagi promptly waves it all off, “We start with the basics. Holy Spirit Power Manipulation, into basic blessings. Sounds good?”

I nod, excitedly, “Yeah, let's get to it!”

“Good, so. You may have already noticed, but Holy Spirit Power much prefers a channel, a medium if you will. Unlike the Greeks, throwing around power willy-nilly won't serve you…”

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

As it turns out, the process of blessing someone isn't all that complicated.

It's pretty much the far less sexual, far more boring version of how I gave Kuroka chakra, except instead of trying to give someone that, it's focused more along the line of giving people a passive effect based on my powers.

Izanagi recommended something simple, like granting resistance against the sun's rays, basically a sort of divine SPF sunscreen.

He has me training this by passing my Holy Spirit Power through a pebble.

Now. How would one tell if a blessing affects a pebble, of all things?

Well, first, it starts with the pebble not exploding.

Izanagi helpfully pointed out that would be what happens if I failed to bless a person as well.

Thanks, Grandpa. Proving exactly why I didn't test that shit on Kuroka.

In any case, it didn't take long for me to get the very minor blessing to stick, upon which, I moved up to bigger rocks…and repeated the same stuff I did to the pebbles.

Repeat and repeat, move up to bigger rocks, like boulders, and repeat.

Then, start all over with pebbles, but instead of a minor blessing, a more mild one.

It went on like that until I was drained of my divine powers.

Izanagi was right when he said blessings aren't too difficult, with the step up between blessing tiers as they were only having a modicum increase in difficulty.

Supposedly, that was only the start, though he clarified that we probably wouldn't have time to go over the insane shit like manipulating probability and causality within the couple of months we had.

Though, artifact creation should be on the table, maybe.

We'll see.

For now though.

I open one eye and stare at the Creator God as he sips obnoxiously loudly from a beer bottle.

“You know,” I begin, gritting my teeth, “It's annoying enough trying to gather Ki with you constantly pulling the life force away from me. I don't need that as well.”

Aptly, Izanagi continued sipping. Louder.

I simply sighed and got back to meditating.

Once I drained my divine powers, this is what he's been having me do next.

Sit on a nearby hill in the middle of the Shinkai imitation forest, and focus on my human spiritual side, ki, or senjutsu.

But of course, with a twist.

“You were much too coddled back in Kyoto, you know.” Izanagi mused, a strand of ki pulling away, just out of my grasp as I tried to take it with my own.

My brow furrowed as he continued, “Ley Lines, brimming with natural life force, all focused on that one city. It's the perfect place to cultivate power in the art, but not so much control.

Another strand dodges and weaves around my senses, just out of reach.

I click my tongue.

“Something you sorely require, considering the boons the arts offer you.” He continued, almost chidingly, “As someone with some authority over life, you should possess a natural talent for the art, boy.”

“Not as much as the cats, old man.” I respond on instinct, lightly, as I focus more so on a small wisp of ki getting suspiciously close.

“The Nekomata and the Nekoshou? Bha!” He huffs, “They cheat with their innate connection, they don't count.”

I chuckle at that with a wry smirk, “Says the literal Shinto Creation God.”

“That's also differe-”

I snap the wisp of ki up all of a sudden like a viper scooping up and consuming its prey in one gulp.

Izanagi halts speaking a second, before chuckling to himself, “Cheeky brat.”

“Slow old man.” I respond in kind.

I don't even flinch when the side of the spear bats me over the head.

Kuroka…wasn't that great of a teacher, but one thing she was good for was helping build resistance to a physical stimulus when meditating.

So I continue smiling along as Izanagi grunts in dissatisfaction, seeing me completely unaffected.

“Where was I…before the cats…ah, right. Senjutsu.” He continues, gruffly, “One of its lesser-known abilities enables it to increase the luck of its users by simply cycling their ki throughout their bodies in a certain way.”

My senses pulse, and I try to grab onto another tendril of Ki.

Just as I latch onto it, it slips straight through my grip like a little snake.

“Of course, it's not true probability manipulation,” Izanagi continues with a smug hum, “it's more so the poor man's version. But a little good luck can never not be helpful, no?”

“The other stuff also helps.” I muse aloud, “Like aura blasts, striking the internal body and soul, things like that.”

“Don't forget the more subtle arts,” Izanagi chides lightly, “Senjutsu can also be used to affect the mind and abilities, and take control of nature itself.”

“Don't think turning trees into minions is very subtle, old man.” I add on.

“...Fair enough.” He concedes with a grunt, “The point is, Senjutsu has a wide array of uses purely by itself. All of which I expect you to take full advantage of, understand?”

“I know, I know…I wasn't planning on not doing so,” I state, “it's just going to take some time to incorporate everything into one cohesive fighting style.”

He hums in thought to that, “That is something we shall be focusing on as well after some time has passed.”

Eh?

“How are we going to do that?” I ask tentatively.

“Do not worry about it for now,” he waves me off, “focus, you have ki to grab and cultivate.”

Well, I won't argue with that I guess.

It's probably going to be rather crazy, considering the fucking puzzle mountains.

No, I will never get over that!

A ki wisp slaps me in the face and I lose focus for a second.

Izanagi merely chortles behind me.

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

Two weeks, seven days a week passed purely like that.

As it turns out when neither the mentor nor the student needs food or sleep, the student can regenerate, and the mentor is an absolute hardass, the work does not stop.

When my physical body was sufficiently trained, we'd move on to my Holy Spirit Power.

When my divine powers gave out, we moved on to the raw spiritual.

Rinse and repeat in a seemingly never-ending cycle.

And it wasn't like it got boring, either. Izanagi, when properly motivated, switched things up on the regular to make everything more interesting.

Whether that be changing the courses, and puzzles, adding a fucking maze in the mountain sections, or switching the targets of my attempted blessings to facsimiles of very frightened pigeons, he came up with something new after a while that kept me hooked.

As if he ultimately needed to do any of that, though. I could tell that stuff was mostly for his amusement, what I was focused on was results.

It's only been two weeks, and yet, I can feel the difference it's made.

Today is different, a rest day, Izanagi called it.

I'd press X to doubt, but I don't have a game console here, unfortunately.

So instead, I walked out into Kuni’s planes, to get a feel for where my strength now sat at.

After going out a good distance from ‘camp’, I drew my broken sword.

Clenching the hilt within my grip, I focused, pouring Holy Spirit Power into the blade, and shaping it along its edge, and past the broken bit.

The blade, what bit remained attached to the hilt, glowed with a humming crimson red, encased by a golden honey glow that stretched out, becoming a phantom overlay, imitating the old shape of the sword.

It's a bandaid fix, but one that will have to do. Hell, it's not even a perfect bandaid placement.

I can see wisps of golden aura flake off here and there, the phantom edge isn't entirely solid yet either, it leaves ghastly trails as I move it around or swing it lightly.

Definitely cool looking, but not at all effective in a fight where the ghostly remnant of the blade would simply pop like a water balloon.

Still though, nice first shot, it'll have to do for now.

I take my stance, phantom sword held out.

For the first time in the past two weeks, I put my breathing techniques back into place, swelling my lungs with that sweet oxygen, letting my blood and muscles feast.

My chest and face burn as my mark activates, dark golden aura bubbles and bursts off my form, before coalescing around me.

I take a step, and rocket off into the distance, with a single sword stroke.

Dance.

The ground shatters beneath and around me as I move, and a trench appears where I bring my blade down into the ground.

I turn to see the path of my movement, carved into the ground for Heaven knows how long behind me, then turn back to look at the trench extending out before me, and deep into the ground.

I blink slowly in realization.

I just broke into Ultimate Class. I think. Probably.

My unenhanced base state has been feeling closer to within the realm my maximum was lately, so that should be the case.

Well, without Ara-Mitama, but that's more or less a berserker state, I don't count that as being wholly me. Yet.

Definitely going to need to compare with Kuroka when all this is done. She described herself as ‘pretty far up there in ultimate class with three tails now, nyah~!’ after all.

…I miss my cat. Cats. Plural, now.

“All warmed up I see.”

“HNN!?” I damn near jump, whirling around to find Izanagi floating there, an eyebrow raised at my reaction, “Fucking…Damn it, old man. I was thinking about stuff!”

He does not look amused, “You can do that, later…today's the day we assimilate everything you've gained into your repertoire.”

My eyebrow twitches, “I thought you said today was for rest.”

“Technically, it is.” He holds his spear out, “All you need to do is fight me. Worry not. I won't strike back, merely defend. Your job is simply to get used to what you now have. Easy, yes?”

I stare at him for a little while longer before sighing, “I guess…especially since I don't have exactly anything combat ready to add quite yet.”

“Precisely.” He taps the spear to the ground, the trench, the destruction I carved into the ground via my high-speed movement earlier fills and flattens out.

“Then whenever you are ready.” He floats there ready, with his spear held out.

My grip on my blade tightens as I slide back into my fighting stance, “Not even gonna fight back a little bit, old man?”

He snorts, “Knocking you out every microsecond wouldn't help, would it? Beyond shutting that mouth of yours up for a second, I suppose.”

Hmm. An idea occurs.

“My mouth? Okay, old man. How about several?” I ask with a grin.

“Several? What are you–”

I cut him off by showing him, smoothly transitioning my grip on the hilt into the hand sign I need.

Smoke explodes out around me, and as it clears, revealing half a dozen other mes standing there with the same stupid grin, and same glowing swords, Izanagi floats there, goggling at me.

“Avatars? No…these feel too real to be constructs, so then this is…” Izanagi trails off, before smirking, “Cloning, then? Most interesting…come on then.”

En garde!” I and all my selves roar out as one, before jumping the old man, glowing swords swinging.

Okay, that sounded pretty bad, but the old man is a primordial creator god with a spear that can manipulate reality, so it's fine!

Granted, it's not like I was doing this just to JJK jump the annoying old man, this has a larger purpose.

For a while now, I've been meaning to complete my swordsmanship, but couldn't because stuff kept getting in the way, or I had to focus on other things first.

But now, not only do I have the time, but I have something better than air to practice on, I've got a practice dummy who will let me swing on him.

And can keep up the entire time, even against seven of me, for as long as need be.

Izanagi blocked a few of the blades with the long shaft of his spear, and easily glided around the rest.

He'd twist his body one way to somehow dodge several swings at once in the chaotic dance of swords, in a way, he's doing his dance.

His was a very rigid, efficient, style of movement. It sacrificed form over sheer practicality. It lacked grace, yet somehow, that made it graceful in its way?

Heh. Look at me judging fighting styles. If it works, it works.

His certainly did.

There was a twist this time, or at least nothing I'd truly call a twist.

Instead, in the middle of the mosh pit of swords, the god holding a spear would start critiquing us.

“Straighten out your foot, loose footwork is a loose stroke!” He calls out to a clone after easily passing them by.

“Arms tucked in! Your blade is already long enough, you do not need to make your swing wider.” He hisses to another as he blocks their swing.

“Unnecessary movement there. There's no need to shift your feet like that, keep them firm!” He calls, here and there, again and again.

Honestly. He sounds like a restaurant critic on Yelp.

I'd also be lying if I said this wasn't my favorite part of all this training so far, though.

With my breathing techniques back up, I can pretty much go forever, so…

I wonder what this old man will have to say about all the other forms I remade?

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

Hour after hour passes, as Susanoo sits on his throne.

Yet, that feeling in his gut, that trepidation stirring in his stomach remains, and continues to grow stronger.

This phantom pain, this sinking dread…

He shut down all exits and entrances to Yomi a while ago.

Yet the feeling didn't leave.

But it's fine. Everything is completely, and utterly fine.

Everything will be worth it.

Even when Ama eventually comes down to have words with him over all this, he's got a plan for her too.

He's dealt with her before, he can do it again.

His foot taps the ground restlessly, echoing like the ceaseless falling of rain.

His hand flexs, back and forth, gripping a phantom blade.

He stares, glaring at the spot where he sent his Nephew away.

It's almost like he's asking for something to happen.

Yet, when it does, he can only be stunned silent, the pit in his stomach dropping.

At exactly four hours after he sent his nephew away, a column of pure white explodes into existence, right in the middle of the throne room.

He recognizes the Holy Spirit Power almost immediately.

Father.

But it isn't him who walks out from the pillar of light, instead, it's…

“Nephew…” Susanoo murmurs, eyes widening as his all too smug Nephew smirks at him.

He's stronger now.

Several times stronger now.

What.

“Met your Dad,” his nephew starts, eyes swirling into Tomoe, “he said you're a whiny little bitch who needed to be spanked more as a child.”

What.

Then there was smoke, a massive explosion of it bursting out from all around him as the pillar subsided.

As it cleared, there stood several of his nephew.

At least a dozen.

Fucking clones. His divine senses, from just a cursory glance, couldn't see which one was fake, and which was real.

Not like they gave him the chance to look much.

Every man for himself!!”

They all screamed at once, before scattering.

He rose, lightning coiling his form as his eyes blazed, his arm swung out, and at its peak, his blade appeared.

Ama-no-Habakiri appeared, and the throne room blazed with rolling thunder, covering the walls, floor, ceiling, everything.

The mostly empty throne room that is, save for himself.

Wait.

He was too slow…?

No. His nephew had gotten faster. Far faster than he was before.

How?

Susanoo snarled, dark taint dripping from his blade like a poison, as the palace creaked at the storm brewing outside.

FATHER!!” He roared, WHAT KIND OF GAME ARE YOU PLAYING!?!

Why!? He never cared! So why!?

Lightning flashed outside, the palace began to actively sway under the force of the raging storm outside.

Fuck it.

No more waiting around.

After he drags the last of Kagustuchi from that boy's cooling corpse, he'll beat his nephew into the dirt, then go down to Kuni and do the same to him.

But…then Mother will…

No. He steels his will. She'll see his reasons, all will be well.

He'll make it well, with his own two hands.

Unlike his Father before him, he won't cower from doing what needs to be done!

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

Chapter 37


Hmm, Patreon is still a little wacky, tho luckily there's no pictures this chapter, lol.

Anyway, pure unadulterated chaos next chapter,  as befitting of Susan. Nori is now very ready to punch him the face, and not get no selled into another dimension, lol.

View Post

A New Sun Chapter 36

Chapter 36

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

A pure white sky, flowing, twisting, and churning like an endlessly spanning ocean greets me as I open my eyes.

I greet it by deadpanning at it all, before holding up my broken blade and beholding it.

I have merely one word.

“Fuck.”

That's an apt way of describing everything going on.

I sigh and sprawl out across the ground, staring up at the clear milky-white sky.

Well. That was certainly…something.

Definitely didn't expect my conversation with Susanoo to be so emotional.

The guy certainly isn't a mindless berserker, he's just entirely ruled by his emotions.

And I…kind of got caught up there myself, didn't I?

As cheesy as it is, love will never not make someone do the stupidest of shit.

Doesn't change the fact that I will stab him when I get out of here.

I slowly sat up, rubbing the spot where my dear Uncle had stabbed me to bring me here, it had healed during the fall here.

Need to pay him back for that. Somehow.

But for now? I need to find out where exactly I am.

And looking around…there isn't much to go off of.

The ground here, as far as the eye can see, is plains. Short grass plains roll off into the distance, in every direction I look.

It's kind of got an eerie type of beauty to it. There are no trees, no flowers, no rivers or lakes, just grassland ad infinitum.

It almost feels unfinished, in a way.

And this feeling…

I hop onto my feet and take a nice, deep breath.

My entire body shivers, but not in a bad way, no.

The air here, it's pure, and especially not like the air back on Earth, it's got a twinge of something else in it.

Something opposite of the taint from Yomi.

I opened my senses, the senses I had closed off in Yomi, and almost immediately regretted it as I was promptly flash-banged by the sheer breadth of power very similar to my own.

Life. The pure, bright, vibrant energy of living infuses this place like water to an over-drenched towel.

My first thought?

Whoa. This would be a great place to train Senjutsu.

My second thought was to promptly slap myself for the first.

Suppressing the urge to train very badly right here, right now, I take another sweeping look around.

It's odd. Despite the sheer amount of life energy suffusing this place, there isn't anything showing it.

I blink, idly, as my senses pick up something different in the air that I recognize.

With a grimace, I take the few steps required to find it, sitting in the grass.

The rest of the blade of my sword was still dyed a slight crimson red like the minimal amount still attached to the hilt.

Gingerly, I pick up the sharp slab of slightly curved metal and slide it down into my sword sheath, placing the hilt right on top.

When I get out of here, I'll have to find someone to fix it, though I'm not even sure where to begin looking on that front.

Maybe Uzume knows a blacksmith Kami?

Shaking my head of those thoughts, consigning them to later, I expand my senses once again.

Unlike normal, where I usually have a very limited sensing range, due to the pureness of this place and the sheer amount of life force flowing through it, my senses carry easily across the land.

Far, far across the land.

For a second, I almost stop, thinking this place may be simply endless, and that there's nothing here after all.

But then I recall the last few words Susan spoke to me.

‘Say hi to him for me, Nephew.’

Him, huh? So there is someone else here.

So, I don't stop looking. I let my senses continue to spread out, until eventually…they stop.

This place, this realm, is finite.

And near the border of this realm, sat the strongest power I've ever felt before.

Stronger than Inari. Stronger than Susanoo.

I could feel this being’s Holy Spirit Power through my senses as a near physical weight or pressure.

So vast was it, even at ease, that the life energies around it bent and cycled around it as if it had gravity.

I'm almost sure this being knows I'm here already, there's no way they haven't.

Yet they don't seem to particularly care. I think.

Regardless, they are pretty much my only shot at getting out of here quickly, so…

I suppose I'll do as my uncle asked, and go say hi, and hope I don't get stabbed again for it.

Granted, he said he didn't want to kill me, so I doubt he'd stuff me in a realm with a malevolent being so vastly stronger than him.

With that slight hope in mind, I start walking, before shifting into a sprint, and then leaping into the air and taking flight.

This realm, although it isn't infinite, is still pretty damn large.

If I want to make good time, I need to go zoom right from the start.

I don't hesitate. As soon as I hit the air, I immediately rocket off.

There is no time to waste, especially now.

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

The land never changed as I flew over it.

Endless grasslands, spread out like waves, continuing onwards, forever and ever.

It was almost enough to freak me out since it felt like I wasn't going anywhere.

So what I couldn't do with my eyes, I did with my other senses, my sixth sense, keeping a lock on that power, using it like a beacon.

In that sense, I can tell I was getting closer.

Until, eventually…

Ah.

When approaching the resting spot of a being stronger than Chief Gods, what does one usually suspect?

Maybe, a grand arena, or a temple, fit for some final boss shit, spiraling up into the sky.

Or any building in general. Maybe a workshop of some kind, or a really big tree, something at all!

Instead, I float in the sky, looking down incredulously at what can only be described as a trash pile sitting on a cliffside.

Right next to said trash pile, is a figure, the source of what I'm sensing, that power.

It's a man, who looks vaguely like Susanoo, clad in a dark blue robe, but with longer black hair and a bushier beard.

He's ripped to hell and back, I'll give him that much, but beyond that?

He's laying in a beach chair, drinking a…is that an Asahi Super Dry bear?

The fuck did I just fly over too?

The man takes another swig of his bear, emptying the bottle in the process.

Without another care, he throws the bottle over the cliffside and into…into…

I tilt my head, as a chill cascades down my spine.

Dark. Cold. More like jelly than water, but resembling the liquid of life more than the former, the bottle falls into this substance, this ocean, stretching out beyond the land, and dissolves.

It was like it was thrown into a woodchipper made of acid, with how quickly it just vanished into non-existence.

“Fascinating, isn't it?” The man suddenly called out, his tone rough, commanding, yet soft, my attention snapped down to him. “Primeval Chaos…it can unmake, just as easily as it can make.” He states with an amused chuckle.

Primeval Chaos? That would explain some things, certainly.

Like how I get the feeling touching it, or even staring into it for too long would be detrimental to the whole living thing.

Slowly, the man got out of his beach chair, and stretched, giving a light groan, before walking over to the trash pile.

“I don't usually get visitors, and no one is supposed to even know I'm here. I'm on…vacation, in a sense.” The man continues speaking, whilst reaching into the trash pile.

Before pulling out a spear.

Well, I call it a spear, but it's truly more like a naginata.

A golden naginata, decorated with jewels from the bottom of the shaft to the blade.

The tip of which, I'm not even surprised I suddenly found, pointed at my throat, the man suddenly standing on the air right in front of me.

The man…doesn't have pupils or any iris. Instead, his eyes are seas of white, just like the sky of this place.

I think I know who Susanoo was trying to copy now, with his blazing, empty eyes.

His dear old Dad.

“So…boy. You sought me out fairly quickly…which begs the question. What are you doing here?” He demands, slowly.

I, in all of my wisdom, answer with one word I'm sure will let him understand everything going on, if this guy is who I think he is.

“Susanoo.” I answer plainly, deadpanning straight back at him.

The man's eyes narrow.

Then he snorts and removes the spear point.

“Of course. Why am I even surprised?” Slowly, he floats back down to the ground, depositing the spear right back into the pile, “He sends all this shit here like it's his garbage disposal, it was only in time he'd send people here as well, I suppose.”

I rub my neck and sigh, as he pulls out another beach chair and lays it out.

“Well, boy? Come, take a seat. Tell me what my brat of a son is throwing a tantrum over this time.” He pats the chair, before laying back down on his own.

Alright then. No reason to not. I guess.

I float down and flop onto the chair with a light groan.

“Shouldn't I introduce myself first?” I ask, bemused.

“No.” Izanagi denied with a light scuff, “I know who you are. And I care little. I asked for something else, so…get on with it.”

I feel my eyebrow twitch a little at that.

Well. It was inevitable, I guess. One of my grandparents was going to be kind of a dick, huh?

The lucky streak finally ran out.

Oh well.

I deadpan up the sky, “Alright. Fine. So, in essence, Susan–”

Izanagi snorted at that, and muttered, amused, “Susan…should've thought of that one myself back then.”

“...is still bent over Kagustuchi killing Izanami. So, he tricked the wielder of Canis Lykaon into Yomi and is trying to get him to essentially kill himself, so he can get at your old sword...which still holds remnants of the old Fire God's power.” I explained, plainly.

Izanagi took a moment to digest that, rubbing his beard, before clicking his tongue in distaste, “So…I assume you tried stopping him and got kicked here as a result, hmm?”

“Pretty much, yeah.” I confirm, before continuing, “He told me to tell you hi, by the way.”

Suddenly, Izanagi froze.

“Did he…now.” He started, slowly.

“Mhmm.” I hum, “Guess your super secret vacation spot isn't all so secret after all?” I muse aloud.

“...No. No, I suppose it isn't.” Izanagi agreed quietly.

“He said he'd come get me once this is all over, but I don't suppose you would be able to send me back early?” I ask tentatively.

“I could.” He confirms, “But I won't.” He huffs out.

I sat up, “Why not?”

“Because what good would it do? When you appear right back before my son once more? As you are still right now?” He questions, scathingly, “Nothing would change. My son might be an overly emotional moron at the best of times, but he is still my son. He is strong.

“You? You are not.” He finishes matter of factly, a beer suddenly appears in his hand.

“Hey now, I've only been at this a few months at most!” I defend, vehemently, “I've been a powerless human most of my life, so for the record, with the hand I've been dealt…well it may not be perfect, but I like to think I've done pretty well so far.”

Izanagi blinks mid-motion to take a drink, “A…few months? Powerless? What…” he turns to look at me, white irisless eyes seemingly looking through me, “You…tell the truth? Honestly, I thought you were merely the weakest Arahitogami in history…”

I deadpan straight back at him, “Wow. Thanks, Grandpa.”

He frowns lightly, “Don't back-sass me, boy.”

“Don't insult me straight to my face, old man.” I fire back.

Now his eyebrow twitches, “You…certainly are like my daughter in some ways, I see. Did you get that from her?”

I shrug nonchalantly, “Not entirely sure what you mean, but I never met her before, truth be told.”

He simply stares at me.

Then continues staring at me, before slowly setting down his bear.

Explain.” His voice rumbles with the command.

No. Wait. That was the entire realm.

And so, quickly, I regurgitate my tragic backstory.

Not like there was much to it, but watching as Izanagi listened silently, his eyes continuously narrowed as I told him what's been going on, with my being made, Uzume's whole…thing, my mother never leaving Heaven, the works.

When I finished, Izanagi took a deep breath through his nose.

“I had thought I raised her better than this.” He started, disappointment clear in his voice, “Letting grief over a mortal man consume her, being so daft to not see the true pain of her servants, leaving said servant to squander the potential of an Arahitogami.”

He shakes his head, “For shame, for shame.”

He looks upon me, silently appraising me, stroking his beard before speaking up once more.

“Who taught you, then, if not the bed warmer.” He asked, curious.

“No one.” I answered honestly.

Izanagi looked like he was about to have an aneurysm, with his eye starting to rapidly twitch, “You're…joking.” He sounded desperate like he wanted me to confirm that as such.

“Nope.” But I shot him down, and he groaned in pain, “I'm entirely self-taught, all-natural talent here.”

Izanagi took his bear back up and downed the entire bottle in one very long drink.

He tossed the empty bottle straight into chaos, and sighed, “It's a wonder that the Celestial Bureaucracy haven't taken advantage of our obvious weakness, and struck us down yet…or anyone, truth be told.”

“Peace tends to have the effect of making people not want to go back to killing each other.” I add.

Izanagi waves me off, “All peace is temporary, boy. That's why it's called peace…it's always a period, a state of being. But states change. Sentences come after periods.

“When people want to kill each other again, they will…and it's clear to me that my old home would be the first to fall, should that time come.” He finishes solemnly.

He shakes his head, before eyeing me intently…I think, anyhow, “I don't think you understand quite how disappointed I am.” He intones, “Don't worry, I understand that if your training was non-existent, so too likely was your education.”

Can't even say he's wrong there. Most I got in that regard was from Inari, kind of.

“Allow me to fill you in…put simply, the last time an Arahitogami walked the Earth, he carved a chunk out of it for us.” Izanagi stated, “He became an Emperor before the title was named such. He fought other Kami and gods and won on the regular, forging the Kingdom on Earth in the chaos of those times.

“Before that jealous god made his own, and far stronger than the half men, half gods of the west at the time. He was the ultimate weapon.”

“I am no weapon.” I refute him on instinct.

Izanagi smiled, wide, “No. You aren't. Not yet.”

“...what is that supposed to mean?” I raised an eyebrow.

“You are like a blank canvas. A slab of metal. Just a seed. But that can change. I am very apt at Creating things from nothing, so it turns out…but what if I had something to work with first?” He asks, excitement mounting in his voice.

My mouth opens and closes several times before I finally manage something out.

“Are…you saying you want to train me?” I ask, completely floored.

“In a sense.” He somewhat confirms, “Usually, I would be against fixing my children's mistakes for them, but this is too big to simply ignore…also, I don't have much else to do here.” He chuckles, “This realm of mine…my last creation, I've been stuck with a sort of artist block regarding it for a very long time…” he trails off wistfully.

Huh. Okay. The more you know.

Now, thinking for a minute, the idea of Izanagi, the Creator God of my entire fucking pantheon, training me personally?

Not going to lie, I don't see much reason to refuse.

Maybe that's just the training maniac in me, that wants to grow stronger, and fight stronger guys, but like, shit!

I made it this far without a teacher, and I can't think of a much better teacher than him, besides maybe the one sword Kami or my mother, maybe.

True. I don't much like the way he referred to me as a weapon to be molded.

It makes me feel a little uneasy, and looking back, isn't this exactly what Uzume said my mother was worried about?

Fortunately, I'm not a baby with a freshly minted mind to be swayed this way and that, so I don't think I'll become a mindless drone so easily.

No, I'm confident in that much, at least.

The real problem is…

“I don't think I have the time,” I spoke back up, drawing an eyebrow raise from the deity, “Tobio, the Longinus wielder, I don't think he'll be able to hold for much longer. I can't stay here for any meaningful length of time when he still needs help.”

Fuck that legitimately hurt to say.

“Ah, right…my son's mess.” Izanagi huffed, “I nearly forgot about that. Messing with the jealous god's toys…it's like he's asking for what happened to Egypt to happen in Japan. It would be best if that was handled…tell me, did you meet the wielder, if so, what was his state?”

“Eh, it wasn't the greatest.” I start rubbing the back of my head in thought. “He can still communicate, hold a conversation. But his mentality is warped heavily.”

“I could barely get inside his head using my powers, what with all the taint clogging it up.” I finish with a sigh.

Izanagi hums, “Then we still have time. If you could get inside his head at all, then that means that place hasn't gotten fully to him yet. It's likely his gear is slowing the infection. Still…” He stands back up, “I give him hours at most, maybe half a day or more, if he's particularly resilient.”

“You know, I gotta ask,” I suddenly spoke back up, prompting Izanagi to look at me with a raised eyebrow, “you agree with me, that Susanoo doing this is probably a bad idea, right?”

“...Yes.” He huffs, “Are you going to ask why I don't head to Yomi and beat his ass black and blue?”

I nod in confirmation, and he sighs, deeply.

“The same reason my Ex-Wife doesn't do the same,” he states, softly, “with an added helping of, he's a ‘big boy’ now, it's not my job to breath down his neck every time he fucks something up.”

He gives an amused snort, “If I did that, I would have leaped into the primeval chaos long ago. I cast him from Heaven specifically so I wouldn't have to deal with his whiny bullshit any longer than need be.”

I can't help the frown that spreads across my face at that.

Ah, yes. The perfect example of how to fuck up royally as a father.

I'll take notes of that later.

“Besides,” he walks over to the trash pile, and pulls out the spear, “judging by the way they all turned out, it's clear that my form of intervention wouldn't work, anyhow.”

Huh. I can't tell if he's being self-aware, or blaming everything on them.

“Listen up, boy.” He suddenly called, stirring me from my thoughts, “You don't have much time…but time you do have. Luckily, I can extend that time frame a bit, to give us more to work with.”

“Huh? How–”

My words were cut off, as Izanagi raised the spear, the Ame-no-Nuboko, to the sky.

I didn't give it much thought, or even recognize this at the time, but…the spear doesn't have a power to it.

At all.

It's not emitting a Holy Aura like Susanoo's sword was, or even my own.

It simply looked like a very mundane, albeit beautifully crafted, jeweled naginata.

But none of that is why I stopped talking and gaped, no, that happened because Izanagi began to swirl the tip of the blade around the air.

This made visible, foamy ripples appear in the air, which he began to stir and churn.

Not an ounce of Holy Spirit Power, or any power, yet the spear is doing…something to the realm.

In a moment, the ripples in space echoed out, flowing and spreading across the land.

As they passed over me, I felt my body get momentarily sick, a tad queasy, before it quickly passed.

“What did you just do…?” I asked, trailing off as I looked around for anything different.

“I manipulated this realm’s time.” He stated simply, “So, an hour out there, on Earth, and Yomi is around…” he scratched at his beard for a moment in thought, “fifteen days or so, in here.”

I have no words to describe the sheer bullshit I just heard.

This man casually made a Hyperbolic Time Chamber, with a swivel of his spear.

He suddenly shrugs, “Oh well, I was hoping for more time, truth be told. But on such short notice, this was the best I could do.”

I should just accept that Kami, especially the original ones, are bullshit, and stop being surprised.

“You are lucky, boy. That this realm remained as malleable as it is due to  my…indecision.” He says slowly.

“On that,” I pipe up, standing up myself, “I've been wondering where exactly this place is, does it even have a name? You keep saying it's not finished yet, so…”

“Ne-no-Kuni.” Izanagi states, “That…was this place's intended name.”

I tilt my head slightly, and furrow my brow at that, recognizing the name slightly, “Land of Origin…isn't that another name for Yomi? The Netherworld?”

A Netherworld.” Izanagi corrects, “Kuni was meant to be the opposite of Yomi, that was how I originally envisioned it.

“An eternal land of life, vibrant colors, a paradise for our people that deserved it. A Shinkai, but for mortals.”

He raised an eyebrow at me, “You do know what the Shinkai is, yes?”

I deadpan back at him for that, “Yes. I am aware.”

He nods approvingly, “Good. Then you aren't completely lost.”

My eyebrow twitches at that, again, “Alright old man. Why didn't you finish Kuni already?”

He huffs, gruffly, and turns away, pacing a few steps “Artist block. Have I not told you already?”

I scoff at that, “Hundreds of thousands of years of it?”

“Sometimes, boy…a little inspiration is required.” He intones, pointing the spear to the ground, before slowly dipping it into the soil.

The dirt parts like water, acting like liquid with the same texture, Izanagi begins to churn the land with the spear.

Before my very eyes, the land reshaped itself.

With every ripple, pieces broke off into the primeval chaos and came up changed.

In seconds, I found myself standing before a mountain range, peaking into the pure white sky so high up I couldn't even see the top.

“In this place, with Ame-no-Nuboko here, I control and create everything.” The Creator God intones, his voice roaring from far above, on the unseeable mountain peak, I assume, “From shaping the land and time to manipulating gravity and life, all is within my domain.

“I give the mortal boy hours at most. I'll send you back in four to them, but for you here? It'll be two months.

“Not anywhere near enough time to turn you into a proper God, a Kami, but it'll be better than nothing. Now.”

The sky suddenly darkened, the pure white void becoming a pitch black inky void.

Climb. There is no time to waste.”

…I can't tell if I'm excited, or angry about this.

Or maybe both? Both definitely work.

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

Susanoo's foot rapidly tapped the ground, his index finger tapped the armrest of his throne in equal measure.

A viscous frown spread across his face, his mood, despite the pun, could truly be best described as tempestuous at the moment.

Plans never survive first contact with the enemy. He knows that. All things said and done, his plans are going well, he thinks.

Ama's brat, his nephew, while annoying, ultimately hasn't done anything.

And with him stuck in Kuni with dear old Dad, he won't be able to for as long as wishes it.

His frown broke into a snarl simply thinking about that old bastard.

Oh sure, before sending the brat away, he entertained the idea of the old man getting off his ass and doing something to help for once, but he quickly shot it down.

The old man never cared. Not truly. He's more likely to lay there in his plastic chair, talking about how stupid he is than do something for once.

He gave him and his siblings sections of the world, then fucked off to go make something else.

Yet he couldn't even do that right!

Were they not enough for him? Were they truly such failures in his eyes that he would run!?

Was Mother not worth it, you old useless piece of shit!?!

Ah. Mother.

He simmered down, albeit, slightly.

Ever since he sent his nephew down, Izanami has been…well.

She locked her door and refused to talk to him since.

Now that, that hurt. She's never done something quite like this before.

Pull an Ama, anyway.

He stabbed his nephew in the chest, now he gets how that must have felt.

But he can't give up now. Despite this sinking, pained, feeling in his chest, he's oh so close now! He can feel it!

He gives it a day, likely less until the boy breaks entirely and gives it up for the sake of his grandmother.

Even with Mother forcing him to move the Shinigami to the corners of the realm, keeping them as far away from the boy as possible.

In the end, everything will be worth it.

He just knows it.

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

Chapter 36


Oh, Susan. No. No, you don't.

It's going to be a very rude awakening when he figures that out. Very cathartic...for everyone not him.

Anyhow. Izanagi! In my notes, I have his personality as "Bored Japanese Kratos, but without the character arc."

So, on the flip side, Nori has no idea what he's jumping into.

Not like it won't be beneficial to him in any case. 2 months of pure grinding is kind of needed for him. A teacher, proper, especially.

This whole time, he hasn't been able to truly go ham with training because he has other things to worry about, like dicking down cat girl(s), but now...?

The results will speak for themselves, I hope.

Also! This is a one-time thing, courtesy of Izanagi and Susanoo bullshit, so after he's done with Yomi he won't be able to return to Kuni whenever.

Also, I have to do this update on my phone. Dunno why, but Patreon on my laptop is being fuckey. So the formatting here may be different, and the picture in the middle of the chapter may not work properly.

Give me a holler if something is jank, and I'll see what I can do to fix it.

View Post

A New Sun Chapter 35

Chapter 35

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

My eyes narrow carefully down at the scythe blade pointed at my Adam's apple, the tip dangerously close to piercing the little bump.

Tilting my head back, and turning it to glance at him, I find something I didn’t expect.

His eyes. They’re equal parts dead yet filled with desperate determination.

His knuckles were so pale they looked like they might crack under the sheer pressure of his grip.

Yet his teeth may be clenched even harder than that, as his face is locked in some sort of twisted unsure frown.

This…is not Tobio.

Or at the very least, it's some twisted version of him, brought about by Yomi.

His base principles, to protect those he loves at all costs, are warped by this tainted realm filled with beings who make you want to die.

Ah, I get it.

It's like Megumi, that one guy from Jujutsu Kaisen, but on crack.

Not good.

“Say…” I start, my tone clipped and simple, “I just want you to know, for after all this over? I don't blame you…” I pause.

As my power bubbles to the surface of my skin.

“And I hope you don't blame me either, for the bump I'm about to put on your head.”

And for the second time on this trip, Yomi knows the color of honey, as it explodes out and wraps around my body.

My face burns and my vision clears, my max power is achieved, and even then, I barely have time to dusk under the scythe blade as it sails for my neck.

I jump back, evading a second scythe rearing up for my chin, barely registering the frustrated grunt of my opponent before I kick the door out during my jump and land in the hallway.

“And right after I fed you too.” I huff out in annoyance, drawing my sword as Tobio bursts out of the room, each hand holding a scythe.

Maybe I should just skip to this bit more often, saves me a whole lot of trouble!

I breathe, right as Tobio steps into my range before me.

Dance.

Fire erupts from the blade, bathing Yomi in ferocious light as my sword falls upon his form.

Only to strike air and soon the ground, clinking off it with enough force to send shivers up my arms.

It was quick, but I caught it just before it happened.

He melted into the shadow the light from my fire created and vanished.

Which means–

I leap into the air as the ground beneath me becomes blades, my halo appearing at my back to stop my accent further as the ceiling too becomes more blades.

Viscous pitch-black blades that seem to vibrate or growl all around me, I can feel the malice coming from them.

So, I respond in kind, by breathing out flames.

Crimson red fire splashes into blades, not destroying them, but rather, eliminating the shadows they came from, causing said blades to immediately detract.

I landed in the plume of flames, and only added more fuel to my powers pulsing out like flint on steel, sparking them up, and driving them higher.

There's nothing here to burn that'll spread these flames, unlike the forest the first time I did this, so I'm free to let them out and run wild.

I cover the shadows my flames create with even more fire, and when those fires eventually cast shadows, I add more.

The flames lick the ceiling, causing even those blades to quickly retract, and I breathe in the scent of something other than death, a smile on my face.

I wait, sliding into my stance.

I don't have to wait long.

I don't hear him. My instincts don't even register that he's there when he is.

No, it's my eyes and enhanced senses that manage to pick up the slightest movement in the flames, before he suddenly is there.

Right behind me.

My body twisted, flipping into the air over his cleaving scythe that would have cut me in half from the waistline had I gotten caught.

The flames around us part at the force of his swing, which I idly note was with two hands this time, him now holding a single scythe.

Improvised, Lateral Fire Wheel.

So I return the favor in kind, lashing out with a flaming horizontal cut, spinning my body with the strike as I do with the assistance of my flight ability for maximum power.

Tobio leans into it, meeting my blow with the shaft of his scythe, stopping it with a low grunt.

I look him straight in the eye, as we push back against one another.

“Still wanna go?” I ask through a strained breath.

“I…have to…” He strains out in reply, “I'm…sorry!”

“Me too, buddy! Me too!” I call out, before letting him win our clash.

His eyes widen as he's suddenly moving forward unexpectedly, with me slipping to the side, around his scythe.

So I can smash my head straight into his nose.

He lets out a dazed grunt of pain as a crack fills the air, before his scythe melts in his hand, turning into a spiraling glave of darkness around him.

These thin spiral arms lash against me like whips, forcing me back, the wounds itching coldly as they heal.

Hmm. Don't think that did it. Maybe I need to hit him multiple times to get it to work?

Time to find out.

I move, flames roaring and crackling and, most importantly, blazing with heat around me.

Fake Heat Haze.

Dozens of afterimages thrum to life around him, obscured by the heat haze caused by the bonfire of flames around us.

Tobio's head and eyes jet every which way, darkness pooling into his palm, his scythe forming as he lashes out with shocking precision.

The afterimages begin falling apart quickly, couples to a few at a time, as his scythe cuts through them and the heat in kind.

I pay his earlier sneak attack from before back, appearing behind him with my sword lashing out right as he swings for an afterimage.

An additional blade suddenly extends from the bottom of his scythe shaft, curling around him and blocking my strike.

I blink at the sheer bullshit I just bore witness to before Tobio spins his dual-bladed scythe around like some discount Darth Maul and knocks my blade away from him.

He whirls around, scythe still spinning as he does, forcing me to dodge an attempt to hook the blade around my neck by ducking, only to go further, falling prone into the sea of flames at my feet.

As soon as my body hits the floor, I pulse my power out, and a variable tidal wave of flames roars up to meet Tobio, forcing the Fallen Dog God to backpedal as the wall rises, and pushes down the hall.

I push myself back up onto my feet, then leap through the wall of fire, and swing down upon him, forcing him to block my swing as he moves back.

Unfortunately, the wall of raging fire doesn't stop.

It keeps going, at my back, forcing him to keep stepping back as I lay into him.

A strike aimed at his collar is blocked by the scythe shaft again.

He dodges to the side of my follow-up kick, lashing out with his scythe for my head as he moves.

I step back and catch the scythe blade with my sword, letting it hook around the blade, forcing him to play tug of war with me for a brief moment before the scythe blade dissolves, and he leaps back right before his arm gets caught by the firewall.

He narrows his eyes at me and the fire, taking a look around the small cramped hallway we're in, before settling back on me.

His scythe blade dissolves and melts away completely, as my eyebrow raises.

He doesn't give me much time to think about something beyond the obvious ‘he's planning something’ before he suddenly launches himself at me.

It was a clear-cut, obvious, straightforward charge.

I could have easily run him through, he was letting himself be open here.

But he knew I wouldn't do it. He wouldn't heal like me, he would die from something like that if I went for it sincerely.

So instead, I moved to meet his charge, head-on, with my fists.

Only for him to cleanly evade my punch for his face, glide around it, and get right up in my personal space.

His arm wrapped around my sword arm, locking it stiff, and before I could get off my trusted backup option of headbutting him, he grabbed me by the collar, lifted me, and kicked us off the ground, blasting through the air.

Not for the wall of fire though, no.

For the hallway wall.

It happened fast enough that I didn't fully register what had happened until my back was slamming into the stone, and making it give way.

In the next instance, the gray stone passage changed into a cave sky, with a Palace in the background, and a very familiar mountain pointing up to the rocky sky behind it.

Few things.

One. I just got used as a human battering ram!?

Two. Susanoo and Izanami's Palace is where the entrance to Yomi is on Earth.

I don't know which one to be more shocked about.

Following us, fire blasts out of the newly formed hole in the Palace like a liquid overflowing in a cup.

Yet without me there to fuel it, and no natural sources to propagate the flame, said overflowing flames quickly burn out into a simmer.

For a moment, we fall, before grunting as we…or mostly I…fit the ground, a gravel or sand ground befitting a courtyard.

Tobio quickly rolls off of me, barely avoiding my next act of breathing fire at where he was, said gout of flame splashing off the palace's stone exterior.

I hop back to my feet, taking a brief look around the new stage to find it's exactly the opposite of the real world.

On Earth, and in the Shinkai, this place was a swath of densely packed, overrun forest.

Here, it's a cleared-out courtyard of sand or gravel, going around the entire Palace.

The mountain further up retains its foliage, but that's no good for me down here.

I turn, slashing my sword down across the ground in front of me as I move, bringing forth a small wall of fire before me.

Tobio adjusts his sleeve, his fraying sleeve, as the clothing around his ankles and wrists is smoldering and burnt, his skin looking a little more red in those regions as well.

Yet beyond that, he seems unharmed.

I click my tongue, as he finally looks toward me, but the distant look in his eyes tells me he's truly elsewhere.

His Longinus, Canisius Lykaon, its most basic ability is the power to create blades from any shadows in his line of sight.

Blades that can cut anything.

In the hallway, I could cut off the shadows themselves with the light from my flames, but out here?

Well. Yomi is one big shadowed realm.

Tobio's expression suddenly steels itself.

So, I'm not surprised when the world around me seemingly begins to growl.

Every single patch of darkness, every single shadow, seems to shudder.

I cut the flames from my sword, instead filling it with pure blinding white light, holding it up like a torch.

A circle around me fills with as bright of light as I can make in this realm, and yet…

I shudder, as blade tips from all directions stand mere inches away from piercing every part of my body.

Outside of my circle, blade hell sits. A forest of pitch black blades, pitch black death.

He can't make blades near me, but the blades he made can still try and reach for me, through my circle.

Thankfully, they aren't long enough.

Tobio walks through the black blades as if they were air and into my circle, completely unaffected by the light.

I stare at him, myself unmoving, mostly because I can't, or else I'll get pierced.

But also, because I have one last idea.

My eyes spin as they meet his, his hand twitching as I know he feels something is about to happen.

Yet, as I don't move he holds still.

Right until as much Holy Spirit Power as I think is feasibly safe enough to shove into a human brain assaults his mind, all at once.

He staggers back, his eyes suddenly going wide, and I speak through gritted teeth, “You must resist this place, Ikuse. I know, it’s a lot. But there are people back on Earth waiting for you, and this isn't you.

“H-Huh…? I…” He grips his head with a hand, eyes straining, he looks...confused, like he doesn't know where he is, or what's happening.

Meanwhile, I keep trying to push my power through, but it's like slugging through a swamp.

Or a filter, made of a swamp.

There's so much taint around his head, confirming my earlier suspicions, his head has been majorly fucked up.

If I could get my light in there, I could probably cleanse it, but my raw Holy Spirit Power isn't made for that.

So it's stimmed against the wall of taint around and infusing his head.

He suddenly shakes his head, and my power slips off him as he faces toward me once more.

He holds his hand out to the side, and every instinct in my body screams at me to run.

It was so sudden, so foreign a feeling, that I followed it immediately.

I blasted into the sky, light-filled sword in my hand and both halos at my back, several dozen feet up just ascended.

My entire body shivered as I heard and felt it, a blade cutting through the air.

I turn, looking down, to find Tobio having lashed out with a pitch-black scythe coated in crimson and black flames, cutting the light I left behind in half.

Somehow.

But those flames, those cursed fucking flames.

Merely looking at them us giving my whole body the shivers as if simply touching them would fuck me up something fierce.

Ame-no-Ohabari. The blade that could slice apart Gods, Buddhas, and Kami, the flames also came from it.

A single cut, or burn, and I could…

Hah.

Die. This thing could kill me in one hit, couldn't it? As an Arahitogami, I'm still a Kami, a deity.

I should be terrified but for some reason…

I can't stop fucking smiling.

Tobio looks up at me and tilts his head slightly.

Up here, there are no shadows. You can't make blades out of the darkness in the air.

So, what will you do?

Black putrid smog erupted from around him, and the very shadows of Yomi began to seemingly crawl towards him.

Wrapping around and enveloping him, twisted black blades erupted from all around him, buzzing and growling in the air.

Then, Tobio spoke.

Quietly, deeply, yet chanted as if casting a curse.

<<—Behowlest the slaying of one thousand mortals>>

My smile widened as the darkness consumed him.

I've never seen it before, a Balance Breaker.

Especially not an Abyss Side Balance Breaker.

<<—Besingest the slaying of ten thousand goblins>>

His figure twisted within the darkness, limbs growing longer and thicker, the body becoming stocky, and his head?

<<—Mine name, immersed in deepest darkness, tis the Imitation God traversing the Polar Night>>

Turned into that of a beast.

<<—O ye, perishest by mine own black blade>>

Ah…is what Ray Ray and her gang felt facing down a transforming Juggernaut Drive?

<<—Fools ye art, oh deformed Creator God.>>

I didn't envy them before, but oh man, did I miss out!

A howl, no, a roar, erupted from beneath me.

Then a dark wall, a mass of twisted midnight black darkness, erupted up from the entire courtyard.

And I saw nothing anymore.

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

My eyes snapped open, and I looked up.

I blinked, several times, before finally saying.

“Did I die, but like…stay here?” I ask, completely befuddled, to the beautiful undead Goddess that is my grandmother.

Who is looking down at me, amusedly, as she runs her fingers through my hair.

Oh shit, am I getting a lap pillow right now?

Best afterlife?

“No, dear, you are not dead, though you were very close.” She huffs, then pats me on the head somewhat harshly, “That last ‘attack’ was my own, to separate the two of you.”

I wince slightly at the head ‘pat’ before sighing and closing my eyes, “Well…that's good then. Thanks for that.”

“You don't seem all that…stressed at nearly dying.” She says, sounding a tad bit concerned.

I shrug at that, “Probably because I'm not. If I die, I die. Simple as that. I'll die eventually, won't go down without a fight I hope, but…otherwise, I ain't all too bent out of shape about it.”

Maybe it's because I'm fairly sure I died once already, the me that came to on that mountain those months ago.

Or, maybe I'm just crazy. Or broken somewhere inside.

Most likely it's all three.

But in any case, I wasn't lying, that's for sure.

I slowly sat up, rubbing my head as I did, and opening back up my eyes.

It figures, but I am in a bedroom, likely her bedroom. Big master bedroom, with an equally ludicrously sized bed and all.

My sword is propped up against the foot of the bed, in its sheath.

I turned back towards Izanami, “Did you send him back to his grandma? Is he…alright now?” I ask tentatively.

She nods, giving a light sigh, “She's the only thing that will keep him…docile. Yomi has affected him far worse than even Susa believes, I think. He even threatened to attack me, seeing me as a threat, when I tried to keep that old woman company.”

Damn, Tobio. Seriously?

“I can fix his head, if I can get close enough to grab onto it and start exorcizing the taint…” I muse aloud, “But he isn't going to just let me walk up and do it now, is he?”

At the shake of her head, I huffed out, “Damn. Well.” I suddenly stood up, “Only one last thing to do, I suppose.”

Izanami tilted her head to that, “Oh? What did you have in mind?”

“Beating up your son.” I state casually, grabbing my sword.

Izanami stared at me in absolute silence as I fixed the sheathed blade to my back.

“...must you really?” She suddenly spoke up, my eyes widening at just how sad she sounded out of nowhere.

I turned back around, to find the woman looking down, clasping at the bedsheets, an unsteady look in her eyes.

“Well?” I started, unsure, “What other choice do I have? I doubt I can talk him out of this, so…”

Izanami chuckles dryly at that, “No, no you most certainly couldn't.”

“Unless…you could help me?” I try, “He'd listen to you, right?”

Izanami gave a frustrated huff, “Listen, yes. But it wouldn't stick. I could have fixed all of this myself, most likely. But that only guarantees he'll try again, and that time, I'll know nothing of what my son plans. At least like this,” she muttered, barely audible, “I can do something.”

She slowly looks at me, “Listen, dear…I don't know exactly what Susa has planned for you now if you go to him…I don't suspect he'll kill you, but…I still worry.”

“Planned for me now, huh?” I parrot back with a hum, “Ominous. You've been pretty ominous since we've met, you know?”

Izanami simply looks at me, before giving me a short sweet giggle, “Well, I do have appearances to keep…the spooky foreboding Goddess of Death, and all.”

It's my turn to chuckle, before facing toward the door.

“I figured. Now, I should probably get going…can't let Tobio’s condition continue to worsen. I remember my promise.” I flash a smile back at her, “I'll catch up with you later, okay?”

She looks especially happy once I bring that up, “I'll hold you to that, grandson.”

I wave back behind me at her as I step out.

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

I'm really starting to hate how short and clipped my conversations with Izanami have been so far.

It feels rude almost, that I can't spare any longer to sit and chat with her, truly.

But time is of the essence. And I don't know how long I've got.

What with the way Tobio is acting, it's leading me to believe not long.

So, I power walk to the throne room, where I'm fairly certain the Storm God would be at this time.

With way more confidence than I should have, but confidence nonetheless.

My working plan going into this, if he truly won't simply off me, is to annoy him until he gives in.

Or maybe I could make him realize how fucked his plan is?

Hnn. If Izanami couldn't, I doubt I could, as she said.

If all else fails…

Well, I'd rather not fight him, considering I'd lose so hard it wouldn't even be a fight, which leaves me getting additional help.

Like telling my mother what her stupid brother is doing.

But that…leaves a bad taste in my mouth.

I scowl at the thought.

Me and my fucking pride. There's someone's life at risk here, I'll swallow it if I must.

I take barely a few steps into the throne room before his voice rumbles across the hall, “We all heard, and felt your…meeting.” The deity noted with an uneasy smile, “Didn't go well, hmm?”

I deadpanned at my uncle, “What gave it away, the tunnel of fire, or the balance breaker?”

He snorted, “Cheeky brat. I hope you see the futility of your quest,” he mocks the word with disdain, “Leave, Nephew. The mortal you came here for is gone.”

“Because of you, right?” I raise an eyebrow while walking toward him, “I already know what you want, the sword is his gear.” His growing smile falls off his face as I cut straight to the chase, “Honestly, it's shocking you haven't just ripped it out of him already. He's certainly weak enough for you to pull it off now.”

He grips the side of his throne, gritting his teeth slightly, “...I can't. Killing the mortal myself, that would make mother sad…she…” he clicks his tongue, “she has had enough sadness for one eternity. But if the mortal gave it, willingly.”

“Willingly with an asterisk, perhaps.” I cut in.

Susanoo growls, lightning sparking across his body, “Willingly.” He intones, sounding more like he's trying to convince himself more than anything, “Then it'll be…not fine, but good enough. Besides, I wasn't lying when I said he'd get to be with his grandmother again.”

“As if that makes it better, uncle.” I cross my arms.

Thunder claps from somewhere, and suddenly, Susanoo stands, a snarl leaving his lips, “You…sassy fucking brat. You sound just like your mother, you know that?” He walks to me, each step heavy, thundering throughout the hall.

He stops right before me, meeting me in the center of the room, eyes blazing as he looks down upon me.

“Why, why, are you so much like her but in the most annoying ways possible?” He ground out, foot rapidly tapping against the ground, like the patter of rain, “See, you've got her sass, her fucking attitude, even got her looks. But you're missing the thing that makes you bearable.”

He looks me dead in the eye.

“You give too much of a shit, for no, fucking, reason!” His voice shook with barely contained wrath.

I narrowed my eyes back at him, my Holy Spirit Power boiling under my skin, “Oh yeah? Why shouldn't I care about a life? Is that so out of the blue, so inconceivable!?”

Yes.” He stated through gritted teeth, “You're a God. Better, even! You're a Living God. Why care about the life of one mortal you've never even meant before!”

“Because I still consider myself human.” I ground out in turn, “At least in part. I only just recently, within the last few months, found out what I am! But before that, ultimately, I was human!”

Susanoo's eyebrow twitched, and lightning crackled throughout the hall before he suddenly whirled back around to face away from me, and stomped.

The entire room bends inward as his step craters and cracks the entire room.

He rears his head back, the entire Palace shaking as he roars, FUCKING! DAMNIIIITTTT!!!

I nearly fell on my ass but managed to dig my heels in and stay standing at the last second.

“This all should have been…so, easy!” The Storm God grabbed his head, and he started ranting.

“I thought the shinigami would have scared you away, but fucking nope! Not them, not the very horny oni,” he shivers at that, and for a split second, I think we understand each other, “not even seeing the mortal you came here for like…that.

He whirls back around, looking dead at me, “Tell me. How could a brat ‘raised’ by a broken Goddess end up trying to be such a big damn hero, huh?”

“I'm not trying to be a big damn hero, it's simply the right thing to do!” I retorted, before blinking, “Wait…broken? Uzume?”

Susanoo snorts, “Course you think that, and yeah, she hasn't been the same since the wars…not like my sister could see it, but I know it's because she died during it.”

I snort straight back, “Sorry, but you don't exactly strike me as emotionally mature enough to notice things like that, Susan.”

His eyebrow twitched, “I know because I saw the same thing once before. The same look on her face was on his when he came back from death.”

“His? Wait, you mean…”

A feral grin spread across his face, “Kagustuchi. After dear old Dad killed him, I was there when he came back. Had the same look she did, he started ranting about…something, seeing things after death.” He shrugged, “Didn't pay much attention to that though, I was too busy putting him in the ground again.

He cackles like lightning, “Then he came back again, and I killed him again. Then again, and again, and again. Until he eventually stopped coming back.

Wait, Kagustuchi is…then the blessings on the Himejima, that's why…

Suddenly, he grabs my shoulders, holding me still, “Don't you get it, kid!? Don't you see!?” His expression is borderline manic, “That sword…it's the last bit of him left. I don't blame the mortal for being born with it, it's just bad luck he got it! But…sacrifices must be made, for her.

“Izanami…?” I ask though I'm pretty sure I already knew where this was going.

“Yes! Mother! She doesn't deserve it, none of what happened to her!” He cries out, “And he is the start of everything going wrong in her life! She deserves to live in a world where nothing left of him exists.

…Is there a term that combines Yandere and Momma's boy into one?

Because even that wouldn't begin to describe the vibes I'm getting from him right now.

“And now, for the cherry on top of this shit mochi?” Susanoo continues, “You…she likes you. You're her grandson, after all. Of course she'd love you. Even if you weren't here for her originally, the fact that you promised to get to know her is…” the man looks away, the blaze in his eyes dimming into normal, sky blue eyes, “thank you, for that. Not even your mother has come down to say hi, ever. She looked so happy…that I…”

Holy shit he looks like he's going to cry.

Slowly, he lets me go, and turns away, rubbing his eyes where I can't sew.

With a deep, shaky sigh, he continues, “You…aren't going to give this up, are you.”

I shake my head, “No, no I'm not, uncle. And you aren't either, are you?” I ask softly.

He gives a sad chuckle at that, “No, no I'm not. I will do what I must, even if she hates me for it…I must give her what Father ultimately could not…peace. Even if she isn't aware she's hurting. I…” He huffs, turning back to me, his eyes blazing.

“I take back what I said earlier, Nephew. You are better than your mother…which is why, I wouldn't kill you…but I can't have you here, yapping in Mother's or the mortal's ears.” He takes a step forward, and I instinctively reach for and grasp the hilt of my sword, “Or even worse…have you flee, and tell your mother.

Another step. The Palace rumbles.

“All I need to do…is keep you busy, somewhere far away where you can't come back from, until I return you myself.”

Lightning, darkness, and fire swirl around his form like a twister, a hurricane of energies mixed with divine power fills the throne room.

Susanoo draws a sword from the hurricane, as soon as the sword manifests, the sheer weight of its Holy Spirit Aura slams into me and forces me down to a knee with its pressure, alone.

Somewhere deep inside, something tells me the name of the blade despite having never seen it before.

Ama-no-Habakiri. The sword he used to kill Orochi.

“Take a break for a while, Nephew. When you come back, everything will be right.” He intoned.

Then he swung his sword down upon me.

It wasn't a fast swing, by any means.

I pulled upon all my power, and swung up to meet it, to stop it.

Yet despite all that, his sword cut through mine like a knife through butter, with no resistance, breaking my blade into two before plunging itself down into my chest.

With a further push, he impaled me to the ground with his sword.

“Tell him hi for me, Nephew.” Susanoo spoke down to me softly.

And at those last words, power exploded beneath me, and space tore apart at the seams.

In the next instance, my now broken sword in hand and a hole in my chest, I found myself free falling through a pure sea of white.

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

Chapter 35 End


Uh oh.

Skip the talking, and the sword swinging part here, he probably should have just cut it and ran when he got the chance.

Not like Susan would have just let him walk out, but still.

Wonder where Nori's falling to this time...

View Post

A New Sun Chapter 34

Chapter 34

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

Hell doesn't have stairs.

A part of me is both simultaneously shocked, and appalled by that fact.

While the rest of me is wondering just how long this fall is supposed to take.

I narrow my eyes incredulously, not that it helps me see anything at all, but more so because I finally recall that I can fly.

My descent slows to a gentle float as my halo blazes to life at my back.

Turning my head slightly, I still see…pretty much nothing at all.

The darkness is smothering the light of my halo nearly in its entirety, so all I can see is a blurred outline of the thing perching at my back.

With a displeased huff, I activate my eyes.

Still nothing.

Fuck.

Carefully, I hold either arm to my side, not finding anything, I begin flying down once more, spread eagle.

Unlike before however, I quickly accelerated, going down much faster than when I was normally falling.

That led me somewhere much quicker, I felt, as in no time at all I could see again.

How? Well, by blasting out of the hole I was flying through…which was in the sky.

I stopped, dead in my tracks, air thundering as I braked hard, and whirled around to look up.

The entire sky is rock.

One big, large, almost cave or chamber-looking cover as far as I could see across the realm.

Here and there, you'd see stalagmites, moss, roots, and other cave things, but it never stopped being rock.

No clouds, no rain, unless you called the occasional smattering of dust such things.

Turning back around, facing toward the…uh, ground, proper, I suppose, I find something equally depressing and…confusing.

I’m above Kyoto now, or at least, the twisted dark reflection of Kyoto here in Yomi.

Yet, I didn't enter Yomi from anywhere near Kyoto, so, what?

Looking carefully, and I mean, really carefully, everything being the same bland grays and blacks kind of makes everything meld together, I catch a glimpse of something very out of place.

Next to the city, directly west, a swath of destroyed stone, black wood, and other very easy-to-miss broken materials are strewn about, forming a long hill of debris.

Ah, right, Yomi is the reflection of Earth. Earth possessed a bridge to the Heavens, the Ame-no-Ukihashi, the Floating Bridge of Heaven.

This would be a nice place for a bridge, wouldn't it?

Although in this case, I suppose the bridge here would connect Yomi to the Earth.

However, if the bridge in Yomi is destroyed, then one Earth is destroyed as well, as Yomi reflects the Earth.

Think I may have even caught a glimpse of it in the Shinkai once…

I shake my head, side to side, dispelling those thoughts.

I can always ask Uzume about that later, she lived on the bridge, after all, I've got more important matters to attend to.

Patting myself down real fast, I find my snack bag has miraculously survived the trip so far.

Single strap, like my sword sheath, it hangs at my waist.

I didn't forget about it, so much as I simply put it out of my mind there for a moment, especially after the Shinigami ambush.

Giving a small sigh of relief, I look out across the dreary, depressing landscape, and try to sense anything.

My senses immediately do the equivalent of a rubber band, recoiling in disgust on instinct and slapping my sixth sense with loads of the most putrid feelings I'd ever felt before.

It made me want to vomit. It made me want to run away, go home, and jump in the shower for the next week. It made me want to light this entire place with flam

I slap myself across the face as my power stirs like a cornered, rabid, injured animal.

My honey-colored aura was bubbling around my form, a deep burn churning throughout my body as I let out a deep, haggard sigh.

Right. Yomi is unclean. The origin of the worst taint to ever plague the Shinto world, death.

My very being is repulsed by this place. Honestly, in this case, my lack of developed sensing abilities is coming in clutch here.

Although, if I can't sense anyone, finding Tobio or Uncle, or even my grandmother, is going to be a pain here.

Susanoo had a Palace at one point on Earth. I know that much, but a direct location was never given.

Ah, but I do know where Mt. Oe should be, and I also know that the Oni there should know where at the very least Izanami is.

I cringe, internally and externally, at the idea of meeting more horny oni lolis, but to be honest it's a much better idea than my other idea.

That being, launch a Holy Spirit Power firework into the air like how I met Fox Princess.

If this is the place where the Shinigami come from, I'd rather not send a signal flare to a whole ass army of them.

Can't believe I'd rather deal with horny lolis than fight, but one would take much less time than the other, so…

Horny Loli Mountain it is, then!

I'm…going to need several showers after this…

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

Thankfully, the trip to the Oni Museum went rather uneventfully, which feels…right, in this realm.

I flew over, high above the city and streets, yet still close enough to see the depressingly haunting outlines of souls shambling about.

Everything is somber, everything emits melancholy, it's insane.

No wonder all the souls I've seen look nearly identical, they all start blending in with the world around them.

The comparison to Limbo is weak, this is an entirely different kind of Hell, and I doubt anything is going to change my mind on that.

Especially as I made it to the Oni Museum, and right in front of the statue, the gate, that leads to true Mt. Oe.

Fortunately, I didn't have to break in, as the statue’s maw was already wide open.

Just like the scenery, even the glowy swirling energy power looks dull and gloomy.

Oh yeah. Most definitely a special type of hell.

In any case, I walk through it, and as soon as I step foot on the other side.

My aura-coated hand shoots up to catch a dull-looking blade as it tries to cleave into my neck, stopping it long before it can reach me.

Deja vu. Also, I'm not impressed.

I send an unamused look down at the stoic little shit who did it, my eyes narrowing at the small, red-clad oni loli.




I'm seeing a pattern forming here. Purple, yellow, red hair, eyes, clothes…is this pack of Oni girls a super sentai team, or a magical girl squad?

At least she has a sword, a katana to be precise, I can respect that difference at least.

She narrows her eyes up at me, but beyond that, her face remains stern and stoic, locked in a constant deadpan.

Cheap Koneko ripoff, I see.

“You…” she starts, soft and quiet, “you aren't–”

“Apple Loli.”

Her eyes widened as I cut her off.

“Wha–”

“You are Apple Loli.” I intone, cutting her off again.

Really. I would have gone with Tomato Loli, but Ibaraki is the best Tomato, no one tops him.

“But…Apples can be–” She tried to deny it, but I moved.

In a blur of motion, I grab her wrists and lift her straight into the air, her katana still held firmly in her grasp.

She blinked slowly at me and then came my aura.

Look. As much as I would love to do this whole song and dance again, I would rather not.

In general.

So, time to speed run this shit.

Almost immediately, her pupils dilated, and she shivered, “Kami…”

“Correct.” I nodded, “Know where I can find my Grandmother and Uncle? They don't exactly have a big sign pointing their way after all.”

“Grandmother and U-Uncle…?” Her eyes widened much more considerably, “Lady Izanami and Lord Susanoo…!?”

“Mhmm. Correct in two.” I hum out, “So, where do I go?”

She jerks her head away, “I…I do not know.”

Eh?

“We do not…Lord S-Susanoo doesn't allow us in the Lady's home, or even near it…” She continues, voice quivering, “She comes to visit us here, however, s-so…”

“You never even had the need, huh?” I finished for her, to her quickly nodding confirmation.

I sigh, deeply, “Well. Shit.” And promptly set her down, letting go of her hands in the process.

She seems befuddled by the act, judging by her small little, “E-Eh?” at the action.

Which gets even worse when I reach over and pat her on the head, “Sorry about that, Apple, I ran into Banana and Grapefruit on the way into Yomi…it was a whole thing, so I wanted to get to the point quicker with you.” I apologize solemnly.

“Banana…and…Grapefruit?” Her eyebrows furrow at that, slightly, “You mean–”

I pat her head one time, extra hard, to interrupt her.

“Banana, Grapefruit.” I state clearly, “I'm not gonna call them anything else.”

“I…very well?” She tilted her head at that, looking more like a lost puppy by the second.

“They're fine, by the way.” I add, “Got caught up in a couple of Shinigami’s suicide thingy, but I healed them up.”

At that, she frowns, her face hardening back up immediately, “That…shouldn't be. The Shinigami have been confined to Yomi for a long time, only being let out recently to scare the Fallen into submission.”

Oh? Susanoo pulled up on the Grigori? I knew he beat and dragged Azazel to the meeting himself, didn't know he pulled up with an army at his back.

Well, there's no kill quite like overkill.

I shrug, “Well, they did. Susan is up to something, most likely.”

“Susan?” Apple parroted, looking once more like a very lost puppy.

“Eh, don't worry about it.” I wave her off, “My thing to worry about. Anyway! You said Izanami shows up here, yeah?”

She nods slowly, “Yes…she does. Would you like to wait for her here? She should stop by after those two make their report, after all…assuming they don't forget to tell her about the Shinigami, of course.” She finishes with a grimace.

I wince slowly at all that, “I was…just gonna bunk outside if that's alright?”

“Hmm? Why?”

I deadpanned at her, “Grapefruit insinuated you were all horny. And I'm not dealing with that.”

“Ah…” she scratched the back of her head, and looked away, “that is…fair.”

Suddenly, in the distance, I heard…hollering?

Looking off, and finally up the mirrored Mt. Oe properly, instead of a dreary dull Iron Palace, I see a traditional Japanese mansion, still in Yomi colors though.

Or lack thereof, I suppose.

Huh, I'm pretty sure I see a massive dive board or water slide in the back.

Oh yeah, resort. Neat.

What's not so neat, is the half a dozen Oni Lolis running down the hill.

Towards us.

All different colors and some even got different weapons. Like a sledgehammer.

Nope.” I utter, “Not dealing with that!” I start walking backward, quickly, as the hollering gets louder, “Nice meeting you Apple! I like you the best out of your sister's so far! Byyyeee!” I call out, leaping backward and into the portal, into freedom.

My last vision of Yomi Mt. Oe is Apple turning ever so slightly more so her shade of red, as a small mob of oni lolis rush her position in a cacophony of noise.

And barking. One of them, a green one, was barking.

Next thing I know, I appear out on the other side, in Yomi proper, and land on the soft, cold, bouncy–

Wait. I didn't fall, though…

“Hmmm, well now? What do we have here?” A soft, motherly voice, questioned directly behind me.

I blinked. I blinked several times. Before looking back and up dumbly.

The woman, she's slightly taller than me, surprisingly enough. With long, luscious, and flowing black hair, and eyes that glow the only other color I've seen in this realm.

An ethereal, ghostly green.

She raises an amused eyebrow down at me.

Oh yeah. I'm in between her tits.

Good old classic ecchi moment.

It's not like it's my fault her kimono isn't covering her chest.

Seriously, is that the latest fashion trend around this time? Robes halfway down the chest, somehow magically covering the nipple.

Doubt.

I give her a little wave, “Hi, Grandma.”

Who else could it be, after all?

“Can I just say, the myths don't do you justice at all.” I add in with an honest smile.

She smiles mirthfully back down at me, “I'm not surprised, but I am surprised to find you here specifically…” she hums, before continuing, “Did you happen to take the girl's offer?”

“Haha! No.” I denied quickly, pulling myself out of her cleavage in short order, “No, no…I came here to figure out how to get to you and Uncle because I can't exactly sense anything here…”

“Ah, right, your nature,” she muses, “yes, I could see how that would be a problem. Ah, well…lucky you, I came to check up on the rest of the girls after I heard what the Shinigami have been up to in the mortal world.”

She gives a displeased huff, “Susa better have a good explanation for this one…and, judging by the fact you're here after…recent events, am I to assume you'd like a word with him as well?”

I nod to that, “Yup, I'm looking for a guy named Tobio Ikuse. Apparently, my dear Uncle has something to do with his disappearance?”

Izanami's smile quirked into a knowing smirk, “So it's begun, then?”

Well. That's ominous.

“Do you know where he is?” I ask, tentatively.

“I do, but…well. I think it's best if Susanoo explains himself, don't you think?”

Oh, that is very ominous.

“That would probably be for the best…” I sigh out, “I'd prefer to get this over with as soon as possible, the girls in there,” I point my thumb over my shoulder, to the gate behind me, “are very fine, you don't need to worry about them for now.”

She raises an eyebrow at that, “Very fine, hmm? How would you know that?”

I stare off into the distance, a dead look in my eyes, “They all charged down the mountain like a pack of wild wolves. One of them, the green one, was literally barking.

Izanami gave an amused chuckle, while patting me on my head, “Oh you poor dear…they haven't seen a man in a long time, well, a strong one anyways. Please forgive them their…eccentricities. They aren't usually so…” she trails off.

“Horny?” I finished for her.

She smiles at that, “Quite.”

“Now then,” she walks around me, stopping at my back, she drapes her arms over my shoulders, and pulls me flush against her, “I suppose I'll take your word for it that they are safe, and you are correct in your attitude. Getting this over with quickly is important…as much as I'd love to catch up with and meet my new grandson properly.” She states with a longing sigh.

“How about after this is all over, then, and Susan stops doing whatever it is he's doing?”

“Hmm…that would be nice, yes.” She boops me on the nose with her finger, prompting me to blink, “Thank you.”

Despite my confusion at being booped all of a sudden, I managed a smile, “It's no problem.”

She smiled down upon me, before muttering as her grip tightened like an embrace of sorts.

Be still.” She muttered, and so I was.

Yomi folded in on itself, torrents of darkness like waves in the middle of an ocean crashed and swirled upon us.

I didn't feel us moving.

Hell, I didn't feel anything.

Thinking about it more, I can't feel Izanami either.

Usually, when standing in front of a Kami, or deity, they have a presence that tells you who they are.

I looked upon Izanami and knew right away who she was.

Yet, I couldn't feel that presence from her at all.

It's like standing in front of a corpse.

I'm pretty sure that's why I ran into her at all, my instincts and senses registered her more like a tree or rock them a Goddess.

In any event, when the darkness falls, splashing to the ground like water, we are elsewhere.

A throne room, with a long shadowed hall.

And down at the end of it, a man sat on the throne.

Unlike Izanami, he had a presence, and unlike Inari, he wasn't so subtle or sneaky with it.

He wore it like an aura. A chaotic, crackling energy filled and stifled the bland dull air.

His eyes were glowing, burning with the third color I've seen in this realm, a fiery orange, and he looked almost exactly how I expected him to look.

Bits of armor on his shoulders and forearms, a blue robe opened to show his ripped muscled chest, the straw hat over messy assorted strands of long black hair that somehow moved in the…

Wait there isn't a draft in here.

I look back up at Izanami, who looks back down at me, both of us wearing the same bland expression as we turn toward the God of Storms.

His hand twitched a bit before he sighed, and his hair fell upon his shoulders normally, “Too much?”

Very.” Me and Izanami replied together.

“Ugghh…” he groaned out, before slowly rising from his seat, “forget all of that, welcome, Nephew, to Yomi.” He walks down toward us, his boots heavy and thundering with damn near every step until he stands before us, towering over us both.

“What do you want.” He doesn't so much as ask but grumbles out.

Huh. Someone sounds displeased to see me.

Then again, knowing his history with my mother, I'm not entirely surprised.

“Tobio Ikuse, the Leader of Team Slash/Dog.” I start, watching his face carefully, though it doesn't change, “Did you or your Reapers take him?”

He snorts at that, “Firstly, don't call my Shinigami ‘Reapers’ boy,” he ground out, “they aren't related to the bonehead's goons. Second, no. I didn't take him. We made a deal. Why? Wanna see him?”

I raise an eyebrow slowly, “Just like that?”

“Just like that,” The Storm God huffs, “not like I'm keeping him prisoner or anything. He's here in fact, in this Palace.”

That's mighty convenient, isn't it?

And very suspicious. It doesn't sound like anything is wrong, but…

A deal, huh?

“Alright, I suppose I'll go see him then.” I shrug, “I'll go check up on him, see what's up, then I suppose I can stay around…pretty much promised Grandma I'd stick around to catch up with her.”

Susanoo blinked down at me for that, his gaze softened considerably, “Really? Hmm…I, see.” He waves towards a hall, “Down that hall, the very last door. Now, can you please get out of Mother's…chest.”

I blinked.

Oh yeah. Izanami hasn't let me go yet.

Said Goddess giggles lightly, “Is something the matter, Susa? I put him here after all!”

Mother…” The God ground out, yet not angrily or annoyed, but legitimately embarrassed.

“Always so easy, aren't you?” Izanami mused, before suddenly snapping out with a hand, and grabbing his ear so fast neither of us saw it.

One moment, she's giggling and smothering me in a couple of nice cold pillows, the next she's pulling the God of Storms and Seas by the ear, a frown flowing down her face.

Said God hissed in pain and no slight amount of actual terror as she pulled him by the ear down to eye level.

“Now, your goons, Susanoo? She began, voice prickly, “Do we need to talk about proper management again?”

“N-No, Mother! Why!? What happened?” He was quick to deny futility.

Though judging by the mirthless smile on her face, and the cold shiver that goes down his spine at it, I figure that's the wrong thing to say entirely.

I, seeing this opportunity for what it is, quickly scamper away in the directions given by the God earlier.

Even as I go, I shiver a little bit, hearing the Storm God's pained dejections of what Izanami says further, albeit, I don't exactly hear what she's getting on his case for.

My guess would be the Shinigami incidents with her Oni.

Poor guy.

Not.

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

I sort of expected the Palace of a deity to be more extravagant, despite it being Yomi.

Yet, walking down the dull gray stone halls, those expectations were long gone.

I also expected a fight to break out as soon as I got here, or for Uncle to be much more…aggressive.

Then again, Izanami being there probably helped out a ton.

I seriously doubt me calling him out on his using his godly powers to make his hair blow around alone would have gone well for me.

I'd still do it though. Probably would have sassed the hell out of him too.

It was very tempting to turn around and start doing stuff with Izanami to fuck with him, not going to lie to myself there.

Getting a rise out of people I really shouldn't is my default mode of operation, it seems.

In any event, this hall is very long.

Near the end of it, right around the final door, in fact, something is adorning the walls finally.

Two pictures, portraits.

One man, one…girl?

I don't recognize them, and yet, they feel familiar regardless.

Neither has color, as is standard for this realm, but I can tell what might be their coloration based on the shading.

The man has darker-colored eyes, and white or gray long hair, pulled up in a ponytail behind him.

He's looking toward the portrait's observer with a side eye and a soft frown.

He's kneeling before a fire, making tea it looks like, in the middle of a starless moonless night.

The girl, meanwhile, is the inverse, with dark-colored hair and brighter eyes.

She's hugging a sword sheath with a blade I don't recognize at all, with a big smile on her face, it looks like she's laughing, or maybe in the middle of saying something?

The sky in her picture is probably the brightest color I've seen since coming here, almost white, but not quite.

I stare at the portraits for a few seconds, taking in that information, then shake my head with an amused chuckle.

So Uncle does care, at least enough to have their pictures up, huh?

Enough distractions, time to face the music.

Well, Fallen Dog God, I guess.

I approach and knock on the door.

“Hello? Is anyone there?” I call out, “Ikuse? Are you in there?”

No response.

I knock once more, wait a few seconds, and sigh as nothing continues to happen.

Ah well. I've got a bad feeling about this.

I try the door handle, fortunately, it isn't locked, so I open it, and let myself in.

Just as I'm about to apologize for entering, I stop dead in my tracks and simply stare.

This room is incredibly small, a single bedroom sized at most, holding only a bed and a table.

The thing is, there are two people in it.

One, a young man, only a couple or so years older than me.

Then two, an older woman lying in the bed, who I can tell is a soul, a spirit.

Yet, unlike the shades plaguing this realm, this older woman feels thousands of times more alive than any of them.

She's glowing with a soft warm light, her hair and old lady clothes have color, actual, real color.

In contrast, the man is, while I can tell alive, he's not doing so hot.

His skin is unnaturally pale, he looks a little gaunt, and he's clutching the old woman's hand as he lays halfway splayed across the bed.

His lower half, his knees, are on the floor, while his torso and head are on the bed, sideways.

Both seem asleep.

Steadily now, I walk over to the man and look him over.

Even with a Longinus, he still ended up like this because of this place. How long has he even been here?

I kind of hate the idea of waking him up like this, he looks like he needs sleep, but he also needs something to eat and drink, and I need to know what's going on from his point of view.

With that in mind, I tentatively put a hand on his shoulder and shook him.

Then when that didn't work, I shook him harder until he finally stirred, groaning and groggily lifting his head.

With half-lidded eyes, he looked at me, and as he recognized that he didn't recognize me, they widened.

“You…” He stood up, and immediately moved to get in front of the old woman, blocking her from me with his body, “who are you…?” He asked, voice coarse and dry.

I held my hands up placatingly, even took a step or two back, “My name, is Noriaki Kusanagi, Mr. Ikuse. I was sent by one of your friends, Suzaku Himejima, to find you.”

He blinks at that, then relaxes, his body slacking as he grimaces.

“Ah,” he sits down on the bed, slowly, and sighs, “I should have figured they'd send someone eventually…if not come themselves. Or try too, anyhow.”

I chuckle at that, “They almost did, to be fair. Think they are still trying to find a way even after learning their gears won't protect them.”

He gives a small, soft, smile down at the floor, “Sounds about right,” he says wistfully, before looking at me, “I'm sorry I didn't recognize you, Lord Kusanagi, without any color around it's kind of hard to tell…” he trails off, quietly.

I merely waved him off, “Don't worry about it, we've got more important things to worry about. Like, no offense, but you look awful.”

He waves me off lightly in turn, “None taken, I'm aware, feel it too. Hell, I haven't been able to sleep since I got here…next to her…” He turns, giving a side-eye glance to the old unwaking woman.

“Well, lucky for you, I brought stuff!” I pull the bag off my shoulder and toss it to him. “Drinks, snacks…not healthy, probably, but better than nothing! Especially since I didn't know how long you were down here. Do you?”

“Ah, well…” He opens the bag up, before scratching his cheek a bit, “not really, no? Sorry.”

I shake my head, “Don't worry about it, we'll figure it out. Talk and eat, pace yourself, tell me everything, how you got here, and whatever this…deal is, you made.”

So he did.

He tells me of the night he worked at the bar when a Shinigami approached him.

Of the deal the Shinigami told him of, of him being pulled into Yomi and wondering for so long, of the storm that led him here, and the deal the Storm God finally offered.

Judging from Earth time, Tobio could have ended up spending anywhere between a few days to a week or longer here, wondering, before he found this place.

Or more accurately was led here.

As for the deal?

“It was…the Ame no Ohabari, for my grandmother's soul…” Tobio slowly divulged after I glared at him for Heaven knows how long.

Fucking. Called it.

“You know that'll kill you, right?” I ask the obvious, to which he merely shrugged and sipped at a bottled tea.

“I know…I'm fine with that.” He sighed, seeing my completely deadpan stare at him.

“Ah, yes, I'm sure the death realm filled with beings that cause people to want to die has nothing to do with that?” I muse, sarcastically.

“It isn't like that, Lord Kusanagi.” He denies, vehemently, “What other choice Is there? He already proved he can get her soul when he wants, I can't just say no.”

“Uh, yeah, you could.” I held up a finger, “You could say no, then kick his ass, make him see what happens when he messes with you and yours, if he even threatens it, even in this state you could it. It'd just be more difficult.”

“And risk him even getting the chance to hurt her? No. Not happening.” He denies it again, with a shake of his head.

“Look,” I start again with a very deep, very annoyed sigh, “I can heal you, maybe, it wouldn't fix you up to 100% probably, but it would help a ton. Make all this a lot easier.”

Tobio turned his head, looking away from me, “I'm…sorry…it wouldn't matter…”

My eyebrow twitched.

Would smacking him over the head really hard fix this? He sounds…depressed. Like he gave up hope for some reason.

Which is odd, because he's doing this all for his grandmother. Or at least he thinks he is, if it isn't just realm fuckery.

So how about this?

“Would your grandmother want you to do this, though?” He froze up as I suddenly continued, “What about your friends? Team Slash/Dog? I heard you had a girl waiting for you…or several. They're waiting for you, you kno–”

Stop.” He suddenly intoned, coldly, “Just…stop.”

“But–”

“No.” He cuts me off, adamantly, “Listen, I appreciate you coming here for me, for them, but…” he trails off with a deep exhale from his nose.

I click my tongue at that.

Shit.

That usually works, doesn't it? Or it's supposed to!

Well, granted, appealing to emotions like that only really works when the one trying has a connection to the other person.

But we don't know each other. We just met, and he's not all…here, mentally.

Well, guess there's only one thing left to do.

I stand up, suddenly, prompting Tobio to perk up.

“Well, if you're going to be like that,” I intone, “I'll do it.

“...What.” Tobio uttered, confused, “What do you mean by that?”

“I'll head down and beat my uncle like a redheaded stepchild, that's what I mean.” I huff out, “Real simple, yeah?”

I probably won't win, but I can try, at least.

What…No, you can't…!” I turn and start walking, waving him off as he stands up.

“Don't worry about it, I'll be fine–”

I stop, raising my head slightly, as a pitch-black blade forms right in front of my throat.

“No…” he continues, “if you do that, he could try and hurt her anyway…I…won't let that…” his voice strains dangerously, “happen.

Oh?

Well. Perhaps I'll get a chance to knock him right on the noggin after all…

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

Chapter 34 End


Nori really should just go for the sword more often first, huh?

View Post

A New Sun Chapter 33

Chapter 33

<~ A New Sun ~ >

Blood oozed from my mouth, a rattling buzz thrumming throughout my chest, the telltale signal of pain.

I'm lucky I can't feel that right now.

Hell, I'm lucky I'll heal from this in general.

I'm just trying to figure out how this happened!

With a grunt, I grasp my sword's hilt and wrench it from my chest, gasping as the wounds, both internal and external, sizzle and heal.

I cough and gasp, hacking out several globs of blood, clearing the way for fresh clean air to finally return.

Huh, I think I might have also punctured a lung there.

“Well now,” I grumble aloud, the Reapers before me going still and silent abruptly, “that was uncouth.”

One of the Reapers snarls, and flies forward, right for me, with a burst of malicious speed and tanto poised at his side.

My aura explodes out around me, wrapping around my form like a cloak as my eyes spin and the world slows.

I can see him clearly, even as he ‘speeds’ towards me.

One slice, one cut, one down.

I breathe, and step forward, ready to meet him before his dagger can even reach its target.

Dance.

My aura pops, and my neck explodes with an almost comedic amount of red, as my blade cuts into its side.

…Huh?

I let go of the hilt just as I realized what I was doing, preventing the blade from even getting near removing my head.

Just for good measure, I grab the blade with a bare hand, letting the buzz from my neck and palm ground me, forcing it to keep me attentive.

A blink later, and I hiss, a gurgling annoyed thing, as a new buzz pierces my chest.

Along with what feels like a needle trying to pierce my very soul.

The grinning form of the Reaper looks down upon me, he cackles once again, twisting the blade in my chest, “So, not even you are immune, hmm Arahitogami?”

My answer?

Spit a glob of blood in his ugly little eyes, and bash my forehead into his nose.

The bargain bin ghost tries to disengage, but I won't let him, grabbing onto his cloak with an iron grip and holding him in place.

In the next instance, light erupts from within my closed fist, the creature screaming in absolute fear and terror at the mere sight of the purifying power.

Despite that, the Reaper lashes out, grabbing onto me as well, holding my arm in place as his friend flies by his side and rams his tanto straight through my wrist.

The light with my fist crackles and sputters out as I lose feeling entirely beyond my waist.

I snarl, a second needle striking my soul, though it has just as little effect as the first.

You. Will. Die.” Both things intone, a statement, a fact

The buzz in my neck worsens only a slight fraction before I stop pushing the blade.

Caught it this time, though that was kind of obvious there wasn't it?

Now. Catch this.

My aura races down my arm, increasing the pace by which my grip slides down to the blade’s hilt.

As soon as I grasp it, I swing, fire exploding from the blade as I do.

A wide horizontal arc of fire explodes out swirling around the turn of my blade and into the area around me.

Not a breath, not even a sword form, simply plain old swing at it extra hard.

Yet still, the Reapers screech, their forms evaporating into the same pitch-black smog before my blade and the flames can reach them.

Their daggers remain, however, even as their misty forms bellow up, riding the rising air created by the twister of fire around me.

With my neck healing, I manage a huff as I pull both daggers from my body, stabbing my blade into the ground to do so.

Shortly after they hit the ground, they burst into the same black smog.

Hmm, the wounds made by those daggers are healing slower than normal.

The feeling is returning to my hand, but it's slow, and both openings aren't as quick to shut as they should be.

So the tantos are their version of scythes then, and although they can't seem to pierce my soul, nor my life force for that matter, the blades are still very much necrotic.

Even to me.

Very interesting indeed.

Now if I only wasn't dealing with something as annoying as mental fuckery at the same time!

As the fire putters out around me, I quickly bash my foot into my sword's edge, cutting into its side.

I grip the bottom of the sword's hilt, focusing through the indicator of pain like a lens as I eye my immediate surroundings.

All is quiet.

Far too quiet.

…Where did those oni lolis go?

That thought was immediately answered, as I turned around.

Both girls hadn't moved from where I last saw them.

Except then, they weren't on the ground, their fists caked in blood, with both their faces not looking much better.

I narrow my eyes slightly. They're still alive, albeit barely, but I'm more focused on how they ended up like that.

Their fists, their faces, all the blood…

Did they beat each other to near-death!?

Cackling echoes throughout the area, and my grip on the hilt tightens as my body tenses.

“These two will have to do, I suppose.” One voice calls, sounding nearly disgusted.

The other sighs, or I think it is, they sound exactly the same, “There could be worse hosts. Now shut it, and let's end this brat while we have the chance.”

The black smog falls upon the two onis, soaking into their flesh like water to a sponge.

Wisps of smoke flicker from their bodies, as they abruptly begin moving, twitching.

A twitch here or there at first, then their arms and legs seize and flail, before eventually, they shamble onto their feet, bloody grins etched across their little faces.

“This will do nicely~...” ‘Grapefruit’ extols, summoning a tanto and, of course, licking its blade.

‘Banana’ seems to pout, “I still think these forms are rather…unsightly.” ‘she’ summons ‘her’ dagger shortly after, pointing it at me.

Both still have the same voice, although it is especially freaky coming out of such tiny girls' mouths, I'll admit.

I, audibly, chuckle at the thought.

‘Banana’ blinks at that, “...What's so funny, Arahitogami.”

I wave them both off, snickering, “Nothing, nothing…well, just thinking how, somehow, you're both looking much more scary than before.”

That prompts both the body snatchers to blink before their faces scrunch up in sheer rage.

I scoff at them, “Don't be offended, it's a step up above the same basic, bland, literally copy-paste mook look you two had going on before. Be grateful you two got the upgrades in the first place.”

“Grateful!?” ‘Banana’ cries, indignant.

“Mook!?” ‘Grapefruit’ screeches, somehow more offended.

“Ah, don't like that?” I smirk, amused, “Well, you two should also be glad because I kind of need those two girls around to lead me to Yomi. It means I can’t just tear apart those bodies to get at you Grim Reaper knockoffs.”

Before they can start ranting at my insult, I continue, “Fortunately! I have my way around that. Which leaves only one question…” I pull my sword from the ground, and thus my foot as well, it sizzles as it starts healing.

Then without further ado, I stab myself straight down in the stomach.

But this time, I meant to do it. My body will be its sheath.

The buzz, my mask to whatever mental fuckery is going on here.

I grin, from ear to ear, at the two oni puppets, as the two's faces morph into one of terror.

Aura explodes out and coats my fists, light glittering and sparkling within the honey-gold power.

The world's most deadly boxing gloves? On.

“Do you ever wonder…” I continued, a feral drive to my tone, “Where do Death Gods go when they die?

With that, I explode forward with movement, the ground beneath and behind me shattering at my takeoff.

My fist meets ‘Banana's’ tanto as it's barely raised in time to stop my downward strike, the aura coating my knuckles stopping the edge from truly cutting skin.

The possessed oni's body creeks as the ground beneath it cracks, struggling to keep my fist from reaching it.

Just a few good hits, or a grab, that's all I need. Merely a medium to transfer my purifying power is all I need.

I can see it, the way they possess bodies, cladding them and smothering their victims’ souls and powers with their own.

They almost act like a suit of armor, in a sense. When I strike, I won't need to worry about harming the girls spiritually. It'll all be blunted by the snatchers after all.

Once I connect, even just a few times, these guys are done, and I think on an intuitive level, they understand that.

That doesn't mean I don't have my own problems to worry about.

My free hand lashes out the side, grabbing the dagger and holding the possessed Grapefruit aloft by extension.

The sheer force of her falling downward swing makes my feet sink into the ground, cracking the immediate area as I had down to ‘Banana’ before.

Though their spiritual powers, Youki, and Youjutsu, may be inaccessible to the body sealers, they still have access to the oni’s natural physical strength and durability.

In fact, I'd hazard to say that they're stronger.

Most likely due to the reapers' higher tier of existence so to speak, being half-gods. Assuming these Reapers are still like the Grim Reapers in that way.

Both ‘Oni’ grit their blood-soaked teeth as they try to push back against me, and in response, I breathe deeply.

Much deeper than I normally do.

I don't get to use this aspect of my power often, or at least it's more active applications, I mostly use it to reinforce my body and assist with my healing factor, as I haven't trained to utilize such abilities with my sword quite yet.

However, utilizing it hand-to-hand is a basic function.

Fiery sparks ripple from my fists, joining my light and aura.

I let ‘Banana’s’ tanto cut through my aura, and strike my fist.

The look of shock, then the flash of triumph across ‘her’ face, came as quickly as it went when the fiery sparks burst from my fist and suffused the dagger.

I murmur, “Overdrive.

The dagger, promptly, explodes.

It combusts in a flash of black smoke and heat, I catch a glimpse of ‘Banana’ wide-eyed shock and beat red, sunburnt hands before I follow up with a kick straight to the stomach that sends ‘her’ small form reeling and ragdolling back.

Their faces are too damaged to take anymore, but their torso? Legs? Arms? Fair game.

They're Oni. They can take it.

I whirl on ‘Grapefruit’, pulling ‘her’ into the way of my fist as I turn.

Eyes wide and panicking, her dagger suddenly vanishes into black smoke, freeing herself from my grip.

Just as quickly, ‘she’ resummons the blade, only for I to take a step forward, far too into ‘her’ guard for her to block, and hit ‘her’ straight in the chest.

Light dances off my knuckles and lashes at ‘her’ form like lightning, ‘she’ screams, a blood-curdling howl of agony as the force of my blow sends her careening back with no resistance.

The body was twitching and convulsing before it even hit the ground, light sparking around it, black smog rolling and coiling and going back inside and out all over on repeat.

Not enough light in a single strike, hmm?

My head tilts slightly, before my full body turns, dodging a stab aimed at my back from the now standing ‘Banana’.

‘She’ snarls as if a wild beast as I jump over a follow up wild slice, landing with a kick down into the ground.

Fiery sparks lash out from the dirt, exploding out around me in waves, blasting ‘Banana’ back across the ground.

I go low and kick off, gliding close to the ground as I follow after her in a blast of speed.

My fist rakes out, a straight jab aimed for her chest, but gets deflected by ‘her’ dagger, which ‘she’ uses as a shield, batting my hand to the side.

‘She’ followed up with a knuckle sandwich of her own, backed up by Reaper-enhanced Oni strength, right to my cheek.

My eyes spun, and I smiled as I let the blow land, even as I felt my jaw creek at the force.

The force which I seized for myself, and sent down to my legs.

Spinning around, and back by the force of ‘her’ punch, I lash my legs out, in turn taking ‘her’ legs out from under her.

But I'm not down yet, twisting at the same time, I kick up, planting my foot in ‘her’ stomach just as before, but unlike before, the kick sends ‘her’ ragdolling up with a guttural grunt.

My hands push out, hitting the ground, launching me up to follow as my halo flashes into existence behind my back.

I quickly overtake ‘her’ flight speed with my own, blurring ahead of ‘her’ in a streak of light, and appearing in ‘her’ immediate flight path.

I clench my fists tightly, as silvery white light erupts from seemingly every pore upon them, overtaking my aura, and cladding my fists so brightly that my hands can't even be seen beyond the constant sparks, flashes, and crackles.

This should be more than enough.

The small Oni’s face barely had time to twist itself into one horror before my fists came down upon ‘her’ like a divine sledgehammer.

A column of light ruptured the air as the power of my blow sent the body straight back down into the ground, followed shortly after by sound.

A horrible, high-pitched, like nails across a chalkboard, static filled the air.

Banana's body was shaking, quivering, before stiffening as her mouth abruptly opened wide, smog pouring out in waves, crashing upon the light bellowing around them...and quickly being devoured.

I watched as the cloud of smog began being torn to shreds inside the light.

Even as it tried to make a coherent shape, trying to make hands or summon a blade to crawl and slash its way out, it couldn't, the light beating apart any attempt.

It felt like an eternity before the last puffs were finally devoured, and the light dispersed itself with a flash, but I knew it was only a few mesmerizing seconds.

Before all that remained was Banana's body, and a light echoing hum, the death throes of a being who brought death.

I slowly turned toward ‘Grapefruit’, whose mouth hung open, almost like they broke the body's jaw to do it.

Shaking, ‘she’ looks up at me.

“You're. Next.” I state clearly, factually, and calmly.

‘She’ turned and ran.

‘She’ did not get far.

My mouth opened right after, but instead of more words, fire came out.

A jet of flames crashed down from the sky, exploding right in front of ‘her’, quickly cutting off her escape.

I fall from the sky as if a comet, crashing right behind her.

She whirls around, tanto forming mid-swing as she slashes wide through the ensuing dust cloud, trying to get at me.

I bat the blade to the side with one hand, while my free hand lights up with pure bursting silvery-white as I punch down to counter.

Yet, amazingly, despite me being in her guard, ‘her’ small form manages to dodge.

‘Her’ body makes an audible sickening cracking noise as it bends back and to the side unnaturally, my fist soaring past her with barely a few inches in a near miss.

I frown, as a grin filled with manic terror splits across ‘her’ face.

How annoying. Breaking your vessel to try and accomplish what? Inconvenience me if she dies?

‘She’ suddenly pulls back her tanto, before lashing out again with it, stabbing out.

I lean back, out of her small arm’s reach, only for her arm to give a crack and for the limb to hyperextend right as it reaches what should have been its normal maximum range.

Grunting as the blade pierces my abdomen, I reach out, grab the hyperextended arm, and pull ‘her’ right up to me, grabbing and holding onto ‘her’ shoulders tightly to force ‘her’ to still.

“This'll do.” I huff, and with that, my hands explode with light.

My eyes catch the tension in ‘her’ jaw before it happens.

The body's mouth suddenly shoots open, and black smog bursts out like a pilot ejecting from his craft.

Unfortunately, I was prepared.

My hands let go of her shoulders, shooting up just as quickly to grasp the smog and pull, wrenching the cloud from the oni’s body entirely.

That same static screaming fills the air, as my light wraps around the smoke cloud, encapsulating, trapping, and beginning to destroy it.

For good measure, I slam the trapped Reaper into the ground, looking down upon it as it tries to form its body, right in the spot its eyes should be.

“Have fun~!” I ‘wish’ it off, as the cloud turns into puffs, then turns into a bright flash of nothingness.

Now, truly, only the dull echo of static remains.

I sigh, letting out my breath, looking down to see the tanto in my gut crack and turn to straight-up ash.

With those two gone, I pull my sword from my stomach, patting the wounds as they sizzle and heal with a satisfied hum.

Sheathing my sword properly upon my back, I then turn to the two oni loli’s, wincing as I see the damages, especially to Grapefruit.

I decided to update mentally that those Reapers are very annoying little shits. Possession, some sort of mental death wish power, soul-cutting knives…yikes.

It's balanced by the fact they don't seem as powerful as normal Grim Reapers, but then again, those two could have just been weaker ones of the species.

It's not like I'd know how strong a normal Grim Reaper is anyway, never fought one.

Looking at the two oni lolis, I also don't think I've had to heal so much damage on someone else before.

Hell, I don't think I've ever tried healing someone before at all!

Well. First time for everything I suppose?

To start, though.

I walk over to Grapefruit, grab her very dislocated arm, and start trying to beat it back in place.

…It's at times like this when I wish I had access to the See-Through World, but I haven't mastered my mark enough to utilize it yet.

So, trial and error it is!

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

There was much trial and error before I finally fixed the girl's arm.

Thank all eight million plus deities in the world that Oni are tough bastards, and could take me slapping the shit out of them.

Otherwise, the poor girl might have a whole broken arm by the end of it.

Due to the fact I couldn't see into her body though, I couldn't tell how it was broken so the Reaper could dodge my attack that one time, so I just had to hope that would fix itself when I healed her.

Speaking of.

I ended up using Ripple, the fiery sparking energy I used against the Reapers earlier, to heal them.

I don't trust my light to not try and exorcize them on the spot, and it's also very slow even when it works on the whole life thing.

Ripple, on the other hand, specifically fucks up undead and adjacent beings, which means the girls should be safe.

It took some time, even with Ripple being the speedier healing option, but now I sit against a tree with two mostly healed, I think, oni lolis leaning into my sides.

Huh. That sounds like the start of a hentai.

I stare off into the horizon of this spiritual realm, knowing I am truly lost at that thought.

Luckily, my self-pity session is cut short by grumbles and groans coming from both of my sides.

“Ugh~...what happened…?” Banana mumbled out.

“The Shinigami happened…” Grapefruit responded with a pained huff, before finally turning slightly and seeing who she was leaning against, “...Ah.”

“Hnnghh, so that's why the last thing I remember was you suddenly punching me in the face, you…” she turned as well, “...hi?”

I wave to them both, “Hey. Do you two feel okay?”

“It feels like someone dropped a mountain on my back.” Grapefruit deadpanned.

Banana snorts at that, “Whatcha talking about sis, that's a great time!”

Grapefruit rolls her eyes, “An upside-down mountain.” She clarified.

Banana winces, “Yeesh, okay, yeah, not as good then.”

“How would either one be good?” I muse aloud.

Banana waves me off, “It's an Oni thing, don't worry about it. So!” She sits up, getting eye level with me, “You take out those utensil wielding shit heels?”

“Yeah,” I waved her off in turn, “they weren't too big a deal, even after they tried to use your two's bodies as meat shields.”

Both girls shiver deeply at that.

We got possessed!?” Banana shouted, disgusted, “Ew! Ewewewew!! Sis! Where's the nearest lake!”

Grapefruit pointed a shaking finger, and Banana promptly ran off, screaming and gagging all the while until a resounding splash silenced her.

“Is…she gonna be alright?” I ask, mildly concerned and amused in equal measure.

Grapefruit nods slowly, “She’ll be fine, it's just, being possessed by a being of death, when you know what that taint is like…it isn't pleasant.” She then smiles slowly, “Thank you for your concern, and for not finishing us off when you could have, young master.”

I shrug, “Kind of needed you two around still, and also…several other reasons I don't wanna list right now.” Then, I blink, “Young Master?” I parrot.

She nods, a smile across her face, “Lady Izanami is your grandmother, so that makes you a Young Master, and us very appreciative~...”

“Oi.” I deadpan, “Those hands go any lower, I'll blow your back out with fire instead of a mountain.”

This entire time, she's been clinging ever so slightly tighter, and her hands have been damn near caressing my chest and abdomen.

She pouts at that, “Come on~ Young Master! We haven't had a man in…a really, really, long time…” she whines like a petulant child.

“Eh?” Banana chooses that time to come back, completely soaked and dripping everywhere, “We talking about fucking? I mean, I guess he's earned it. Though I still won't forgive you for what you said about big sis earlier, jerk!” She points at me. “Speaking of! I need to beat you up for that! Fight me!”

I can feel Grapefruit wiggle her eyebrows at me as I sigh, deeply.

“I don't have time for this.” I state, sitting up, Grapefruit gasping as I wrap an arm around her waist and pull her with me.

“Hey! What do you think you're- EEHH!?” I, of course, do the same to Banana, cutting her off.

Briefcase lolis, acquired.

“Now,” I huff, “the Entrance to Yomi, guide me.”

Banana flails around in my grasp, trying, and failing horrendously to wrench my hold on her waist, “Hnnghhh! Hnnnghhhh!!!”

“If you resist, I'll uproot a tree, and spank you with it.” I add dully.

Banana immediately goes still, “...please don't spank me.” She mutters, all of a sudden way too softly and way too quietly.

I raise an eyebrow to that, just before Grapefruit chimes in, “She actually likes being spanked!”

“E-Eh!? Big sis!!” Banana cries out, betrayed.

“Mhmm, mhmm,” Grapefruit nods, and then continues, “she also acts like a loud obnoxious brat all the time, hoping some big strong exorcist will come along and, ahem, purify her~...”

“T-That's not true! Don't listen to her! Please!” Ah, now she sounds like she's about to cry.

My eyebrow twitches, my aura leaking from my form slightly.

“The Entrance to Yomi,” I say again, calmly, now.”

Both girls squeak at that, before Grapefruit quickly pipes up again, “Down the path! I'll tell you when to diverge!”

I nod and start jogging, straight down the only dirt path nearby.

Finally, we're getting somewhere. Literally.

Though knowledge of the Shinkai, the World of the Kami, is rather limited, there are a few things I have parsed together.

For one, the place is a mirror to the modern mundane era, sans special exceptions such as Shrines, the World of the Kami is a return to an endless sprawl of nature.

This is why a dirt path being here is odd, especially as I reach its end, with it being cut off and consumed by the sprawl of foliage around us.

I look down at Grapefruit, eyebrow raised.

“Ah, take a step or two forward, then a sharp right.” She starts, “Through the foliage, don't stop until you reach the mountain's base.”

And so I did as such.

“How did the entrance end up so…buried?” I muse aloud.

“The one who used to take care of it stopped showing up.” Grapefruit answered, voice downtrodden.

Banana huffed at that, “You mean he abandoned it, just like he abandoned everyone everywhere? Just like he abandoned the boss at first!?

“Sister.” Grapefruit says sternly, shaking her head slightly, “Enough of that.”

Banana huffs, crossing her arms and looking away.

Abandoned Izanami first, huh?

Izanagi. My grandpa on the Kami side of things.

“Anyone know where he went?” I hazard to ask.

Grapefruit shakes her head solemnly, “Unfortunately, no. He's been gone a long, long time…he left even before the wars with the pantheons from the continent.”

“Lucky bastard,” Banana seethed, “if people did know, I'd be the first to show up and ram his divine spear up his ass.”

Grapefruit sighed in exasperation, and I decided to leave the conversation there before Banana blew a blood vessel.

So on the journey went.

I reached the mountain base and was then told to run around it, heading left.

Until eventually, I ran into a hole in the side of the mountain.

Not a natural one, mind, but what looked like some blew into the side of the mountain with C4.

Grapefruit grimaced, “The last one to take this way to Yomi was Lord Susanoo, but uhm, he couldn't fit into the crevice leading the cavern. So he…yeah.” She waved to the divine made entrance, Banana cackling all the while, while I rolled my eyes at my uncle doing his thing.

Regardless, I step through, and into the cavern.

Although to be fair, it's more like a…hall, than a naturally made cave.

Although covered in moss, and vines, and chipped to all hell and back, I could see markings and drawings layering the path forward.

There was even text, it looked Japanese, but also…not?

Old Japanese, perhaps. Or maybe it was whatever language Izanagi spoke. A primordial tongue?

Whatever it is, trying to focus on the proto-kanji makes my head buzz.

I'll leave that for now.

Eventually, the hall opens up into a supermassive chamber.

So massive that it felt like I suddenly stepped out into the middle of a completely hollow supermall.

Yet, despite that size, it's needed to house the titanic rock sitting at the end of the chamber.

Covered in moss, proto-kanji, and layered with several dozen ropes, it merely sat there.

Menacingly.

“Holy shit.” I mutter, my eyes widening rapidly.

This thing could crush city blocks, it was that huge!

“So do I just,” I put the two girls down, and stretch, give my fingers a good crack as I do, “like, push it really hard…or?”

Grapefruit chuckles, “Oh no, nothing like that. If you really are who you say you are, all you need to do is go up and ask him.”

Him?

The Rock?

The rocks a deity?

You know what, thinking about it, how else would you trap a primordial Goddess of Creation somewhere?

“Well, alright then?” I oblige, unsure, yet walk right up the massive stone anyway.

Seriously, Ibaraki’s true form looks like a baby next to this thing. How did Izanagi get it in here?

Shaking my head of those thoughts, I place a hand against the rock.

“Uh, hey? Rock…guy? Would you mind letting me through?” I ask, tentatively.

For a second, nothing happens.

Then I stagger back as what sounds like a bell chiming radiates from the rock, followed by golden white light erupting from proto-kanji symbols across its surface.

One by one, they light up, before the entire stone turns into a miniature star.

By which, just beyond it, through the translucent glow, I spot a hole. A normal-sized hole, hilariously enough.

A normal-sized hole, seeping with a darkness I can't see through.

I turned back to the oni lolis, “You two coming this way?”

Banana shakes her head, “Nah, we got our own, much faster, way back! That only we can use! Jerk!” She sticks her tongue out at me.

“We will probably be seeing each other again, however,” Grapefruit adds with a sly smile, “we do have to report to the Lady that the Shinigami did something naughty again.”

I chuckle at that, “Right, right…I'll be seeing you lot again then. Until then!” I wave them off.

Maybe the next time I see them, one of them will be less horny.

“Ah…we just have to introduce him to the others, don't we~?”

“...Always a sex thing with you big sis, why don't you get laid more?”

I'm trying!

…Somehow, I doubt it though.

Listening to the two bickering in the background, I walk off, through the glowing veil.

In a sense, I'd compare the feeling to passing through the film into the Shinkai, but more…slimy? No, thicker is better. It's like trudging through a swamp.

I have to work a bit for every step, but it's much easier than trying to lift the whole darn rock, I'd imagine.

But soon enough, I soldier through, not even hesitating to step straight into the darkness.

And promptly began falling.

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

Chapter 33 End


Guess who finally made it, huh? Also, Nori reminding everyone he's got Ripple. I think he's only used it like...once, actively, and that was when he fought Tsubaki.

I cut a segment where he used it against JD, punched him straight in the face with it, but otherwise? Doesn't get much use.

When the Vampires start pulling shit, it'll definitely get a lot more use there, but otherwise it's gonna be a pretty sporadic thing.

At least until he can channel it actively into his sword without risking it exploding.

View Post

A New Sun Chapter 32

Chapter 32

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

“Aww! Suza-chan was here?” Kuroka sat there, pouting, crossing her arms, and puffing out her cheeks, “You should have invited her up! We could have done the thing together, nyah~!”

Koneko, whilst lying there on the bed, simply deadpanned at her older sister, “...I'd rather not…whatever that thing is. Still can't feel my legs.”

“You get used to it, nyah~!” Kuroka happily informed her sister with a smirk.

Much to said little sister's grumbling.

I meanwhile, snorted at the two's antics.

Suzaku didn't stay long after I got her talking. I couldn't tell if it was embarrassment at the whole breaking down in front of me over some guy, or eagerness for me to go find him that did it in the end.

Probably both.

The point is, that she left feeling much better than when she walked in.

Hell, probably left feeling much better than she had in days.

In return, I learned some stuff about Tobio.

Well, not directly, but I can read between the lines well enough when most of what I got was Suzaku talking about Tobio's harem antics.

The harem antics he very clearly didn't, and still doesn't, want.

Poor guy. Apparently, he still hasn't locked down Sae and told the others to fuck off.

Suza knows he doesn't love the others, love her, like Sae, yet they still try anyway.

He's been using university as an excuse, which is just…why?

Needless to say, when I get down there, I'm slapping him, or making his grandma do it.

If she's down there, that is.

Boys got to step up, nab that childhood friend, and close the rest of those doors already if he doesn't want them open.

Four years, four fucking years.

Shaking my head of those rather infuriating thoughts, I plop myself down right between my two cat girls and begin scratching their ears idly.

“Nyah~!” Kuroka clambers over to my side, rubbing herself against me.

“Nyan~...” Koneko purrs, not moving an inch, yet a light flush blossoms across her face along with a small smile.

Honestly, I have half a mind to tell these two about what I learned from Suza about Tobio and his relationship ‘status’, but that would feel a tad too mean for simple venting.

Even though it would be hilarious hearing Koneko call Tobio a pussy.

Eh. Maybe after the poor dog man gets laid. Then it's fair game.

Also, Koneko needs to catch up on a lot of what I do, I think. Starting that conversation by talking shit about a potential friend probably isn't a great idea.

Think I'll just leave Kuroka to catch Koneko up after I leave for Yomi.

My eyebrow unconsciously twitches at that.

I'll leave Uzume to do it.

Much better.

In the meantime, though.

“Alright you two, here's the thing.” I start, causing both of them to perk up, “I've got to head down to Yomi because my uncle may have made a fucky wucky, and I'm not too sure how long I'll be gone, so!” I glance between the two, “Is there anything I need to do with you two before I head out?”

Koneko blinked at that, “Fucky…wucky?” She parroted, befuddled.

Kuroka, meanwhile, held up a finger with a mischievous smile, “There's a joke to be made here about how you blew out our backs, then almost immediately ran down to the Underworld, you nyah that Nori-kun~?”

“We can go again, and I can remove the almost there if you want.” I immediately answer, deadpaning back at her.

That garners a pleading, continuous shaking of the head from Koneko, whose eyes widened at that idea.

Kuroka huffed, seeing her sister's reaction, “Hmph! No fun! Nyah~!”

Legs.” Koneko bit out in turn.

“Point.” She conceded, “But still!”

Koneko then promptly ignored her, instead turning to me, “I missed school today, and I don't exactly feel like going tomorrow either, what with…you know.”

I chuckle as she blushes, and I pat her on the head.

“Don't worry, I'll give the Student Council and your King a call, tell them what's going on.” I assure her.

Her eyes suddenly narrowed, “...senpai, what exactly are you going to tell them.”

“The truth? What else?” I say with a smile.

Koneko's eyebrow twitched. “Please don't.”

“I'll do it right before I head out, promise~!”

Senpai.

I chuckle, pulling her against my side, “Alright, alright. I'll make something up, but you know Rias will suspect something regardless, right?”

She huffed at that, idly wrapping her arms around my waist, holding onto me.

“I'll deal with that when it comes to it, I guess.” She grumbled.

Ah, the classic ‘I'll let future me deal with it’, works every time.

A pair of slender arms wrap around my neck, as Kuroka leans against me, her head on my shoulder and my arm pressed in between her cleavage.

“I suppose I can't convince you to let me join you?” She asks softly.

“Nope.” I state resolutely, “You know why.”

Kuroka sighs but doesn't fight me on it. Although I do feel Koneko looking up at us, an eyebrow slightly raised.

Looking down at her, I add.

“Speaking of, we did a thing, Kuroka will tell you about it later…if you can't already sense it, that is.”

Kuroka shot me a look of betrayal.

I sent her a smug smirk back.

Her not being a Reincarnated Devil anymore…it's not something I plan on advertising quite yet.

Though the process is mostly Kuroka specific for right now, the world doesn't know that.

If it gets out, it wouldn't shock me if I had a Devil hit squad knocking on my door the next night.

But, telling Koneko, who would be able to sense the change with Senjutsu anyway, is fine.

Going to have to keep her away from Magari for now though, or any other Youki skilled in Senjutsu.

In any case, I was planning on telling Koneko about Kuroka’s change myself actually, but then everything with Koneko happened, and Kuroka was halping…so, yeah, she can do it.

You reap what you sow, black cat.

Koneko narrowed her eyes at the two of us, before they suddenly widened, her mouth gaping slightly.

Ah, she senses it now, doesn't she?

“Big sis, you…” Koneko started, disbelieving.

“For the record,” I chuckled lightly, “she went through with it so she could have kittens easier.”

“Never mind.” Koneko deadpanned, tone doing a complete one-eighty, “I should have seen that coming.”

“Nyah!?” Kuroka cried out, “Shirooonee! Why do you sound so disappointed!?”

“Because my older sister is a useless, perverted, horni neko who can't stop thinking about being bred for five minutes.” Koneko stated, plainly yet resolutely.

Damn, she went straight for the throat, huh?

“W-Well! You'll understand when you're my age! N-Nyah!” Kuroka rebuffed, weakly.

Deciding to throw Kuroka a bone, or I guess a cat toy in this case, I smile, and start reaching over to Koneko.

“Hn? Senpa– Nyan~!?” Koneko suddenly gasps, as I land my hand firmly on her behind, “S~Senpai~...” Koneko shudders out.

“On the contrary, Kuroka, I think Koneko here already gets you pretty damn well~...” I disagree huskily.

Kuroka gives a smug smirk, as Koneko shudders out a moan when I cop a feel.

So of course, I reach around the black cat, and grasp a handful of her breasts, coping a feel and pulling the same reaction from her as well.

Horni cat girls indeed, my horni cat girls.

I don't want to let go. But, unfortunately, I've got stuff to do.

Hopefully, the quicker I deal with this, I can get more time to do more normal things before the next big event the world decides to throw at me.

Like finishing my bloody swordsmanship style, for one.

I know I could technically keep up this pace forever, as I don't truly need rest per se, but it would be nice.

Here's hoping…

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

Following all that, I managed to coax the girls into getting proper nonsex coma-induced rest, while I went to find wherever Uzume had wandered off to.

I ended up finding her in one of the few structures that had a modern oddity, that being a copper roof over one made of wooden shingles.

Before entering the small building, I stopped right at the door, furrowing my brow.

Now that I'm so close, I sense not only Uzume's power, but another's as well, although it is very weak.

Uzume masks it almost completely.

But I recognize it regardless, even though I have only sensed it a few times.

My mother's power.

With a foreboding sigh, I push open the doors and enter.

Yet stop once more a mere few steps inside as I see…something I didn't suspect whatsoever.

In the center of the small almost chamber-like room is a small raised rectangular stand, with enough room to maybe fit a similar sized small box on top of it.

Instead of a box, though, it held a picture frame and incense.

A very familiar-looking picture frame and incense set, with a certain Kami kneeling before it in silence.

I clear my throat all of a sudden, “Uzume?”

“EEP!?” Said Kami nearly leaped where she sat, whirling around to face me, “O-Oh, Nori…Hiii…?” She greeted me weakly.

I deadpanned down to her, “You know, you could at least have told me you moved him…” I stated, walking over and sitting right beside her, “Would have been nice.”

I did take time to at least pay my respects every once in a while but haven't gotten the chance to do it for a bit.

She looked down at that, “S-Sorry…I was going to, but, well…”

“I've been busy, yeah?”

“Y-Yeah.”

I wave her off with a shake of my head, “Don't worry about it. This is as good of timing as any, considering where I'm about to go.”

Uzume looked back at me, incredulously, “You…accepted to go?”

“Course’ I did.” I scoffed, “I owe her one, and the guy I'm looking for is a pretty good dude, supposedly.”

For a second, Uzume simply stared at me, before sighing and facing back toward the picture with a soft smile, “Of course, of course. So, are you heading out tonight?”

“No, I'm headed out in the morning.” I scratch the back of my head, “Beyond it kind of being a dick move to the cat girls to leave so soon, heading to the entrance of ‘The Land of Darkness’ during the night time sounds like a frankly terrible idea.”

Uzume chuckled lightly at that, “Day or night on Earth doesn't affect Yomi, but I can see the logic…it being day would certainly help you trying to get in, as I doubt the guard at the boulder would let you in.”

I blink at that, “Wait. The entrance to Yomi is legitimately blocked by a big ass rock?”

“Mhmm,” Uzume hummed and nodded at that, “and Raijin and half a dozen or so female oni, which is the main threat, but the boulder is also there.” She adds matter-of-factly.

“Raijin.” I parrot, “The Thunder Kami?

Uzume nods once more, a small smile on her face.

I simplify my thoughts on that with a single word.

“Fuck.”

Uzume, promptly, bursts out into giggles, “Ah, don't worry about him…Susan doesn't like Raijin all too much, so he's rarely around. It's mostly just the oni you'll have to worry about.”

Oh, thank fuck for that. Oni, I can deal with perfectly fine.

Also, Susan? Hah! I'll remember that if I need to piss off the guy for some reason.

“Even then, they shouldn't do much besides try to chase you away,” Uzume continues with a smile, “not like they could even manage that.”

“True,” I agree, “though I just now realized I don't think I've properly met a female oni before…” I muse aloud.

There had to be some on Mt. Oe I just didn't notice, right?

“Much like how male nekomata are rare, so too are female oni,” Uzume shrugs, before giving me the side eye, “you better not try anything with them, you. Female oni are kind of like grasshoppers when it comes to mating.”

“I'm not as horny as you, I'll be fine.” I wave her off with a small smile.

Uzume darted her eyes forward, a red hot blush spreading across her cheeks as she zipped shut her mouth.

I would lay into her more, like about how I know she was watching me and the cat girls all day, but here and now? In this position?

No. Not now. Later.

As I stared at his picture, a thought suddenly occurred to me.

“When I head down, will I see him?” I ask just as suddenly.

Uzume stiffened.

For a long moment, absolute silence reigned.

Then, begrudgingly, Uzume said, “I…hope not.”

Huh?

“Huh?” I turned to her, an eyebrow raised.

“Ah!? That sounds bad, um!” Uzume stammered, “See, of course, I hope you meet him…someday, somehow, but not in Yomi. A man like him deserves far better than that!”

Ah, okay, that makes sense. Jeez girl, think before you speak yeah?

Yet, I furrow my brow, “There's elsewhere he could have gone? I thought Yomi was the only afterlife for the purely Shinto?”

“Technically speaking, it is,” Uzume bit her lip, unsure, “but there are…other places to go. Yomi, to be Abrahamic about it, is more like Limbo. But there are places that can be considered a Heaven of Hell for good and bad souls respectively.”

I have vague recollections about some realm or land located across the sea in some myth somewhere, but I doubt that's what she's talking about.

With a grimace, Uzume continued, “We didn't always have something like that. But, then Hades came to power and started making demands…pissed off Susan something fierce back then,” she sighs, despondently, “especially since we can't exactly do what more modern beliefs dictate…let spirits wander for thirty-something years, trying to ‘help’, it…wouldn't go so well.”

With a cough, Uzume cleared her throat, “Anyway! Yeah, he shouldn’t have gone there, I hope. If your father is in Yomi, trust me, you wouldn't want to see him like…that. He wouldn’t be him anymore.”

I nod, slowly turning back to face the memorial, “I'll take your word for it, then.”

“Hey.” A hand suddenly grasps my shoulder, stopping me, and as I look back, I take in an…interesting sight.

Uzume looked at me, her normally amethyst eyes glowing with a dangerous amber light.

Gone is the blush, a blank, almost dead look on her face.

“If you do, see him down there?” Her hand squeezes my shoulder ever more tightly, “When you get back…do tell. I would like to have words with Susanoo then.”

I raise an eyebrow slowly at her, “...you seriously think he wouldn't beat your ass black and blue?”

The light in her flickers for a moment, before intensifying as she intones, “Nah, I'd win.”

I stared at her.

It took everything in my power not to burst out laughing.

And I still failed.

Snnnrrrcckkkk!!!” I wheezed out like a man desperate for breath.

“Eh?” Uzume tilted her head, the light suddenly gone, “H-Hey hey hey! Are you laughing!”

My answer to that is to promptly collapse on the floor, holding my stomach as I laugh hysterically.

“Umu!” Uzume pouts, puffing out her cheeks, “I'm a Kami, a Goddess, you know! I can fight! I fought in the Great War! Kind of?”

Haaaahhhhhh!!!

“Mmm!!” She seethed, “Okay! Fine!” She throws up her hands, “I'd tell Ama, then she'd kick his ass! Better?”

“Hnnn…” I slowly sit back up, chuckling, “And more realistic? Yeah. Much.” I reach over, patting her on the head, “Sorry about that extreme reaction, Uzui, it's just…” I snicker, “You referred to something there, a really good reference, right then.”

“Eh? A reference?” Uzume huffed, “Was it an anime reference?”

“Yup.”

Mmmm!!!” She seethed further, “You and Ama are like that, you two little…” she mumbled and grumbled off.

“Oi.” I deadpanned at her, “First, taller than you, second…” I decided to give her an out, “speaking of her, coming here, I sensed her power. But I don't see any sign of her. What's up with that?”

Uzume perked up, and took it.

“Ah? That's probably because this building used to be where they stored her Mirror during coronation ceremonies.” She informed me, “Although it has been a long time since it was last here, I know her divine armament is powerful, but to be able to sense it so long after the fact…” she trailed off.

“Well, I can't sense it.” She adds, “Maybe you can because you're you?”

My lips twitch at that, “Most likely, yeah.” I stood back up, bowing to the picture frame, “Sorry you had to watch all…that.” I spoke out apologetically, “Truly don't get how you dealt with her for so long, Dad.”

“H-Hey!! Nooori!!” Uzume cried out.

I snicker as I turn around and head out.

At the door, I stop and turn to look at her once more, “Also. Uzume?”

“H-Hmm?” She sniffles.

“If he is down there, you wouldn't need to worry.” I state, “I'd kick my uncle's ass myself for it.”

“E-Eh?” She murmured in shock, “Noriaki…”

I shoot her a smile, as I wave her off, “Be seeing you.”

“R-Right…” I catch a glimpse of a smile stretched across her face as I fully make my exit.

Don't need to know the man personally to hear about him from others, hear how shit Yomi is, and decide the same thing as Uzume.

Although I do hope it doesn't come to that.

I know I'd lose after all.

Heh. Still wouldn't stop me from trying, though.

Now then, if I recall correctly, eating the food in Yomi…or any Underworld is a bad idea.

I don't need to eat, but assuming I run into Tobio, and he's alive…then depending on how long he's been down there, he's probably starving assuming he's not an idiot.

So, stock up on some snacks, water, the works, and then the next stop?

Yomotsu Hirasaka, the boundary between the world of the living and the world of the dead.

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

As soon as morning came, and my cat girls woke up, I bid them a proper farewell.

Not by blowing out their backs again. Koneko could walk again and begrudgingly declined, much to her pouting older sister.

Still, with kisses and a bag of nutritious and healthy snack foods, I set off.

Now, in most cases, I would take a train, maybe a bus. Enjoy the journey and all that, and see the sights.

The problem is, I don't even know how much time I have before I have a very dead dog boy on my hands.

So. Zooming it is.

Utilizing the power of Google Maps and flight, I crossed to the other side of the nation in record time.

And I'll admit, watching Maps flip its shit at my speed and try to recalculate the best path to my destination every seven seconds got a good chuckle or two out of me.

Truly, the greatest piece of technology ever to exist.

They ought to make a supernatural version at some point.

Regardless, in Shimane Prefecture I went, specifically to its capital city, Matsue City.

I've never been here before, never even heard of the place, truth be told.

It's not like Kyoto or Tokyo, you know about those even in the West.

But this city holds something very special within its bounds, much like the cities Japan is much more well known for.

Something…supernatural.




Although at first glance, you wouldn't be able to tell.

A simple pathway leading to the site, where a large stone monument said to be the Rock of Senbiki…the boulder that Izanagi put in place to block the entrance to Yomi, sat.

The path is marked by a single shime Torii gate, one of the simple ones, made of two wood posts with a rope and shimenawa, connecting either of them from top to top.

Which I stand before now.

Even without entering the Realm of the Kami, I can feel the power radiating off Izanami's Shrine, which isn't too far from where I stand.

I'll be honest, I expected something…darker, than what I sensed.

It's got that twisted, repugnant, tainted essence to it, I expected that, and it makes my entire being recoil feeling it.

But at the same time…I don't know how exactly to describe it.

Maybe non-malicious is the right word? Despite it feeling as if actual death is staring at me, it isn't violent death.

More like the cold, reassuring certainty, that all beings do die, and not to worry over that fact.

Huh. Yeah, that does it.

I shake my head, not letting my thoughts wander any longer.

It's time to go.

I step through the Torii Gate.

The familiar sensation of passing through a film greets me before I enter the other side and

My instincts scream at me.

I barely have time to blink, but my arm moves by itself as soon as I fully go through.

The air shatters and thunders, as my aura-coated hand catches and stops a club aimed straight at my face.

I'm already reaching for my sword to lash out in a counterattack, but stop myself as I suddenly hear laughter…from further away.

“Heeheehee!! See, see! I told you he'd stop it!” A very young girl's voice calls out, “But did you listen? Naaahhh! Heh!”

“I! Can! See! That!” Another one, this time right in front of me, calls back, her voice straining, “Oi! Boy! Let go of my club! It's the only one I have left!”

I decided not to let go of her club.

Also, boy?

Really?



Really?



Before me, trying desperately to wrench her club out of my hand, is a yellow-haired oni loli with a matching getup.

Behind her, sitting on a tree smugly, a purple-haired oni loli wearing…nearly nothing beyond a completely open robe.

Which is covering her arms, and that's about it.

Each girl sports two horns, interestingly enough, and they seem fully capable of speaking normally.

Yet, from what I sense, they aren't that strong. Maybe High Class a piece?

Still…

My thoughts are interrupted, as the yellow-haired one suddenly cries out once more, “Are you even listening to me!?”

Idly, I respond with a simple, “No.”

“Wha!? You!” She reels back her fist.

My eyes activate.

She's…very slow.

And her form is shit.

I sigh, lashing out with a kick to her gut before her fist even makes it halfway to me.

She gets flung back, rolling backward into the tree her smug and now chuckling companion sat upon with a plain thud.

I dropped her club to the ground, now free of her hands as it was, as she stood up, stomping her foot against the ground like an enraged bunny.

“Hnnghhh!! That's it! I'm gonna eat ya! Get over here!” Yellow immediately tried to leap for me, points for tenacity I suppose, only to be stopped as Purple reached down and grabbed her ankle mid-air.

She hit the ground, face, and horns first, a second later.

With a sigh, Purple leaped from the tree, landing next to her downed companion, and patting her on the head.

“Now now, sister, be calm. This guest of ours isn't someone you can eat, scare off, or kill, I'm afraid.” She states, disappointingly.

Why are eat and kill two separate things, by the way?

“So, I'm afraid we'll have to take a different approach~!” She continues with a sultry grin toward me that says she isn't afraid at all.

Ah, hell no, I ain't into lolis!

I send her a deadpan stare back, as I ask, completely out of nowhere, “Aren't there supposed to be eight of you?”

That gives Purple pause, for a second, “Ah, right, that myth…what, think we aren't enough for you big man~?”

Oh grandmother, kill me now.

Yellow sits her head up, spitting the dirt out of her mouth before she starts, “For the record! Our other sisters are on break right now! We take turns guarding the entrance, two at a time! Boss treats us well! Haven't you ever heard of proper working conditions before!?”

Fuck me that's hilarious.

Wait, no, don't actually fuck me.

“Well, regardless,” I continue, doing my level best to ignore Purple as she tries to pull a Kuroka with her robe and non-existence bust, “I expected something different when I heard of demon hags or female oni.”

Purple scoffed at that, stopping her robe from completely dropping, “We can shapeshift, of course. But we sisters prefer these forms.”

“Yeah!” Yellow backs up, “The Boss says we look real cute! What else did you expect!?”

“Not a couple of lolis.” I intone dully.

At that, both girls go, “Eh?”

“Yeah. You heard me. Lolis.” I huff out, “Now, you!” I point to Purple, “Pull that robe up, you got nothing to show and I'd rather you keep it that way!”

“H-Hey!” Purple shouted, legitimately offended.

“Oi!” Yellow pointed back, “Don't you talk to big sis like that!”

I narrow my eyes at her, “I'll bash your head so hard with your club you'll grow a third horn if you don't stop yelling, hear me brat!?”

“Eh!?” She yelped, grabbing onto Purple, trying to hide behind her, but well…lolis.

Both are too small for that.

I stalk over to them, making sure my eyes are spinning, and my aura leaking slightly as I do.

Both shiver as they behold me, looking up as I tower over them.

Names.” I simply state.

Both yelp as I speak, Purple manages to form words first.

“U-Um…I am–”

“Grapefruit Loli.” I cut her off, filling in the rest for her.

“...huh?” She quivered out.

I nod, “Grapefruit Loli.”

“B-But…that's not even the right color!” She tries to deny me, but I'm already ignoring her, pointing at Yellow.

“Banana Loli.” I state.

Newly named Banana nods, fervently, to that.

Good.

“B-But! But!” Grapefruit continues to try and deny me, but I glare down at her, and she promptly zips it.

Double good, now then.

“You two are going to show me how to get to Yomi.” I command.

“Eh!?” They both cry out before Banana continues, terrified, “We can't do that! The Boss will get real mad! Really mad!”

I roll my eyes at that, “I'm sure Susanoo–”

“N-Not, Lord Susanoo.” Grapefruit interjects, “Lady Izanami…” she corrects.

That gives me pause, and makes a lot more sense than Susanoo, Mr Storm Rage Incarnate, giving good working conditions and hours.

Still funny with Izanami though.

I think for a second, before asking, “Would she still be mad if you two were just leading her grandson to Yomi so he could see her?”

“Grandson?” Both Oni girls tilt their heads at that.

I sigh, deeply.

“When was the last time you two picked up a phone?”

Banana chimes in, frowning, “What's a phone?”

“Where do you lot even go for a break then!?” I ask incredulously.

Because there's no way it's not in the normal, mundane world then!

Grapefruit answers that one, “Ah, there's a version of Mt. Oe in Yomi that we turned into a super gigantic hot spring resort…”

Both girls stare off into the distance with longing at the mention of it.

Okay, that sounds pretty sweet.

But, how to get my original point across?

…Would flashing the full extent of my aura do it?

I think that should do, no?

The two girls' attention is suddenly snapped away as I let my boiling aura burst out from within, out into the world uncontained.

Both simultaneously recoil in shock at the action, their eyes wide and quivering as they behold the pillar of honey light around my form.

“Lady…Amaterasu…?” Grapefruit mutters breathlessly.

“Not quite,” I answer, “one step down the family tree. I'm her son, with a human. An Arahitogami.” Both pale more than they already are at that, “Get what I'm saying now?”

Grapefruit nods quickly, “Y-Yes, yes! Um! The Lady would love to meet you…she's only had the company of that meathead for so long, so…yes, that would be good for her.”

Huh.

Looks like I'm not the only one not getting visits.

My aura calms significantly as I reel it in, “Well, I would love to meet her if you would?”

I do mean that. Beyond just nabbing dog man, visiting family is always nice.

And hey? Grandpa was nice on one side of the family, maybe I can go two for two?

“W-Well…” Grapefruit cleared her throat, as Banana hid behind her more, or tried to anyhow, “there's just one little problem with that?”

“Hmm?” I hum out, “What's wrong?”

Grapefruit points behind me.

With an eyebrow raised, I turn.

Then stand there, almost gaping, as I behold two more people…no, corpses, twitching in place right in front of the gate I came in from.

They look ready to fall over, with blood seeping from several open wounds, guts halfway falling out of their bodies, and one even has an eye popped out, barely held to the skull by a small tendon of meat.

What the fuck.

I draw my sword and take a step forward without uttering a word.

I can't sense them, whatever they are. Are they Undead? They look like it! But how did they get in here!?

In sync, both corpses smile, before suddenly collapsing into heaps of gore.

A black smog pours from the dead, swirling, twisting, and shaping itself into two figures.

Two, cloaked, figures.

Each possessed a tanto, a Japanese short sword, and wore deep velvet cloaks. An oni-like mask covered their faces, as their long stark white hair flowed freely down their backs behind them.

Arahitogami.” One of them hissed, “This is far as you go…”

“I…doubt that.” I respond slowly.

I get the feeling, although I can't sense it, that these guys are a bit tougher than the oni behind me.

I also don't know who these guys are? They kind of remind me of Grim Reapers, with the cloaks and masks.

Japanese Grim Reapers?

Do their knives work like Death Scythes, then?

Hmm, only one way to find out!

I breathe, entering my stance, and I ponder, how easy would it be to kill myself with my healing factor?

…Huh?

Blood bursts from my mouth, my breathing completely shot as I cough, hack, and sputter, falling to my knees.

I vaguely hear the Reapers in the background cackling, and the oni behind me gasping, as I look down, and find my own sword piercing through my chest…

Right through my own heart.

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

Chapter 32 End


Ah, inching ever closer back to my desired time to update. The dreeaammm...

Also. Oof, Nori, you okay there?

This is going to present a unique challenge for him, as so far, he's dealt with most "big power, more punch" type fighters, and while Shinigami are tough bastards, they are also big mind manipulators. Passively.

A challenge for next chapters opening fight, hmm?

Also, yeah, Banana Oni and Grapefruit (snrk) Oni are here! Didn't think I'd get to use them at all in this story, but I managed to cram in and bs something together.

Be advised, I actually don't play FGO, so if I somehow managed to copy the twos personalities, I apologize, that wasn't my intent. Like Uzume, or Inari, I use the face claim but change the personality to try and make them their own character, not merely an expy.

Ah, starting the year off...well, certainly starting it with something, huh?

View Post

A New Sun Interlude 6

Interlude 6

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

Tobio Ikuse, better known as the Slash Dog, or occasionally Fallen Dog God, stood behind the counter in the Black Dog Bar.

With a small smile on his face, he wipes a glass in his hands down with a cloth.

Truly, he's already wiped this particular glass down…maybe something like four times? But it's not like he has much else he can do otherwise.

At his part-time job here, things have been rather slow.

A few people here and there come in for drinks and food, mostly die-hard regulars who enjoy his cooking, and most haven't even been supernatural.

To be fair, he knows why that is.

Most of the time it's usually much busier, they get more supernatural than mundane customers on average, but due to the whole thing with the Grigori, and them moving from the organization, things have slowed and people stopped showing until everything settles.

In Tobio’s mind, he honestly kind of prefers it this way.

Not to say he despises his supernatural job and responsibilities, but the Grigori aren't the most, shall he say, restrained in deploying him and his team.

Even for rather silly and stupid things.

Like that time Azazel tried to convince them to raid some Heavenly Institute for Gabriel’s…undergarments.

The thought alone makes Tobio pause, staring half-lidded across the empty bar.

He still remembers the face Azazel made after all the girls took turns slapping him.

In any case, he hopes that with the Shinto's more isolationist nature, there will be less of all that and more time to dedicate to his and his team's personal lives.

Such as University! That was going well!

Maybe, if things keep going so well, he'll be able to open up his restaurant like he wanted…

He chuckled softly as his mind strayed to Sae in a waitress outfit.

Maybe spending so much time around Azazel had affected him?

Ah well, all the more inspiration, he guessed.

He perked up, as a low chime suddenly rang out throughout the bar.

Looking towards the source, the door, he finds an older man, perhaps in his sixties or so, balding and wrinkled yet with a kindly smile on his weathered face.

“Ah, I know it's late, young man, but are you still open?” The man asked.

Tobio eyed the clock for a second, then nodded.

“For a little while longer, but I still would have let you in any way,” Tobio smiled softly, “it's rather cold out, and I wouldn't let you stand out there freezing.”

The old man gave a genuine smile, stepping in and closing the door behind him, “Thank you. You're most kind.”

Tobio waved him off, “Don't mention it. Please, have a seat.”

Reaching under the counter, Tobio pressed a button, locking the doors.

“Can I get you something warm?” He continued with an eye-to-eye smile.

The old man shambled to the counter, and sat, slumping over slightly, “What would you recommend?”

Tobio turned toward the rack of drinks behind him, his smile never leaving his face.

“Hmm…I could mix you up an Umetini?” Tobio offered.

“Ah, gin…” the old man smiled, “it's been a while since I've had some of that.”

“I suppose you Shinigami don't get out much then, hmm?” Tobio idly noted.

The bar was suddenly plunged into silence.

“Damn…” the ‘old man’ wheezed out, “didn't even make it past the front door hidden, did I? You know…” he moved his head slightly, moving his neck away from the pitch black scythe blade that suddenly seemed to manifest around him.

“You're one scary young man, Fallen Dog God…” the ‘old man’ rasped out, staring at Tobio, who all of sudden turned back to him, the handle of said scythe held aloft with a single hand.

The Longinus possessor never stopped smiling, even as he drew the blade slightly closer to the man's neck.

“It was your eyes. Your eyes gave it away.” Tobio remarked, without a hint of smugness, as he merely stated fact.

The old man's eyes…were completely dead. Glossed over, hazed.

This old man is a corpse.

The Death Kami clicked his body's tongue, “This was the closest vessel I could find on such short notice…, Lord Susanoo should be praising me, I enacted his orders so quickly.” He huffed, annoyed.

Tobio briefly recalled Suzaku’s lecture on Shinigami all those years ago.

Right. They can't materialize on the Earthly Plane like normal Grim Reapers, because they would corrupt or kill anything they touch.

The Shinigami ‘Aura of Death’ is unique, however, not that it kills directly, but because it makes the victims want to kill themselves.

Plants suddenly stop taking in water, stop making sugar, and starve themselves to death.

Humans jump off buildings, and bridges, or otherwise find some way to kill themselves as quickly as possible.

So instead, they possess a vessel to keep that aura contained, usually living as that's most efficient, but here…

In the back of his mind, an insidious thought creeps into the back of his mind.

What if he fell on his scythe?

He slaps that thought away without an ounce of hesitation, and instead, fills his mind of things that he’d stay alive for.

Mostly Sae, but he wouldn't tell everyone that.

“Oh?” The Shinigami gave him a toothy grin, “You're good, catching that so quic-”

He stopped talking, as the scythe blade pressed against ‘his’ throat.

The scythe blade seemed to hum, a powerful thrum resonating throughout the darkness as its very nature seemed to shift.

The Shinigami paled the color of the corpse he wore.

He would be able to sense it, wouldn't he?

At this wavelength, the power in his scythe would tear apart the Shinigami in a single stroke, leaving his puppet body entirely unharmed.

“Give me one good reason I shouldn't consign you to oblivion and free that man's body back to his rest.” Tobio intoned coldly.

“Your grandmother.” The corpse hissed out entirely too fast, too afraid.

Tobio paused, blinking.

He decided he didn't much like that joke.

So then, he moved to annihilate the errant Death Kami with a single stroke.

“Wait wait wait!” The Shinigami flailed ‘his’ arms around, right before the blade made spiritual contact, “My Lord! The King of Yomi! He has her soul!”

Tobio froze.

“...What.” Was all he could muster in that moment.

“Yes, yes.” The Shinigami breathed out, emboldened and relieved, “He sent me, to tell you of this fact, and to offer a rather simple…er, hmm, not bargain, perhaps a deal?”

This isn't a joke, is it? A lie?

No. It couldn't be, right? They just joined the Shinto, so what could this be? A test?

He always knew Lord Susanoo disliked them, but he could never figure out why.

Maybe it was because of their relation to the Grigori? He knows not a lot of people like the Fallen and their ilk after all.

So, maybe a test of loyalty then?

“What kind of…deal.” Tobio drew out, coldly, gaze fixed like stone upon the Shinigami.

The Death God shivered at his tone, before continuing, “My Lord wants something in exchange for the return of her soul, either to her rightful place of rest or…to the living, should you do well.”

Tobio's heart hurt at that.

That…to see his grandmother again…after so, so long…

“Really…?” He muttered, low voice cracking slightly.

The Shinigami nodded, “My Lord is many things, but a liar is not one of them.”

Tobio bit his lip, contemplating those words.

Something feels off. About all of this. Yet, he can't quite place it…

In the end, the only real way to find out what's going on is to confront the man himself, isn't it?

Taking a deep steadying breath, Tobio answered, “Something like this…is far too important for a talk as simple as this.” He narrows his eyes upon the Death Kami, “Take me to him. To Lord Susanoo. I want to see what he has to say for himself.”

To his surprise, and slight unease, the Shinigami smiles at that, and nods, “That can be arranged, Fallen Dog God.”

The corpse then held out its hand, “Better not keep the Lord waiting, if you're so inclined, the sooner we head to Yomi the less likely he'll…do something unwarranted.

Like hurt her?

The corpse, somehow, someway, sweated a single drop as all the shadows in the bar suddenly erupted with obsidian blades, coated in red and black god-killing fire.

“I…don't get paid enough for this shit…” The Shinigami muttered and damn near whimpered.

Within a moment, the storm of blades vanished, and Tobio took the Kami's hand, prompting him to flinch at the small smile stretched across the Slash Dog's face.

“Well, we wouldn't want that, would we?” Tobio asked, nonchalantly.

The Shinigami shook his head back and forth rapidly in apt agreement.

In Tobio's mind, this shouldn't take long, anyway.

In that next instance, Tobio felt a pull, and the world swirled into dullness and darkness.

He stood amongst a dark, dreary reflection of the bar, without a Shinigami in sight.

Walking out, the world would be much the same, without even a sky.

It was at this moment that he realized however, he had no idea where to go.

So, he wondered.

With only the company of Jin, his Sacred Gear, he walked across what felt like the entirety of this dark reflection of Japan.

None of the dead would talk to him.

He ate or drank nothing, knowing at the very least that was a terrible idea.

And he couldn't sleep, as whenever he tried, he felt something wearing down his body and soul, requiring his consciousness and Jin to keep that feeling away.

Time blurred together. He didn't know how long he was there.

Until, one day, a hurricane suddenly erupted across the land, laced with divine power…

And he knew what he'd find at its center.

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

Interlude 6 End


This chapter was meant to go up yesterday, but yeah, I got blindsided by New Years stuff. My fault, though, I should have known it was coming, lol.

In any case, here we are, what exactly happened to Tobio.

Yeah, when the Shinigami grabbed Tobio and threw him into Yomi, Susanoo didn't actually have his grandmother then, he was in the process of getting her soul.

Being stranded for a while was meant to nerf Tobio for when he inevitably tries to fight Susanoo, cuz otherwise, like I said in the comments of last chapter...

Tobi would straight push Susanoo's shit in then take his lunch money otherwise.

With all that being said, Happy New Years! I do hope you all have a much better New Year then poor Tobio over here!

View Post

A New Sun Chapter 31

Chapter 31

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

My eyes snap open as three strong presences all of a sudden ping to my senses.

Of the three, I only recognize the one, Suzaku.

But the other two? Completely foreign.

Interesting.

Also, very bad timing, fire birb.

I lift my head slightly, looking between the white and black-haired cat girls nuzzled into either of my sides.

Sorry, correction, the very naked cat girls nuzzled into my sides, with my hands placed firmly on their waists, oh so close to the plush booty I've been balls deep in for…

Huh. I'm honestly not too sure how long we went at it.

Right now though, as a quick look outside at the falling sun suggests, it's late evening.

Regardless, I am very tempted to grab both their asses, rouse Nori Junior from his slumber, and keep going.

Especially Koneko. She deserves some proper exclusive one-on-one time eventually.

But besides the fact that both girls are currently out, peacefully sleeping and purring so adorably that I legitimately don't want to wake them up?

The new visitors.

I really should get up.

But I don't wanna.

Fuck that makes me sound like a baby, but, come on, it's cat-girl body pillows!

Still, duty calls, or at least I think this is duty related.

Judging by the strength I can sense, the two with her aren't mooks, or handmaidens for her, or something similar of the sort.

Hmm, partial Team Slash/Dog meeting time perhaps? But why?

Only one way to find out I guess.

With a low, and I'll admit, whiney sigh, I extract myself from between the two cat girls with careful ease.

I give the two scratches behind the ears, smiling as they both grin all dopey-like, before grabbing my robe and carefully floating out of the room.

Don't want to risk my heavy footsteps waking them up after all.

I haphazardly throw on my robe as I float lazily to my front door, making myself look somewhat presentable.

Truly, I had half a mind to open the door naked, just for the laughs.

Probably would if only Suzaku had shown up unannounced, but as she did bring others, I suppose I'll be mindful of first impressions with them.

The three seemed to be waiting right outside, likely Suzaku sensed my coming, so not even a knock was required.

So, without further ado and much reason to keep them waiting, I adopt a half-lidded stare, one more tired than annoyed, before sliding open the door.

Standing almost directly in front of me was Suzaku, with her arms crossed under her chest, her own half-lidded stare clashing against mine.

I'm not entirely too sure why she looked so annoyed, but it made me immediately flip from tired to smug, a small smile forming across my face as I locked eyes with her.

Kuroka is a terrible influence, eh?

“Well now, good evening to you, Suza-chan!” My smile grew as her eye twitched, “To what do I owe the pleasure of such a sudden visit so late in the day?”

Suzaku took a moment, breathing out lightly before responding, “Lord Noriaki,” she stressed, “I've been trying to reach you all day, but you haven't been answering your phone. What have you been doing?”

My phone?

Oh yeah, I turned that off right before trying the thing with Kuroka.

Then Koneko came over, and I never…turned it back on.

Huh. Well, shit.

Still though. My mouth spoke words before my brain could seriously think about what I was saying.

“Catgirls.” I answered automatically, although nonetheless very seriously.

Suzaku blinked. Several times in fact, as she simply stared at me, befuddled.

Although she certainly didn't give much of a reaction, the two behind her certainly did.

“Hmm, hmm…catgirls, eh?”

My eyes drifted to the source of the male voice as it hummed in approval.

Prompting me to blink, as I behold a guy who looked like he had never grown out of his delinquent phase from high school, standing behind and to Suzaku’s left.



Dyed, spiked-up brown hair, fierce storm gray eyes, even the school uniform, all that's missing is the bat.

Good thing he makes up for it with the actual white cat just kind of sitting there on his shoulder.

As soon as my eyes land on him, he smirks and gives me a thumbs-up.

I manage to push past the dissociation I feel at that exact moment to shoot him a thumbs-up back.

“Eh?” Another voice, feminine, chips up in confusion, “What's that all supposed to mean?”

Standing right next to the delinquent guy is the source, a young woman in a uniform similar to the guys, but with light brown eyes and light brown hair tied at the back of her head.



She's rather cute, I'd say, especially since she legitimately doesn't seem to get the joke.

Fortunately, her friend was here to give her a little help.

The delinquent snorted, “Oi. Birdbrain,” he huffs out, amused and smirking, “it means our little Kami guy here fucked a couple or more catgirls. Not that hard to grasp.”

Kami guy? That's new.

The girl meanwhile, took a second to process what she heard before she too blinked, putting a hand to her mouth.

Oh.” She muttered, yet without an iota of a blush.

Most impressive.

The delinquent chuckled, “Oh indeed…”

You know, looking at these two, I do recognize them somewhat.

They are part of Team Slash/Dog, that much I’m certain, but I'm drawing a blank on pretty much everything about these two.

For the guy, I keep thinking ‘cat drill’ for some reason.

Then the girl, I keep wanting to call her ‘Irina lite’ in my mind.

Yet before I could delve too deep into those thoughts, or before the guy's unique nickname for Irina lite over there could prompt her to do other Irina things like start a fight, Suzaku managed to bring the attention back to herself with a single sigh.

“As…interesting,” her smile strained at that, “as that information is to know, we've come here today for something very important, Lord Noriaki.”

As Suzaku started talking, the other two suddenly straightened up, looking much more serious.

“Tell us,” she continued, gaze hardening, “what do you know of Lord Susanoo and the Realm of Yomi?”

I stare at her for a moment, before letting out a deep, anguished, sigh, before I ask.

“What did my Uncle do…this time.

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

Deciding it was probably for the best of everyone present if we sat down first, I ended up inviting everyone in.

Unfortunately, I don't exactly have an informal sitting area as of yet, which led to…this.

Us all sitting on a tatami mat floor, with the new girl looking around in wonder, stars in her eyes.

“It's all so…traditional…” she muttered in legitimate awe.

Even the delinquent looked around in appreciation.

Despite this room being wholly empty, with literally nothing inside of it.

I think, after these three leave, I'm sending a clone to go shopping personally.

Uzume was supposed to do it, but she's taking too long, and I'm getting sick of this.

Only Suzaku didn't seem to care about the architecture either way, staring at me with an intensity I didn't think was possible for her.

“Before we begin,” Suzaku piped up before I could say anything, “proper introductions first. Lord Noriaki? These two are Slash/Dog Team members,” she held her hand out to the girl, “Natsume Minagawa.”

Natsume, promptly, gave an exaggerated wave my way as she greeted, “Haiya! Lord Kusanagi!”

Heh. Cute.

Suzaku sighed, before moving her hand towards the delinquent, “And Kouki Samejina.”

Kouki held a hand up, as did the cat perched on his shoulder, as he simply said, “Yo.”

I nodded to them both, “Noriaki Kusanagi, though I feel the two of you already know who I am.” I returned in greeting with a smile, “Still, you don't need to call me by my last name, or lord, or whatever. I'm not so formal, and I don't exactly consider myself a deity either.”

Natsume’s eyes practically sparkled, “Ho? Really? I'll call you Nori then!”

I smirked, “Only if I can call you Nat?”

She gave an exaggerated nod and a thumbs up, “Sure thing! Waaayy better nickname than what this cat-brained guy gave me…” she stuck a finger at Kouki.

Who snorts in turn, “Stop copying me because you lack creativity, birdbrain.” He admonished without even glancing at her.

“And I told you!” She whirls on him, “To stop calling me that! Years ago!”

Kouki merely shrugs, unperturbed, “If it fits, why change it?”

“T-That’s not the point you damn delinquent! I’ve changed!” She denies it, vehemently.

Watching these two start going at it, I chuckle.

Reminds me of Irina and Xenovia a bit, Nat especially reminds me of Irina, she's got that pep.

While Kouki? By the way he looks, I kind of expected another Vali type of guy, but he seems incredibly chill.

“You two.” Suzaku interjects coldly before Kouki could respond, bringing me out of my thoughts, “Now is not the time.”

“Ah,” Nat rubs the back of her head, “right, right…sorry, Lady Himejima.”

Kouki grunted, “Right. Can't get distracted now.” He starts…crawling closer to me? Going past Suzaku, he mutters, “No offense, Himejima, but I'll take it from here.”

Suzaku blinks, looking just as confused as I am.

Kouki gets right in front of me, with barely a few feet between us…

Before promptly slamming his head into the ground in a kowtow for the ages.

“K-Kouki!?” Nat exclaimed, “What are you…?”

We need your help.” Kouki began, muffled by the floor.

I uh, don't think he knows how a proper kowtow works, does he?

Yet still, the man continued, “Your uncle, he sent someone after Tobio…our leader, next thing we know, he's gone. We don't know where he went, we have our suspicions, but…”

“We've got nothing to go off of.” Nat chimed in, downtrodden, “He just…up and vanished…”

Poor girl sounds like she's going to cry.

I blinked between the two, before pinching the bridge between my nose and sighing.

“I'm…going to need more than that.” I start, “For one, how do you know my uncle is involved somehow?”

“There were traces of…taint,” Suzaku spat out, “from Yomi left behind at the bar, right after Tobio vanished. Only a few beings could leave such a mark behind, the Shinigami being the most apparent.”

Curious.

“I don't know much about the Dog God personally,” I muse, “but I do know of his strength. Whatever went down, he came willingly. It would take nothing short of my Uncle himself showing up to take him by force otherwise.”

“That's the same conclusion we came to as well…” Suzaku muttered.

“But! Still! It just doesn't make any sense!” Nat suddenly cried out, “H-He didn't even say anything to any of us! N-Not even Sae, I just…” she trails off into silence, a distant pained look in her eyes.

I want to pat her on the head and tell her it'll be alright.

Truly, I do, but I’m just as lost as them right now, and I don't want to plant false hope in case I'm wrong.

Rather, I shot her a soft smile, before looking back at Suzaku, “So that's why you wanted to know about Susanoo and Yomi specifically, huh?”

She nods, and I rub my chin as I ponder that question.

“How much do you know already?” I ask idly.

Kouki huffs, “That he doesn't like us all that much, never has.”

“Yeah!” Nat pipes up, pumping her fist in the air, “He was the only Japanese God to vehemently refuse to bless us after we cleaned up the Utsusemi!”

I tilt my head slightly to that, “...that wasn't really what I was talking about, but that does point to him being the more likely cause of all this.” I look down at Kouki, “Also, Samejima, you can get up now, okay? That's starting to look like it hurts.”

He promptly groans as he sits up, “Yeah, damn…it did…thanks.” He, and his cat, reach back and start rubbing his back.

I waved him off, “No problem. What I was talking about, is his myths. You know, like the stuff where he gets thrown out of Heaven for being a big crybaby, where he makes my mother hide in a cave…that stuff.”

Suzaku pursed her lips, “I…don't see how his past is relevant?”

“Because it shapes what he does today. For instance,” I start chuckling, “d-did you know? My uncle is a massive momma’s boy.”

Don't even need Uzume to tell me that much.

In damn near every variation of his myths, he's trying to reach Yomi explicitly to be with his mother.

Hell, he got thrown out originally by his father because he wouldn't stop crying over her death.

Literally. The man almost flooded Japan.

But, although it's funny, that's not why I bring it up.

My three guests blinked at that, seemingly not catching on quite yet.

Nat spoke up first, “What…does any of that have to do with Tobio?”

I raise a finger, smirking slightly, “Simple. Does he have anything that connects him to Izanami?”

“No? Why would he?” Kouki frowned, “Well, they both manipulate darkness to an extent I guess, right? Maybe he got jealous?”

I could see that happening, funnily enough. Deities aren't exactly known for their humility, especially Susanoo.

But, no.

The Ame-no-Ohabari…” Suzaku muttered lowly in absolute horror, her eyes wide as I nodded.

There it is.

“Eh? Do you mean the divine sword that's part of his Sacred Gear? The fire one?” Kouki asked, incredulously.

“The same sword that killed Kagustuchi,” I add in, “after he in turn killed Izanami during his birth.”

At that, the other two simply stared, their eyes widening as the idea set in.

Kouki was the first to emerge from the slump and break the silence, with a growl.

“That…bastard.” He rose to his feet, gritting his feet as his cat hissed atop his shoulder to the sky, “He's after Tobio’s sword, huh? Well! I ain't about to let some momma's boy ‘god’ take it from him! Birdbrain!” Kouki called, snapping Nat out of the distant look in her eyes, making her look at him, “Let's get the others. Break into the Underworld, and get him back.

“Ah…” Nat’s expression morphed, hardening, “Yeah. Let's.”

Suzaku however, stayed stock still, “You two, don't move, quite yet.”

“Wha?” Kouki turned to Suzaku, “Why the hell not!? Don't you want to help?”

Suzaku clicked her tongue, “I do. But you need to think before you act, Samejima.”

He snarled at that, “We have been thinking! We thought enough! The time for thinking is long over!”

“Removing such an integral part of his Sacred Gear should kill him.” Suzaku states, unmoving as she stares at the ground, “It would break his gear. Mutilate his soul. Knowing that, why did he go without a fight!?” Her hands clench the hem of her Shrine Maiden skirt tightly as her voice shakes with rage.

That question, that proclamation, makes Kouki stop and stare for a second.

I decided to chime in here, “Most likely? I think my uncle forced his compliance. I don't mean to be rude, but from what I heard, the Dog God is kind of your…well. He's a standard light novel protagonist, ain't he?”

Suzaku leveled her near-death glare at me for a second, before I corrected myself.

“Sorry. Standard harem light novel protagonist.”

That made both Suzaku and Nat blush mutedly, and look away.

While Kouki simply snorted, “Shit. Can't even be mad about that assessment, it's right on the money.”

I nod to that, “See? So like I was saying, taking that into account, it's likely my ‘dear’ uncle threatened the people closest to him to get him to comply. Friends and family. You guys, most likely.”

Kouki snorted and rolled his eyes at that, “I doubt that much. We can handle ourselves just fine, and if he did go willingly cause’ of a few threats to us, I'll rip that stupid sword out of him myself.”

Nat nods vehemently in agreement with his words, while Suzaku simply huffs haughtily.

I shrug to them, “Well, does he have any family I don't know about?”

Nat looks down and mutters, “None alive…”

I raise an eyebrow to that, “My uncle is the King of Yomi, dead or alive…shouldn't be all that much of a barrier for him.”

“She shouldn't have gone to the Japanese afterlife,” Suzaku spoke up in denial, “his grandmother practiced Buddhist Magic. The claim to her soul should go to them.”

I hum to that, “Fair enough, I still say it shouldn't be discounted as a possibility though. My uncle…he's known in part for the chaos he brings.”

“Ah~…That's one way of putting it, I suppose.” Another feminine voice adds with a yawn.

Turning, I stare half-lidded as Uzume enters the room, rubbing her eyes, and wearing…pajamas.




More specifically, a onesie? Cute. Even has a little hood.

“Taking a nap, huh Uzume?” I muse.

“Well, I was…but, then I felt–”

Uzume was cut off, as Nat suddenly rocketed herself straight into the Kami.

“Uzuumeee-chan!” Nat cried, snuggling into my maid.

Uzume suddenly seemed very self-conscious, as she reached down gently and patted Nat on the head with an awkward smile on her face, “There there, there there…” she softly muttered down at the girl.

Suzaku stared blankly at the scene before her, looking like she went into shock.

Ah, damn. There goes my trolling opportunity. Still, the look on her face is superb.

I and Kouki watched this scene unfold in amusement for a little while before I eventually asked the obvious.

“You two know each other?”

“Ah,” Uzume chuckled lightly, “in the past, for all Team Slash/Dog did in Japan, Ama decided to gift them with our blessings, and I chose to bless Natsume, here.”

Oh, Nat. You poor girl.

“Eh? Nori-kun? W-What's with that look!?” Uzume suddenly added, almost panicked.

I quickly wipe the Tanjiro pity look off my face, returning to a neutral expression.

“I have no idea what you're talking about.” I state plainly.

“T-That…!”

Luckily, Uzume is saved from being outed by Suzaku, as she suddenly asks, voice breaking slightly, “What...what is the Goddess of the Dawn doing here…?”

Uzume quickly looks at me, pleading with her eyes alone.

I meet her gaze, then slowly draw my eyes across the very empty room.

The next time I meet her gaze, my stare is narrowed significantly, and her eyes have in turn widened in realization.

So, I answer honestly.

“She's my maid.”

Suzaku stares dead ahead, not saying a word.

Kouki raises an eyebrow.

Nat blinks a few times, before finally letting Uzume go, and looking up at her with a tilt to her head, “Eh? Uzume-chan? I didn't know you were into that!”

Uzume looks like she wants to commit die.

“It's…not that,” I snort, causing Uzume to wave her hands out in denial, “really! Ama gave me this job! Socanwegobacktowhateveritwasyouallweretalkingaboutbeforepleaseandthanks!”

Pin drop silence.

“Uzume,” I started, an amused smile on my lips, “What was that?”

She slowly pulled her pajama hood up over her head, and looked down, “...you were all talking about Susanoo?”

“Yeah,” I chuckled a bit, “we were. Kind of. Nat, care to fill your blesser in on what's going on?”

Ah, Uzume. Always there to break the tension and cast downtrodden moods into the abyss.

Sometimes via sexy dancing. Sometimes via being, well, her.

In any case, Uzume listens in as Nat gives an abridged version of what's going on.

Following that, she gives a thoughtful frown.

“Ama…really isn't going to like hearing about any of this,” she sighs, closing her eyes and clicking her tongue in annoyance, “seriously, that brain-dead oaf, right after they join us!?”

“Better to get this out of the way now than have to suddenly deal with this later, I feel.” I add with a raise of my finger.

“I mean, maybe…” Uzume bites her lip, “Still, what a mess. Especially if he did take a soul from another afterlife to use as bait, pretty sure that violates so many laws it's not even funny.”

“Even if whatever passes for law enforcement down there jumps mommy's boy?” Kouki asks with a smirk.

Uzume thinks for a second, before snorting, “Okay, it would be funny to watch Hades beat the storm out of him, but still.”

“Heh!” Kouki chuckled, “Well, I don't want to sit around her and wait for some Greek to do our job for us. I still say we go.”

Suzaku pinched the bridge of her nose, and sighed, “Samejima, we just talked about this…”

Uzume blinked, and tilted her head at that, “You wouldn't be able to, anyway.” She adds matter-of-factly.

The three look at her, eyes wide, before voicing all at once.

“Eh? What the hell do you mean by that, Kami!?”

“Uzume-chan…?”

“Lady Uzume…”

“Humans, alive humans, aren't meant to exist in Yomi,” Uzume elaborates, a sad glint in her eyes, “Longinus possessors like Tobio would be fine, their gear would be powerful enough to protect their living body from eroding and, well, dying.

She looks at the three intensely, “But for the rest of you? You wouldn't last long. Not without the blessing of Izanami or Susanoo himself, in any case. The former hasn't been seen in so long, and the latter? Well…you know.”

Following that explanation, the three looked damn near dead to the world.

Well, Suzaku, especially. Kouki was chewing on his gums, and cracking his knuckles with a look of cold rage on his face.

While Nat? She looked down, staring at the floor despondently, “T-There…has to be a way, right, Uzume-chan?” She reaches over and grabs the Kami’s pj's, “There has to be something, r-right?”

Uzume looked down at Nat, a pained, guilty look on her face.

Then, she looked over at me.

Oh yeah. I'm not necessarily human, so doesn't that mea–

“While humans can't go down and survive in Yomi, Arahitogami like Noriaki can.” Uzume added slowly.

Oh. You bitch.

Almost instantly, Nat and Suzaku’s gaze locked onto me.

Just as fast, however, before either of the two could get a word out, Kouki called out, “Oh yeah? How's that supposed to help?”

Nat turned to Kouki, eyes wide and slightly shaking, “K-Kouki…he could…”

“Solve the problem for us? Yeah, maybe.” Kouki crossed his arms, “But I didn't come here to send some guy I just meant after our best friend.” He looked down at me, “No offense, Kami guy.”

I wave him off, “None taken.”

“Were you not just on your knees before him, begging for help mere moments ago?” Suzaku bites out in response.

Kouki huffed, “Yeah. For help. Not for him to solve our problems for us. We're a team, not some outsourcing group.” He waved to Nat, “Yo birdbrain, let's head back, tell everyone else what we found out here…we’ll think of something.”

He walks over to her, helping her to her feet, “We always do.” He finishes resolutely.

Nat sniffles, sparing me one last glance, before nodding to Kouki, and promptly slapping herself in the face with both hands, “Y-Yeah! I guess we do! Hmm hmm!”

Kouki turns back to Suzaku, “Thanks for the ride, Himejima. We know our way back.” Then he looks at me, “Thanks for the talk Kami guy, we'll give you a call once everything blows over, then you'll get to meet the team proper, aight?”

“A…ight?” I wave at them as Kouki walks off with Nat in tow, the girl giving Uzume one last big hug before exiting the front door.

Soon enough, their presences vanish into thin air, most likely via magic teleportation.

My confusion came from Suzaku sitting there motionless, not joining them the whole time.

Then, pretty much the second their presences disappear, Suzaku throws herself at my feet, in much the same way Kouki did, except her kowtow is much more…proper.

I…need your h-help…” Suzaku began, voice breaking.

Ah…well, I was probably going to get involved one way or another.

Didn't think it would be like this, however!

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

After shooing Uzume out to spare Suzaku some embarrassment, I shuffle right up in front of the girl.

“Suzaku?” I ask, tone soft, “What are you doing?”

“I…I…k-know what you're about to say, but I’m not t-truly an official member of their team,” she continues, ignoring me, “more like an honorary member. So! I beseech you, Lord Kusana- Huh…?”

I get her to pause, by reaching down and gently cupping her face into my hand, slowly making her lift her head to look me in the eye.

She's crying. Slow, tired streams.

I wipe them away with my thumb.

“You've been bottling up these emotions for a while, haven't you?” I ask, “How long exactly? Since right after Ibaraki? Did you even have time for yourself after that mess, and Baraqiel?”

“I…that…” she averts her gaze away from mine, “I don't see how that is relevant.”

“Because worrying about someone you care about is one thing, but killing yourself over it…physically or mentally, is another.” I scolded her.

“It isn't about me!” She bit back, yet more down then heated, “I'll be fine! But Tobio won't…I c-can't…” her head sagged down, “I promised…to keep him safe…He’s some of the last good of my family left, and I…” she bit her lip as a quiet choked sob silenced her.

I raise her head back up, along with an eyebrow, “What makes you think he won't be fine?”

“He’s never fought anything like this before…Susanoo, one of the strongest of the Shinto Pantheon, is said to possibly rival the Omikami in terms of power.” She muttered in horror, “That isn't something you fight alone, Lord Noriaki…”

“Cut the ‘lord’ thing here, Suzaku.” I tell her sternly, before adding, “Also. You need to have more faith in this guy.”

Her eyes promptly narrowed, but I didn't let up.

“Seriously, the way you make it sound, he's some sort of damsel in distress. Not the Dog God with an Abyss Side Balance Broken Longinus wielding an actual god-killing sword.” I admonished her further.

Laying it all out like that, Suzaku at least had the decency to blush.

“No, the only thing holding him back from fighting, is whatever made him come ‘willingly’. Without that, he probably would have dealt with this situation on the spot.” I muse.

Suzaku's eyes widened, “Y-You mean…?”

I smiled, “I was already planning on taking a look. Izanami is my grandmother, you know? I'm sure she'd be delighted to know her daughter had another grandkid, don't you thin– Hmm!?”

Suzaku interrupted me this time, by suddenly attaching to me, wrapping her arms around my torso and clinging, tightly, as she muttered seemingly unending ‘thank you's at a breakneck pace.

I let out a soft chuckle as I pat her on the back, “So,” I muse aloud, “does this count as a favor?”

Suzaku let out a dry chuckle as she pulled back, whipping a fresh tear from her face.

“P-Perhaps,” she accedes with a small, pretty smile, “only if you manage to make him come back in one piece.”

“...You know if it comes down to it, I won't be able to fight my uncle.” I state for certain, “There's no sun down there, or at least I would assume there isn't, and even then…” I trail off, uncertain.

I'm not even sure about my power relative to the top of the Faction.

If Susanoo is near the top, rivaling my mother, then he'll probably slap me around like Vali did.

Even with Ara-Mitama…If I managed to pull that off. If the time even works out that way.

So many variables, and so many things that are more likely to go wrong during that potential fight.

But above all else, I don't believe I'm ready to fight a true divine being yet. Much less one so high on the totem pole.

“Then don't fight,” Suzaku murmurs, “just make sure the two of you make it out alive, alright?”

That, I have a much higher chance of doing.

After I drain Uzume of everything she knows about Yomi.

Like, for instance, how to get in without being elbow-dropped by dozens of Shinigami and Susanoo himself.

But for now?

Suzaku, despite her smile, shows cracks. A tense air to her eyes, the occasional twitch of her hand…

She's still bottling up her feelings, huh?

“Hmm, alright,” I nod to that, “then, for now, Suza-chan,” I smirk as her eye twitches, “it's been a while, why don't you catch me up on everything else going on, and then?” I pat her on the back, “You tell me more about the guy I'm going to drag out from downstairs?”

At her smile, I figure she has a fair bit to tell.

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

Chapter 31 End

The rizzing of Suzaku begins.

Also, it wouldn't be a Demigod story without an adventure to the underworld, would it?

Also, can I just say, finding a good, colored, quality picture of Kouki was a pain in the ass? Nat was easy. In fact, here, have more Nat.



Nat's real fun to write, by the way, even if she didn't get much time here. Kouki too.

She's like proto-Irina, and her sole existence is making it harder for me to not add more Slash/Dog girls to the harem, lol.

Seriously, those thighs.

But I'm seriously trying not to. Gotta save some characters for "Get Sinful" after all.

Anyhow, this weekend, Interlude 6. Featuring dog boy himself.

View Post

A New Sun Chapter 30

Chapter 30

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

As I sit here, or rather, as I've been sitting here giving Kuroka a lap pillow the rest of the night and into the morning, I realize something truly tragic.

I barely get any lap pillow time myself!

In this case, I'll let it slide due to certain circumstances, but something to keep in mind for later.

Honestly, after the first hour passed, and Kuroka remained unconscious but still alive, I more or less stopped worrying so much.

Which has led me to sit here, thinking of completely random things.

Like how when Kuroka finally wakes up, I want to have her say that…one thing.

How'd it go again? Uh…

‘Can you imagine an imaginary menagerie manager imagining managing an imaginary menagerie?’

Yeah, there we go.

“N~Nyah~...” A mewling groan radiates from beneath me, snapping me out of my wandering thoughts.

Looking down, I find Kuroka belatedly opening her eyes only partway, staring up at me half-lidded.

“Mmm~? Good morning, darling~...” She murmurs weakly, “Or…is it morning? How long have I been out, nyah~?”

I nod slowly, “All night, it is morning now.” I reach down, cupping and gently stroking her cheek with my hand.

She leans softly into my touch, purring as she does.

“So, how are you feeling?” I ask slowly.

“Mmm~!” Kuroka hums lightly, “Well, for starters, I can't feel my Demonic Power. At all.” She starts with a sigh, and a shake of her head, “But in its place, there's something else there...but I can't…” she trails off wistfully.

“Yeah, your pieces didn't vacate your body, which means it's still doing…something, inside your soul.” I shrug, putting a hand to and rubbing my chin in thought, “My bet? Your bishop pieces took the attribute of my purification. Which means you might have that now instead.”

I give her an easy smile, “Though there's only one way to figure that out, isn't there~?”

“Nyah~!? Noooo~!!” She cries out weakly, clinging to and burying her face in my robe, “I don't wanna train! No training~! Well…unless it's another kind of training~...?” She slowly pulls her head back, looking up at me with a lewd smirk.

I flick her on the nose.

“Nyah~!? Darrlliiinggg~!” She wiggles and whines, grabbing ahold of her nose in mock pain.

“Now Kuroka,” I begin, chastisingly, “we need to know if you even can bring it out, or even confirm what it even is and if it'll hurt you.”

“I know, I know…” she waves off, weakly, collapsing her head back onto my lap and closing her eyes, “it's just so much work, nyah~...”

I snort at that, “That's probably the first time you've ever outright admitted to wanting to be lazy.”

“Well, it's not only that, darling.” Kuroka continues with a huff, “My body feels…light. Not necessarily weaker, but…”

“Cleansed?” I supply, and after thinking for a moment, she nods in acceptance.

“That fits I suppose. It feels…weird.” She wiggles in place, “It's like my entire body fell asleep, and doesn't want to wake up. As though there's parts that aren't getting blood anymore, because they don't exist, so my body doesn't know what to do…”

I lean down and kiss her on the forehead.

“Give it time,” I advise, stroking her hair idily, “I think this might be akin to the reverse of the reincarnation process. Your body is likely adapting back to how it was before you became a Devil.”

“Nyah~?” Kuroka opens one eye slightly, “So does that mean…?”

I chuckle, “No training…for now.”

“Nyaaayyy~!” She throws her arms up and cheers, jubilantly.

If,” I suddenly continued, halting her, “you say something for me.”

Kuroka tilts her head slightly, “Say…something?”

“Repeat after me,” I clear my throat, “Can you imagine an imaginary menagerie manager imagining managing an imaginary menagerie?”

Kuroka blinks at me.

Then smiles a small, wry smile.

“Can mew imyagine an imyaginyary mewnyageri mewnyager imyagining mewnyaging an imyaginyary mewnyagerie?”

I pump my fist as I let out a cackle, “Worth it!”

“Honestly, darling?” She rolls her eyes whimsically, “That's what you have me say? Though I'm surprised you didn't have me do this earlier.”

“Wouldn't have counted then.” I refute, bopping her lightly on the nose and drawing a light yelp from her, “Until recently, you were a Devil, not a cat.”

Kuroka held up a finger.

Then slowly dropped it, before crossing her arms underneath her chest, and pouting.

“Still would have counted, nyah!” She denies, before looking down and pouting harder, “You covered me up!?”

She exclaimed, scandalized.

Ah. Only Kuroka would react opposite to the anime norm, huh?

“Yes,” I confirm plainly, “what of it?”

“Does darling not like looking at my marshmallows~?” She asked hotly.

I stared down at her, resisting the urge to cringe at her calling them…marshmallows.

Even if that's a fairly accurate description of what they look and feel like.

“Kuroka. Look, if I had to look at your tits all night, I would have done something drastic.” I emphasize huskily.

“And I wouldn't have minded it, you know~?” She pushed up her chest with her arms, causing her, “Especially if you recorded it to show me later? And promised to give a…repeat performance~?”

My eyebrow twitches.

“Maybe I didn't use enough purifying power?” I muse aloud, to most certainly no one in particular, “After all, someone seems particularly sinful still…”

And kinky. And a whole host of other sexual things.

Seriously, Kuroka, damn.

So I add casually, “I will remember that for tonight.”

The speed at which Kuroka’s mouth dropped and formed an ‘O’ at me was glorious.

Only for it to be ruined as her chest…vibrates?

“Hmm?” Kuroka blinked, before reaching down into her cleavage and pulling out a phone.

Just like that.

The speed at which my mouth formed an ‘O’ would have broken the sound barrier at that moment.

Seriously. How!?

That thing wasn't in her robe! It wasn't between her breasts either when I pulled her clothes over her!

When it went off, it shook her chest, which means it's not a pocket dimension!

I didn't sense her use any magic, or need any chakra either!

What is this power!?

Kuroka smirked, looking at me out of the corner of her eye and winking, “Women's secret darling~!”

Bullshit!

Fortunately, my internal raving is cut off as Kuroka, eyeing her phone, smirks so damn wide even the Grinch would be concerned.

She quickly types something out in response, before shoving her phone back into her cleavage, it disappearing into the aether as it slides in between the cushions, so to speak.

Yes. I watched intensely.

No. I couldn't see anything beyond it simply vanishing.

One day…!

“Shirone is coming over~!” Kuroka suddenly announced, still smirking, “She has something she'd finally like to say to you, darling~!”

I deadpanned at her for that.

“We're doing this now, Kuroka? Really?” I huff, “You better not be pushing or forcing her.”

“Pushing? Yup~!” Kuroka easily admits, “But forcing? Nope! Shirone has been trying to work up the courage to say something to you about you know what proper for a while! And after your two’s date, well…” Kuroka chuckles slowly, “let's just say she's been getting more desperate, alright nyah~?”

“Besides!” She adds before I can say anything, reaching up and grasping at my collar as she does, “There's no better time than the present~!”

With that, she pulls down my robe, my yukata, with one short pull.

“And also, my body is still kind of out of it at the moment,” she continues, “so there is no better time than now, alright darling~?” She bats her eyelashes at me, prompting a deep sigh from me, even as I feel Koneko's presence appear within the compound, likely via Kuroka's teleportation circle.

Huh. If it's a Devil circle, she's going to have to get that changed now, isn't she?

“I guess I'll go get Koneko, then.” Right before moving to sit up, I give Kuroka one final look, “You're, helping~...” I intone huskily, looking her straight in the eyes.

My suddenness, the sheer lust behind my words, prompted Kuroka to flinch back, her face reddening.

“H-Helping~? Nyah? Darling?” I proceed to get up, “What do you mean by that? D-Darling? Hey! Darling!?

Ignoring her cries of concern as I leave the room, a pep to my step and a light hum reverberating from my throat.

I know what Kuroka has been pushing for, and I know what Koneko wants, generally.

I know she thinks she's bad at lewd stuff, so to get anywhere in any relationship at all, she likely thinks she's got to jump straight to fucking, or something like that.

Kuroka probably hasn't been helping that notion, although it's not like I know for sure what those two say to each other.

Still. It's Kuroka. There isn't a doubt in my mind she's pushing Koneko in that direction.

So, the simple question is, does Koneko truly want to start with that? Or no?

I'm all for either, whatever the white cat girl is comfortable with, of course.

If she does want to push for sexy fun times, genuinely, then isn't it only fair for her dear older sister to help her out?

After all, she's new to this, and Kuroka has been pushing for it, no doubt.

Well, we'll see soon, I suppose…

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

It's a quick jog down to the room Koneko suddenly appeared in.

Sliding open the doors to find Koneko standing there, awkwardly, in her Kuoh Academy uniform was certainly an odd treat for my eyes.




Despite her generally petite appearance, she does have some meat and curves on those bones, which the short academy skirt reveals rather amply if you look closely enough.

She twitches as soon as my form reveals itself, her fluffy white cat ears and tail perking as a small red blush blossoms across her face.

“S-Senpai?” Koneko stammered, eyes immediately drawn to the fact my yukata was down to my waist.

I'm not sure what those two's original plan was if they even had one, but I don't think it involved me showing up damn near as soon as Koneko arrived, half-naked.

I'm also sure it didn't involve me picking up the small white cat and sweeping her off her feet.

S-Senpai!!” She gave a panicked hiss at me, prompting me to simply smirk as I turned around and carried her out.

“What is my cute little kouhai doing here, hmm?” I mutter slowly down at her, “Isn't it a school day?”

Koneko blinks at me, before pointedly looking away, huffing.

“You know,” I continued gruffly, “as your senior, it wouldn't be right for me to just stand around and do nothing while my junior blatantly skips class.” I lean down to her ear, whispering now, “I can't believe I have to say this, but is my cute little kouhai a naughty kitty? Does she require punishment?

Koneko's eyes widen almost instantly, as she shivers in my grasp, “S-Senpai…” her breath hitches, “N-No…?”

“Someone doesn't sound all too sure herself, hmm?” I idly note, “Don't worry, I'll decide, so leave the tough decision-making to senpai, alright~?”

“A-Ahn? Nyah~!?” I give her cat ear a light kiss, prompting the girl to mew for the first time I've ever heard.

Her hands shoot up to cover her mouth as she sends me a scathing glare…that has absolutely zero heat to it.

I simply smirk right back at her, which causes her glare to shrivel up rather quickly, replaced by an awkward stare.

Oh, Koneko. She truly isn't the best at this, huh?

That's alright, just going to need to be very blunt with her then.

That's how our walk back to my room went. With me whispering lewd innuendos into her ear the whole time, and Koneko trying weakly to act mad before the facade crumbles and she flips the script.

Upon reaching my room, it's Kuroka's turn to perk up, scampering to the edge of the bed as she cries out.

“Shirroonnee! I'm sorry! He—”

Koneko, abruptly, cuts her off with a glare, and a flat and plain rebuke, “I hate you.

“Nyahh!? Shirone noooo!!” Kuroka continued her crying, rolling around back and forth on the bed.

Koneko did not look amused.

I snorted, finally letting Koneko down and onto her feet.

With a few steps, I sit on the edge of the bed, reaching over and whacking the black cat to stop her from falling off the bed in her over-dramatics.

She yelps, before looking at me in sheer betrayal.

My deadpan look, however, quickly assuages her from continuing with the act as she looks down in shame.

“Now then,” I clap my hands together, drawing the attention of both cat girls properly, “I'm not too sure what you two had planned for…this.” I waved my hand between myself and Koneko, prompting the white-haired girl to erupt in a full-on blush, “But since Kuroka was involved, it likely wasn't good.”

“H-Hey!” Kuroka objects behind me, only to be silenced as Koneko nods vehemently at my words.

I chuckle at the two sisters’ antics, before looking intently at Koneko, and patting my lap.

“First things first, sit. I have some things I'd like to ask you.” I command softly.

Koneko, after a moment, shuffles over and daintily takes a seat. Her ears droopy and her face scarlet, she doesn't look me in the eye.

Behind me, I feel Kuroka come up and place her hands on my shoulders, and her chest on my back, as she looks slightly over me to watch her sister.

“Now, Koneko.” I start, prompting her ears to twitch, “How much has Kuroka told you? Do you know about us?”

I would hope she would at least tell her that much.

Thankfully, Koneko did indeed nod slowly at that, “I am aware, s-senpai…” she murmured, then shivered, “very aware.”

I blink, slowly turning my head to look at Kuroka, who slowly moved down with a nervous smile to get out of my sight.

I turned back to Koneko with a sigh, “She was telling you stupid shit like how big I am or what have you, wasn't she?”

Koneko simply nodded up and down to that, face burning.

That sounds about right, fucking black cat.

Oh yeah, she's been halping has been my bet, but if this goes where I think it's going, then I'm going to make her help properly.

“If that's the case, then let's not beat around the bush alright?” I reach over, cupping her chin and making her look at me, her eyes going wide as they meet my own at last, “You like me, yeah? I think we share a bunch of common interests, you're really cute, and I like you as well. Do you want to do something more together?”

“A-Ah…l-like…?” Koneko fumbled over words, but at least she managed something at least.

Progress.

“Make it official, if you want. Make you one of mine, if you're okay with the idea of being in a harem, that is.” I add on.

“I…um…” she squeezed her eyes shut, “harems are normal in supernatural society, S-Senpai…I never thought I'd be in one, but…well…” she slowly opened up one of her eyes, “I wouldn't mind giving it a shot, I…g-guess?”

That is pretty much all I needed to hear.

In the next moment, I swoop down, claiming her thin lips with my own, while pulling her closer and holding her flush against myself.

Koneko seizes up, going completely still, until her brain finally catches up with current events and her body pretty much melts against me.

She wraps her arms around my torso, lightly holding on as she gives her best try at kissing back.

Honestly? It's not bad, it's cute. She's not nearly as passionate, or horny, as Kuroka is clearly, but she's got her charm.

Behind us, I can feel Kuroka shaking and holding herself back from squeeing and ruining the moment.

Props to her for having some sense at least.

After a few moments, we pull apart, albeit Koneko is still clinging to my torso.

She huffs lightly, once more not meeting my gaze, “You…i-idiot…senpai…”

“You know, you sound significantly less threatening saying that with a dopey little smile on your face.” I point out.

She smushes her face against my chest, “S-Shut it…

I chuckle at that, absentmindedly petting Koneko on the back of her head, and giving her ears little scratches.

She purrs against me, and I start feeling it, as she, in turn, starts grinding her hips against me.

Slowly and softly at first, although she doesn't go much harder, it does get more pronounced as time goes on.

Until eventually, she suddenly stops, going completely still for a moment before slowly looking up at me.

“Ah, s-senpai?” She asks gently, unsure, “Do we…um…do l-l-lewd things now?”

“Only if you want?” I respond softly, “Either way, I'm game.”

Usually, I'd say something like, ‘Isn't this a bit too fast?’

But I've long since accepted that sexual relations move incredibly fast here, in this world.

Or maybe Kuroka has severely gimped my perception of sex and the like.

Could be either, or both.

Probably both.

Fucking cat.

“A-Ahn~…” Koneko hums lightly, looking down, as she slowly starts grinding herself against me once more, “The original plan was to have big sister get you, um…ready…before I took over and…made the leap of faith, as it were.”

Casually, my arm snapped out, my face unchanging even as I grabbed Kuroka by her kimono before she could scamper off the bed and escape.

She gave a whimpering cry as I slowly pulled her to us, but otherwise, neither I nor Koneko acknowledged her presence.

“I am…prepared…to do that, still…if you want?” She slowly finishes.

“I've made it abundantly clear that I consider you sexually attractive, kitty?” I patted her on the back, “But I asked you first.”

“I…” Koneko muttered, “What was it that you said earlier?” She asked herself, before slowly looking back up at me, “I've been a…n-naughty kitty, skipping class and all…so…um, please punish me, s-senpai…?”

I'll take that as a yes, then.

My lips promptly come back down on hers like a hammer on the anvil, my free hand moving down and claiming an entire cheek of her ass under her skirt, filling my palm easily.

Koneko makes a noise between yelp, mewl, and a moan as I do, she pushes her entire body against me almost desperately.

If I didn't know any better, I say my white cat girl here is in her mating season now, but judging by the fact that Kuroka hasn't piped up to say that…

Speaking of, my black cat girl is trying weakly to wiggle out of my grasp, whimpering lightly at the show going on right next to her.

Ah. Right. She's supposed to be helping.

I pull my lips away from my desperate white cat girl and give her ass a little spank to grab her attention.

The way the flesh jiggles in the palm of my hand nearly makes Nori Junior burst out of my yukata.

I want to see it.

“Koneko. Kitten.” I try, looking straight into her eyes, causing her pupils to dilate slightly and an atomic blush to spread from ear to ear, “Why don't you get up, and get out of your school uniform, make yourself more comfortable…and make sure we don't ruin it, yeah?”

Koneko nods vehemently in agreement, staggering after how quickly she slid out of my lap.

Meanwhile, I turn to Kuroka.

Pet.” I address her, causing Kuroka to freeze, and to my slight surprise, a blush spreads across her face as I think she finally realizes what I meant earlier by ‘helping.’

“Get down on your knees, and start showing your little sister how it's done.”

A simple command the perverted black cat understands pretty much instantly.

As she crawled off the bed and to her place in front of me, I watched any hesitation she had fall as quickly as her kimono did as she pulled it off whilst moving.

Even before Koneko could get completely out of her school uniform, Kuroka was already in her birthday suit, kneeling between my legs, her tails swaying in anticipation behind her.

Speaking of my kitten.



I will say this now, I've always been more of an ass or thighs man.

That sounds ironic considering I'm in titty anime land, but it's the truth.

I can say, with one hundred percent certainty, that Koneko has a far better ass than her sister.

It's smaller, sure, but that's only because Koneko herself is a small girl.

But the way it curves down to her plump thighs, the way it jiggles and bounces slightly as she walks?

Yeah, those are some breeding hips right there.

Koneko sees me looking at her, and shies away from my desiring gaze, instead looking down at her bare older sister.

I see the moment, in her eyes, when she starts comparing herself to her.

Kitten,” I call out, snapping her out of it before it can truly begin, “come here.” I hold out my hand to her.

Slowly, Koneko does, and as soon as reaches my side I wrap my arm around her waist and pull her into it.

“Watch closely, alright~?” I mutter into her ear, prompting a shiver, “Your sister is going to be useful for once and show you how to do lewd stuff, alright~?”

“O-Okay- Nyannn~!?”

I accidentally cut her off into a mewling moan, as I can't help it when my hand roams down her waistline, grabbing and squeezing her ample rear, my fingers sliding into her curves, and slowly going under her underwear…

That's where my hand stays, for now.

Kuroka meanwhile wasn't idle, as she grasped at the yukata around my waist, “That's right, Shirone~! Let your big sister show you how it's done…then you can work your needy senpai all you want~! Or, rather…” Kuroka, ever the dramatist, chose that moment to pull the rest of my clothing down, revealing a Nori Junior who was standing at complete attention to the world.

“He’ll be working you, nyah~!” Kuroka finished with a sultry smirk.

Koneko audibly gulped next to me, “Y-You weren't lying…about…? How would that even…”

“Like…this~!” Kuroka started hotly before no words came anymore as she stuck out her tongue and started taking nice, long licks up and down my shaft.

I let out a low groan, deep in my throat, as Kuroka wraps her lips around the tip and swirls her tongue around it.

“You gotta get it nice and lubed up, make sure everything is silky smooth and wetted down~…” Kuroka continues her lecture, “Plus, he likes it quite a bit. See his face Shirone~?”

“Y~Yeah…I do— Nyan~!?” Koneko suddenly froze, and let out a shuddering moan, “S~Senpai~!?”

My hand moved again, my fingers finding her tight lower lips, and poking and prodding at them.

“Why don't you go down there, and try it out yourself, kitten~...” I suggest huskily.

“T-Try~...? Nyah~!!” My finger slowly slips inside of her, “O~Okay~!”

Koneko wastes no time, bending over to join her sister.

Even Kuroka was surprised though, as Koneko went straight to wrapping her lips around the head and swirling her cute little tongue around it.

In turn, I push my finger as far as it can go inside her tightening folds, groaning as she moans and shudders around the tip.

“Very good Shirone~!” Kuroka praises, before moaning hotly around the base of my member and continuing damn near worshiping it, “Like this, we'll make him cum in no time~!”

She's not even wrong about that.

Koneko began pushing her head down my rod, her small mouth unfortunately unable to go past my head, but holy fuck if it wasn't tight.

She swirled her tongue wildly around the tip, almost desperately.

I pounded my finger into her folds in response, her back arching as she tried to take it, her shaking her ass in what I think is a plea for more.

Kuroka meanwhile, gave the root of my shaft a thorough cleaning with her tongue.

“Come on darling~...” Kuroka breathed out between laps, “Shirone seems pretty desperate to taste your seed, doesn't she~? Won't you be a good senpai and give it to her~?”

Fucking. Cat.

I didn't want to shove exorbitant amounts of cum down her throat during her first time, but with her lips clamped around the tip like this I don't think there's any other choice.

Kuroka, of course, helps me not be able to hold back.

So, with a final shuddering groan on my end, I reach what I know is only going to be my first climax of the day.

I do not doubt that if Koneko wasn't acting like a cap on the tip right now, my seed would be spraying out like some kind of geyser.

Instead, said cap suddenly perked up, her eyes widening considerably as I shot everything straight into her mouth.

Both Kuroka and I were shocked when she managed to take it all without the slightest drop coming out, without even the slightest gag.

Once my release finally ceased, Koneko pulled herself off my rod with a resounding pop.

“Mmm~...salty…” She touched her lip with a finger, before eyeing me as her tail swayed back and forth rapidly.

She reached around, grabbed my wrist, and pulled my finger out of her, causing her body to shudder.

Slowly, she turned around, and bent over the bed, her eyes locked onto mine, filled with desperate need as she shook her hips back and forth.

“Come on, senpai~...punish me~...please~...” she reached back, pulling her underwear down completely, before grabbing her cheeks and spreading them.

Well. Who am I to say no to such a clear invitation?

I stand up, almost smacking Kuroka in the face with my still throbbing hard rod, but she manages to avoid it in time.

I come right up behind Koneko, grabbing her hips to hold her in place and wasting no time as I slide my shaft right between her cheeks.

Koneko gasps loudly, her hands coming down to grasp the bed sheets tightly, her face digging into the covers as she shoves her ass up and out more.

Kuroka comes up behind me, she doesn't even say anything, just immediately starts rubbing her body up against my back.

She licks my neck and runs her chest up and down my back, so even before the tip of my member reaches Koneko’s lips, the thing is already throbbing with need once more.

So, I lean back slightly, letting it slide down into the proper position, before slowly pushing myself forward.

My tip parts her excruciatingly tight and wet lips before being wrapped up and squeezed by her equally tight folds.

Fuck~...” I groan, loudly, Koneko mirrors me by letting out her groan down into the sheets beneath her, and her entire body shudders to accompany it.

I lean my body slightly over her, hands holding myself up placed on either side of her head.

“You feeling alright down there~?” I huff out through gritted teeth.

“G~Grand~...N~Nyan~...” she shudders out, “You c~can move, senpai~...please move~...punish me~...! Nnnggh~!!”

With a grunt, I push forward, hard.

“F~Fuck~! Y~Yes…like that~...!” She breathily mewls, her tongue sticking out of her mouth as she does so.

“Hmm~, naughty kitten with naughty language~...” I pull back, then pump forward once more, causing her to scream out with pleasure, “That's another thing to punish you for~...”

“Then f~fucking do it– Nyan~! Nyah~!! Nnngggghh~!!!”

I promptly shut her naughty mouth by ceasing holding back.

My once slow, steady, thrust are replaced by wild, damn near primal or animalistic pistoning.

Hey. She's a Rook, no?

Better take advantage of that Rook durability.

In that same vein, I deliver a nice hard slap straight to her rear.

“Nyaaahh~!?” Koneko cries out once more, her body shuddering, “A~Again~! Senpai~! Again~!

“Ho? Naughty kitten is also perverted?” I muse, “Another thing to punish you for!”

“I'm~ I'm not~!!” Her attempt at denial is cut off with a whimper as I spank her once more, “Nyann~!? I'm sworrryy~!! I'm sworry I'm a naughty perverted kitten senpai~!!”

“That's more like it~...” I gruffly growl out, prompting a shudder from both cat girls as I put my hand on Koneko’s head, pushing her head down further, “Senpai has got a gift for you, kitten~! You aren't allowed to say no to it~!”

Unfortunately, Koneko can't say much of anything beyond giving muffled moans of broken ecstasy, her eyes halfway rolled up into her head.

Fortunately, I don't need her to say anything.

“Here it comes~...!” I grunt out hoarsely, and on some level, I think Koneko knows what exactly it is.

As her body suddenly locks up as soon as I say those words, her folds tighten to extreme degrees as her core seems to pulse, her climax hitting her just before mine does.

Like a one-two punch, my release kicks in straight after, causing her to gasp loudly for breath as she all of a sudden finds her depths being filled to the brim.

S~S~Senpai~...!” She manages a single word as she lets out a shuddering breath, her mouth agape.

I take a deep breath, my cock twitching as I slowly pull out of her, leaving a small stream of white the same color as her hair to trickle out.

“Now, kitten~?” I reach down, giving her ass a light spank, “You better not be done yet, after all, your sister still needs help with her turn~...”

Kuroka, who was furiously fingering herself right behind me, suddenly perks up.

“Nyah~? Darling~?” She exclaims, worried.

She should be, to be fair.

“I~I'll…I'll try, senpai~...” Koneko mutters, “But no promises, okay~...?”

My hand shoots out, grabbing Kuroka's tails as she tries to scamper away, pulling her back with a yelp while a smile graces my face.

“That's alright, Koneko, take your time~...” I ease her.

After all, I'm going to be taking my time with this fucking cat as well~!

Something must have shown on my face, as Kuroka starts to panically exclaim, “Ah~!? Darling, can we talk about this~? Please~?”

I make a show of thinking about it.

“Hmm…No~!”

There wasn't much talking to be ahead after that, so it turns out.

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

Chapter 30 End


The smol white cat has been lewded.

Also, can I just say, writing threesomes are weird. Think I prefer 1 on 1 tbh.

Was going to put meeting some Team Slash/Dog peeps at the end, but the lewd kinda...over took the chapter, so I'm pushing that off for 31.

Think it would be more proper that way, anyhow.

Thanks to Lee over on QQ for the imgs, btw. They're really damn good aren't they?

View Post

A New Sun Chapter 29

Chapter 29

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

Oh, how the turn tables.

“WWWRRRYYYYYYY-”

“Quiet you.” I slap the leopard-looking Stray beneath me mid-screech.

But although it stops screeching for a moment, it continues to try and remove the absurdly large dumpster pinning its lower body to the ground.

“You know, you really don't have the right to be like this,” I huff, arms crossed, looking down at the gaudy gold-wearing leopard, ”you were the one who told me to get as close as I'd like, remember?”

And that I did, to drop a dumpster on the poor Dio cosplayer.

Or, rather, I body-slammed him to the ground then dropped the dumpster on him to keep him there.

Its hands, more paw than truly human, suddenly tense.

“WRRRRRRRY–”

I sucker punch it straight to the jaw, its impromptu battlecry cut short as its head suddenly snaps down and hits the dirt, making no more sound nor movement any longer.

Looking back at its hands, I see the barest hints of claws poking through.

Not sure if he was going to try and claw me, or my handy dandy test subject blanket here, but either way I couldn't have that!

Eh. Doesn't matter in the end as it's always best to start with the subjects being unconscious.

Especially the unique screaming ones.

Which was every single stray I've run into for the past few nights, but I digress.

It spares my ears the pain for at least a little bit, because no matter what, I'll be hearing a lot of screeching.

Turns out, being annihilated out of existence, no matter how fast you go, hurts.

None of the monsters have been shy about letting me know that much at least.

I let out a long, tired sigh as I kneeled next to my latest catch, staring at it with a dull expression.

The novelty of how every single stray seems to be unique in some way is beginning to run out, as is my patience.

See, these repeated experiments have yielded results, good and bad.

The good thing? I have consistently been able to get purified pieces, which is what I've taken to calling them.

The bad thing? I'm only getting them after annihilating the Reincarnated Devil's body and soul.

It isn't for a lack of trying to focus the power either, by the way. The power of purification, going off its Shinto Ritual counterpart, cleans out all it considers unclean.

I know it can be used to cure or attack specific things, or at least there's a precedent for it considering Inari was able to actively not affect Kuroka with her Holy Spirit Power.

But I lack that type of control at the moment.

So as it stands, my purification is very much a filthy racist that will try and purify everything in sight, kind of like a ‘pre-retaliatory’ immune system, it considers people like Yokai or Devils the same as a disease and will try to destroy it.

I can kind of work around it, by using very small amounts of the power, but that's only effective on smaller things like actual disease.

Also, all the…screaming, as I mentioned before is still a problem.

Getting away from that, now it's not a case of whether or not I can purify the Piece, it's can I even get to the piece to purify it without hurting Kuruka?

And the answer to that is…my chances aren't looking too great.

If the piece is where I think it is, the soul, jammed in there like a Sacred Gear, then I think I may be fucked.

This would be so much easier if Kuroka could just pull out her piece, but I've never seen anyone do that before.

Well, beyond Ajuka, but of course he could do it, and it would make sense for him to lock it up nice and tight.

Pretty sure the only reason the pieces aren't simply exploding, teleporting away, or whatever failsafe they have in place isn't working is because of what they're made of.

Attribute crystal. Don't think it was ever given a proper name.

When I purify everything, the crystal pieces take on the attribute of my purification, basically overriding all the Devil stuff within.

But if it's in the soul, then no wonder I destroy everything on the way, I have to go through everything to get to it.

Although, there is technically a way to get to the soul directly, skipping the body at the very least.

Senjutsu.

One of its basic functions enables a direct strike to a person's spirit, I could technically use that to skip the physical body.

Slight problem with that though.

It's an attack, and I'm nowhere near good enough with Senjutsu to think I could precisely attack something in someone else's soul.

With the way my power works? It's more likely to hit and outright purify her entire soul, especially since I’m gonna be contending with the power of two mutated bishops!

With that method, to actually purify her pieces, I’d have to hit her soul with a lot of purifying power.

Enough even she wouldn't be able to resist if things went south.

That's a no-go, I'm not a surgeon with a scalpel, I'm more like a bomber with a nuke here!

I blink incredulously at the comparison, squashing the urge to physically kick myself for that.

Although, thinking about it like that…

What if I had a connector of some kind, a tunnel, bridge, route whatever you call it, straight to target?

I'd prefer several, truth be told, but I’d be lucky to have even one.

Are there? Could I make any?

Senjutsu enables the attacking of others' souls, and one’s ki is their life force, coming from the soul.

We've done that before, connected directly no?

Ah. The Bedroom Method.

That…could be a good start.

Luckily I don’t need to be fucking for it to work, as amusing as it would be to tell Ajuka to his face that I fucked the Devil out of someone.

Assuming it even works.

What else, though? Come on, there's got to be more than that!

Ahah! Chakra! Fuck I can't believe I never considered it!

Or, to be more specific, ninshu, or its principles at the very least.

It was meant to connect people spiritually, right?

Don't know exactly how it works, I recall Chakra being all interconnected in some way though, even through a simple fist bump.

On that note, what about my other powers? My eyes…

I look intently down at the knockoff, not even a vampire, leopard Dio, my eyes shifting and spinning with four pupils, three tomoe, and the center dot.

These eyes of mine, one of the basic components of one of its abilities as the ‘Eye of Insight’ are the power to see chakra, or in my case, see energy, giving it color, enabling me to distinguish it by composition and source.

It's an aspect of my eyes that I only recall using once, way back when I was staying with Kuroka months ago.

I saw some type of power coming from her then, a purple aura around her.

But that was with my eyes then. Now that they're matured?

Looking down at the Dio wannabe now, with a bit of focus and intent, his cosplay is joined in my eyes by flowing glowing patterns of light.

Specifically, there are two that stand out to me, both coming from the same source, seemingly coming up out of his chest.

One is this dark golden color, that spills out of his body and clings tightly to his form in an aura.

The second is black and red, looking less thick and more airy compared to the dark gold's liquid-like composition. That energy disseminates across the leopard's whole body, not leaving it, but infusing it.

With a quick reminder about the basics of Demonic Power, I surmise that the golden aura is the stray Devil's hellish power.

Assuming the Demonic Power comes from the Evil Piece, then to get a better look I'd need to use the other methods I was thinking about before.

Except I can't necessarily test any of that with random strays, now can I?

Well, I suppose I could give random strays chakra, but the process is entirely instant.

Which means I'd have to hold these guys while it forms, then contend with them likely trying to use said powers against me, and if one of them escaped with such a power?

Yeah. Ain't risking it.

Even if I could have Kuroka there as a sexy lab assistant getting a kick out of it.

Still not worth it.

Also, that would be reaching the limit of how far I'm willing to go with the whole larping as a mad scientist thing I've been doing.

At that point, no matter how reprehensible these strays are, I'd start feeling bad going that far.

So instead, how about throwing all my powers plus the kitchen sink at the problem and seeing if that'll work?

Deities in this world can do some crazy shit, like tearing out Sacred Gears from their users without killing them levels of crazy.

I’m at least halfway a deity, why not try that, but for Evil Pieces instead?

“Fuck it.” I intone aloud, staring at the spot on fake Dio's chest where his Demonic Power streams out from, “Worth a shot I guess.”

Not like I'm going to get anything else from this guy doing the same old shit again anyways.

I put my hand over the spot, and pull on my Holy Spirit Power, not my purifying light power, sending it straight down and in like a fishing rod with a flex of will.

With my eyes, I watch as my bright, honey-gold energy crashes into the devilish golden-yellow power, there is a very brief resistance before my power bulldozes ahead.

The guy doesn't have enough Demonic Power, fortunately. His being unconscious also probably helps.

I'm mostly working blind now as my eyes can't see the soul directly, but hopefully, with Bouchujutsu and some bastardized Ninshu, I can get a feel for it instead.

Right now though, I'm pretty much willing to pull the piece out of his soul.

It's as simple as that.

The leopard's eyes suddenly snap open, and he almost instantly begins screeching madly.

WWWWRRYY—”

Only to be cut off, not by me, but as he promptly pops like a meat balloon.

The dumpster crashes to the ground, as what's underneath it practically liquefied on the spot.

Slowly reaching up, I wiped the thick coat of blood and gore from my face, beholding an immediate area that looked like someone bombed with several layers of extra thick red paint.

I blink ahead, patting the dumpster conciliatorily on its side.

I have no fucking clue if I did that myself, or if that was one of the hypothesized Evil Piece fail safes.

Either way.

I slowly take off the cheap, formerly white, lab coat I was wearing, and chuck it in the dumpster before righting it.

I was going to consider maybe trying to bless stuff, but if this is what happens when I try and throw around some divine power maybe I should hold off until I can talk to Uzume.

Or Inari. Preferably Inari.

I don't think Kami bullshit is supposed to do this, but just in case, I'm going to not.

Ended up wasting a good few thousand yen on that coat too…

Oh, well. I’m not much of a scientist after all, only mad.

Especially since I'm going to have to clean this all up!

With a sigh, my hands ignite with flames as I get to work, evaporating and scorching everything down to the ground, regrowing any foliage I need to with my light.

If there's one thing I'm thankful for, it's that Kuroka has been away this whole time doing…whatever Vali Team does now that canon is destroyed.

Maybe Vali is looking for the next Red Dragon Emperor?

They'd be an actual baby right about now, but still, I could see him doing it. If nothing else then to train his future rival himself.

Kuroka should be back soon though, so it's time to get this show on the road.

Fuck I hope I don't mess this up…

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

I had the bedroom all well and prepared by the time she got back.

Nice little candles and sweet-smelling incense, the windows open just enough to let the cool night air circulate on through.

I wanted to get this over with as soon as possible at this point, or at least try it, there was no point in holding off on it after all.

The problem, the first one and hopefully only, was Kuroka herself.

“Kuroka.” I deadpan down at the cat sitting and facing me in my lap, “This isn't helping nearly as much as you think it is.”

“Nyah~?” She purrs back, right into my neck in fact, to which she promptly gives another little lick, “I beg to differ, darling~! I think you're sufficiently distracted from your worries, nyah~?”

I huff petting her on the head, “In a sense, now I need to focus on not ravaging you.”

Kuroka looks up at me, tilting her head slightly in confusion, “But…you said we were doing Bouchujutsu again?”

“The non-sex version.” I boop her on the head.

Kuroka pouted, “But that’s the fun version!”

“This isn't meant to be fun you!” I snap back, “I wasn't kidding when I said this could really hurt you if I fuck it up! I could kill you!”

“You won't though?” She licks my neck again, the suddenness causing me to give an unprepared shiver, “Darling would never hurt me on purpose, nyah~!”

On purpose.” I stress, “It still could happen.”

She shakes her head, “Not if you don't want it too, nyah!”

I simply sigh at that, “Love the faith, but I'm still nervous. Not that easy to simply shake it off.”

“Hmm~?” Kuroka hums, before slowly starting to smirk and dropping her kimono to her waist, leaving her chest bare before me.

“...Kuroka.” I grumbled, “Really?”

“Hey! Bouchujutsu works better the more skin-on-skin contact there is! Even without the fun stuff!” She huffs, crossing her arms.

Okay, that's fair–

“Also, I thought you could use my titties as stress balls, nyah~!” She cackles, grabbing her breasts with either hand and jiggling them around.

I stare at her.

I stare at her, really, bloody hard.

Please take this seriously.” I sigh out, slumping forward and laying my head on her shoulder.

Kuroka leaned against me with a purr, I could feel her smile on me as her hand came up behind my head and stroked my hair.

“I am, nyah~!” She then promptly took one of my hands and placed it smack on one of her admittedly very squishy and soft melons. “Just in my way~! Annyah~!”

She half moans, half mewls, as idly squeeze and grope her like some kind of plush marshmallow.

“Which someone seems to like, hmm~??” She purrs straight into my ear.

Fuck.

This is fairly relaxing, actually.

I mutter out a garbled response.

“Nyaaah~? What was that~?” Her tail swishes happily behind her, “I couldn't hear you, darling~!”

“...you do have a very nice chest, you.” I mumble out.

“I know, nyah~!” I could feel the smug, I didn't even need to look at her for it.

“Going to tell you right now though,” I add on quickly, “I'm not groping you the entire time during the process.”

I could also feel the exact moment it switched right to pouting.

“Wait, ‘entire time’?” She parroted, “So some of the time then, at least?”

“...Maybe.” I give.

“I'll take it, nyah~!” She cackles in final victory.

I merely let out a simple pleasant sigh.

Without even realizing it, I suddenly feel a lot better.

Damn cat. Using my trick of being an idiot and adding your horniness to it.

I'll remember this when you're begging for kittens after this works, and I'll tell you no creampies for a while.

Unless I figure out how to control my virility.

Should be a basic divine ability, truth be told.

But enough of that for now.

I suddenly sit up straight, Kuroka yelping as I wrap my arms around her waist and pull her flush against myself.

I set my forehead against hers, staring into her eyes with a small smile.

“Ready to do this?”

Kuroka smirks back at me.

“Whenever you are, darling~!”

Nodding, I take a deep breath, closing my eyes for a moment, only to open them back up, Sharingan activated and swirling.

Similarly to the leopard stray from before, Kuroka also possesses two energy sources coming from her chest.

One black and purple that spreads out and infuses her body, and another dark purple power that forms a much thicker aura around her body, compared to the strays anyway.

However, entirely unlike the stray is a third power, a bright, almost liquid-looking light purple flame set in the middle of her stomach.

If I focus hard enough, I can even see the misty translucent outline of her chakra network.

“See something you like, nyah~?” Kuroka muses with a smile.

I snort and roll my eyes, spanking her as I do, pulling a yelp from between those lips of hers.

Before she can add anything more to that, I raise my hand in front of her, palm facing her.

“Paw.” I ask nicely, like an owner asking their pet.

Kuroka grumbles and blushes, not giving me a proper response as she raises her hand and presses it back against mine.

“Now…you know how when you make that energy in your gut, you combine and knead together from two separate aspects? One physical, and the other spiritual.” Kuroka nods, I continue, “Focus on the spiritual aspect. I think you described it once like ki before, right?”

“Mhmm~! Similar, but not quite.” Kuroka muses, “Ki, or even Youki, is much more of a personal spirituality type of deal, while this is more…worldly, I nyah?”

Ah, the return of the philosophical kitty.

“Good, that means what I'm about to say next isn't too crazy,” I start with a small smile, “we need to meld those separate spiritual aspects, and connect, essentially like a bridge.”

“Like Bouchujutsu~?” Kuroka immediately piped up.

I chuckled, even as I turned her down and prompted another pout from her, “No. But, the process may be similar at its core, I think?”

Kuroka wiggled her eyebrows at me as I sighed.

“Just…that spiritual aspect, send it out like you would Ki for Bouchujutsu, and I'll latch onto it and piggyback off it. Like a phone call.” I add, quickly, before Kuroka can somehow turn any of that sexual.

She huffs but closes her eyes to do as I say regardless.

The only reason I can tell is because I can see what she's doing.

Thinking about it more, the spiritual or mental aspect usage here, isn't it a lot like Yin Release? A proto-version of it, anyhow, that doesn't use chakra.

Instead, what seems to emit from her head are waves, rippling hazy waves, nearly invisible even with my fully mature eyes.

Closing my eyes myself, I do the same, focusing on expelling that pure mental or spiritual component that makes up chakra, imagine molding it together and mixing with the outside–

Our eyes snap open.

Ninshu. What was its base idea, again?

Ah. The ability to understand one another without even the need for communication.

“It's like senjutsu, but…deeper.” Kuroka mused breathily, finishing a similar thought to my own.

Despite myself, I blush, prompting her to giggle.

It's weird. It is so fucking weird.

Words can't be used to precisely describe what I'm feeling, they're just that, feelings, yet they tell a whole story.

I know the girl sitting before me trusts me implicitly. There isn't a shred of doubt, anywhere in her. She wholly believes that once I set out to do something, I'll do it.

And it's not only that either! Of course, I feel lust, but not just that, love…she wants a family, one she never got the chance to have, and there's so, so much more!

The connection slips as my focus wavers, I quickly reestablish it by slamming back down on it with a flex of mental will.

She chuckles, leaning forward to press a dainty kiss against my lips, “I know it's a lot, don't worry, just focus on one thing at a time, nyah~...”

I give a shuddering breath, “Y-Yeah, one thing at a time…”

One thing at a time.

We can explore this more later.

What's important for now, is that I should be able to look deeper with this.

“Bouchujutsu proper next.” I state.

“Mhmm~...” Kuroka happily hums in affirmation.

We've done this one before, so slipping into the state is almost as easy as breathing.

Within a breath, gold and purple mist pop out around our combined form, mixing.

With my eyes, I can physically see as her Ki erupts from that point on her chest where her other powers come from.

As it coats her physical form, that spot on her chest seems to glow faintly, translucently.

My Ki mixes with her, pulsing back to the spot, wherein it shimmers and pulses back out.

For the tiniest of moments, the splitist of seconds, I beheld something beautiful.

Physically, I barely hear her, as Kuroka mutters, “Go on ahead, nyah~? What are you waiting for?”

I take a deep shuddering breath, and nod, closing my eyes.

My mind's eye rockets wide open, clearer than it's ever seen before, at least when it comes to Kuroka specifically.

Unlike the last time I did this, I follow my glow as it enters her.

Also vastly unlike the last time I did this, I don't find a dark empty void of some sort.




How do you describe the weight of a soul?

Because it isn't enough to describe merely the color, although it is beautiful, with every single shade of purple I ever knew existed wrapped around a mote of precious light.

Around that, specs of brilliant gold dance, my power, my very life force mingling with her own.

It's all beating. The colors, the mote inside. It all throbs and flows, it's alive, and it proves that she's alive.

I don't want to even touch it, but I know I have to.

Something this beautiful…if the Pieces are here, then they should stick out like a sore thumb.

I can't see it here, her Demonic Power, I’m too close now, but feel it?

Everything here feels so warm, so real.

Except.

My sight drifts closer, gold shuddering around me as I near the center mote.

If I was physically present, I would have laughed.

There, right behind the mote, hiding, the only thing I'd describe as cold, as artificial.

Two Evil Pieces, side by side, Mutation Bishops.

Her pieces must have evolved with her time spent with me because I don't recall her taking mutated pieces originally.

Oh well. It matters little in the end.

I don't dare touch the pieces directly, or as directly as I can like this anyway, just in case.

Instead, I bring forth my purifying power, with the next pulse of my golden ki, swirling silver sparkles join the cacophony of color.

My will slams down upon my power like a steel trap, as I laser focus on the two Evil Pieces.

There is nothing unclean here, besides those.

A tidal wave of silver followed shortly, as it slammed into the pieces.

A bright red flash fills my mind's eye, and with a jolt, I'm suddenly and violently thrust back into my physical sense.

Belatedly, I blink spots out my physical eyes, groaning as it feels as though my mind's eye got punched in the, well, eye.

It is then that I vaguely realize that our jury-rigged Ninshu is no longer active, nor is our Buchojutsu.

Looking down, I find Kuroka leaning against me, dead to the world, groaning lowly as a trickle of drool drips from the corner of her mouth.

“Oh…fuck.

Pulling her and laying her down gently on the bed, I quickly check her pulse.

Heartbeat. Good.

My eyes spin back up, as I check over her metaphysical.

I watch with bated breath as that dark and purple power of hers, her Youki perhaps, slows down to a trickle of production.

But the more important bit, her Demonic Power?

It's being sucked back in.

I don't know if that's a good thing or not.

Gently running my fingers through her hair, I sit there, watching vigil over her.

Her body didn't explode, neither did her soul it seems, since she's still making Youki, and again, she didn't explode.

The night is still young, but I'm pretty certain she'll be alright.

I let out a deep relieved breath that I've been holding for so, so long.

Now, I wait.

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

Meanwhile, elsewhere in a land so far beneath the Heavenly High Plane and Central Land of Reeds, a dark mirror of Japan sits.

With all the same buildings, all the same streets, yet haunted by ghostly gray specters of the few once living who cross the Sanzu on the side of the Shinto into this place.

Neither a Heaven nor a Hell, this is the Land of Yomi.

Normally, this land is rather calm.

Even after Susanno took over, with all his proclivities, Yomi's scant changed.

This land has that effect, it's always been like this: dark, dreary, tainted, unclean.

Things continue as they always have, just with a few shades less color, and a ceiling made of roots and rock fit in the sky.

So, when Izanami woke up today, looked outside, and saw several Shinigami caught and flung across Yomi on a realm-spanning tornado, she knew things were going to be, unfortunately, very different today.

See, for all Yomi doesn't change, that applies significantly more toward her son.

Truly, despite him never once acting like a king of this realm, it does fit him best…no matter how boring he claims it to be.

With a yawn, Izanami rose from her slumber, throwing her long luscious black hair out behind her and out of the way.

She nearly walked out in her birthday suit, but deciding to spare her son the embarrassment, threw on a nice dark blue and red kimono haphazardly.

Ah, and the finishing touches, her parasol and a lamp, traditional make, of course, can't go wrong with the classics.

One to protect herself from all the storm stuff her son tends to cause, the other so she doesn't have to strain herself to see.




Satisfied, and deciding to hurry it up before another Shinigami flies past her window crying, she heads on out to find her son.

Luckily, it doesn't take much, even over the sounds of the storm outside she can hear him roaring in…joy?

Well, that's new.

It's a small walk from her chambers to the throne room, this place being the only dark mirror of the Palace in the High Heavenly Plane, she knows it like the back of her hand, even if it wasn't a short strut.

Throwing up the doors to said hall, she finds her son standing before his stone and black iron throne, clutching a scroll in one fist tightly as his gaze is raised to the sky, as she said, roaring.

WOOOOOOOOO!!! YEAAAHHH BABY! THIS IS WHAT IT'S ALL ABOUT!!

Izanami stood there, deadpan staring at her, as lightning filled and struck the hall.

Tempestuous winds and rain bellow, and with a casual raise of her parasol, all splash harmlessly against it.

Upon putting it down, her son finally turns and seems to recognize she's even present.

So what does he do?

WOOOOOOUUU!!! MOTHER!

She simply sighed at him.

That seemed to snap him out of his rhapsody, at least temporarily, as he blinked at her, the blaze in his eyes slowly going out as he rubbed the back of his head.

“Ah,” he clears his throat, “Mother…did I…?”

“Yes.” She answers plainly. “Yes, you did. And I also believe you chucked half of the Shinigami to Hokkaido.” She drawled out dully.

Susanoo, at the very least, winced as he looked outside and saw what she meant.

“Well, I, uh…apologize. But!” He holds up the scroll clenched in his fist, “I have very good reason for my reaction!”

“I'm sure you do…” Izanami mused, walking to him.

Susanoo huffed, “No no! I do! See, read it yourself!” He holds the scroll out to her with a smug smirk.

Taking it, she opens it, rolling it out.

It's not too long, maybe a forearm’s length of characters, from…King Yama?

“Ho? A soul transfer?” She muses with a raised eyebrow, “Why did you…?”

Wait.

Why does the surname ‘Ikuse’ sound familiar?

“Because now,” his hands slip over her shoulders, holding her gently, as she looks at him he smiles…maliciously, “I finally have what I need to take and destroy the last remnant of what's left of that bastard.”

At his snarl, Izanami frowned, “Susa, darling, if this is about Kagustuchi, then I–”

Of course it's about Kagustuchi!” He barked, “For the longest time, I couldn't get to that damn sword, that last remnant of him. But now? Now I can!”

She put both of her hands on his face, “And how many times must I tell you? You don't need to go so far…especially now, especially after you already made sure he stays dead.”

Susanoo cringed slightly at that, at the pain on his mother's face, at the pain he caused.

“I especially need to after that.” He says solemnly, decidedly, “The job won't be finished otherwise, Mother.”

Izanami sighs deeply, “And when everyone, your sister, the Earthly Kami, the Dog God, and his team, fights you for this?”

It will all be worth it.” Her son states resolutely, “Especially if little Ama will get her flat ass down to see you.” He grumbled a little as he added.

Izanami merely chuckled, patting Susanoo on the chest chidingly, “Be nice now, Susa, this is why she doesn't visit.”

Continuing his grumbling, Susanoo lets go of her and walks to his throne.

Ah, that son of hers. So stubborn. So…

Well. Let's just say his doing things like this is why he got thrown out of Heaven in the first place.

But kidnapping a Longinus Sacred Gear user's dead grandma to use them as leverage to make the user mutilate themselves for a divine weapon is a new one.

Now, where is that poor old woman being kept?

She figures she may keep the mortal company, at least for a little while.

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

Chapter 29 End


Woooo baby! That's what I've been waiting for! That's what it's all about! WUOOOOO!!!

Finally got it done. I'm not 100% recovered, but more then enough to start writing again.

So, back to your regularly scheduled updates.

I really enjoyed writing that last bit, with Susano and Izanami, especially Izanami. 

No, it has nothing to do with the fact she's hot, trust.

Next up, threesome, and Nori meets a few of the Slash/Dog team...including seeing Suzaku again.

View Post

A New Sun Chapter 28

Chapter 28

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

“Ah~! Quite the sight, isn't it my cute little kouhai?” Noriaki mused behind her, his voice sweet and tender, “Although it would be much better at night, I bet.”

Probably.” Koneko ground out through gritted teeth, “Now can you put me down, senpai.

He makes at least a show of considering it, humming for a second before huffing out a, “Nope~!”

And then proceeding to cuddle her against his chest, like some God damn teddy bear.

Koneko grits her teeth, the fists clenching so hard her knuckles turned somehow even paler than her complexion already was.

It contrasted hideously, she imagined, with the burning red drowning out her face as people around them awed and cooed at them for their ‘couple antics’.

The mundane humans are the only reason her dear, beloved, senpai hasn't lost his fucking jaw yet.

Now, being held and pampered like a bloody stuffed animal, literally being held aloft on the Kyoto Tower Observation Deck so she could see better, Koneko tried to figure out where everything went wrong.

Technically speaking, it all started back when her stupid bastard of a senpai summoned her.

Being very technical, it all began when her equally stupid fat-chested sister ran into him, told her about their family, and he decided to try and fix their shit.

In the end, everything was her sister's fault, huh?

Putting that line of thought to rest, and getting more specific, shit went wrong lately around the time she saw Noriaki on his phone, looking up date locations in Kyoto while they ate yakitori.

She should have known that her senpai putting effort into something spelled trouble.

And it did. The moment they left, he was like…this.

All sweet, lovey-dovey, holding her hand, calling her cute, and all sorts of other nicknames in public.

He acts like he's trying to be quiet about it, but he's barely loud enough that everyone can hear me.

She doesn't think she's stopped blushing at all since they left.

Never once before has she thought that being able to tell whether someone is lying or not by reading their ki would change the way certain things feel when said, but now she knows better.

Him calling her cute, now that she knows with 100% certainty that he means it, makes her feel…things.

If he tries pushing her any further, she'll grab his nips and twist.

Something she's been saving for her sister in case she gets too many ideas.

In the end, though, she can say somewhat surprisingly that all of this? This torture is much better than the hell that's going on back home.

That thought almost made her frown, but then he put his chin on top of her head.

Fucking, tall, back-hugging, bastard!

He's making it very hard to brood over her black-haired perverted bimbo of a Queen and her daddy issues making her fairly uppity at the moment.

Oh, wait, did she say a moment? No no, she means the past few weeks.

Truly, Koneko had already set her sights on dragging him out eventually for dumping that literal problem Angel on their doorstep.

The 10-winged Fallen, former cadre Baraqiel, wasn't tight-lipped about what happened, and how he ended up there.

She would begrudgingly admit that it took everything in her power not to die laughing at some of the things her senpai said to the Fallen.

She did choke on a cookie when the bimbo, with such a sickeningly sweet and fake smile on her face that it looked like it hurt to wear, ‘confirmed’ pretty much everything and told him to promptly fuck off.

Despite her and Noriaki never even talking to each other once, she thinks.

Ah. Household drama.

Since then, President Bimbo has been stubbornly training to get the two to make up, and she hasn't been backing down at all shockingly enough.

Even told off that annoying chicken for trying to muck it all up.

So, now Queen Bimbo's daddy works at Kuoh, and kind of works with the remaining Fallen in the Underworld working with the Devils, while President Bimbo slowly pushes the two to interact.

To say the resulting tension throughout the school is so thick you could cut it with a knife would be wrong.

She could eat the tension as a main course and still not leave a dent in it, that's how bad it is.

Senpai hasn't even been to school, not even his clone things have shown up for a good long while now.

She can't wait to see his reaction once he finally shows up again.

But compared to all that?

Well.

Maybe she finds herself snuggling back up against her senpai, just a little bit.

Thankful that, at the very least, he can't get a clear view of her face as she smiles slightly

“Hmm, let's see, it's near midday, so where to next?” He mumbles above her, “The Kyotomangekyo Museum, the Aquarium? Plenty of gardens too.”

After a moment, Koneko replied softly, “...the Aquarium sounds nice.”

“Should I expect we'll be taking a trip to Nishiki afterward?” He muses aloud, “I hear they have octopus there!”

He grunted faintly as she elbowed his ribs.

Before promptly adding a little, “Yes.”

To which he simply chuckled down at her, “Right.”

This idiot! Acting like this in front of other people to stop her from responding properly.

She'll punch him later, when they're alone, for sure.

But, for now?

It's not bad being treated like a princess, she supposes, even if he is trying to embarrass her.

As long as she's not being treated like that one perverted fox princess her sister told her about.

Anything except for that.

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

The rest of the day flew by.

She'd never out loud add unfortunately to the end of thought, but here she is, definitely thinking it at least.

Mostly.

Kind of.

“Like the kimono we ended up picking out for you?” The entirely too smug, entirely too handsome in that fucking kimono of his, bastard of a senpai asked lightly.

Sadly, she did.



A mostly white kimono, with a blue petal or leaf-like pattern spread across it, draped down across her petite form.

She could do without the giant red sash around the stomach, but that's par for the course with these outfits.

Staring straight ahead as they walk, she ignores the blush spreading across her face as she thinks back for a moment to the process of getting the damn kimono, all the ones she had to try on.

His, ‘suggestions.’

Oh, would you look at that, they're in an alleyway, holding hands, with no one around.

So she increased the grip on his hand.

She knows she won't get any delicious popping from it, but she'll settle for the wince.

Finally answering him, she goes with a simple, “Eat shit and die.”

He cackles at that, before trying to raise his denial, “Oh come on, the other options weren't so bad you!”

“One of them you suggested was pink.” She huffed out, a scowl on her face at the thought of wearing that color again, “And the others weren't even kimono, they were yukata.” She rebukes soundly.

“Oi. You look cute in pink.” He huffed, before continuing, she could feel him raise an eyebrow at her, “And so? Yukata are comfortable, I'd know.”

Her glare intensified, and her blush positively burned red, “They barely went halfway down my thighs.”

After a few moments of what she hoped was careful contemplation, he merely says, “I see that as an absolute win.”

It was not, in fact, careful contemplation.

She whirled her head in his direction, glaring bloody murder at him.

Only for her heat to be walled by his cool gaze and small smirk, “What? You've got nice thighs and a very good a–”

“Complete that sentence and I will rip your balls off…!” She interrupted, more panicked than embarrassed at this point.

His smirk grew, as he leaned down slightly, his eyes boring into her own, “You have, a really fucking great ass.”

He stated, mirth clear in his eyes as he watched her face morph into abject horror.

Senjutsu, of course, told her it was true.

Koneko.exe shut down.

For a split second, until she slammed her forehead into his jaw as hard as she could.

Pulling back, the bastard didn't even have the decency to look phased.

“F-Fuck you, perverted idiot senpai…” she stammered and grumbled, averting her eyes from his gaze, “who just…says something like that to someone…”

He chuckled a little, before musing, “Well, I figured you could use the compliment. I know you compare yourself to the other girls in certain aspects, and that you sell yourself short because of it.”

“I do not.” She denied it with a huff.

Then she blinked.

“Senpai. Did you just make a joke about my height?”

“You call any big-chested girl a bimbo in your head, don't you?” He asks, completely ignoring her, “Or cow, maybe. Something along those lines.”

She furrows her brow.

Cow is a new one, why didn't she ever think of that before?

Hey! Wait a minute!

“Heh. Called it.”

Then she turns and rams her fist straight into his liver.

Prompting the longest drawn-out groan she'd ever heard from him, but still not one in pain, merely discomfort.

Tch. One of these days, one of these days…

“Damm kitty…” he grunted, as she pulled her fist back, “Look, the point I'm trying to make is, you are attractive in your own way as well, and not to let the looks of others bring you down.” He squeezes her hand back gently, “I saw the way you looked at yourself in the mirror back there when trying stuff on. Like you were disappointed in yourself?

“Don't be. You are attractive, physically and sexually, whether you believe it or not.”

Well, he certainly believes it.

“How did you even…” she mumbles out weakly, “did you peep, pervert?”

Is it strange she wouldn't even mind if it was him?

He snorts at that, “Like you? No.” She flinched at that and didn't dare turn to see him otherwise she might very well be the one to explode, “You've got a lot of it, and it's all packed in two nice peach shapes. The fabric of the kimono, meanwhile, is pretty soft and thin, so when you bend over.”

He clicks his tongue to emulate a popping sound, “Bam! Snapshot.”

Oh.

Looking down, she pursed her lips together.

“C-Can…we not talk about this anymore, please?” She damn near pleads, “I'm not good with…l-lewd stuff.”

As painful as that is to admit, stuttering embarrassedly all the while.

Turns out, actively trying to be the opposite of her sister led to her not being very…versed, that way.

She couldn't flirt to save her life, and hell, she couldn't even tell the difference between flirting and coming on to someone.

They're more or less the same to her.

Mission accomplished, she guessed.

Still never going to take her sister's offer to teach her how to be lewd.

On that, she stubbornly refuses at least.

“Hmm, you know?” He hums in contemplation, “Only one real way to learn, ya know~...?” He trailed off suggestively.

See! Like that! What the hell does that mean exactly!?

Halting her racing thoughts, he sighs, reaches over, and pats her on the head, “But alright, if it makes you that uncomfortable, I'll stop, okay?”

She lets out a small sigh of relief, already feeling the burning across her face retracting, “Thank you, senpai.”

“No problem, my cute little kouhai.” He starts full-on petting her head.

She resists the urge to purr and lean into him, though it's mighty tempting.

She must stay strong, he will be punished somehow by the end of this night!

“So,” he continued, filling the silence, “figure out which play you thought looked the best?”

Oh shit, that.

Currently, they're walking down the Ponto-chō, a district of Kyoto that is pretty much a long narrow alleyway.

It would be exclusively that if it also wasn't host to traditional Japanese architecture and entertainment.

Tea houses, geisha houses, bars, restaurants, brothels, the works.

But what they were here for, the reason why he even rented a kimono for her, was for the theater here, the traditional plays and dances.

It's a tad early into the evening, so there aren't many options available, the alleyway lights up beautifully in the dead of night supposedly.

A shame, she would have loved to stay out longer, but during the nighttime proper she's got Devil work to do.

Fucking yakitori bitch and her schedules.

She wishes her bimbo of a President would put her foot down there too, but instead, she found a workaround for herself and proceeded to fuck off with it.

Although, maybe she could similarly use him?

Thoughts for later, she needs to make a choice now.

“What were the options again, senpai?”

“Hmm, let me pull out the pamphlet again and che-” As he moves to grab the pamphlet in the inside pocket of his kimono, he suddenly stops, jerking her to a sudden stop as well.

Son of a bitch.” He hissed out.

She tilted her head, befuddled, “Senpai, wha–” she froze as she suddenly felt it.

The cold, dark dread of Demonic Power, the type of Demonic Power backed by malicious and violent intent.

Heavy footsteps echoed down the alley, coming from behind them.

“Thayure yore! Ahv been lookin' fahwar yawl…”

Wait.

Huh?

Senpai sighed, a loud, pained, anguished thing, as he let go of her hand and turned around.

She did as well, shortly thereafter, and beheld a monster walking towards them.

A monster of fashion that is.

Koneko couldn't help herself.

She deadpanned, before asking, “Who put the fat gargoyle with a mullet in a biker jacket and said it was a good idea?”

The gargoyle stopped and looked at her extremely offended.

Noriaki gaped at her for a second, before a wide, proud smile slowly etched itself across his face.

It took her everything she had to not preen at his look.

“Thuh hell yawl thank yawl thank yore tawkin' bout yawl dawgone midget!” It started ranting, at her, she thinks? “Yawl wouldn't know fashion hifit fucked yawl in thuh ass!”

Yeah, she has no damn clue what this guy is saying.

Well, the only thing she got was ‘midget’ out of that.

Because of course, this trash went that way, the unoriginal hack.

She turns her head, looking at Noriaki with a raised eyebrow.

To which he dreadfully sighed, again, before beginning to explain.

“This guy is a Stray Devil, clearly…but judging by his accent, he was an Oni.”

“Wuz? Wuz!?” The creature cried out in anger at his explanation, “Ah still am! Ahm better evun! Now ahm....more.” He shivered as he almost moaned the last word out.

Both of them somehow managed to hold back gagging on the spot.

“Ugh,” Noriaki grimaced, “okay. That's disgusting.”

“Iz not!” It tried to interject.

Is.” Noriaki shot out a quick denial, “Anyhow, the fuck did you do ugly?”

“Not ugly! Smart!” The stray rebuked viscously, ”Say, cheater, few could git help frum other Yokai an thuh Clans, then Ah thought Ah could git help as wayul!

“So, Ah went tuh thuh Devils, tricked wun with mah big brain tuh reincarnate muh, then ran awf! Ah became...better.” It did the thing, again, his wings popping out behind his back and shaking as they do.

This time, Koneko did gag, and her senpai patted her on the back as she did.

The monster wasn't bothered though, and continued unabated, “Enough tuh crush yawl, avenge Lord Ibaraki, then, Ahl go take ovur thuh Oni mahsef! An lead us tuh uh new golden age!” It finished with a jubilant cry.

“Okay, okay.” Noriaki nodded along, “I didn't get half of that.”

She holds up a finger, “I didn't get any of that.”

“Bha! Don't matter few git it or not!” It stomped the ground, cracking and splintering it as its massive flabby foot sunk into the concrete, “It'll end thuh same anyways!”

“Right, right.” Noriaki nodded, mockingly, “So, uh, quick question…but was it only you who did this, or…?”

It laughs boisterously at the suggestion, “Yawl thank no others is smart enough tuh thank uh thus? Naw, monly ROKUBI!” It roars its name like a beast, creating actual shockwaves.

It ruffles their kimonos a little bit.

“Okay.” She and Senpai say in unison, in the most deadpan drawl they can manage, as they stand there unaffected.

“Now, who should Ah start with?” He muses aloud, acting like the two of them aren't just staring at it like the trash it is.

This guy has no sense or survival instinct left, does he?

Eventually, its eyes settle on her, “Ah! Bout thuh tiny liddel pedo bait? Yeah, sshaylooks aansmayuls llahkuh good snack!”

Wait. Hold on.

Back up a second.

What did this guy say?

What did this dead fucking meat just say about her!?

Her senpai huffed, “Give me a second, I think I got some extra soybeans around here somewhere.” He started searching his pockets, only to stop when she took a step forward.

A very heavy step forward.

One that cracked the ground, lacing the alley down with small spider web fractures.

Noriaki, promptly, took a step back.

“Alright, have at it then. Just don't get blood on the rental, alright?”

No promises.” She huffed out.

“Oh, well…shit.” He stated despondently.

The Oni turned stray looked upon her with shock, “Wow...Ah didn't know yawl wuz thet heavy! Yawl must bay rilly fat under thet small frame!”

Her eyebrow twitched.

Heavy? Fat?

In the next moment, her tails and ears sparked into existence as her ki violently burst from her body.

“Ah! Hare it com–” Its battle shout was cut off as its lower jaw, suddenly met and fused with the upper part of its jaw.

A sickening pop cracked the air, as one moment, the stray was fine, then in the next her fist came from below, smashing into the bottom of its jaw.

Its neck stretched and snapped, becoming several inches longer before bending and hitting itself in the back.

Slowly, the monster's body fell back, crushing its head under its weight with a wet crunch.

She, meanwhile, simply stared up at her fist in disbelief.

At the last second, she pulled back her ki to not pop his head like a balloon, she didn't want to get blood on her after all, or the kimono for that matter.

Yet, that felt far too easy, right?

Oni are supposed to have enhanced physical power and durability compared to other Yokai, kind of like a Rook.

Then after being reincarnated, and gaining a Devil boost on top of it, along with turning stray and getting a bigger and fatter form, it should be way tougher, right?

Or is she simply that strong now?

Huh, training with Senpai and her sister has been paying off pretty well then, hasn't it?

She just hasn't gotten a chance to see how much stronger she's gotten in a real fight.

Not like this idiot could put up a real fight.

It's a shame too, she was hoping to make it take back everything it said about her.

With a discontent sigh, her ears and tails vanish as she looks at the body sprawled out before her.

Now, how to get rid of this thing?

She's fairly certain there isn't a dumpster big enough in the city to dump this thing in, so that's out.

As she's contemplating simply throwing the body really damn far away, Noriaki walks past her, standing to the side of the corpse.

Oh, duh.

Walking incinerator, right here.

He puts his hand on its stomach, and as soon as he does, she preemptively takes a step back.

Shortly thereafter, something did happen, but it wasn't fire like she expected.

Instead, a wave of pure white light ripples across the figure or the corpse, outlining it with light.

As seconds ticked up, the light grew, Noriaki narrowed his eyes in focus while she started closing hers.

Until eventually, she was forced to snap them shut as a bright flash erupted from the body before her.

Wearily opening them back up, blinking several times to regain her sight, she finds her senpai staring down in confusion at the ground.

Where the body is completely gone, not even ash remaining. The only trace, proof of existence left seems to be a small pool of blood.

And an Evil Piece. A Pawn Piece to be precise.

Except there's something strange about it.

Standard pieces look like normal chess pieces when not in use, but when used, glow the color of the user's aura.

So then…why does this piece look bleached out? A complete marble or crystalline white, carved to vaguely resemble a pawn piece.

Tentatively, he reaches down and picks it up, eyeing it strangely before looking at her, “Is it…supposed to look like this?” He holds it closer to her so she can see.

Her eyes narrow as she focuses on it, finding nothing else besides her initial observations, “It's not like any piece I've seen or heard about, that's for sure.”

“Huh.” He brings it back, holding it before him, “I think…I did this.”

She stared at him, half-lidded and unamused, “You mean beyond the sudden flashback?”

He winced, “Yeah, besides that, my bad…didn't know what would happen when I tried that, to be honest.”

The last time he said something like that, he went into that form.

Fortunately, a few bright lights aren't anywhere near the level of that, so she deigns to bring up his propensity to try new shit out on the field later.

Instead, she asks the most obvious with a sigh, “So what exactly did you do then, idiot senpai?”

“Pumped every crevice, pipe, and fiber of its being with my light-based powers.”

She blinks at him.

“So you purified and exorcized him out of existence then?” She lays it out in simpler terms.

Prompting him to blink back at her.

“Huh…Yeah. I guess I did.” He rubs the back of his head with a silly smile, and a chuckle, “Oh!” He suddenly perks up, holding up the piece, “Mind if I keep this for…stuff?”

Her eyes slowly narrow at him.

Kings can summon their unused pieces at any time. If a stray is killed, that piece becomes unused, so they can summon it back right after.

So even if he kept the thing it'd vanish eventually.

On the other hand, there's something up with that piece. Albeit, she can't quite put her finger on it.

Well, either way.

She shrugs, uncaring, “Not my problem what you do with it.”

Really, it isn't.

The Peerage doesn't get paid nearly enough in her opinion to track down and stomp a bunch of tantrum-throwing edge lords and reclaim their lost pieces for them.

Seriously, it's absurd how many of her clothes end up getting torn or burned off fighting all the bastards.

Everyone seems to have claws, or acid, or something that specifically fuck with everyone else's wardrobe nowadays.

She's sick of that shit.

“Sweet. Yoink.” He stuffs it in his pocket, “Thanks Murphy, love ya!”

Huh? Who the hell is Murphy?

As soon as she's about to ask that aloud, he's suddenly upon her, scooping her right up in his arms.

“Now then, my cute little kouhai, look how strong you've gotten~!”

Oh no. Not this shit again.

“And you did it without getting a spec on your kimono, look at that! I'm so proud of you~!”

That sweet, tender-sounding voice…!

“S-Stop that, senpai!” She hissed, feeling her face starting to heat up on instinct at this point.

“Hahaha!” He giggles, “Make me kitten~!”

Also instinctual was her suddenly going on the attack, batting the hell out of his face for what he called her.

She should have let that gargoyle try and eat her, no wait, she should have thrown Noriaki at him!

Yeah, his stupidly hard head would have splattered the fat fuck across the pavement in an instant!

Grabbing his cheeks, and pulling as hard as she can while he laughs maniacally like some overdramatic supervision, she makes a decision.

But first, she needs to talk with her sister about it…

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

I stare at the scene that awaited me back home with a half-lidded expression.

All around the garden, my clones ran around like chickens with their heads cut off, as several oversized plants flailed about with ludicrously large roots, petals, and vines.

Almost as soon as I walked in, all the clones, damn near half a dozen, turned to me at once.

“Boss!!”

“Prime Guy!!”

“Thank fuck!”

They all cried in relief before jumping and dogpiling around me.

I simply give a deep, long sigh, before catching a vine before it hits me in the face casually.

“I have two words,” I start, unamusement clear in my tone as I looked over the clones, “the fuck.

What followed was my voice, several times over, panickedly explaining what happened.

It all boiled down to this: they got bored and decided to forego an IV drip of light, instead, they pumped as much as they could as fast as they could into several different plants all at once.

Except, unlike when I did it, the plants didn't end up like the stray.

Instead, they became oversized versions of their normal versions.

We had to end the night early because of the damage done to the Ponto-chō, neither of us had the magic spells to fix it, so this is what I have to deal with when I get back?

With a huff, I dispel all my clones.

Then groan, as the fuckers running around all panicked like that one SpongeBob scene was revealed to me to be an intentional clone plot.

Payback, apparently, for leaving them there while I go out and enjoy the day with a cute cat girl.

Well, fuck me too!

Wait. You? You me?

Ugh. Clones.

Regardless, they left this shit for me to deal with when they got back because they're petty asshats.

So now I'm going to make extra sure to ring the clones out the next time we do swordsmanship training.

Little shits.

I walk over to one of the plants, a sunflower, that's flailing around every which way, and grab it by the step, making it stop moving as it faces me.

It becomes almost eerily still, its center desk facing me, the flower head being much bigger than my head in size.

Truthfully, it's kind of unsettling, seeing the oversized disk florets so close.

It's like staring into a maw without teeth.

Huh. I consider an oversized sunflower that can't hurt me to be scarier than some of the legitimate monsters I've fought before.

That's kind of…sad.

Shaking that thought out of my head, I pulled the flower from the ground, immolating it in my hand at the same time.

I will be forever thankful the thing didn't start screaming. Somehow.

Seems like whatever the clones did to the flowers didn't make them more alive or sentient than they already were.

Following that, I did the same to the rest of the sized plants, scattering the resulting ash amongst the gardens, to much the same results.

Sitting down in the garden, bathed in darkness with the taint of ash in the air, I pull the Evil Piece from my pocket and stare down at it.

I never considered it before, the ‘Power of Purification’ that the exorcists in Japan used.

Mostly because it's so easy to forget people even have it, despite one of the main characters, Akeno, possessing the ability to use it, I can't recall a time where she explained and showed it off, always preferring to blast someone with lightning.

Typical of her, but still, such a power would have been useful against Riser in the Rating Game, and it wasn't her Holy Lightning, so…?

Ugh. Canon inconsistencies. Whatever, there's no point trying to dissect it now.

Logically, if Shinto priests and normal exorcists around these parts can use it, why wouldn't I?

And, especially considering my mother, and what she and her attributes stand for, shouldn't my purification be particularly strong?

Well, the purifying powers within my light, that is.

But where to begin?

The closest thing I can think of that the power of purification would be related to would be Harae, the ritual purification used at Shinto Shrines.

It's often known as a type of exorcism, after all.

Harae is used in the purification of sins and uncleanness, although the English translation doesn’t cover everything.

Sins are accumulating in the Shinto term by causing evil deeds, and disasters, and spreading uncleanness.

Uncleanness, or defilement in some cases, is a state caused by forms of death, disease, menstruation, childbirth, and acts such as rape.

These things, sins, and uncleanness, are ultimately remedied by Harae.

If the power of purification is truly based on Harae, and I see no reason it can't, then that's an avenue to explore.

Especially since it might be the key to doing this again, without destroying the body around it.

I hold up the Evil Piece.

The marble white Evil Piece, that I sense nothing from.

Even as I poke, prod, and push my Holy Spirit Power into the thing.

Nothing.

It's almost like it's inert, a completely blank, and empty crystal.

I think I may have, in the process of annihilating that ‘poor’ stray, completely purified out the Evil Piece as well, turning it back into the unnamed attribute crystal it's made of.

Of course, this could just be a one-off case.

But that's what repeat experiments are for, no?

And I don't doubt for one second that other Devils took advantage of the supernatural chaos to reincarnate people, possibly other Oni, or others, and that they strayed as well.

At the very least though, that was the fest reincarnated Oni I've seen, surprisingly enough.

Not the first Oni since the fight with Ibaraki though. It's all been low-level idiots who keep trying to ‘take revenge’ on me and shit.

The stronger, saner, guys get that it would be useless, but these guys mentally can't.

In any case, I think it's about time I return to an old pastime of mine.

Mob farming.

After I spank Kuroka for sending Koneko after me!

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

Chapter 28 End


Murphy can deliver, sometimes.

Originally, I didn't intend for the date to take up most of the chapter...but, considering I'm planning on ending this mini quest off with a threesome between Nori, Kuroka, and Koneko, it felt right.

Also, I just enjoy writing the two interacting, lol.

I think we'll be wrapping this up next chapter, get an undevilifyed kitty, then the chapter after will be the threesome and the start of the Slash/Dog section of the story.

Ready? Here we gooooo!

View Post

A New Sun Chapter 27

Chapter 27

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

In the few days following, I honestly considered a sex marathon of several days just so I would have an excuse not to do more bloody meetings.

That thought only became more prevalent as time ticked on, and the same shit continued day in and day out.

It went like this.

The smaller Yokai Factions had two reactions to me: suck up or be cowed by my waving the Oni Daiyokai's head around.

Sometimes both.

Truly, I am ever grateful that past Nori at least had the slightest foresight to get these smaller groups to ‘help’ us by wording it not as an aid to my living specifically, but rather as a chance to stick it to the Oni themselves.

Which means I don't owe them anything.

Heh.

Not like they ended up trying to demand anything regardless when I waved the head around, literally.

The only one I asked for help from was the East specifically, and well, they more or less said.

“Meh. We'll see how it goes, boyo.”

Word for word, that's exactly what that gourd-headed guy said.

In the end, the little troll and his Faction ended up watching on the sidelines eating popcorn.

Quite literally, as that's what the old bastard came here to ‘discuss’ when it was his turn.

And by discuss, I mean laugh. Laugh and drink sake.

Ugh.

The only amusing thing that happened there was Magari, the Nekomata Leader from the East, who came with him snuck off during our talk and dragged Kuroka into the Court Room specifically to bat her for being sensed by her despite having three tails.

Oh, and for a host of other stuff relating to way back after Kuroka first strayed.

Like the whole joining a terrorism cell thing. Instead of bunking with the East and Magari’s cats.

That ended up with Magari forcing Kuroka to become her student.

Poor kitty.

I'm sure she'll rope Shirone into it soon enough, just so she won't won't have to ‘suffer alone’ or something like that.

I think a proper mentor would be good for her, considering she's mostly self-taught, and only recently reached three tails despite being a supposed master of Senjutsu for years.

We'll see how that goes.

As for the Five Principal Clans, they are mostly the same as usual.

Reverence due to my being who I am, mostly.

The Heads and current wielders of the Sacred Beasts of the Shinra and Kushihashi are being, for lack of a better term, hard asses.

They didn't show up to Kyoto. Didn't send anyone either. They stayed back at the Inner Sanctuary to ‘protect’ it, but everyone with an ounce of understanding knows that's a thin excuse.

If I recall correctly, the Shinra guy is a hard ass for strength, while the Kushihashi only has a rod up his ass.

Waving around the Daiyokai's head isn't going to prove anything to them, so kicking both their asses directly at a later date would probably solve the issue, but for now, I'm willing to let it sit until it becomes an actual problem.

It's odd, though.

I haven't heard from Suzaku since the battle. Not even a text. The Shrine Maiden that she sent in her place merely said she was busy with other important matters.

Definitely a little strange, wonder what came up all of a sudden?

Something related to Slash/Dog perhaps?

Ah, well. If firebird needs my help she knows where to call.

For now, though, I've got my problems to deal with.

Like this one particular fox MILF who keeps taking ‘diplomatic visits’ here!

“Still trying to figure out how to spruce the place up a bit, hmm~?” Hummed the said fox with a small smile as she leaned forward ever so slightly.

From my seat, I merely deadpanned right back at her, ignoring her thinly veiled attempt to show off her stretching valley of cleavage.

“I sent my maid out to go find someone to help decorate…since it's not like we know anything about that here,” I huffed out, “it's just taking a bit is all.”

Uzume does have high standards, after all.

“It's not so bad, you know?” Yasaka grinned and raised a finger in abjection, “Traditional, surely, but there's nothing wrong with that.”

Traditional is one way of putting this place.

Much like the Study Room, or any of the rooms or buildings here it seems, it's all traditional architecture, with barely anything kept inside.

In this case, I was lucky there were a couple of seats and a very tiny table.

The Court Room walls didn't even have paintings or frescos on them, they were all a matching plain color.

“I'm fine with traditional,” I retorted easily, leaning down against my tiny table, “it's just that it could be better. Especially if I'm going to have people show up. Constantly.” I narrow my eyes at her intentionally.

To which the fox simply giggled slyly at me.

“Ara~? Do you mean to suggest we aren't having very important talks behind these closed doors?” She batted her eyelashes at me ‘innocently’.

My eyebrow twitched at that.

When we're alone like this, I noticed she's very quick to drop innuendos and flirt.

Cute.

It helps her case that her particular statement wasn't wrong.

Several of the times she's shown up, it's been to coordinate efforts toward pushing the Yokai together.

The results of these talks have led many of the Yokai from across Japan to stay in Urakyoto.

With my subtle mentions to the Yokai that have shown up about my connections to the West, and Yasaka pushing for Yokai to stay because of the business the Night Parade brought, many have stuck around, at least for now.

That includes Magari, unfortunately for Kuroka.

But while there have been meetings like that, multiple even, there were also several like this.

Where she shows up and starts talking about random stuff. Trying to tease or get a rise out of me.

Hmm.

You know what? Maybe it's not just the Princess that needs correction, but her mother as well.

How would one go about bulli’ing Yasaka?

“Hmm,” I hum out, smirking back at her, “perhaps. Perhaps not. Though, I can't help but notice you aren't bringing Kunou along with you to these…talks.

Distract for now. I need time to think about how to go about this.

Yasaka grimaced at that, although her smile didn't fade, “Funny you should mention that, Noriaki,” Yasaka returned the favor with a smirk of her own, “Kunou has actively been refusing to come with me to these, no matter what I say, although, I couldn't imagine why…” she trails off, knowingly.

Or, at least she thinks she knows.

I'm willing to bet she doesn't have the full picture, but it's not like I'm going to give it to her.

“Speaking of,” Yasaka continues, “now that you brought her up, I just realized I haven't paid you back at all for watching over my little girl during that whole…thing.

She huffed with clear distaste before a sultry smile spread across her face, and she pulled on the top of her uniform ever so slightly as she leaned forward.

Now did I~?” She questioned breathily, the sides of her nipples ever so slightly peeking out behind the cloth of her uniform, with the rest straining against it, outlining themselves clearly.

I give her the blankest stare I could muster.

“If you want to be technical about this, you could say all of this was my fault, you know.” I point out plainly.

“Nonsense~...” Yasaka huffs out in denial, “You didn't control your father's actions, nor wish to be born, now did you? Besides,” she leans forwards completely, practically on her hands and knees, fluffy tails swishing out behind her, “I was the one that more or less forced Kunou into your care, allow me to make up for that~...”

I'm starting to think this fox is Kuroka 2, Electric Boogaloo, MILF fluffy tails edition.

If she starts crawling towards me like that, I may break my tiny table fucking her silly on top of it.

Which is unacceptable, because this is my only tiny table!

Let's see here…for her type, the mischievous flirty type, what's the normal way to quickly get them flustered and bashful?

Aren't the indirect types usually weak to direct assault? Ah, but since she's an older mature woman, directly attacking her with spicey flirting would be ineffective, that'd be playing into her game.

Which means…showing her the opposite. Something like genuine, romantic affection?

I hold up a hand to make her stop and wait a second for me, before clearing my throat with a breath and beginning, “I know what you can do.”

Her tails swish a bit as she tilts her head at that, raising an eyebrow in curiosity, “Ho~? And what would that be?”

“You can…allow me to take you out on a date.”

She blinks in sheer befuddlement at that.

“...What?” She tries like she didn't quite hear me.

I nod sagely, “Mhmm, a date. It must be rough having to lead the West like you do, no?” I lean my head against my hand, and shoot her the best handsome smile I could muster, “I think a date would be something the both of us would enjoy a fair bit.”

“Hmm…perhaps,” she muses momentarily with a soft smirk, “but it's unfortunate, Noriaki, but I can't leave Kyoto for something like that.”

“Who said you'd have to leave?” I retorted easily.

She fumbled a bit, “H-Hmm? Then how…?”

I smile genuinely, recalling my date with Kuroka briefly, “Because a date isn't just about visiting a place, either new or rarely visited, it's about the experience and fun you have along the way.” I state with conviction, “We can have a sweet evening anywhere, it can be a picnic, a walk…you name it. I'll make it enjoyable, just for you.”

She blinks once more, a small, barely noticeable blush spreading across her face, “...it sure sounds more like this would be a reward for me, doesn't it?”

My smile shifts into a handsome smirk as I look right into her eyes, “With how quick you are to show off your body, I thought you'd already know this…” I hold my hand out to her, “You are the most perfect reward a man could ask for~...”

Yasaka flinched back at my final statement, her small blush exploding across her face, “A-Ah…blast…” she huffs, crossing her arms underneath her massive bust with a pout, mirroring her daughters almost perfectly, “That's not fair, you know~? Most young men shrivel up at a mere little tease, how do you stay so…”

“Composed?” I finished for her, prompting a nod, “Spite.” I answered simply, “Sheer, unending, spite.”

And clever application and exploitation of enemy weaknesses.

But I'll leave that bit unsaid.

“Spite, hmm?” She tried out the word.

“You know, while we're talking about dates,” I muse, “I recall also promising to take Kunou on one outside of Kyoto…need to figure out a time for that as well.”

Yasaka was once again back to smirking, “Did you now~?” Then she blinked, “Wait, as well…were you…being serious about taking me out, too?”

I tilted my head at that, “Yeah? Why wouldn't I? I know I can be a spiteful prick at times, but there's no reason to be that much of a dick to you over you being a little tease,” I huffed a small fit of chuckles, “especially after you looked so touched earlier.”

“I…I see,” she stammered briefly, “I'll admit, it has been a while since I've done that…it would be nice to experience it again.” She smiles, a real genuine one, free of mischief, “Shall we make your dating me and my daughter official?”

I blink at her.

“As in, like, make it an official courtship?”

She nods.

“Well, in a sense,” she elaborates, “it would apply more so to Kunou than to me, as she has yet to be officially…courted.”

Ah. Her mischievous smile is back.

I deadpan straight back at her.

“I'm not going to marry your daughter just like that, especially without you not even talking to her about this first!” I exclaim as I shoot her down, much to a skew of vibrant and sly chuckling from the fox.

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

Fucking fox.

I didn't want to spend the rest of the day talking about courtship rituals and marriage, but that's what ended up happening.

She even brought up marriage contracts.

I don't know why, but that shit made me gag.

She was joking, thankfully, but still.

She also brought up something called the Hanyō-Kami Descendants Plan.

Which I'll simplify as her wanting Kyuubi kids with the powers and attributes of a deity to take over Urakyoto and, therefore the name.

Half demon/god descendent's plan.

Take a wild guess as to how she'd get such descendants?

Why, by me impregnating her and Kunou of course!

Kuroka 2.0. I swear.

She left it ambiguous on whether or not she was joking or not, but considering the fact I vaguely recall Kunou bringing up a similar plan in canon I'm pretty sure it's real.

Now, it's nighttime.

Over the next few days, I should have significantly fewer meetings to be forced to attend, as everyone has other things to do.

Even Yasaka, whose work is picking up in Urakyoto steadily the longer the Yokai stay.

I think, last up, I need to talk with Inari, as she wants to push job applications down everyone's throats steadily, but soon, and she needs my help to push those out, and tailor certain apps to certain groups.

Fun.

But, after all that, I should finally have some time for myself.

For now though, mentally drained, I want sleep.

So far, in my new bedroom, all I have in it is this very comfy futon, but that's all I need to drift off peacefully.

Now. If only I could get some quiet to do so!

“I'm telling you darling~! It was awful, nyah~!” My black-haired cat girl pushed her voluptuous body into my side as she held onto me, shaking in ‘terror’ as she recounted her day with Magari.

Again.

“That old hussy made me sit there for eight hours, nyah~! Eight! And if my tails so much as even twitched she whacked me with all seven of her tails! Nyaahhh~!!” She dramatically whined into my side.

As I stared at the ceiling, wishing for death.

Fuck it. If she's going to keep me awake like this, I may as well make good use of this time.

“Say, Kuroka?” I suddenly asked, prompting her to perk up, her whining ceasing instantly.

“Yes, darling~?” She looked at me with a tilt of her head.

And a small smirk.

Fucking cat.

“Did I ever tell you about my thinking about ways to try and, hmm, unincarnate you?” I try that term.

Kuroka blinks, her ears twitching, “Unincarnate…as in, reverse the effects of the Evil Pieces? Make me not a Devil anymore, nyah~? Hmm…” she hums, then shrugs, “No, I don't think so, nyah~!”

I deadpanned at her for that.

I'm getting the feeling I mentioned it offhandedly to her, but she probably forgot, especially if I didn't elaborate further.

“Well, I've got the start of a plan of working towards it,” I continued unperturbed, “the only question now is…would you be good with the idea? Of trying to reverse your…hnngh, devilfication?”

That sounds better. Let's stick with that.

Kuroka stretched out, letting out a light yawn before humming in thought, “Would I? Let's see…beyond no one being able to do it before, and all your effort possibly being for waste if you can't? Hmm~!” She taps her chin, “I do like how easy to use Demonic Power is, you know~? If I stop being a Devil, I don't have that power anymore, presumably, nyah~! Nor the power my pieces give me!”

I nod, that's all fair.

“Let's see, lifespan? No, no…” she mutters, “Hmm…well, besides the power, the only other thing I can think of is that…it won't change anything, you nyah~?” She looks up at me, right in the eyes, a sad smile on her face, “Pieced or not, the Underworld would still come after me, just rather a stray and criminal I'd be only a criminal…”

I blow out a light sigh to that and pat her on the head.

“Maybe not kitty, but you see, you're missing something important here.” I point my finger right to the center of her chest, “That little chess piece in there marks you as one of theirs. With it gone? I can claim you fully as mine.” I huff out huskily, prompting her to shiver slightly, “And maybe replace it with a little something else? Who knows…” I muse wistfully.

Kuroka stared at me, a doughy smile on her face as she wiggled around against me, “Don't tease me like that, darling~...!”

“I'm serious though?” I confirm, prompting her to stop and blink at me.

Quickly continuing, I add, “And, besides, I get the lost power thing…but you already have a perfectly serviceable replacement that you stopped practicing.

Now at that, Kuroka cringed and looked down, not meeting my gaze.

Seriously, I nearly forgot I gave her Chakra. She was practicing with it, doing well and all!

Then she just stopped.

“Sorry…” she mumbled in shame, “old habits die hard, nyah~?”

I continued petting her hair, sighing all the while.

“If you need help with it, don't hesitate to ask.”

“I'll be fine,” she stated, “I just got…lazy is all, alright?”

I huffed at that, thinking for a few of the following silent moments before adding.

“You know, if I removed your Devil bit, your fertility would probably return as well.” I tacted on, almost as an afterthought.

Kuroka’s gaze shot back up to mine in an instant.

When can we begin?” Kuroka asked calmly.

I merely blink back down at her.

Why didn't I just lead with that?

Keep it simple stupid. Especially with cats.

“Whenever I can start setting my plan into motion.” I respond whilst patting her on the back.

Kuroka twitches slightly at that.

“What does this plan of yours involve this time, nyah~?” She asks, curiosity stricken.

“Well, you remember after my fight with Vali, when we destroyed that forest?” I started, she nodded, “And how I used my light to sort of, kind of, maybe help along with regrowing the forest?”

“Ah~?” Kuroka lets out a breathy sigh, “Yeah, I remember that nyah~! You think there might be more there?”

I roll my eyes at that. Judging by her reaction, it's more likely she remembers the lovey-dovey sex after rather than the forest restoration.

“Yeah, I think there might. All this time, I've been using my powers offensively, for combat purposes, but never stopped to think about, well…anything else?” I ground out, almost ashamed of myself there, “I mean the sun is more than just fire and light, it's–”

Life.” Kuroka cuts me off to finish for me.

“Huh? I mean, that's not wrong, technically in a sense…”

“I think you might have something there, darling~...” she said with a wide beaming smile, “when I first met you, one of the things I sensed from you was life. Not like life-force, or ki, but something more.” She kisses me on the cheek, “May be best to start there, nyah~?”

After a moment, I hum in agreement.

Life, just straight up, huh?

That could be excellent in fact.

I have a healing factor, after all. Maybe that's just a passive benefit from that aspect of my power?

Only one way to find out.

“Gonna go out, grab some stray devils, and see what happens when I light them up.” I idly finished the intended explanation for my plan.

Kuroka blinked and raised an eyebrow at me.

“...Are you sure you aren't still thinking with your battle boner, nyah~?”

“Well…?” I state slowly, “Gotta start somewhere, right?”

Only to be met by light cat cackling.

Which I huffed at. Fucking cat.

There is logic I'm following here, although it's not something she'd know about.

About the only person to be un-deviled in the series, technically.

See, in canon, Issei did stop being a Devil, at least for a time.

Issei’s body was destroyed and his soul was placed in a new body, one made of other flesh.

At this point? Issei wasn't a Devil, he was a Humanoid Dragon, and to become a Devil once more he needed to be reincarnated by Rias again.

That's a vastly simplified version of events, but what happened paints an interesting picture.

This all leads me to believe that Devilfication is only body-deep, not soul-deep, and that theoretically…if you can purify out the Devil bits or coating, you could reverse the process the Evil Pieces puts someone through.

Of course, this all requires experimentation, thus the need for test subjects.

But before even that, I need to make sure I can even, as a base, heal others.

Without that, well, I could destroy all I want, but healing is hard to come by unless you're a Phenex or Asia.

There is one of those in Kuoh, a Phenex, that is.

Hmm, backup idea, hello there~!

And none of this is accounting for the role the Evil Pieces themselves play in all this, another thing that needs testing!

Suddenly, Kuroka's cackling stops as she crawls on top of me, looming above me.

“Enough of that for now, darling~! I'm not some brilliant scientist…but you will let me help when the time comes, nyah~?” She asked, batting her eyelashes at me.

I reached up and cupped her face in my hands, “Like you ever need to try and convince me there, Senjutsu and magic would be a pretty big help here, no doubt.”

Kuroka smiled as she lay down, wrapping her arms around my neck, and resting her head on my chest.

“Good, nyah~!” She yawned, deeply, “Now then, that evil old woman who hasn't gotten laid in three centuries ran me ragged…and I want as much private time as possible with my darling before you're suddenly occupied again, you know?”

“I don't think you'll have to worry about that too much,” I idly note, wrapping my arms around her, “schedule should be lightening up here soon, should have more free time then for…stuff.”

“Hmm~!” She hums, “Even when adding Shirone into the equation?”

I blink.

“What?”

“Mhmm! Shirone, it's been a while since you two have been able to do anything, you nyah~?” She winks up at me, “So I took the liberty of telling her what's been going on…and needless to say, she wants to see you soon~!”

I stare down at Kuroka, who smirks innocently back up at me.

“Kuroka,” I intone, “did you do this, specifically because I didn't save you from Magari?” I ask outright.

Maaayybbee~?” Kuroka purrs out.

Well.

The cat learned the power of spite.

That's probably not good for my future health, is it?

“Huh. Well.” My hands slide down her back, landing smack dab right on her ample ass with a sweet slap and surprised squeal from my cat girl.

The next thing she knows, I'm flipping over, dragging her with me so now I'm on top.

“You did say you wanted as much private time with me as possible,” I held her down on the bed, leaning down to mutter darkly into her ear, “right~?”

She shivered, shaking her head at me as she looked significantly less certain than before.

“A~Ah~? Umm…Mercy? Nyah?” She tried.

I chuckled.

“None here, pet.

“Nyahhh~!!!”

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

The rest of the month passed by at worryingly blistering speeds.

May passes into June, and only at the start of this month am I finding myself with enough free time to dedicate to pushing my plan forward.

Fortunately? Pushing toward my goals requires me to do one of my favorite pastime.

Training.

Ah, how I missed the simple repetitive task of doing the same thing over and over again, repeating for what feels like an ad-infinitum until I get better at doing the thing.

Truly, the monke part of my brain is showing there.

So then, what task am I performing now so early in the morning as it is?

Well, there are plenty of gardens in and around the Kyoto Palace, which means plenty of test subjects.

Plant test subjects to see If I can draw out the supposed life aspects of my powers, by showering them in the glow of my light.

Now, I'm not trying to blow anything up, so I, and the several clones I made and spread out across the gardens to do this, are only giving minimal light showers at the moment.

Have to start somewhere, after all.

How is it going so far?

It's like Naruto's Rasen-shuriken training, but instead of struggling and straining to cut leaves, it's like watching paint dry.

Painfully tedious. Painfully slow. Yet so much better than sitting in meetings all day bug-eyed that I can't even complain.

Watching as the little sparkles of light rain down from my outstretched palm onto some random flower, as its petals are illuminated by my light’s silvery white glow is also somewhat…mesmerizing, to be honest.

Even if nothing else is happening.

I'm going to feel bad when I start pumping these plants full of light like a drug addict.

All for science!

I blink belatedly as one of my clones suddenly pops.

Huh?

They were suddenly attacked from behind, right to the head, who in the hell…?

Slowly, I stand up, turning in the direction I sent that particular clone off in, narrowing my eyes.

Someone is masking their presence in that direction.

Only reason I can tell is because it's not perfect, I can still sense them faintly, but it's muffled.

Wait a minute.

I recognize that aura!

Pretty much all my caution that had built up leaves me as I deadpan stare off into the distance.

In the back of my mind, something Kuroka said a bit ago replays itself like a vhs tape.

“Even when adding Shirone into the equation?”

Kuroka left not too long ago, Vali Team stuff apparently.

I've been putting off getting a collar for her, but now's a better time than never.

I don't even bother moving as the presence, as Shirone, turns to my direction and starts heading this way post haste.

“How have ya been, my cute little kouh–” I begin to call out, only to be interrupted as the bushes rustle and Shirone's form explodes out from the foliage, fist lashing straight into my gut.

Prompting my words to be replaced lowest groan I could muster from the back of my throat.

“You are…so lucky, I haven't eaten breakfast yet, or else it would be all over you right now.” I mention, breath strangled.

Quiet.” She hisses, fist still in my gut, “Or I'll do it again, but aiming lower.

“Oi! Nori Junior is innocent in all of this! Keep him out of this!” I cry out.

Senpai.” She slowly looks up at me, glaring, something like the mix of a pout and a scowl set across her face.

“Alright, alright…” I concede, wrapping my arms around her little form, “Sorry.”

“Idiot senpai. Idiot. Idiot. Idiot.” She repeated, over and over again, jabbing at me all the while, although each jab carried little to no heat, unlike the first.

“Good to see you too.” I muse with amusement, “Am I assuming correctly that Kuroka let you in?”

Shirone leaned her head against my chest, well, middle of my torso because she's so short, and nodded slightly at my words.

I sigh.

“I'm also going to assume that Kuroka embellished her account heavily of what happened to make me seem as bad as possible, yeah?” I further question.

“Most likely,” she mumbled against me, “doesn't matter though.”

“Hmm?” I raise an eyebrow down at her, “Why's that?”

“Senpai is totally stupid enough to do at least 1% of what big sister told me.” She huffed out with conviction.

“You know what kitty?” I reached up, petting and scratching behind her small fluffy white ears, “That hurt. More than the punch.”

“Good.” She intoned back, whilst leaning into my touch.

Damn. Cold much?

Suddenly, she reaches up and takes my hand, looking up at me expentently, “You can make up for your transgressions, if you take me out and buy me food.”

“So you want a date then?” I huff non-paused.

Her eyebrow twitches, “Not a date.” She huffs, “Just free food.”

I roll my eyes and smile as she refuses to meet back my gaze.

What is with me and all the dates lately?

“Right, right.” I nod, “So where do you wanna go on a date?”

She twitches at that once more.

Ah, small kitty, you should have seen this coming! Interrupting my precious training time as you are!

Granted, I can have the clones do stuff while we're away…unlike the meetings, this shouldn't last so long that the headaches caused by all the clones popping would be detrimental to the task at hand.

Also, actually enjoying what you're doing helps when one wants to power through something, and I do enjoy bulli'ing and teasing the small white cat!

“Not a date.” She denied with a little more heat, on both her tone and face, “But…I want yakitori.”

I deadpan down at her.

“That's not breakfast.”

She shrugs, and deadpans back at me.

“So?”

Shit. Can't argue with that logic, now can I?

Though I doubt any kebab place is going to be open so early.

Pretty sure the little gremlin knows that too.

Oh well, guess we'll just have to spend the time doing other totally not couple things.

With a chuckle, I pick up Shirone suddenly, prompting a squeak as I start carrying her.

“Nyah!? Senpai!”

I ignore her outraged mewling, and start walking off with her, making a mental note to replace my clones as soon as I'm able to.

“So, while I walk,” I smirk at her indignant glare, “why don't I tell you what's really happened, yeah?”

“Sure…after you put me down!”

“Nope~!” I cackle in denial, moving my head to the side to dodge a small little fist aimed for my cheek.

Not the worst way to get interrupted, if I do say so myself.

And hey? Who knows! Maybe something won't happen on this date that will also conveniently help me out with what I'm trying to do as well.

Nope. It'll be a perfectly normal not-a-date. That's all.

Heh.

Murphy, do your thing!

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

Chapter 27 End


Honestly considering renaming this mini arc from the "Purification" Arc to the "Dating" arc, straight up, lol.

Granted, aren't going to get to Kunou and Yasaka for a bit, but still.

A couple more chapters for this, then we'll be hitting up Suzaku and Slash/Dog. I'll admit, there isn't going to be a whole lot of fighting this arc, want to take a short break from that here, but the action will kick up again when we meet Slash/Dog officially.

By the way! I recently got a new phone, which I used to write this chapter. Everything should be fine, but Grammarly acts kinda fucky on it. I tried my best to comb everything over, but if there's an abnormal amount of grammar or spelling issues, please don't be afraid to tell me so I can fix em real quick.

View Post

Makin' Waves! Chapter 1

Chapter 1

< ~ Makin' Waves! ~ >

I do not own High School DxD. High School DxD is owned by Ichiei Ishibumi. Please support the official release.

"DOOOOODDGGGEE!!!"

At the sound of the man's commanding voice, I threw myself to the side with all the strength my small demonic body could muster, falling to my hands and knees.

A torrent of spiraling water, condensed and spinning like several misshapen whirlpools, blows through the air my body just occupied.

And tore a swath through the lake me and my bastard of a Father we're fighting upon!

Looking down, I can see it, feel it, my Demonic Power exuding from my body, wrapped around it in a blue-violet aura, keeping my hands and knees just above the water.

This particular 'spells', if you could call it that, one job?

Use its water-aligned nature to keep me from sinking.

My concentration wavers, my imagination and will shifting to wanting to blast the silver-haired manlet standing across from me on the lake as I rise back onto my two feet and turn to face him.

I stagger then, as one of my feet slips under the water's edge, my aura moving to focus itself on my hand to do just that.

With a snarl, my will and imagination snap the correct mental image into place, and my Demonic Power moves back into place.

But not before I slip, fall face first, and dunk my face into what felt like liquid concrete.

Hard liquid concrete, as if that makes sense.

For a blissful moment, all was quiet.

Then the chuckling began.

Then the chuckling turned into a full-on belly laugh as I raised my head and deadpanned straight at the source.

My manlet of a father in this new life of mine.

Kunrex Sitri, the Lord of the Sitri Clan.

If I could pray, I would only pray I don't receive his height when I grow older.

His violet eyes were enough.

Not like it truly matters, because of Devil Shapeshifting, but just to make doubly sure.

The man I call father is laughing uproariously at me now, holding his gut as he goes on and on.

Despite his lack of height, he's got quite a bit of width in muscle.

He's like a smaller Sairaorg and fights like him too except for the fact that each punch is backed up by fucking car-sized torrents of watery death.

Slowly, his laughing routine stops, and he looks at me, a sly smile apparent in both his eyes and on his lips.

"What's the matter, La-tan," he teases, his voice uncaring and light, "lose your concentration there?"

I click my tongue and get back on my fight, rubbing my stinging face a bit.

"Yeah," I admit, still deadpanning at him, "wonder what gave that away, hmm?"

"I wonder as well, hmm?" He snarks right back with a smirk.

I was about to retort, but then, well…

"Hey, hey~!" A much more peppy and cherry feminine voice blasts itself across the lake.

Oh, fuck me.

"Hey, hey are you ready~?" Two sounds like claps echo out across the lake.

Oh. Oh God. She's clapping now!?

"Are you ready~!?" Two more, once more.

God.

"To train~!" Clap.

Can you hear me? I know you're dead.

"Say go La-tan~!" Clap.

But please.

"Go La-tan~!" Clap!

Fucking kill me again. I beg you.

"La-tan all the way! Yay ~!"

I could feel the way my face twisted as liquid cringe shoved itself through my eardrums.

Even dear old Dad grimaced at that whole thing.

I turn my head to the source of it, off on dry ground, just in front of the lake shore.

My lovely sister in this new life.

Look. Sera. Sis. I wouldn't say this out loud because I do love you.

But.

There's a reason Dad made you do this specifically.

And it's not because you look hot in the cheerleading uniform.

No, the way the red, blue, and white mini skirt and short little skirt clings to your chest and shoves off those luscious thighs are just a side benefit.

I wish I was older, real—

I stagger once more, catching my Demonic Power from fluxing in an attempt to divert resources as it were to my shapeshifting.

Rather than stumble forward and faceplate again, I merely sank slightly before regaining buoyancy.

Better.

I click my tongue, re-focusing on her, to find Sera waving her pom-poms at me with a big happy grin.

Okay. The outfit is a pretty big contributing factor.

But, it's also because you suck at cheerleading, and it's fucking cringe.

I'm pulling out the slang terms from my first world because there's nothing better I could think of that encapsulates the sheer unending feeling I get when I hear her like this!

Like. Good lord why? And how!? She's an actress! And the Satan of Foreign Affairs! The fuck!?

"Anyways!" Dad suddenly pipes up, "Ready?"

That's not a question. There is no—

"DODGE!" He suddenly roars out, pure blue Demonic Power bursting from his hands clenched fists.

I see it the second it happens, how his pure raw power shifts and seems to melt into an elemental power.

Water spills forth, wraps around his fists, and condenses.

Then he punches out.

A right straight punch straight towards me.

And the torrent shoots off his fist like a rocket.

I leap to the left, managing to stay on my feet as I do this time, even weathering the stormy-like winds created by the spiraling water as it passes by me.

A left haymaker sends a smaller torrent about the size of a big rock.

Problem.

It's smaller, faster, and is curving as it flies at me.

I barely have time to drop completely prone before it whizzes over me.

I quickly get to my knees, "I'm five!" I stress as I stand back up fully, "Were you trying to take my head off there!?"

He merely hummed, even as his fists regained torrents of water around them, "To be fair, you did ask for this, so, I dunno La-tan~?" He smiles darkly, "What do you think?"

I huff indignantly at that.

Because he's right. And I hate that he is.

It's not like I dislike this or anything, I asked for us to do this, and Dad in turn asked for Sera to help further to make this more effective.

Essentially? This is all training.

When I turned five, hell, when every Sitri kid turns five, we are taken to this specific lake where the Sitri Progenitor, our honored and supposedly dead Ancestor, was born.

Created by Lilith and Lucifer here at this place, the largest lake in the entire Underworld, our Ancestor was created by the Father of Devils as a replacement for the Leviathans after their line was nearly wiped out during some stupid pre-Great War testing.

When Ancestor came out with only an affinity for Water Demonic Powers, let's just say dear old Luci was less than pleased.

Why? Well, besides being a massive cunt, this lake is different compared to the rest in the Underworld.

It moves.

Its waters are shifting and flowing all by itself long before the artificial sun, temperature control, and winds were made to make Hell more comfy for the Reincarnates.

Beyond that, the lake seems to reflect…something's light into the sky, turning the usual purple sky into a mixture of violet and blue.

Looks pretty damn weird when the artificial sun is out, but also pretty cool at night.

In short, the lake contains power. Likely Demonic Power, it's alive in some way.

Seeing all that's special about this place, and him only getting a Sitri out of it?

Of course it pissed him off!

Thinking quickly, Ancestor did the one thing he could think of to prove his worth before he was purged by Lucifer's Evil Light.

Lift the entire lake.

A feat which, legends have it, impressed Lucifer enough to not kill the Ancestor instantly, giving him a chance to further prove himself.

He built his castle on the mountain overlooking the lake and led sixty legions of Devils - millions of our kind back then - during the Great War.

He earned the name Sitri, he earned the rank of Great Prince during the war.

Then he died during it

And thus our line continues to this day.

Regardless, this legend, the basis of our Pillar Clan's founding and first member, is the reason I'm here.

As per the legend, the Ancestor's first steps after being born were upon this lake.

Taking this idea, a test was formed.

A trueborn Sitri with the innate bloodline power over water would be able to easily walk on it with a flex of will and imagination.

So, right on the fifth birthday, we are taken here to perform the test.

Usually, that's all that occurs.

But I wanted more.

For the past three or years, all I was allowed to do was sit around, reading a shit ton of books.

And for the two years before that? I couldn't even leave my damn cradle without Sera or Mom!

While the history of the Underworld, my clan's origins, and so much other stuff was very fascinating to read about…

Especially since none of it was told in the original story this world is from.

None of it can compare to actually doing something.

Like training, fighting, learning actual Magics or Demonic Powers!

I wasn't allowed to touch any of that stuff until now because it wasn't safe during my youngest years.

But now?

I smirk back at him, a grin from ear to ear as my Demonic Power responds to my mounting elation.

Blue-violet power crackles and sparks across my form, snapping from the aura and striking the water around me as I get low to the surface.

"I think you're getting quite slow, you overcompensating manlet. When's the real training going to start?" I snark cooly right back.

His eyebrow twitched.

Yeah. That's right Dad, I called you short, the fuck are you going to do about it?

"Really?" The torrents around his arms spiral faster as he utters out that single world, all with a still smile on his face.

"Um~!" Sera calls out from the side, slightly worried, "Papa? What are you doing?"

"Starting the real training, as your dear brother seems to wish for." Despite how calmly he said it, there looked like mini hurricanes raging across either of his arms.

Not like they were that big though.

Remember?

Manlet.

His eyebrow twitches again.

I smiled innocently.

Then he stepped forward and punched.

A tidal wave practically blew out from his fist, even disturbing the lake water as it rolled towards me at terrifying speeds.

"E-Eh!? Papa! Hey!! Stop that!! Too much, that's t-too much!!! La-tan noooo!!" Sera almost immediately started crying like I was already dead.

My wings burst from my back as I blasted into the air, narrowly going over it.

Then the winds created by the thunderous spiraling wave hit me and sent me flying further up and back.

I hold my arms up to my face, blocking winds from beating into it and my eyes.

Now this is more like it!

My sixth sense, my ability to sense others' energy, short circuits as I feel dear old dad's power suddenly pop into existence behind me.

Hmm. That's not supposed to be there already—

The next thing I realize, my body is sent belly-flopping down, straight on top of the lake.

I can feel Sera's wince from the lake shore.

I can feel my father's smug smirk as he looks down upon me.

I can also feel that everything, fucking, hurts.

< ~ Makin' Waves! ~ >

"Sera, come on, you know how Papa gets when someone calls him tha—" Dad's explanation was suddenly cut off as a pom-pom hit him in the face hard enough to knock him straight down into the ground.

My sister looked down upon his prone form, arms crossed, face between wrathful and pouting, "I don't care! La-tan is too young to be facing attacks of that scale! You could have hurt him!"

"A-Ah…" He slowly pulls the pom-pom off his face, "Sera, you know I have more self-control than that! La-tan wasn't in any real danger! I promise!" He continued rather feebly.

"Still. Don't. Care!" She turned and looked away from him, "I hate you, Papa!!"

"W-W-What!?" He fumbled as if gut-punched, "Seerraa!? Noooo!!" He cried out so loudly it echoed.

I, meanwhile, watched all this with the most unamused expression.

Occasionally, I'd hiss, but not because of them.

No, it was due to the light-pressing of a cloth lathered in some type of medical ointment against my crimson skin.

Heh. Rias. Eat your heart out.

I wince a bit as the cloth is pressed against me once more before soon full-on hissing in pain.

"Don't worry dear," a soothingly mature feminine voice mutters behind me at my pain, "almost done, alright? Hang in there!"

I suck in a deep breath and nod in affirmation.

The only reason Sera has been laying into Dad this whole time instead of smothering me to death is because Mom forbade it.

As it turns out, being forcibly made to belly-flop onto a magical, maybe alive lake, tends to hurt.

And sting.

A lot.

The entire front part of my body is raw, tender, crimson right now.

Even the bits that were covered somehow.

Luckily, the Sitri Clan owns the hospitals and clinics in the Underworld, along with the methods of making normal herbal remedies so we can offer more than just the standard Devil Method of healing.

The second half of that is due solely to the lovely lady who is smothering me gently while applying something for the stings.

My mother in this new life of mine.

Sera is practically a mini version of her, and I got my hair color from her myself.

Hopefully, I also get some of that height.

Hmm. There's a joke to be made here that height in the family matters when it comes to sanity.

Mom isn't a bridge troll like Dad, and she's tall.

Sera is Sera, and she's oh so close to the magical form that is a short stack.

"Done!" Mom suddenly calls with a pleasant smile.

I shiver as she pulls a cloth that was stuck to my stomach off.

Huh. Significantly less pain already, though that sting still bites a fair bit.

"La-tan!!!"

Oh shit.

Another body collided with my front, sandwiching me in between both women.

My cat-like screeching and hissing were muffled as my face was shoved in between Sera's large magical muffins.

Nothing new there, but still.

Also, yes, Sera calls her tits that.

She began patting me incessantly while snuggling me, rambling on and on, "Are you okay!? You don't have to worry anymore La-tan, your big sister is here to protect you from that mean old octopus!"

I vaguely heard Dad groan dramatically as if struck behind her.

This continued for a good bit, until Mom pat Sera on the head, and slowly eased her off me with a small smile.

"Sera, don't handle your brother so roughly now…he's still in a good amount of pain, that ointment isn't instantaneous, you know that." She chastises lightly.

Sera blinks at her, before looking down at me as I let out a slow, pained, wheeze, finally free from her blossom at least.

"A-Ah…right, Mama…" She starts tearing up, "L-La-tan…!" She starts sniffling, "Nnnghhh!!! Your big sister is exactly like that mean old salmon! I'm sorrryyyy!!!"

She starts full-on crying.

Also, Dad coughed like he got stabbed or something again.

I look back over to Mom, who merely shakes her head and sighs.

I give her five minutes before Sera returns to normal.

At this point, I just learned to tune her out when she gets like this.

Anyhow.

I turn and look out over the lake I was just training at.

Now, we're all sitting on a slightly elevated hill looking over it, and from here I could see it perfectly.

The way the lake makes waves out of nowhere, the way its waters flow, twist and turn despite there being nothing to disturb it.

No water life lives in that lake, nothing seems to be able to due to its properties.

Fascinating.

I wonder just how much study and research has gone into this place…

Idly, I hum as I take note of the time.

The Underworld's artificial sun is beginning to make its fall, and within the next few hours night will rise to take its place.

I spent several hours out on that damn lake, huh?

We started just before noon.

Honestly, I didn't think I'd last that long.

The entire point of this type of training was control.

The raw manipulation of Demonic Power requires imagination and the will to create and control phenomena.

If you don't focus and don't have enough intent behind it, your power simply won't respond.

On the flip side, concentration can be interrupted.

A mind wandering, raging emotions, pain, all of these can affect your powers, so it's important to get that out of the way first.

It's also the only thing they'll let me do right now since I'm 'too young' to start what I like to call the good shit.

Like water dragons and such.

But, I know you always have to start somewhere.

I click my tongue internally at that.

It's never too late to prepare for the apocalypse.

"Ah!?" My attention suddenly snapped toward my Father as he suddenly exclaimed, "Look at the time! Everyone, we have a reservation in Bitru to attend!"

Sera perked up, "Ah!? Right! My little La-tan's birthday dinner!" She suddenly snatched me back up, and any trace of her bawling her eyes out evaporated.

Literally. I see the steam come from where her tears were as they vaporize instantly at a mere flex of her Demonic Power.

"That's right, Sera. Pack it up, everyone!" He calls out whilst clapping a few times, "We have to account for Sera getting swarmed the moment we step into the city! If we're late to another reservation because of that, I'm making her pay!"

There are grins all around at that.

Well. From everyone besides Sera, who squawked indignantly.

"E-Eh!? Hey! Papa! It's not my faul—" She started to defend herself.

But I cut her off with a simple, "Hey. Sis."

"Huh?" She turned, paused, and paled as she looked at me, "L-La-tan…?"

Hmm, is my wide, hungry grin all that scary?

In any case, I give her a thumbs-up.

"I'm counting on you, big sis."

"W-Weh!?" Sera looked positively crestfallen as she held her chest, crying out, "La-tan doesn't even believe in me!?"

I feel a slight movement from behind me, as Mom also holds out a thump-up and nods along in agreement.

"Quite right dear." She gracefully facts on.

"M-M-Mama!!! Not you too!!"

Sera gave exaggerated cries, sputtering out denials even as she was packing up her pom-poms in a…suitcase.

That's just there now? No flash of magic or anything?

Yeah, that sounds about right for her.

We all chuckled at her expense nonetheless.

I…need to just enjoy these moments.

As short as they may last in the grand scheme of my potential ten thousand or so year lifespan.

Especially for my birthday.

After all, at around, eight to ten I think? I'll start having to have birthday parties.

Not the fun kind of party, but the noble kind of party where I have to mingle, play nice with actual asshats, and build connections.

Joy.

The approaching canon is a whole other can of worms as well.

Or well, what's left of it with me taking Sona's place here, anyway.

But, for now, I can relish this.

< ~ Makin' Waves! ~ >

It's odd how, after dinner, we aren't staying at the Sitri Palace in Bitru.

Extremely odd.

Granted, I haven't been to the Palace much, it's only been a few years of life after all, but every time this far we stayed overnight at Bitru we stayed at the Palace Center.

Maybe it has something to do with the place being more for administration rather than residence?

I once heard Dad talk about how the Palace in Bitru was based on an old Mycenaean Palace, an ancient Greek Palace before Ancient Greece was a thing.

Back from the Bronze Age, fascinating stuff.

Seemed comfortable enough though, from the few times we did stay there.

Still, I can't complain all too much about heading straight home after a big meal.

Sera out ate the rest of us combined, somehow, so as the light from Mom's teleportation spell fades I'm not surprised to see Sera swaying from side to side on her feet, looking blissed out after stuffing herself.

She's also giggling lightly, eyes half-closed as she looks up at the Sitri Castle, a big wide loopy grin stretching itself across her face.

Ah~...” she hums with relief, “Home sweet home~! Eight hours of restful sleep, here I come~!” She cheers to herself, giving a small fist pump.

Before dinner, switched out of her cheerleading outfit into her ‘work’ outfit, the one with the azure green formal blouse, little light pink neck scarf, long dark frilly skirt, and cute little golden laced black boots.

She rocks it, truth be told, but somehow I think the future heavily hormoned-up me will think the cheerleading uniform is superior.

“Ah! Hold up!” Sera suddenly perks, her eyes opening just a bit more as she jerks her head in my direction.

I couldn't say why, but my danger senses flared.

Then I understood, as I was summarily scooped up, held like a damn teddy bear, and my face was quickly assaulted by a flurry of pecks from my sister.

“Mwah~! Mwah~! Mwah~! Mwah~! Mwah~!”

Seeerrraa!!” I cried out, trying my best to cover my face with my little hands.

It failed. Spectacularly.

“Mwwaahh~!”

Oi, that last one was way too close to my lips!

I pout at her, prompting Sera to stop with an affectionate giggle.

“I know, I know La-tan~!” She winks at me, before snuggling me against her bosom, “N~ot y~et! Heehee~!”

Not yet?

Uh.

I'm in danger?

“I need an adult.” I mutter tiredly.

“I am an adult~!” Sera giggles animatedly back.

“That just makes it worse!” I fire back.

“Hmm…” Sera thinks for a moment, eyes slowly and increasingly narrowing as she does before she finally snaps back to attention with a huff, “Better me than any of those hussies from the Pillars. My La-tan. Hmph!” She pouts, her cheeks puffing at the proclamation.

I do my best to deadpan up at her from between her mounds.

Truly, I do hate being this short again.

And while I could always abuse Devil Shapeshifting to make myself look my true age in record time, for height and all, just that is rather a waste of such power.

Especially since looking my age doesn't confer the power increase all Devils get through proper age, actually have to experience the years naturally for that.

Also, I can't force certain biological functions to work that way either, so my dick is still non-functional until I properly hit twelve to thirteen.

I cry.

But I'll live. For now.

“Which is why I'm sleeping with you tonight!” Sera proclaims, “To make sure none of those hussies come for you now that you're officially Heir Sitri!”

“...Sera.” I start plainly, “I think I'll be fine. It's a bit early for that, don't you think?”

“It's never too early for the hussies to come after you!” Sera nearly cried out in denial, “Don’t you know they always try to start young!? Those third-rate noble scags with nothing in their lives will try to seduce you for your future holdings, wealth, and power! They'll even try to do it to get in your Peerage!”

“Sera, I don't even have one of those ye–”

“No! No no no!! I absolutely won't accept that!” Okay, now she's crying, “If anyone tries to take my La-tan’s chastity,” her momentary tears stopped, a dangerous cold glint appearing in her eyes, “I'll ice them, and toss them into Cocytus!

Huh. Is it just me, or did it suddenly get very cold?

Ahem.”

Sera whirls, and promptly hisses at the noise, holding me protectively as she does.

The source of the noise, dear old Dad getting her attention, merely stares at her blankly.

“Sera. Dear.” He points down at the ground.

Sera and I look around, only to find the floor, and damn near half the front of the Castle completely iced over.

“Ah.” Sera squeaks out, “Sorry Papa!” With a wave of her hand, the cold seemed to lift, and the ice started to melt.

Dad merely sighed, before turning back to Mom, who was watching all of this with an amused smile, “Well, he’s all yours for tonight then, dear.”

Hmm?

“Aww, darn it!” Sera huffed, holding me ever so tighter, “I nearly forgot about that thing with Mama!”

Thing?

Also, Sera. Please. Starting to lose the ability to breathe here.

“Can't you wait until tomorrow? Pretty please Mama! I wanna snuggle La-tan tonight!” She begged and pleaded.

“Now now,” Mom walked over, reached out, and gently freed me from Sera’s chest, prompting a deep relieving breath of air to finally reach my lungs, “We should get this over with as soon as possible now, you know that, Sera. This is just as important as checking for his Sitri Clan Trait.”

“I know, I-I know!” Sera conceded, weakly, “B-But…”

Mom merely rolled her eyes, reaching out to hold and rubbing one side of Sera’s face.

“Don’t be like that, my little Coldsnap, it's not like I'll be hogging him all night…” an amused little glint appeared in her eye, “in fact, why don't you wait in his bed for him, hmm? It shouldn't be long.”

I slowly looked at my mother, the woman who supposedly loved me, in sheer and utter betrayal.

Why would you encourage her like this!? What, do you want incest grandbabies that bad?

On the bright, Sera suddenly perked up, a big happy smile on her face!

“Ah!? That's a wonderful idea! Thanks, Mama! I love you, Mama!” She accepted, before starting to literally bounce off, “Oh! Right!” She stopped suddenly, turning back and looking at me, “Don’t stress if you don't have it, okay La-tan? I wasn't lucky enough to have it either!”

Would it hurt to just say what it is outright, you lot?

I furrowed my brow as Sera gave me a dramatic wave, and a cheery smile, before bounding off instead.

She crashed through the ice blocking the castle doors like it was made of paper mache, seemingly not even noticing its existence.

Dad walked over, patting me on the head while damn near having to stand on his top toes to kiss Mom.

He sighs as he pulls back, “That girl…regardless, she is right,” he looks me in the eyes, his own becoming rather steely, “about…several things, there. We'll talk about several of those things when you're older, but for now?” The rather serious look in his eyes dissipates, becoming the usual carefree I've come to expect the last few years, “Just do what your mother says, alright? And don't worry, Sera’s right about that last bit as well.”

With a wave and a small smirk at the confused frown on my lips, he walks off.

I turn, looking back and up at my mother.

“What are you all talking about?” I ask straight and to the point.

To which the reply I get is a short burst of giggles, “Hmm! I think it's better saved as a surprise,” she gently runs her fingers through my hair soothingly, “if you'll indulge me? I promise it's nothing bad, you won't get hurt, this isn't some sort of secret test for the family that'll make or break your position, none of that.”

I settle into her grasp with a warm hum.

“I suppose there isn't any harm in it then?” I try, I can see the excitement, it's palpable in her eyes.

Can't find a reason not to go along with that, I trust her, them, my parents, and my sister here.

If it'll be fine, it'll be fine.

I smile as my mother practically bursts into a fit of excited girlish giggles at that, not entirely unlike some of the happy giggles you could hear from Sera.

“Right, then!” She starts, strutting forward toward the castle with purpose, “Ready to see a part of the Castle you've never seen before?”

Oh?

My smile widens at that, “You bet!”

She sets me down on my feet, mirroring my smile as she gingerly takes my hand.

“Then let's be off, then.”

As we approach, I can finally start seeing the castle as Sera’s impromptu icing melts and falls away, the Sitri Castle, in all its glory under the fake moon and starlight.

The Castle is embedded into the side of the largest mountain the Sitri Territory sports, overlooking the Teraphim and a vast swath of some of the most beautiful nature preserves I've ever seen in either one of my lives.

Just outside of the castle, there's a stone bridge leading out to a small platform engraved with a magic circle, which we are currently walking across and from.

The circle is, of course, the only way to enter the castle properly, as the very mountain upon which the castle sits is warded to hell and back, nearly as much as the Bael’s home.

Heh. Hell and back.

As for the castle itself?

It is awash with blues, purples, gray, and bronze.

Crystal clear stone bricks build the foundation, wood is painted the Sitri colors, and you’d be hard-pressed not to find a banner or flag or just outright the Sitri sigil adorning some part of the castle, whether that be the walls, spires of bronze, or even the doors.

The inside interior is much the same, in terms of primary colors, with the Sitri paraphernalia being joined by other works of art, and displays of stuff like trophies from the Great War and Devil Civil War.

Ah, but there is one rather glaring issue.

There aren't any stairs.

Or hallways for that matter.

The entrance area or the lobby, the welcoming space for visitors and the like is one big museum-esk room, with several windows letting in beams of light to illuminate the rather airy, decorated room.

The one outlier! The giant magic circle at the far end of the room.

See, if Devil children possess enough power to use a circle to teleport, why not take advantage of that fact?

The castle wasn’t originally designed with this in mind. My Mother’s Bishop pitched the idea, and my Dad got far too…enthusiastic, about tearing apart and rebuilding the interior.

The result? Without stairways, hallways, passages, and such, there's plenty of room for everything else.

Each of us has a section of the castle all to ourselves, with our bedroom, bathroom, entertainment or living area, workshop, and so on, all accessible via a flex of will and a circle.

I have half a mind to call the old man ‘Manletmaster’ for his commitment to efficiency.

With that being said, I have Mom to thank for reeling his ass in and thinking about style, rather than plain old efficient and boring design.

To a degree. She went overboard in some ways too.

For instance, the wall facing the nature preserve and lake in my room?

There isn't a wall. It's all one giant glass window.

Very nice view.

But oh boy, has it made me hate that stupid artificial sun with a burning passion in the morning.

That's all just for the living spaces, and as we walk towards the big brimming magical circle, I have a sneaking suspicion of where in the castle we might be going.

The only real parts of the castle I haven't seen, or been allowed access to, are the parts within the mountain itself.

Manletmaster, recall.

I’d imagine stuff like the servant's quarters are there, along with vaults for the Clan Treasury where the real important stuff is locked up.

Sera hinted that there's also an actual Clan Archive with the good shit there, like books on magic, demonic powers, and the like.

Hmm…I wonder if that's where we're going!

I push down the rising urge to get overexcited over that prospect.

But, a Devil can hope!

Reaching it, and stepping onto it, Mom suggested, “You may want to close your eyes for a moment dear, so they can adjust a tad faster to where we end up.”

I nod, and close my eyes shut.

Giving a hum of approval, she taps her foot against the circle, and I can feel the thing buzz to life as her demonic power swirls into it like a key, her grip on my hand tightening ever so slightly.

“Away we go~!” She calls with a playful chuckle as the circle spins up, and takes us away in, for me, a dull flash of light.

< ~ Makin’ Waves! ~ >

The first thing I noticed was the chill in the air.

It wasn't an unnatural chill, caused by powers, but a natural one.

A dull, absent cold, merely present because of the lack of anything else.

And as I open my eyes, I see that literally.

Devils possess natural night vision, with it, I can tell there is no lighting, natural or artificial, in this chamber.

It's merely a chamber, a dome of gray dusty stone, looking behind where we appeared, I don't even see a circle that would enable someone to teleport back.

Slowly, Mom lets go of my hand and walks near the center of the chamber.

“Not much in here, is there?” She muses aloud, her voice echoing as she does, taking a quick look back at me with a small smile.

“Is there even anything in here…?” I ask back, my befuddled voice echoing softly as well.

Her smile grows.

“Look closer.”

Closer? As in, maybe, on the walls? The ground?

I step forward, closer to the center, and it's only when I'm a few paces behind my mother do I finally see it.

Burn marks. Thin, but there are many, and they seem to make some shape.

In the center of the chamber, it's almost like they form a circle, a magic circle it kind of looks like, but this one seems different.

“A magic circle?” I pitch, only for my mother to hum in thought.

“Very close. But not quite.” She states, holding a hand out to her side.

A band of blue light sparks into existence a few feet away, and as she turns, the band traces itself in the air, forming a circle around her.

“Tell me, Laplace.” Her eyes flickered over to me briefly, before moving back to her hands, as she continued tracing more and more bands of light into the air, “You've been reading quite a bit, yes? History mostly. Can you tell me what you know of the Stolas Clan?”

I hum in thought at that. Stolas, huh?

“The Stolas Clan, Rank Prince, like Sitri,” I begin babbling off what little I had heard, “they originally held a position just above the Phenex, but then the Great War and Civil Wars happened, and right after Rating Games were invented they just kind of…vanished.” I shrug, rubbing my chin a bit, “Don't think they ever went extinct, however.”

She nodded at my words, a bright smile, just as bright as the circle forming around her, plastered on her face, “That's all correct! Did the books mention why, exactly, the Stolas Clan fell out of basically everything?”

I shake my head at that, “No, Mom, I don't think they did.”

Although to be fair, I didn't go all that deep into a dive on the Stolas specifically, I focused much more on the Original Satan Clans, their old territories, the modern-day Old Satan Faction, and so on.

“Ah, I see,” her smile turned bitter, “the answer is rather simple. It's how any Pillar Clan falls into ruin. They lacked power.

She cuts new bands around the outside of the main circle and starts forming several new small circles around it.

“Without power, Pillar Clans can't gather anything. Keep anything. Protect anything.” She continues softly, her voice murmuring throughout the chamber, lights picking up, “The Stolas especially were done rather dirty by Lucifer. Their Clan Trait, Ritual Magic, was meant to be the Devil's ultimate scourge of what the Heavens loved so much: arias, chants, prayers, and songs. It was meant to take that power from them, and make it the Devil's own.”

She suddenly stopped moving, the bands of light swirling around her now, twisting and swirling.

“It failed. Ritual Magic was a worthless trait in combat. By itself, it took too long to set up, too long to cast, and too slow to show results. The impatient Devil King regulated the Stolas and their armies to fodder. But through sheer stubborn will, they lived on post-Great War.”

With a wave of her hand, the bands of light settle in place mid-air.

“Eventually, a use was found for Ritual Magic, but it wasn't a grand one. Little cared for the natural world of the Underworld, after all.”

My eyes widen, and she suddenly waves her hand down, the bands of light collapsing into the ground with a thunderous fiery clap, burning themselves into the ground.

She turns to me, a sardonic smile on her lips, “My maiden name is Ellaruth Stolas. My little Laplace, can you guess what you're here for now?”

“To…test for the Stolas Clan Trait?” I murmur back, my eyes not leaving the bright blue light.

“Yes.” She hums in affirmation, her normal sweet smile returning to her, “I do love this part, despite my rather…complicated feelings regarding what's left of my former Clan.”

“I…” I swallow thickly, “how do I…?”

She giggles lightly at that, “All you need to do, is merely watch, okay? Watch, and…listen.” She murmurs, power humming in the air, sparking with light.

“Here’s an ode to the Underworld. Hear mine feeble voice, and tremble.

The circle hummed at her words, before expanding.

My breath was sucked from my chest as I beheld an absolute cacophony of color, sound, and light.

It was as if the world had become enamored with instruments and the verdant colors of the world refused to be unseen, popping out all at once.

Then my mother began to sing.

A secret tale of life and toil.

I could feel…it.

Something somewhere else. All around, but not here.

Power buzzed all around the chamber, pulling inwards, I could almost feel it, the way with every single word she spoke, every lightly sung lyric…

“Oh, verdant rebels in the devil's lair,

Defying torment with each leaf’s flare.”

The world shifted.

Bent, changed, drove towards one purpose.

“No sunlit kiss, just sulfuric glow,

Yet, blossoms thrive in the fiery throw.

Their stems, a defiance in the abyss,

A green uprising, a tale of bliss.”

I'm sorry, your voice is so beautiful, Mom, but I can't just…listen.

I need to…

Huh? Since when did I reach out and touch the light?

The light thrummed at my touch, and I could vaguely hear her gasp through the haze of…everything else around me.

I let out a shuddering gasp as the light rolled down my arm, the blue becoming tinged with blue violet.

“A paradox profound, in shadows cast,

Where flames entwine with life so vast.

Ode to the Verdant Inferno’s Grace,

A testament to life in the darkest place.

And suddenly, as quickly as that light, that song, that sound appeared…

It all went away.

That rush went out in a wave, flooding out from the chamber, but not physically piercing it.

I fell to my knees slowly, deep breaths wracking my body.

My Demonic Power, my energies, they didn't get drained at all, yet…

So, so tired.

Tentatively, I heard clicking heels approaching my form.

“Mom? Wha…what was…tha–!?” I grunt as arms suddenly wrap around my tiny body. Slender and slick, comforting.

You have it.” She muttered, nigh disbelievingly, “You, really…h-have it.”

Ah, Mom? Why do you sound like you're crying?

Is that good crying? Or bad crying?

I try to look up at her, barely managing to move my heavy head to look up at her.

Can't see her face, just her neck. She's hugging me.

Darn.

So. Why can't I physically ask that?

Oh. Everything’s getting…hazy.

Hmm.

Say…since I have both my parents’ traits, does that mean I can learn all the things sooner?

I'll admit, that thought manages a low, very excited giggle from my throat and a big goofy lopsided smile to boot.

Slowly, I feel her pull back to look down at me, her face is tinged with tears, but she doesn't look sad.

She's smiling, so that's good, right?

Then she sees me, and pouts at me, her cheeks puffing out like Sera’s do!

Laplace Sitri…what are you thinking down there, hmm?”

Tired.

And other stuff.

Like how I'm going to get in so much trouble trying stuff out…aren't I?

< ~ Makin' Waves! ~ >

Chapter 1 End

Let's. Fucking. Goooooo!!!

This took way longer than I thought it would take, tbh.

But it's finally here!

Ah, let's get to it.

So, we aren't going to stay very long at the five years of age, probably only one more chapter before we get a significant time skip to the next age mark. I just want to cover some of the family interactions and lay down what Laplace's early years are going to be spent doing first.

Show, don't tell, and all that.

As we progress up his ages, we'll be spending longer and longer in each 'stopping point' as you will.

As for a schedule, I'm thinking Mondays or Tuesdays right now, likely Tuesday? Or maybe something less rigid. Definitely going to need to hammer something out before I start posting chapters to QQ and FF later.

Same deal as with A New Sun there, by the way, you lot will always be three chapters ahead of public release. So, QQ and FF won't even get this story until we hit Chapter 4 here.

Fun fact, by the way, I tried to write my own ode for Ellaruth's song at the end. But it was 4am, I was really fucking tired, and just said fuck it. Used ChatGPT to make one, lol.

I still have the full thing, if any of you would be interested in seeing it. It turned out shockingly well I think.

Another thing, certain text in this chapter is meant to be colored, kind of like the Juggernaut Drive in A New Sun, but I can't do that here cuz Patreon. Big sadge. 

Now, until next time, have a sneak peak at Laplace's mermaid. Heehee.

(Normal)

(Mermaid. Heh.)

View Post

A New Sun Chapter 26

Chapter 26

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

“Bha! Are wars fought this far east always so…bland?”

“L-Lord Odin!!” His petulant white-haired Valkyrie cried in admonishment to his left, “You can't just go saying things like that! The Gods of this country are watching!”

“Well maybe if they don't want me saying that, they should go fight wars better!” Odin huffed, “Not like you can call this scuffle a war, too much fighting in barriers, not enough destruction in the human realm.”

L-Lord Odin!!!” His Valkyrie damn near screeched.

To which he merely grunted, not even looking at her as he reached up and rubbed a finger to his ear.

“You know,” He began offhandedly, “if you put as much effort into finding a boyfriend as you did nagging and screeching at me, you wouldn't still be a virgin right now.”

He zoned out the consequent sputtering denials, self-shaming, and sobbing that followed his remark.

As he does.

And for once, it wasn't just because he usually does! He's focusing on something far more important right now.

Though poor Slepnir, he could feel his eight-legged steed give the girl the stink eye from here.

They did just arrive in Kyoto after all, well, just outside Kyoto, what with the big barrier up and about and such.

Not like it was truly keeping someone of his or even his Valkyrie's caliber contained within, should they choose to enter.

But still, he's not so much of an ass as to ruin the work of a Magician so randomly, it's good work!

Regardless, Odin focused, looking primarily through his magic ‘eye’, it glowing dully as he peered through every single barrier attempting to bar his sight.

Truly, visiting this country didn't end up being a total waste of time, it would seem.

He isn't much informed about the gods this far east, but they must be incredibly cultured to have their supposed virgin shrine maiden - mikos, they're called? - running around wearing such form-fitting robes.

It's like the perfect fix of airy and showing just enough to spark the imagination and get the blood pumping!

Odin let out a light giggle as he watched some random miko purify another creature, a, ah…Yokai? Right.

Purify a Yokai, some horned troll thing, her ample bust swaying every which way, thighs out and glistening with sweat as she does…

Perhaps he should have taken a look at this part of the world sooner, hmm?

Oh! Speaking of, that's not even talking about the Yokai themselves!

The troll things, they're ugly as shit, not a single knocker amongst them, but there are a few others.

Dog girls. Cat girls. Fox girls. Who knew this country had such a smorgasbord of beautiful creatures?

Somehow, the ears make the melons right below that much more enticing.

Ah. Almost makes up for his favorite club around these parts, Boobs, Bath, and Beyond, being closed.

Or the fact that he couldn't find that stupid crow, Azazel, anywhere.

The original reason he even came to this country in the first place.

Oh well. He didn't find a body, so he was pretty sure the Fallen Angel was alive. Somewhere.

Not his problem anymore.

Especially if the dusty bastard was going to run off without telling him anything.

Odin paused briefly in his surveying as he felt a wave of heat wash over them, the suddenness so pronounced it made his ‘bodyguard’ stand at attention.

She couldn't tell, but he could feel it. See it in the heat as it travels in the wind.

Divine power. Different from his and the Norse's own, but is very familiar at the same time.

Where did that come from?

With his eye, he followed the trail straight back to an area where the residual energies in the area told him a barrier had recently broken down.

Granted, he probably didn't have to use his eye to find the source, the same area was also covered in a blanket of mist, rolling out much slower than the heat wave before it and much more visible.

“Ooohhhh~? Heeheehee~!” Odin exclaimed, more in shock than anything lewd, but it was still there.

He didn't expect to find some reincarnated cat girl with absolute slammers making out with the guy who killed the Juggernaut Driving red dragon.

Nice.

“Lord Odin…” Much to his mounting annoyance, he could feel the Valkyrie’s gaze leveling back onto him, “What are you doing with that eye of yours!” She accused heatedly.

Well, there's nothing better than the truth, hmm?

“Watching a lovely couple get it on, something you wouldn't understand even if it hit you with a God Class Rune-style explosion.” Odin vapidly remarked.

“Wha!? L-Lord Odin! That's not—”

And zoned out, once again.

Much better.

Now then, where was he? Right.

Damn, are those big ol’ tiddies!

Well, that and Odin thinks he is starting to figure out what's going on here.

Basically? It boils down to demigod bullshit, or whatever this country calls them.

The massive troll corpse behind the two leads him to believe that was the leader of the troll thing, and that they are after him specifically.

Well. Was.

Kind of hard to continue a hunt when your leader’s dead.

He’s not too sure why, but it could be practically anything.

When you have the Greeks as a next door neighborhood, he means that quite literally.

Also, that mist is clouding up a whole chunk of the city, and any of those trolls that waltz on in appear to fall over dead or very debilitated in moments if they aren't fodder.

Then they die shorter afterward regardless.

Was the mist the cat girl's creation then? A spell of hers? Impressive work.

Turning his attention back to the two, he watches amusedly as the boy reaches into his robe, and pulls out a very smashed phone.

Much to the boy’s bland look and his cat girl’s cackling.

Ah, to be young and dumb once more.

“...L-Lord Odin…” The still distressed voice of his ‘bodyguard’ broke into his thoughts once more, as her tone gained a serious edge to it.

Odin huffed indignantly, the glow in his ‘eye’ dimming as he tapped his walking stick to the ground, “My sixth sense is working just fine, Rossweisse.” He notes as he turns around.

He glosses over his Valkyrie, who at some point fell to her knees in her crying.

Truly, he’ll never understand.

How can someone not get a boyfriend with a body like that!? It's absurd!

He wouldn't outright mention it, of course, the girl is supposed to be smart, but out of all the Valkyries he believed she was probably the most beautiful as they come.

And in her Valkyrie Uniform? That practically shows off those thighs and exorbitant chest? He’d say she's downright desirable, even!

Yet she still manages to muck it all up!

Honestly, it would be hilarious if it wasn't so sad.

Patting down his robe and adjusting his hat slightly to be a tad more presentable, Odin looked at what his Valkyrie was staring at.

That being, the massive pink fox lounging on top of his carriage, just a few paces behind them.

Even without his senses, he could tell immediately what kind of being this was, just by the fact that Slepnir didn't turn and try to nip at her.

Only a deity would cow Slepnir in such a way. Or, whatever they call it here. Spirits? Spirit Gods? Something like that.

“It took you long enough to acknowledge my presence, old man.” The fox started amusedly in a very feminine voice, “Enjoying the show too much, hmm?”

“Meh,” Odin waved off with his stick, “not much of a show, was it?”

Thank whatever Chief God in this country that the fox responded before his Valkyrie could start screeching.

The fox chuckled slyly, before jumping off the top of the carriage and landing lightly before them.

“No, no I suppose not.” She answered wistfully, “Then again, it was not so much a show, but the beginning of one.”

“Ho?” Odin raised an eyebrow, “Is that why you sat here watching, like the rest of you gods, rather than cleaning up the mess?”

The fox smirked, before standing and shifting into a much more feminine form to match her voice.

It took everything in the Chief God's power to not immediately zero in on those knockers.

Seriously, are the shrine ‘maiden’ uniforms just one big cock tease here!?

This wasn't helped by the fact that as soon as the deity took a female form, his Valkyrie whirled on him and glared.

Oh, ye of little faith.

“In a sense.” The goddess sauntered up to them, waving a hand to the Kyoto barrier, ”I suppose the closest comparison that would make you Norse folk understand would be the conflict between the Aesir and Vanir. This is meant to be a first step toward solving the issues between two opposing sides.”

Ah. Odin did notice, although he wasn't exactly paying attention to the fighting specifically, but at times humans and those Yokai were fighting together against the trolls.

He only made note of it, because the two sides didn't seem to work together well, not due to a lack of incompatibility in Odin’s mind, but because they just didn't understand how.

It got a good chuckle out of the old man, the awkwardness of the two sides.

So, if what this goddess is saying is true, then the humans here…servants of gods, and these spirits, Yokai, don't like each other much, eh?

So this entire thing is basically…ugh.

Politics.” Odin groaned aloud in realization.

No wonder it was so boring!

Well. Maybe the fight with that big guy would have been fun to see, but he missed it.

The goddess nodded with a sly smirk across her face, “In essence, yes.”

Well. He can at least respect the method. The first step to getting two sides to stop killing each other?

Find someone else to kill instead!

Flimsy as it is as a foundation, it's a foot in the door to lay something better down later.

Ugh. Now he's thinking about politics again. It's giving him stress headaches already!

This type of shit is exactly why he left ruling Asgard to his sons and fucked off to travel and work on outside relations rather than internal!

With a huff, Odin looked at the goddess, “Well, you clearly know who I am, but not us, you.” He tapped his stick against the ground and rubbed his long gray beard in faux thought, “Who might you be, oh Eastern Goddess?”

The Goddess hummed, “Inari Okami, I suppose by technicality, I am the overseer of the Earthly Kami here in Japan.” She bowed lightly, “Pleased to make your acquaintance, Odin of the Aesir, despite your rather…unannounced arrival to our shores.”

Aw shit.

He forgot to send a notice, didn't he?

Odin let out an uneasy smile, as his Valkyrie bowed, “This here is Rossweisse,” he pointed his stick at her, “one of the Valkyries, and my bodyguard.”

“Pleased to meet you, Lady Inari!” Rossweisse affirmed with a nod.

Can talk to powerful deities, no problem, but still not men eh?

Oh, that's a good one! He’ll save that for later!

Inari’s smile widened, “Pleased to meet you as well. Now, would you two please come with me? I'd like to talk…if you don't mind.”

Odin huffed, “Talk, huh? About what?”

“Your many, many, unlisted visits to Japan to spend exorbitant amounts of money in clubs relating to female mammaries, for one.”

Odin froze.

How did she know about that!?

The fox goddess's eyes sparkled with mirth, “Oh don't worry, you did pay rather handsomely in the end…we Kami couldn't be mad about that, but, you know? While we're at it…we have been meaning to talk to the Norse about some diplomatic matters. You wouldn't mind, right?”

“I…suppose not?” Odin wearily sighed out.

“Wonderful!” The goddess clapped her hands together, “Please, follow me you two!”

Ugh. This cheeky minx.

Also, his Valkyrie better stop giving him that ‘I told you so!’ look right now or he swears by his father, he’ll leave her here in Midgard as soon as he gets the chance!

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

“MMMM!! MMNMHH!! MMMHH!!!” Muffled screams and shouts attempt to reach me, but are blocked by the ball gag stuffed in her face.

Now. Normally, in this situation? I'd say kinky.

But the way Kunou is wriggling and writhing around on the bed, glaring at me like she's trying to set me on fire with her mind alone is kind of ruining the mood, not going to lie.

Even with her being tied up in such a way to bold the ‘B’ in BDSM, it just ain't working for me.

Shame.

“Oi.” I turn and look over my shoulder, at Uzume, who's cowering behind me, “Why’s she got the gag in her mouth? I didn't gag her before I left…”

She nodded rapidly, “She tried to bite when I tried to feed her, so I kinda panicked! Eheh.” Uzume chuckled nervously and looked away like she was having trauma flashbacks.

Kuroka crawled up onto the bed, and started sauntering towards Kunou on all fours, “Say, darling~! When are you going to tie me up like this, nyah~?”

Amusedly, Kunou looked at her, widened her eyes, and started trying to worm away from the reincarnated Nekoshou post haste.

She didn't move, at all.

“Probably tonight, after everything blows over,” I state plainly, going over and grabbing Kunou’s gag, “seriously…can’t wait for all the meetings and shit I'm going to have to do after this.”

Kuroka grinned like a loon, “Can't wait, darling~!” She purred out, plopping down right next to Kunou and proceeding to pet the fluffy tails.

Well. Someone sounds like they want to be bred.

Not like I don't reciprocate, but really, I'm just not looking forward to going around and using Ibaraki’s head as my stick in my big stick diplomacy strategy.

A man can only take so many meetings and talking before he wants to cut or stick his dick in something.

With a snort, I pull the gag out of Kunou’s mouth.

“Ghhaa!!!” She cries out, twisting around as much as she can to look at Kuroka, “Let go of my tails you bimbo cur!”

“Neeoow!” Kuroka meowed out happily in denial.

Kunou clicked her tongue, growling, before turning to me.

“And you!” She started, without pointing, but only because she was tied up, “Untie me at once so I can burn you alive!” She seethed out, “How dare you leave me here, tied up like! L-Like! This! All night! I-I wanted to help! And you did this!” she started slamming her head against my stomach repeatedly, “I hate you! IhateyouIhateyouIhateIhateyou!!!”

I merely stared down at her, blankly.

It's at times like this when I realize, at her core? She is an insanely spoiled princess.

Correction time?

After several seconds of her doing all that on repeat, I put my hand on her head and ceased her movements.

I start by telling her plainly, “No.”

Kunou flinched at my tone, but did narrow her eyes back at me, “No?” She parroted back at me, “But, Mother—!”

No.” I denied once more, even flatter.

“B-But—”

My eyes narrow, and in the next instance, I'm leaning over her, my hand on her head, holding her down lightly against the bed.

“YIP!!!” She squeaks, her own eyes widening as she beholds my form above her, she even freezes up completely.

“Your Mother sends you out of Urakyoto specifically to avoid everything, no?” I ask, coldly.

“I-I…” She starts stuttering, trailing off into a non-answer.

“See, your Mother, ultimately, didn't send you to help me. She sent you here to keep you safe.” I continue unperturbed, “Don’t get it twisted Princess, I know you're just as stubborn as I am, so I knew you’d push it. That's why I tied you up because, like me, you’d do something stupid if I didn't.

I huff, looking down into her ears, “Now that the situation has passed, I can handle this bit.”

“H-Handle…w-what?” Kunou stumbled out, a growing blush spreading across her cheeks as I forced eye contact.

“You aren't told no very often, are you?”

“I…w-what?” Her eyes divert from my own, “What does t-that have to…?”

I sigh, deeply.

It's just as I feared.

“The spoiled Princess to a T, aren't you?” I more so state rather than ask.

“H-Hey! That's n-not—”

I cut her off with a simple hush.

“See that? The talking back constantly? Mhmm. That's stuff spoiled Princesses do.” I explain as if I were talking to a nine-year-old.

She tries frowning, scowling, at me even, but with her blush, it only looks like adorable pouting to me.

“So,” I continue unperturbed, “let's nip that in the bud, yeah?”

“H-Huh?” I lean my face down closer to hers, “H-HUH!?”

“Listen very closely,” I began deeply, nigh huskily, “from here on out? When I say no, it means no, okay, Kunou?”

“M-Mmm!?” She squirms underneath me uselessly, her blush growing rapidly.

“No fighting. No back talk.” I continue regardless, “Don't make me think I have to do this again, you here? Or next time, I skip straight to the punishment. You hear?”

“H-Hnmmggh! Y-Yess…” Kunou confirms in nigh desperation as her ears pin to her head.

“Good.” Leaning down ever so slightly closer, I whisper, “Don't make me have to be your Daddy…” I let out a low trailing huff before pulling back.

Only to find both Kuroka and Uzume staring at me.

Both of them are blushing like mad, with Uzume looking away, and Kuroka grinning from ear to ear.

Kunou, meanwhile, stared at me with her mouth halfway open, just as red as the other two.

She wiggled back and forth, specifically her lower body, trying to rub her legs…no, her thighs…together desperately.

Then, Kuroka spoke, aptly conveying my thoughts on everyone in this room with a single word.

Horny~!” Kuroka stated hotly, looking at me with slits in her eyes, leaning down with her ass in the air like she was ready to pounce at me.

“V-Very…” Uzume chimes in, clenching at the bottom of her uniform.

Meanwhile, Kunou let out a very muffled breathy groan. Or maybe it was a moan? As she tried to rub her thighs together, before promptly looking at anywhere but me.

I, meanwhile, deadpan at all of them.

Son of a bitch.

Okay. This one is on me, to be fair, but still.

Making sure to keep my cat in the corner of my vision as she wiggled and narrowed her eyes on me, I reached down and untied Kunou, who once she was free, practically smashed her legs together and rolled away from me.

As soon as she did, Kuroka pounced.

My eyes flickered, and Kuroka damn near froze mid-jump to my sight.

I plopped down on the bed, my eyes swirling as I caught Kuroka by the nape and held her on my lap.

“You stop that!” I admonished, swatting her right on the ass on reflex.

“Nyaaahh~!!” She moaned deeply, jiggling her hips as she did, “Harder Daddy~...” she purred sensually.

Behind me, Kunou squeaked again, and Uzume let out a soft half groan half gasp.

My eyebrow twitched, even as Nori Junior threatened to rise and poke her stomach.

Fuck. She's into being spanked. I made it worse.

Also, turns out I like being called Daddy. A lot, judging by Nori Juniors sudden need to make himself known.

Double fuck.

“A-Ah, Nori…?” Uzume sort of called, stifling a breath as she clenched onto her skirt shakily, “Your eyes…changed again?” She asked, desperately trying to change the subject.

Huh? Did they?

Kuroka looked back at me, a continual soft purr rumbling in the back of her throat, “Hmm~! They did…four pupils~? Did that happen during the fight, nyah~?”

Four pupils? So, three tomoe then? When did it…?

Hmm. Maybe it was after I got turned into a baseball.

Seemed like the appropriate time, I just didn't notice after because Ibaraki was kind of getting throttled by everything else at the time.

“I…suppose?” I try hesitantly.

It was either that, or the danger horny Kuroka was emitting that triggered it. I certainly only noticed the improved kinetic vision then.

It better fucking not have been that!

Kuroka shrugged, “Oh well~! That's nice and all, Daddy~, but don't you have a little something else to do right now~?”

Kuroka wiggled her eyebrows, and her hips, as Uzume and Kunou whimpered in the background.

I click my tongue, muster all my willpower…and grab Kuroka by the nose!

She yelps and whines indignantly, trying to wriggle out of my grasp.

“That's right,” I sigh deeply, “I have to get all our stuff ready to move into a proper place here in the city. I'll handle you two later.” I responded with a huff, prompting both girls to whine, as I turned and looked at Kunou…who still wasn't looking at any of us.

“As for you, Princess. I think it's time we send you home for now, yeah?” I ask, damn well knowing her answer already.

“Mhmm!” She quickly affirms, muffled by…is she biting the bed sheet? “W-Wait!” Her head perks up, and I hear the fabric crack lightly as she lets go of it, “For n-n-now!?”

Oh, Kunou.

Poor, sweet, not so innocent anymore Kunou.

Do you think this is the last you'll see of us?

I still have to show you places outside Kyoto!

Beyond that, her mother is going to want to keep in touch, for sure.

I don't say any of that out loud, of course. I'll let her figure it out.

Thus I promptly turned away, back to my maid and cat girl.

“H-Hey!!” Kunou called out, though I ignored her.

“Now then! Up and at 'em!” I pat Kuroka on the back, “I promise this new place will have plenty more space to do stuff in, shouldn't take long at all.”

Kuroka crossed her arms, and pouted, “I'm going to hold you to that, nyah~!”

Uzume merely sighed, “Where is this new place then, Nori?”

Ah, I've been waiting for that question!

A grin splits my face just before I open my mouth.

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

The Kyoto Imperial Palace.

Honestly, it's easy to forget the place exists, and very easy to put it out of your mind.

Mostly because, for the past century or so, to the public? The palace hasn't been in use.

Beyond just the Emperor vacating the premises. All ceremonial functions have been moved to Tokyo. No welcoming foreign dignitaries in the Kyoto Palace, not even public tours.

See, after one of the buildings burned down for the umpteenth time back in the 50s, the Household Agency locked the place up for repairs, then just…never opened it back up after they finished.

Why is that?

Well.

As it turns out, this is the place my dear old Dad stayed for a time.

And now? So am I.

The old man didn't give it to me, mind, just like he didn't for my Dad, he can't do that.

But! What he did do was suggest I just waltz on up to the Household Agency building in Kyoto, flex a little bit of who I was, and see what happens.

Short story of that? We've got a new base that isn't an apartment building and is significantly larger than my place back in Kuoh.

Ah, all the buildings have fancy names, there's a lot of them, and I guarantee I'm not going to touch half of them.

Is it sad the only thing I was excited about was the several barrier areas to train? With each being specifically picked and made to train specific things?

Probably.

We just met, and I feel like the old man knows me so well.

Straight up, I know he did something to make this happen because there's no way in hell me flexing my name carries that much weight yet.

Especially with the Agency.

I can go into further detail on places here when they become relevant, but for now, let's focus on where I'm at currently.

In particular, the Palace’s Study Hall.

I wasn't surprised to find a mostly empty traditional Japanese building with nothing to really study, the palace in general hasn't been used in a while, and presumably for not long if what Uzume says is anything to go by.

She didn't even know Dad used this place for a time, so he either used it before he had the place near Kuoh built, and abandoned it, or used it for such a short time that Uzume forgot he even did.

Speaking of, she and Kuroka are part of the reason I'm here.

This building is right next to the Emperor’s Residence, which those two are currently in to make sure everything is ready for…activities.

Judging by how horny they are though? It wouldn't shock me if their definition of ready was something like slapping down a bed and calling it a night.

Literally.

So, I'm in here, away from them, seeing if that will calm down their horny.

It probably won't, but hey? A man can dream.

I'm also here, however, because I figured the studious building would be the perfect place to make a quick list of what to do now.

To be fair, the Court Room probably fits better since this is more of a planning thing, but I don't feel like walking halfway across the palace grounds for that right now.

So this will have to do!

I sit down in the middle of an empty room, barely even the sound of the wind passing through the cypress wood walls.

There isn't even a chair here, nor even shelves for scrolls or books to study, but this will be enough.

I pull my new phone from my robe, the brand spanking new one I just bought on the way to the Palace, and open the notes app, creating a new note.

This list is going to be extra objectives that I need or want to do from now until…

Huh. I think the next big event that I can have any real part in is the Hero Faction assault in Kyoto.

Searching my memory quickly, I find that the canon date for their attack is sometime in October.

Five months away.

Hmm.

Well, the whole thing with Odin and Loki showing up happened something like a month or two before that.

But without the Three Factions Peace Conference, I'm not sure how the Norse would even get the chance to want to form some sort of alliance with the Shinto.

So, I'll put that out of my mind for now unless further evidence proves me otherwise, and focus on the Hero Faction for now.

I snort at the notion as if I'm going to be given that much time to train to prepare for them.

I'll train and train like they'll show up tomorrow, but otherwise? Hope for the best, and prepare for the worst.

And keep a very close eye on Kyoto, much closer than Kuoh.

For obvious reasons, of course.

Though Kokopuffs may be a factor, though honestly, at this point?

If Akeno hasn't gotten over her daddy issues yet even after the thoughtful gift sent her way, then this timeline is doomed.

I don't want to have to spank her into accepting herself, but if she would, she would make dealing with the mad fallen rather trivial.

Alternatively, make Koneko into one punch cat, so if the guy shows up? Well, one punch cat.

Is it any wonder I like that second idea more?

I wrote down ‘One Punch Cat(?)’ before moving on.

Speaking of cats, I quickly add in, ‘Figure out a method to purify Evil Pieces.’ beneath that.

I have a few ideas in mind already, mostly relating to the light-based powers that I barely use.

Using them to help regrow that forest after the Vali fight is making me question just what else I could do with them.

That…goes for most of my powers, now that I'm thinking about it.

Most of the time, the usage of my powers has been rather simple.

Hit it with the pointy end! Or burning end! Or stuff some energy in their eyes!

That type of stuff.

My ‘chakra’ specifically, hoping for the greatest amount of time, I should be able to explore that, as well as finish up my swordsmanship.

I'm closest to completing and actualizing Sun Breathing properly, so I should probably jump on that first.

Ah, let's not forget my martial arts as well! I want to try rolling that into my swordsmanship as well at some point, combining blade and fist, but that's a much more future project.

And on, and on, my private storming session went.

So much easier when you don't have to deal with horny maids, cat girls, or fox girls.

Who'd have thought?

Yet, none of this is taking into account all the other shit I might get pulled into…either by Yasaka, the other big Yokai Factions, or the Clans.

Like Suzaku. I don't know if I'm going to like what she has planned for me.

Honestly, I'm just thankful that I get this short reprieve from them all for now.

Having told Kunou of where we're moving into, so she could tell Yasaka, who could tell everyone else who needed telling because my phone got smashed, that I need a little bit of time, a day or two to prepare to talk with everyone again.

I let out a weary sigh.

By prepare, I mean have copious amounts of victory sex.

Not that I'm not looking forward to it, it's just the part after that I'm not.

Hmm. Other shit I might get pulled into.

After a brief pause, I slowly add the following.

‘How did Dad die, really.’

It's a suspicion of mine, that's been slowly building and building as time goes on.

If everything I've heard about him is true, then how did some random group of Fallen and Devils take him out?

Maybe, just maybe, I'm overthinking things. Even the best of the best could be taken out in a proper ambush, right?

Yet, still, something just isn't sitting right with me.

A shame then, that the only person supposedly left alive to see his death is also someone I…would rather not meet.

At least not for right now.

But I’ll do it, at the very least.

It's the last thing the old man asked of me before my clone left Tokyo, after all.

Ah.

I quickly add, ‘Visit the old man regularly.’ to the list with a smile.

Family, huh?

Maybe I should add seducing Koneko, Kunou, and Yasaka to the list as well?

Eh. Probably don't need to. Already been working on it. And it wouldn’t surprise me if Kuroka starts pushing for it harder now that soybean is taken care of.

I blink as a familiar presence pricks my sensory range.

Then quickly bolts right toward my location.

She's not even trying to hide, is she?

With a wistful sigh, I save my little note and put my phone away.

Well, at least with this little interruption I know exactly what to focus on next, hmm?

I didn't even get to say a word as I turned, only to be given a face full of chest as Kuroka slammed into me.

Ah, I'm most definitely going to purify the fuck out of this cat.

So could this be considered first testing then?

Well, not technically the first, but any good science has to be tested repeatedly regardless~!

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

Chapter 26 End


Hello there! And Happy Thanksgiving to all whom maybe celebrate it today!

Look at me, unborking my schedule for once in the past few weeks to actually post in the middle of the day rather then later at night.

Not gonna lie, of all times? This probably isn't the greatest because it's likely you all won't see this until later anyways.

But I managed it regardless, so yay!

Anywho, onto a little news. From here on out, I'm going to intersperse minor arcs, several of the things Nori mentioned he wants to do in this chapter, between bigger arcs, like the previous.

We've got a lot of free time after all, several months to spend, until the "final arc" as it were. Which means a fair few time skips, but there's also still plenty left to do. 

So, next up, Nori is going to figure out how to purify Evil Pieces. Then after that? Suzaku and Slash/Dog time. The next major arc, albeit not nearly as long as the one that just concluded, is going to be with the Norse.

Poor Nori. Not suspecting the nature of the world would slap him in the face like that. Who needs logic and reason when the old Norse Chief God is actually just a fucking melon head?

And, two more things.

One, I'm thinking about writing the threesome(?) that takes place directly after this and making that Interlewd 3. Victoy seggs, OOUGGHHH. You know, all that.

Two, I'm going to finish the first Chapter of Makin' Waves this weekend. I have the last bit outlined, I just need to wrangle my muse in and write the damn thing.

Now then, with that all being said?

I hope you lot have a wonderful weekend and thank you for sticking with me so far!

View Post

A New Sun Chapter 25

Chapter 25

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

Suzaku couldn't help but sigh.

She watched, perched atop a building as hundreds of thousands of Yokai - thankfully all disguised in their human forms - spilled out onto the streets of Kyoto.

Most of them are the same gangster cosplaying Oni, with a splash of other Yokai mixed in.

It would seem Noriaki’s little gift prevented a good portion of the lesser Yokai Factions from joining up right away, thankfully.

Although she doesn't think that would curtail them for long, it's much more likely that they're taking a ‘wait and see’ approach, as the Oni Daiyokai predictably flies off the handle.

“Lady Suzaku.” One of her Clan’s Shrine Maiden fades into view next to her, kowtowing as she does, “Everything is in order. Heir Nakiri and Lady Doumon have taken to the streets personally.”

“And Lord Kushihashi and Shinra?” Suzaku asked, although she already knew the answer.

“They have elected to stay at the Inner Sanucatory,” the Shrine Maiden informed her evenly, “citing the possibility of it being attacked. That the Oni Daiyokai might seek to free his master during this commotion.”

It took everything within Suzaku for her to not openly scoff at that.

Everyone knows that an attack on the Inner Sanctuary is bound to fail, the Yokai already tried it once after all, some four to five years ago.

Even now, she’d call the additional enhanced protections and barriers excessive. It would take all the Daiyokai present in Japan to work together to snap just the first one.

And by that time? Tobio would already have been called in for cleanup, just like the first time.

No, the only reason those two aren't out here is because one of them has a stick up his ass a mile wide, and the other is just being a dick.

Simple as that.

Regardless, their current forces would be enough.

“I see.” Suzaku mused, completely unamused, “Thank you for informing me. Please, return to your group, post haste,” she commanded with a glint in her eyes, watching as the Yokai procession began fanning out across the city, “things may start heating up sooner than expected~...”

The Shrine Maiden audibly gulped at that, “Y-Yes, my Lady.” She replied in confirmation before hurriedly getting up and jumping off.

Now all that's left is to see how far Ibaraki will go in his rage.

See, Oni pride isn't a fickle thing. Noriaki’s original challenge went uncared for due to a lack of respect.

Now he's forcing him to agree, such a killing must be avenged in kind after all, so Ibaraki must come personally to squash the disrespect done to him.

But that doesn't mean he has to agree to the letter of the challenge.

No, at this point? The Oni Daiyokai is fully out for blood. He will send his people at him, droves of Oni and any Yokai who are willing to sign up.

Not to kill him of course. That's the Fierce God's sole privilege at this point.

But, if the mobs sent after him are to rough him up a little and bring him to the Daiyokai’s feet barely alive, that still counts as a job well done.

So long as Ibaraki gets the last swing of the cudgel.

But even now, there's a limit.

The best way to drag out Noriaki would probably be to threaten the city, but doing that would incur the wrath of the West Yokai almost instantly.

They won't risk destroying the city, or disrupting the human world, not at the start at least.

The second best way then would be to go after those he cares about.

Sadly, as Suzaku notes, the only one she's aware of who's close to the man is that insufferable feline.

This means the last, most convoluted, most annoying option is underway.

A good old-fashioned manhunt!

Which normally wouldn't be a problem, if it weren't mostly Oni trying to do it.

Idly, almost without thinking, she holds up her hand, pointing her fingers like a gun, aiming at the streets below.

Just as an Oni, a blue one based on their jacket, tries to bring their club disguised as a baseball bat down on a shop window.

Sparks dance around the tips of her fingers.

And the Oni’s torso pops like a balloon.

Head, arms, and legs flop to the floor, as the remains of his torso flutter to the ground in ashes.

The small group of Oni and other Yokai around him quickly scream and scatter.

‘Convoluted’ and ‘annoying’ aren't two words that go well together with the Oni.

With a huff, she blows the tip of her finger gun, causing smoke to waft from it.

It just started, and she could sense the rowdiness already beginning to pick up throughout the city.

So far, it's basic petty gang stuff, but it's only a matter of when it'll escalate to full-on supernatural battles that threaten the masquerade.

Truthfully, she doesn't know how this isn't going to blow up before morning.

Luckily, they've got the city locked down for the event.

Exorcists from the Clans are out prowling the streets, putting down Yokai that threaten humans or the city, purifying them on the spot.

Mystics from the Five Clans, and even Onmyoji from the Bureau, are out putting down barrier fields and traps for the inevitable twist from roughhousing to a battlefield.

Even other Yokai are starting to go out and contest the Oni across the city, both trickling in from outside the city and from within.

Interesting. Albeit not surprising considering the Oni aren't exactly popular.

For now, all they can do is try to squash and put down these idiots, and pray the message sticks long enough for morning to come and Noriaki with it.

Then he can put down Ibaraki, and they can finally get to other funner things that don't involve small-scale war!

She already has an idea or two on what to cash that favor in on for having to deal with that unbearable black cat~...

But, well, for now. She supposes she can take out some of her toiling emotions on these idiots.

The Oni haven't been acting up for the past few centuries, not since their former leader Shuten was sealed and Mt. Oe was massacred.

Therefore, it's been a long time since anyone has hunted Oni.

With a wave of her hand, the discarded limbs and head are set alight and join the torso in ash.

Leaping off her perch to another, Suzaku can't help the wry smile spreading across her face at the thought.

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

I sit now at the parapet, the barrier set up to separate Kyoto from the outside world.

While non-supernatural beings can still leave and enter freely, for supernatural beings it only goes one way.

In.

As soon as I cross this boundary, I'll be stuck in the city with a very angry Oni Daiyokai who's currently sent his entire army out after me.

According to Suzaku via the good old cellphone, it sounds like he brought nearly all the Oni from Mt. Oe with him.

Yokai flooding and dispersing throughout the streets in cacophonous waves, as time slowly ticks on, things will continue to escalate, further and further.

Lucky doesn't even begin to describe the situation so far.

The fact that hasn't immediately devolved into a full-on battle inside the city is itself marvelous.

On top of that, we don't have to wait too long for the sun to rise, it's the main reason why I say it's so lucky.

In the middle of May, the sun dawns at a little over four in the morning, with the sun rising entirely into the sky at a little under five.

I pushed the limits of sending that package, sending it practically right at the last second, and it paid off so far.

When I'm so focused on it, I can feel it, the sun as it begins to rise, even before it breaks over the horizon.

Dawn is oh so close.

I take a long deep breath, not even one meant for battle, just one to breathe.

A pair of slender arms wrap gently around my neck, with a soft body clinging closely to my back shortly after.

“Darling~?” Kuroka purred warmly into my ear, “Feeling nervous, nyah~?”

I chuckle softly, “Yeah, just a little.”

And why wouldn't I be? I'm waiting for the other shoe to drop.

As the saying goes, no first plan survives contact with the enemy.

In the best-case scenario, Ibaraki doesn't come out until noon.

In the worst case? He comes out now, and I have to play a game of cat and mouse with him, trying to stall for as much time as humanly possible.

You know, this power of mine is practically Sunshine, but holy fuck did Escanor not have nearly as large of a problem with getting to use it as I'm having.

For him, whenever he needed to, it was high noon and he was ready to clobber a motherfucker.

Or, when it was the middle of the night, he pulled out some bullshit like simping over Merlin counting as being ‘his sun’ so he could use it!

And I'm over here with a straight-up sun in my chest, and I can't do that!

Well. Maybe it's a matter of needing to train it more until I can activate it whenever via Shonen logic.

Considering a good chunk of the battles here are likely to take place in alternate dimensions and barrier spaces where there isn't a sun at all, it's something to look into.

Later. I don't want to continue relying on this aspect of my power for wins.

A kiss on my cheek brings me from thoughts.

“Myah~! Well, don't you worry…I’ll be with you every step of the way!” She affirms with a mischievous smirk.

I reach my hand up over my shoulder and start scratching her ears, leaning back into her touch as I do.

Can I just say I'm highly considering breeding this cat when this is all over?

Maybe it's just the upcoming life-or-death battle that's got me feeling this kind of way, but still.

I know what I need to do for sure after this is start looking into a way of reversing or purifying her reincarnation, so the Underworld holds no sway over her anymore.

It would also have the side effect of making breeding her much easier, too.

…I'm sure she’d zero in on that bit the most, huh?

For the time being, we sit there in a comfortable, if foreboding, silence.

When you're waiting for something, somehow, someway, it feels like it takes both an eternity to happen and comes far too soon.

That's how it felt when dawn finally arrived.



When yellowish-orange light finally broke over the horizon, coloring the darkened sky over the city with purple and blue.

And the way it was tinged with a rusty red, as cold dread filled the air.

Oh. Fuck.

I didn't even need to look at the messages blowing up my phone to understand what was going on, I felt it.

Ibaraki is in Kyoto.

Judging by the fact I haven't heard anything exploding, he isn't out trashing the place.

But I need to give him something to focus on before he does that or shatters the barrier around the city.

Either way could make shit hit the fan real quick.

I stand up, bringing Kuroka with me as if she were a backpack.

“Time to go.” I intoned while checking my phone to check and see if Suzaku had an exact location.

Ah. The moment he left he destroyed her Shikigami that she had watching Urakyoto’s entrance and exits.

Joy.

Shadow Clones it is.

All of my clones at this point had popped a while ago, and whatever help I was going to get had been acquired.

It isn't much of a shock that the smaller Yokai Factions I reached out to didn't care about me, they just wanted to bloody the Oni.

Although I doubt anyone is going to step up to fight Ibaraki besides maybe Yasaka if he starts destroying the city.

Still, extra hands are always nice, even if it's just to deal with the grunts.

With a simple sign, I create the maximum amount of clones I can manage, around half a dozen.

I spread them out, and send them in first.

It's been a while since I kited a boss, but I hope I haven't gotten too rusty now.

“You ready, kitty?” I ask tentatively, stepping toward the boundary.

Another kiss on my cheek sends a nice warm feeling to beat against the nervous ache in my stomach.

“As ready as ever~! I worked really hard on my special Onigami poison you know, nyah~!” She licked her lips, her smirk turning just a bit feral, “I can't wait to see how it works in some live testing.

I give her a weary chuckle and a slight shake of my head before I step through the barrier space myself.

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

When was the last time the Fierce God was forced to take to the field of battle himself?

Truthfully, he gave them until dawn to find the boy knowing full well they likely wouldn't.

It was a toss-up on if he was even in Kyoto at all, or had taken Mt. Oe as his to hide in.

Judging by the fact the little coward seems so intent on challenging him, and drawing him into a fight, he’ll assume he's here in the city for now.

Either way, the Onigami couldn't care less.

If he isn't, smashing the barrier around the city and taking an enthusiastic walk home wouldn't take long anyway.

Considering the paper familiars he leveled into fine ash with a single swing of his club, the paper familiars watching the way to and from Urakyoto, it would appear the boy has some help. Likely from the Clans.

Ibaraki isn't surprised. It still won't save him.

The question now becomes, how to go about finding him?

The urge to start smashing shit was of course his first thought, but that's more likely to draw the ire of the fox cunt rather than the boy first.

And although using the fox's tits like oversized baseballs for his club sounds absolutely cathartic right now, he doesn't feel like fucking around anymore.

Which is why he decided to start with a bang.

In his Human form, Ibaraki appeared like an extremely tall Yakuza or gang boss on a slight chunni streak.

His mostly former business attire was marred over by a long crimson red coat, embroidered on the back with the fearsome visage of a black Oni, crowned with five horns, the symbol of his power much like an Angel their wings or a Kitsune and Nekomata their tails.

The visage is a perfect color-swapped recreation of his looks, bare one important detail.

This image? Has three eyes.

In the middle of the street, Ibaraki smashed his fists together, Youjutsu seals stamping and burning over top of each other.

With a simple motion, he turned each of his clasped fists in the opposite direction as if turning a key inside a lock.

A single symbol burned itself into existence atop his forehead, glowing as red as his true form's skin.

As it wafted away, his skin shifted and opened.

His third eye was open for the first time in centuries.

He cared little for the few humans around him who saw him and screamed, before running in terror.

As long as he didn't physically touch them, the fox cunt could complain, but not come face him.

His making them take care of whipping and changing memories will give them to do in the meantime, keep them off his ass for a while.

Now like this, he could see everything.

He could see the way the leylines flowed in from across Japan and congregated in the city of Kyoto.

He could see every single Yokai within the barricaded city with ease, their unique Yoki painted against the backdrop of the lifestream in his mind's eye.

And most importantly?

He could see the Holy Spirit Power of the gods, the Kami, from the shrines to the beings themselves.

Kyoto is considered the cultural capital of Japan by the human population, and it is shown by the sheer number of temples and shrines within the city.

All this divine power, all huddled so close together, to his enhanced senses makes it feel like he's surrounded by fireworks.

But he will push through. He must.

He can feel it, the Holy Spirit Power from the Shinto Shrines, and even the Sacred Power from the Buddhist Temples, as they burn bright, flickering seemingly in response to the goings on around them.

They are watching the chaos as it unfolds in Kyoto.

The Gods are watching.

Ibaraki let out a grin, a savage feral thing, followed by a loud bark of laughter, summoning his club disguised as a baseball bat to his hand as he did.

Good. Let the divine have a front-row seat to the finale of their meddling.

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

Due to time, I don't think Prime gave us numbers, huh?

Hmm! Well, how about I call myself…Nori Ichi then? Nori One?

I was the first to get made after all!

Now then. Where was I? Right, right.

My garbage sensing abilities aren't making this job any easier.

Us clones have one job, randomly flare our power as we run across the city, and try to draw the big red chili pepper in.

Then get bodied if he decides to pick us, but we're clones, so it's not like we matter.

Repeat ad infinitum until noon, or however close we can get to it.

Good ol’ Prime is squatting at the ambush spot, where the Bureau set up that special barrier.

Now all we have to do is do what we do best.

Be a bunch of little trolls!

Which is why I'm wandering around looking for soybeans.

For no particular reason, trust.

Say, how long has it been? Need to keep a watch or something…

I suddenly stopped walking.

Not because I wanted to. Or because I remembered something.

No, I just can't move.

Every hair across my body stands on end, and footsteps, loud and heavy, approaches from my right.

I barely manage to crane my head to the side, watching as a unit of a man approaches, bat idly swinging around in one hand.

I'd say he looks like you're over-compensating chuuni yakuza or mob boss straight out of a video game with that coat, but the actual third fucking eye doesn't do anything to help that image.

There you are.” The Onigami in ‘disguise’ growls out, “You won't escape this time.

Hmm. If he does his whole villain speech and then pops me, how pissed off would that make him?

For that reason, I keep my mouth zipped for now.

Then he just keeps walking toward me once more, a savage grin on his face, and he speaks no more.

…wait, really? That's it?

Man, this guy must suck at parties.

Oh well.

“S-Say, I've got a question for ya?” I manage, voice unintentionally quivering under the sheer pressure in the air.

The Fierce God snarls, violent purple ki bursting out and coating the tip of his bat as he walks.

I take a deep gulping breath.

“Do you t-take your soybeans yellow, white, black, red, or green?” I ask, with the utmost serious and solemn expression I can muster.

Ibaraki pauses. He looks at me, well more like glares down at me, and for one beautiful moment, he looks completely dumbfounded, his face scrunched up in distaste.

Then he grumbled, “Red.”

Did he just fucking answer me!?

Well, I guess I should have expected that, considering, you know—

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

My head buzzes as a set of new memories slam into my brain.

Slowly but surely getting easier to handle, but not quick enough.

Especially when a new set of memories ends with a bat to the face.

Also. Soybeans? Really?

This one clone wandered around the wrong side of Kyoto for soybeans, for a little over half an hour.

On the bright side, it is now sunrise.



The sun is now visible completely in a deep blue sky, the horizon awash with yellow and orange light.

On the not-so-bright side, that was kind of quick, wasn't it?

Granted, there's that paradoxical feeling again…

I shake my head and return to my meditation, in that same little bus booth from where those Oni tried to ‘jump’ me before.

Just passing the time at the spot I told him I would be waiting for him for my first challenge.

Because there's no way I would be here for the second one, right?

Right. Most definitely. That would be crazy.

Heh.

Another half an hour passes in the blink of an eye until my next clone gets tracked.

Then a little under that for that next, and the next, and the next.

He's getting faster.

Another twenty for the last, and as the last one pops I send out more.

The next batch gets taken down at roughly the same continuous speed.

That third eye of his, huh?

One of my clones tried throwing roasted soybeans in his eye, unfortunately, it didn't work.

That poor guy got particularly blasted. He used yellow beans after all.

Regardless, it's now a little past eight.

Solar noon in Japan is eleven fifty-three these days, if I want overkill, I need three more hours.

But that's just not feasible.

I open my eyes, as the world around us shifts, the special barrier space I had prepared triggering and folding in place.

Standing there, in the middle of the street, is the Fierce God himself.

His face is contorted into one of snarling rage, and his skin is a mix of a half-disguised human tan and beat Oni red.

Wonder what got under his skin, eh?

“Took you long enough.” I idly note, ignoring the pressure preventing me from standing for now.

I'll fix that soon.

“I don't know if I even want to ask, at this point.” The Oni growls out through gritted teeth, his Youki visibly leaking into the air around him, giving him a purplish-red aura.

“Hey now, I'm the real deal!” I happily confirm with a wry smirk.

“That's what the last four of those…things…said!” He points his bat at me, the aura of Youki swirling and gathering to the tip of his bat as he does so.

“Well, I suppose there's only one way for you to find out, right?” I ask with a raised eyebrow.

The vicious smile that spread across his face at my words, twitching occasionally with sheer rage nearly made me chuckle.

Nearly, but a bat was swinging for my face at that moment.

So instead, I remain still, emptying my mind as much as possible, and take a deep breath…

And in the moment before his strike connects, a honey-colored aura springs up and glows around me like molten gold.

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

A flash of gold overcame his vision.

Then dust and rock and debris overtook it all, yet no blood.

Another one, then!?

See?” The Fierce God stopped his ranging thoughts at the nearly echoing voice and turned to the side, just as the dust and dirt settled, revealing the boy whole…and changed.

“Told you I was the real one, yeah?” He smirked, but Ibaraki only snarled back.

“Real or not, you should be dead.” He spat out, “What did you do, boy.

With his eye, he could see something going on.

Divine power flowed into and through the boy from all directions, yet seemingly coming from nowhere.

This power took on the form of a honey-colored aura, clad on his body like a second skin, glowing with the ferocity of molten gold.

From the freshly destroyed booth, a trail of fresh magma and slag followed straight to the boy where he now stands, the ground around him even now continuing to melt as he just stands there.

The only blemishment that marred him was the nasty-looking bruise on his forearm, the torn sleeve of his robe showing it.

Holding up his bat, Ibaraki bit back another growl, seeing the bit near the top glowing red hot.

The change in his hair color, and those markings going up his face…this is that same form from his fight with the Red Dragon, isn't it?

But even then, it should not be this strong! To take one of his blows, even if not yet entirely serious…

Hmm,” the boy hummed, turning over his arm and looking at it with a click of his tongue, “that's for me to know, and you to guess for what little time you have left.” He idly threatened.

Now at that, Ibaraki barked out a laugh.

“Just because you gained a little bit of strength, doesn't mean you are my match, boy!” He denied his threat with ease.

The boy craned his head to the side, with eerily unblinking eyes, “You ever played Pocket Monsters before?”

“What does a children’s game have to do with any of this!?” Ibaraki howled in indignation.

Slowly, the boy drew his golden sword from his back.

You’re a Charizard.

His sword burst with swirling flames and sparkling light, the two powers converging with a pop, becoming a roaring hurricane of golden fire around his blade.

“And I'm a Stone Edge on crack.

With that comparison, the boy charged. A haze of golden fire and divine light followed him like a comet.

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

Dance.

I bring my blade down upon the Oni Daiyokai like a guillotine.

His bat, coated in his ugly purple Youki, comes up and stops it.

He snarls like a mad beast as I push down, due to the aura around his weapon, my blade isn't directly touching his bat.

Yet even still, the thing is starting to glow.

I let my power run wild and free, golden fire encircling the two of us in a wild dance.

It burns away at his clothes, at his human skin, at his power, and I smile down upon him.

Despite him being taller, of course.

My smile turns to a smirk as his human-sized form begins to contort, twist, and crack.

Youki spills from every pore of his body, and he roars, his aura bellowing from his body in one huge pillar.

My fire and light are pushed away, but not snuffed as I'm sent skidding back once more, eyeing the Fierce God in his Yokai form.

Five horns, three eyes, Oni club nearly as big as me, at least twice as tall as before, and leopard skin loincloth.

Although not in his kaiju-sized form, which I'm willing to be in his true form.

Of which I'm thankful he isn't in, at this distance, I could probably see up his loincloth.

Kusanagi!!!” The red Oni roars, punching the air as he does.

A red Youjoutsu symbol burns itself into reality.

Flame-

The air cracks at the symbol and a deluge of red lightning comes from it, cascading forth like a wave.

Dance.

My golden flame-encrusted sword lashes out twice, carving the wave into fourths and directing them around me.

I can hear it, the destruction that single attack wrought, as it tears through the fake street block behind me like a hurricane of whips.

My turn.

Sunflower Thrust.

I blaze forth like a comet once more, just as the Daiyokai raised his Youki-clad club.

Encompassed by spiraling with golden flames, I fly under his swing and slam into his stomach like a fireball.

His club smashes into the ground, Youki and rock alike blasting into the air like a geyser as he roars in pain.

My golden blade, roaring itself with Holy Spirit Power, and Holy Spirit Fire alike, can easily tear and pierce Yokai flesh.

As I just did his stomach, lodging my blade into his gut.

With a twist of my blade, fire bursts from either side of the hole in his body, prompting another roar of pain.

My eyes dart to the left, as I suddenly pull the blade from his body.

With a deft leap, I flip over his incoming grasping hand, using it like a springboard even to launch myself further up.

My eyes widen as I barely have time to hold up my blade, blocking his horns from goring me at the sudden attempt to headbutt me.

The force of just blocking the attack sends me flying into the ground, striking it like a comet.

I look up from my strike zone and roll backward into a flip as a big red foot comes following up.

The resulting stomp carves an even deeper hole in my impact crater, with my landing safely at the edge of the destruction.

I raise my sword, looking to take some toes for that, only for a big red Youjutsu symbol to suddenly appear beneath his foot, carving itself into the ground.

With me standing just within its space.

I move to jump, only to find everything solid beneath me give way far too quickly for me to react.

Ibaraki pushed his foot down, and the ground around me rose like a liquid sludge, crashing around me, enveloping me, and dragging me up with it.

Trapped in the mud-like substance, I couldn't see, I couldn't even move, but I could hear.

I could hear the muffled sound of air parting-

My power, my aura, wraps around me like a tight shell at my command, just as the mud rumbles and parts.

His club swings through the pillar of mud like a baseball bat and strikes me like a ball.

The mud blows apart, my shell exploding with it as I go flying, ragdolling through the air.

When I hit the first building, my arm snapped the wrong way.

The second? My leg bent at the knee.

I don't know how many buildings I hit, I only counted the last thunderous sound as my impromptu flight was stopped suddenly by dead air.

My mangled form was caught in a web of cracks in the air, made from my slamming into it.

He hit me straight to the edge of the barrier space.

With a groan, I slowly dislodge myself from the boundary, watching my aura cascade across my form, fixing kinks and bends and snaps with similar sounds of its own.

For a split second, a manic smirk splits across my face before I quickly pull it back, my aura flaring.

I groan once more.

Slipping already? Seriously?

During my testing the other day, I figured out that up to a certain point, I can kind of ‘control’ myself when in this state.

Kind of. See, it's not controlled, not truly, more like going with the flow tentatively.

Ara-Mitama. My violent half. Unlike Kami, it's always a part of me, I don't need a big shonen moment to realize that the wording was literal.

If I had to guess, it's my battle-maniac tendencies taken to the extreme.

But it's still mine. I can take the reins, but the horse loves to buck, especially during fights it seems.

Generally speaking? I can tell how far along I am to lose it based on how badly I want to kill everything in front of me.

Or when the clock strikes ten, that's the point I naturally succumb anyway.

“Kuroka…” I mutter seemingly to the air, “It's time.”

And I'm feeling pretty damn violent right about now…

Slowly, from the cracks behind me, a light purple mist begins to seep through.

Not just there, the mist starts coming out from across the entire boundary, seemingly from out from under it.

I have but one goal now.

Finish this before I lose myself entirely.

At least then, I won't feel so…dirty, afterward.

The first step? Smother his powers and Youki with my own.

I breathe deeply, pulling on my power at the same time.

When I breathe out, it's a tsunami wave of golden fire, crashing down to the ground and rampaging forth, bathing the fake city in a spreading torrent of flames.

The next step?

I land on the ground amongst a city awash in a sea of golden flames, power throbbing and visibly humming in the air.

Hit him really hard.

I kick off the ground, blasting forward like a bullet train, quickly catching up to my expanding wave of fire.

Just as it reaches the Oni.

Dancing Flash.

I leap through the wave and lash out, my sword cutting into another pillar of mud just as it forms.

The flames roar and splash into the makeshift mud breakwater, rapidly baking them solid once more.

With a twist of my blade, I cut the solid earthen wall in half.

I feel my eyes spin as I almost idly dodge a club swing poised to bat me away again.

My halo forms from my aura at my back as I do so, bursting into the air, beholding the snarling Oni below me.

He diverted the wave of fire around him with his mud wall, but not the poison mist slowly seeping in from all around.

Looking around, he seems to notice the mist and growls.

Hmm. How to stop him from dealing with it and advance my cause?

Ah. No biggie. I'll just add more fire.

My mouth opened, but instead of expelling words, I expelled a column of flame.

Ibaraki seemed to understand what my intentions were, however, as he punched out, stamping reality with his power once more, creating a net or web of red lightning to catch and disperse the flames like an umbrella.

I huff embers as the net bursts apart.

Well. I do have another way of adding more fire to the fire, as it were.

The first time I used this against Vali, he face-tanked it well.

Ibaraki shall not.

My blade ignites with wild roaring golden flames.

First Form, Dance.

The air cracks like thunder as I burst down straight at him, my blade arching down with me, bringing an arc of flame down upon the Oni.

Ibaraki raises his club, holding back the strike as the fire splashes around him, just like my first attack.

Second Form, Clear Blue Sky.

I twist, spinning my body and slashing out in a circular motion, prompting a ring of golden fire to whirl out around me.

The force was like a spinning wheel, pushing the growling Oni back, his feet digging against the ground as his club was forced to the side.

Only for him to plant his feet, and swing it back.

Third Form, Raging Sun.

Like clockwork, I strike back.

Not so much as beating the oversized club back as shifting and redirecting its movement around me within the wave of flames.

He swings twice, one left and one right, each with a howl as he sees each blow merely graze me.

Fourth Form, Burning Bones, Summer Sun.

His next attack comes straight down, and I spiral up to meet it.

Flames twist, rise, and whirl out of my attack like a cyclone as our weapons clash, traveling down his club and splashing onto him directly.

He roars as he's overtaken by the flames for a brief moment, and I grunt as he wins our clash of force, beating me down to the ground once more.

Fifth Form, Setting Sun Transformation.

I burst from the cloud of rock and dirt almost as soon as I made it, backflipping into the air.

He's too tall for me to reach his neck in time while he's distracted being on fire so I'll settle for slashing something else.

GRRAAAAAHHHH!!!”

He roars in anguish as I slash open one of his knees.

Sixth Form, Solar Heat Haze.

Predictably, he swings down wildly for me in retribution.

The flames around my blade, hell, around the area in general swirl around me as I move, cloaked by the heat and fire.

His wild swing clips my hair as I go under it, and his fist follows up quickly to pick up the slack.

I slash, aiming to take a few digits off, but a Youjutsu symbol bars and clashes against my blade, despite its being concealed, perfectly, protecting his knuckle.

Looking past the flames, and his fist, I see his three eyes strain in bloodshot outrage as he looks down at me.

Hmm…

Seventh Form, Beneficent Radiance.

I twist and spiral around his fist as it continues its descent, slashing as I move not to deal damage, but to use the force to make myself be thrown ‘off course’.

Eighth Form, Sunflower Thrust.

Fire explodes out of my feet like a jet engine on steroids, uncaring for the fake city behind me.

At the same time, I pushed my normal flight ability to its extreme.

I shot myself straight up, more a bullet than a comet, and stabbed forward.

Right into his big third eye.

With enough force to snap his back and send him staggering back slightly.

What? You can't have such a big ‘hit me here!’ sign like that and expect me not to!

Ninth Form, Sun Halo Dragon Head Dance.

I don't get time to wrench my blade from his oversized socket, as I'm suddenly violently thrown off by a blood-curdling roar, equal parts pain and horror.

His Youki once more erupted off him and into the sky in a pillar as his size thrummed several more meters, just like he was when he fought Yasaka, any fire that was on him was flung off like dust.

He didn't appear to grow any stronger, just bigger.

In truth, this entire time, he's just been growing weaker.

With every attack he takes, the longer he stays in these flames, he gets weaker, poisoned by light, and suppressed by divine powers.

Although, now that he's so much bigger, I'm going to need to add more fire, aren't I?

He starts to scream something, but I merely ignore him as I raise my blade high, a pillar of golden fire exploding forth from me and my blade.

I tense my body so much it buzzes with the telltale sign of pain, before slashing once, gathering all the golden flames along the blade as I do.

What follows the stroke of my blade is more like a beam of fire rather than a slash, all in the shape of a solar dragon.

It roars forth, thundering against the air as it slams into the supersized Oni, completely enveloping him waist up with golden fire.

The force was enough to send him straight on his ass, reeling back as his roars of pain were drowned in the flame.

Now to make sure he doesn't stand back up

Tenth Form, Improvised, Lateral Fire Wheel.

I fly forward with a burst of flames, aimed down straight at his legs.

Specifically, the knee I slashed earlier.

The Oni is too busy trying to put out the bonfire that is his upper half to even see it coming, especially without his third eye.

I blast into his non-existent guard, and with a flip, complete the cut.

There is no sound of the leg falling as it's already on the ground.

But there is a roar of indignation and anguish, as usual.

“How is your throat not shot yet?” I muse aloud, continuing to fly forward.

I see the shadow of his face in the flames as his mouth opens, lights flicker as his aura gathers, and he expels it with a roar as several dozens of bullets of power.

Very clever answer, Ibaraki, very clever.

Eleventh Form, Fake Rainbow.

But my path forward is clear, I will not be denied.

I twist and rotate, flames blasting from the soles of my feet as I move.

Several dozens of afterimages, all dodging his bullets, tell him exactly what I think of his reply.

Twelfth Form, Flame Dance.

In a blur, I reached his center, my blade preemptively poised as I struck.

Two slashes, one on top of the other, one vertical, and one horizontal.

But rather than carve through a lightning attack, it carves a ‘+’ into his chest.

Thirteenth Form.

The force of my final two strikes finally parts the flames rampaging across his torso, showing the extent of his burnt form.

Almost like charcoal in some places, charred and tender in most.

Y-You…” I look up, seeing him looking down upon me, his face scorched and swelled, yet still, somehow I can see the telltale contortions of rage, “I won't…accept this…” he grumbles, seething, holding onto a nearby building to stop himself from fall over, as he lifts his club once more, “you poison me…weaken me…I’ll kill you…I’ll…

I float up to be face level with him.

He swings his club.

It clangs as it slams into me, and bends around me, the immediate parts close to me superheating and melting away almost instantly.

He pulls his club back, staring at it as its melted half falls off to the ground.

With a low groan, he fell back onto the ground at last.

I stare down at him, as I feel his life finally dwindle, devoured and eradicated by my light and power.

I let out a sigh that I'd been holding in for the longest time, before muttering.

“Red soybeans, extra roasted, just the way you like, right?”

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

Chapter 25 End


This was supposed to have come out like...three hours ago.

Then I went from nearly 4k words to nearly 7k, damn near double what I orginally had written.

Fitting, I suppose, for an arcs final chapter, eh?

Le, accurate power levels.

Ibaraki - Mid Satan Class (Kunou was very biased, he is stronger then Yasaka, who's Low Satan herself, it’s just Yasaka can beat him back with fox fire and her infinite ki hax due to leyline connection.)

Noriaki (8am Morning Sun) - Bottom Satan Class, and growing.

With Kuroka’s poison, and Noriaki being Stone Edge to Ibaraki’s Charizard, he was kind of fucked once Noriaki could hit Satan Class, then weaken him until the power gap closed.

Nori planned a hell of a lot for this, finagle him into a proper time to fight, stalling for time, and Kuroka doing experiments to get a poison that would actually work on Ibaraki, it wouldn’t have gone so smooth otherwise.

View Post

A New Sun Interlude 5

Interlude 5

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

Tokyo is beautiful this time of year.

It's such a damn shame I'm here for business rather than pleasure, truly, I should have visited the city sooner.

As soon as I entered the city area so to speak, I could feel the shift, in the very air itself.

The sun seemed just a tad more vibrant, the air somehow seemed cleaner, and I don't get how.

It's like the Shinkai was peeking through in this place, just a little bit.

On top of that, judging from my admittedly short stride to the Tokyo Imperial Palace from the train station, the place also seemed strangely clean of foreign supernatural influence.

As in, I didn't blatantly run into a Devil Hotel or one of the old Grigori’s random businesses.

Like titty clubs.

Seriously. Why?

But no, as far as I could tell, it was purely Japanese businesses and shops on my trip.

Maybe I'm just too used to Kyoto, what with Yasaka encouraging such mixing and peace, while the Imperial Family here is supposedly just as isolationist as the Kami, save a few outliers of course.

Maybe it runs in the family?

Regardless, Prime Nori is going to miss seeing them for himself!

As a side note though.

I stand at the entrance gate to the Tokyo Imperial Palace, my phone in hand showing a map of the East Garden.

The only part available to the public.

Slight problem.

The Imperial Household Agency HQ isn't in the East Garden!

Or at least this map from said agency's website isn't saying its headquarters is there.

Which, for one, means I don't have an excuse to walk through the East Garden.

There's supposedly a part of the Garden called the Ninomaru Garden, where trees representing each prefecture in Japan are planted.

Two hundred sixty trees, thirty different varieties, sounded cool to see.

Now I don't have an excuse to take a quick peek.

The second, much more pressing issue, is I'm going to have to trespass to find the place I'm looking for.

Now, see, I should just walk up to someone…like a guard…state who I am, and ask to be brought or led there, but there's also a slight issue with that.

There's nobody here.

I got here pretty early, right at when the Palace opens to the public at nine, so I could get there not being many, if any, visitors so early.

But there are also no guards. I can’t see or sense anyone around.

Now, the Palace grounds are pretty big, my sensing range currently can't cover it all.

But still, this is starting to feel like the Himejima all over again!

There better not be a stupid fallen malding out here that I have to kill or something.

So am I just supposed to…walk in?

‘...the moment you set foot on the grounds of the Imperial Palace, they'll know.’

Uzume’s minimal instructions flared in the back of my mind.

The way things have been playing out, I would be surprised if they knew about me the moment I entered Tokyo.

Well. Shit. Here goes nothing, I guess?

I take a step forward, passing under the gate, into the East Garden proper.

And…nothing happens? I don't even feel myself passing through a barrier.

Very fucking eerie. I still don't see or sense anyone.

With a deep sigh, I start walking, following the shortest path I can to my destination.

The Imperial Palace is more or less cut in two, the East Garden which is available to the public, and the Inner Grounds, which is where the Emperor of Japan and his Family live and work.

My destination then, is the Inner Grounds. The Agency building should be in there, likely around other administrative buildings, all in a nice cluster.

…You know, actually thinking about it now sends a shiver up my spine.

My Dad, Kunihito, was the Crown Prince.

My Grandfather is the Emperor of Japan.

Why is that just now settling in while I'm here?

Fuck it feels very weird to even be thinking that.

And I don't even know what the man looks like, my Grandfather.

I also find myself, despite it feeling weird, also…not caring all that much?

Still feels weird, but I've never met this side of my family, we're strangers.

Their status means practically nothing to me.

I'm drawn from my thoughts as I begin crossing the bridge to the East Garden into the Inner Grounds.

Tilting my head slightly, I see the wind as it physically brushes through the trees, and the water as it rushes and laps under the bridge.

Huh. The closer I get to the Grounds, the more alike the world seems to be to the Shinkai.

Say, isn't that the Imperial Palace off in the distance there?

“It is beautiful, isn't it?” An aged male voice resounds thoughtfully directly to my right, “Although, I suspect you see more than even I, don't you?”

What in the fuck.

I whip my head toward the direction of the voice.

Standing there, looking out at the water, is a short old man.

Despite his age, I'd say the years seemed to have done him rather well, unlike Suou, this man has aged gracefully and majestically.

White and gray hair neatly trimmed and cut, clean-shaven, the works. And with a rather dapper and clean, albeit standard, formal suit and tie.

For my part, I'm wearing the same outfit I wore to Urakyoto, my sword, kimono, suit, and all.

But putting that aside for the moment…

Why does this old man feel like a tree or blade of grass to my senses?

The old man turns to look at me slightly, an amused twinkle in his dark red eye at what I imagine is my very shocked expression.

“Surprised, hmm?” He hums out.

“That’s a bit of an understatement,” I manage to mutter, “who are you?”

He gave a small smile at my question.

Then began to pull up his left suit sleeve, tugging it up to his elbow.

Showing a dark red flame-like mark cascading down his forearm, ending a little above halfway to his wrist.

Huh.

I look down at my chest, pulling my dress shirt collar to the side slightly, revealing the similarly designed mark across my clavicle.

“Oh…” I responded, oh so very intelligently.

The old man, my Grandfather, chuckled, rolling back up his sleeve, “Oh indeed.”

“It's, uh…” I trail off, unsure of what to say, “Nice to meet you?”

Nailed it!

“It's nice to finally meet you as well, although I wish it were under less pressing circumstances…” he mused aloud, amusement slowly draining from his voice, “Perhaps we should take this inside? Tea always helps calm the nerves, in my experience.”

Ah, he could tell that?

I guess I'm not doing anything to try and hide it, huh?

“Sure,” I sigh and give a slight nod, “let's do it.”

“Very well.” He turns and starts walking across the bridge, “Walk with me, and try to calm yourself...here, you are amongst long-lost friends and family.”

That is precisely why I'm slightly freaked out here!

Regardless, with a deep breath, and a shake of my head, I follow him off into the Inner Grounds.

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

I was led to a cluster of three big modern buildings, all interconnected with each other, we entered one of them.

I'm not sure if it's the Agency building, none of them had big names or signs, but regardless we ended up in a rather simple room.

Fairly small and plain, with only a table and a couple of chairs, all modern office styled.

I will say, in this case, I welcome the more plain scenery. If the world kept getting any more vibrant it would be pretty damn distracting.

Small teacup in my hand, I look over to the old man sitting across from me, as he sips gingerly from his cup.

Deep breaths, Nori, you can do this. Then you can blame Prime later because he's too much of a pussy to do this himself!

“So,” I began, nice and steady, “It sounds like you already have an idea as to why I'm here then?”

He looked up at me from his cup, and sighed, “We are aware of the Night Parade, yes. We also figured it was called over your rather dramatic reveal to the supernatural world. Is it correct to assume you are here to ask for assistance?”

“Yeah,” I wince, “although, I originally didn't intend for our first meeting to be for such…before all that, I was going to go around and meet everyone, all the factions in Japan that would open their doors for me. You guys included, just to have a chat, and see what's been going on since my…father.”

I mention him without thinking, and the old man before me gives a solemn yet understanding nod but doesn't speak up.

So, I continued, “...Did all his stuff, though I'm sure you're aware. I especially didn't think I'd see you, for a long time.”

“What reason would I have, not to finally see my grandson?” He raised his question with his eyebrow.

I give a weary chuckle to that, “I don't know. I didn't know what to expect from you, or what kind of person you are…hell, I don't even know much about the Imperial Family as a whole. I only just recently learned of my father's station.”

He huffed to all that, “I see the Kami tell you just as little then, hmm?”

“To be fair, I didn't ask,” I shake my head, “never had much reason too.”

“Only because you didn't know you could have in the first place, and then, after a while…once you finally learned…” he sighed, “apathy, yes?”

“Ah…yeah.” I rub the back of my head. “Sorry, really, I just—”

He raised a hand to stop me, “Don’t be. Really. It is not your fault.”

“I…guess?” I take a sip myself, “Still, I feel kinda bad.”

He gives a wistful smile at that, “You have heart, Norihito. Just like your father, albeit, he didn't express it nearly as much on the outside.”

Norihito?

Ah, that's what Dad wanted to name me, right?

“Speaking of him,” the man continued, “cleanliness, ceremony, and tradition,” he intoned like a mantra, “nowadays, that is what it means to be a part of this family. The Imperial Household Agency…while I wouldn't say runs our lives, they certainly have a significant say. This, combined with when Kunihito learned about the goings on of the other side, is ultimately why he decided to leave.”

I blink to, well, all of that, “That…everyone knows the Imperial Family doesn't have a say in matters of state anymore, but you're all that…impaired? Truly?”

He gives a sad slow nod to that, “Generations upon generations, and the blood of our Honored Ancestor ran thinner and thinner. Our powers got weaker and weaker. Until there was nothing left but a dormant mark,” he tapped his left forearm, “and an affinity for light and fire. And if there's one thing the supernatural world cares about most…”

“It's power.” I breathed out, finishing for him.

He nodded, “Yes, without that? The Household Agency deemed it for the best if we stayed out of the supernatural affairs. Although we still have the Bureau of Onmyo, not the Agency, we aren't allowed to be proactive with their use. The protection of Tokyo is as far as we are allowed to go.”

All of this is leaving a rather sour taste in my mouth, and it shows, judging by my old man's grimace.

“Yes, I know. It wasn’t always like this, mind you. But as the Emperors got weaker and weaker, they signed more of their authority and power away for protection, and now,” he holds his hands out to the room around us, “…we are here. Until your father was born blessed with powers harkening to the original Emperors and broke free, with the Honored Ancestor’s blessing that is. And now…you.”

I nod solemnly to that. Damn. That…is a bit to take in.

I can see why Dad didn't want me raised over here, I don't know the full extent, but man does it not sound pleasant. Being raised like a puppet.

Especially if my powers were still sealed off for most of that time. Sounds like Hell.

“Ah, wait…” I start, my eyes widening, “If you're limited to Tokyo then…!”

He chuckles, “I wouldn't worry so much about that. Your father had friends within the Bureau, that I'm sure wouldn't mind lending a deft hand outside for his son. Off the books, of course.”

He adds with a grin and a sparkle in his eye. “I would be happy to introduce you if needs be?”

I give a relieved sigh to that, and grin right back, “Yeah, that sounds good…thanks gramps.”

The real, warm, genuine smile that blossomed on the aged man's face from one word damn well broke my heart.

I think…after this, I need to visit more.

And, you know what? It's still early…the assault on Mt. Ōe doesn't happen until tonight.

I don't think Prime will mind if I stick around for a while and, ahem, gather information, no?

“So old man,” I lean back in my chair, raising my teacup slightly with a smile, “for now, got anything juicy to share about my parted younger but still old man?”

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

Interlude 5 End


I really liked this Interlude. It's gonna be the perfect opposite of when Nori finally meets Ama.

Shame I didn't get to include everything I wanted to though, the way Nori and the Grandpa are I wouldn't have been able to force certain things early. Although it's all stuff that can really be brought up after this Arc is finished.

For instance, Nori getting his housing situation updated in Kyoto, and a small talk of the possibility that something may be up with the way Kunihito died...

Oh well, all stuff for later.

View Post

A New Sun Chapter 24

Chapter 24

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

Uzume didn't end up making it back until late that evening.

I don't know what exactly she thought she'd be coming home to, but I'm fairly certain it wasn't this.

That being, Kunou and I, sitting on opposite ends of the couch, arms crossed in a pout as we looked away from each other.

Meanwhile, said maid stood there in front of us, looking between us completely bewildered.

"Umm, so! What did I miss?" She tried, to neither one of us in particular.

Though it was Kunou who bit the bait.

"Your master is a big jerk." She huffed out haughtily.

Uzume instantly turned to me for a moment, an eyebrow raised, before turning a plain look at Kunou.

"So nothing new then?"

"Oi." I pipe up in faux indignation.

Though I'm subsequently ignored.

Rude.

"No, like a bigger jerk than normal!" She emphasized with a harumph.

Before Uzume could even ask, I addressed Kunou directly, turning my head to give her the side eye.

"I think I have the right to be," I started with a mocking huff, "you practically whipped me with steel cables!"

Okay. It's not like it hurt that bad, not like I can feel proper pain, but they did pack a fair bit of punch.

She turned to me fully with a snarl, "Stop calling my tails that! They're fluffy and soft and very petable!"

"Yeah! When they're not being used like weapons!" I fire back.

"Okay, okay!" Uzume held up her hands, waving them between us as she called out, "Enough of that you two, start from the beginning."

I clicked my tongue, before explaining briefly, "Basically, I was practicing drawing out my Ara-Mitama under the setting sun, and Kunou used tail whip."

"I thought you were losing control!" Kunou cried out in response.

"I had just started."

"You were grunting and growling!"

"Well, yeah? That's what everyone does when they're controlling their power."

"That doesn't make any sense!"

"It makes perfect sense." I nod to myself, before raising an eyebrow, "What, you telling me you don't make assorted animal noises when you turn into a fox?"

"T-Thats!" Kunou looked lost for a second, "We are literally a fox then! What other noises are we supposed to make!?"

I smirk at that, "There's a video for that on the Internet somewhere."

"Hhnnghh!?" Kunou reels, her hands twitching into fists that spark with pale blue flames, "I hate you. So much."

You know, I'm pretty sure it's too early for the music video I'm thinking of, but maybe not with that reaction?

I hum nonchalantly to that, "You weren't thinking that when I called you a good girl~!"

She hissed at me, actually full-on hissed at me.

Then something grabbed my cheek.

I blink, looking at the offending fingers pinching my cheek, "Uzume, this doesn't hurt at all."

Ignoring me, she pulls regardless, "It still gets my point across, you. Stop teasing the Kyoto Princess and fake pouting-"

"Huh!?" Kunou shouted, scandalized, "Fake! He was faking it!?"

"-stop fake pouting," Uzume continued, unperturbed, "I've got word from Inari."

With a deep sigh, I unfold my arms from my chest and sigh, "Ruining my fun like that…" I half-heartedly trail off.

Then give a small smile to my side as I see Kunou's reaction to those five words.

And what a glorious reaction it is.

Kunou, sitting there, completely still whilst gaping at Uzume, her face locked in that shocked state perfectly.

Ah, I lied.

My fun never ends.

"W-W-Wait…Inari?" Kunou managed to stutter out slowly before her eyes widened comically as what I said just before then kicked in, "And…did you just call her…?"

Uzume, meanwhile, just tilted her head at her, before looking back and deadpanning straight at me.

"You never told her?"

My very manly giggle answered that question for her.

With a sigh, Uzume turned back to Kunou, "I am indeed the Goddess of the Dawn, Revelry, and more, Kunou-hime. Although I am currently serving as Lord Noriaki's maid and secretary at the moment." She bowed to her slightly, "Pleasure to officially make your acquaintance."

With that said, Uzume turned back to me, leaving Kunou sitting there to marinate on all that.

Poor fox girl looked like she just got her world flipped upside down.

"Inari accepted your idea." Uzume suddenly said.

I blink.

Oh.

Well fuck there goes mine as well.

"Okay, firstly, Uzume…can you let go of my face?" I mumbled out through my stretched lips.

"Hmm? Oh, yeah, right." Uzume promptly let go, and I rubbed my cheek with a sigh.

"So she did, huh? Honestly, I wasn't sure how she'd take it." I mused aloud.

"If the Yokai and Clans agree to it as well, of course." Uzume tacts on lightly, before continuing almost chidingly, "Really, Nori, I think you underestimated just how much Inari wants help!"

"She'd offer anyone a job in any of her ventures? Just like that?" I ask unsure, "That's a bit more than just guarding a shrine."

In case it wasn't clear, my idea for bringing Inari in on this is rather simple.

Essentially? Inari would offer jobs to Yokai and Clan members if peace happens in her companies, business, and such.

I don't know exactly what industries she works in, but from what Uzume told me?

A lot.

That would be enough.

See, the idea was meant to hit two birds with one stone.

For one, help Inari take some of the work off her shoulders via the almighty power of delegation.

And two, give the clan members and yokai something to do now that they can't hunt and kill each other.

I'm trying to solve a potential problem the Three Factions faced after signing the Peace Treaty, that being the Exorcist Rebellion, before it even happens.

Especially since the clans specifically kind of have a history of strays forming organizations to fight the main clans, I figured trying to give these people an alternative would be better than hanging them out to dry.

Not that it's perfect of course, it's a tentative solution, a band-aid fix for a potentially larger problem, but it's still something of course.

My train of thought ends as Uzume sighs and shakes her head, "You underestimate her desperation too much. I bet you don't even realize if this ends up working she'll break your hip bone as a…reward~..." She said with a shiver.

Eh?

Not this shit again!

I deadpanned at her, "That doesn't sound like a reward."

"Oh, Nori," Uzume began, her face flushing mildly, "you wouldn't know until you've experienced how—"

I grab her face, specifically her lips, and hold them shut, stopping a now flabbergasted Uzume in her tracks.

Nope. None of that.

I turn my head back to Kunou.

Ah. I recognize that face!

Gone was the sheer confusion and, dare I say it, awe from earlier.

Now, it's just a twisted sneer of disgust.

"Are you sure that's a Kami?" Kunou asked in discontent.

Heh. She called her a 'that.'

Uzume wiggled in my grasp, mumbling what I'm pretty sure went something along the lines of, 'I am a Kami! A Goddess! Really!' as she tried to escape.

I didn't let her.

My answer was rather plain, "Last I checked she was."

That of course only made Uzume try to escape harder.

Still didn't work.

Oh, speaking of trying to make things not escape.

"Ah right, Uzume?" I turn back to my maid as she tries in vain to free her mouth, "Did you pick up the thing on the way back that I asked for?"

"Mmm?" She looked at me oddly, then recognition passed through her eyes and she gave a small nod, as much as she could give, "Hmm, hmm!"

Very neat.

"The…thing?" Kunou parroted back.

"Oh, you don't need to worry about that." I wave her off, "You'll see what that's all about soon enough."

"Eh?" The way Kunou's ears and tails fluffed and perked at that was slightly worrying.

I don't think I sounded threatening, did I?

Besides, it's not bad! It's just rope!

Well, special rope, but still.

Hopefully, she'll forget about it tomorrow by the time Kuroka gets back, and we head out to Mt. Ōe.

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

She did not forget.

"Nyahahaha~!!!"

As my damn cat so aptly continues to remind me, as she hasn't stopped cackling all the way here!

I turn to her with a click of my tongue, "How have you managed to keep that up the entire time!?"

Kuroka winks, "Trade secret, nya~!"

I merely huff at that.

My cat is extra smug tonight. For one, apparently whatever testing she had to do to make an Oni-specific poison went well enough that it was ready for field testing, as she had put it.

Two, trying to tie up a fox that was expecting something to happen was actual pain and suffering I hadn't felt in a long time.

Little shit kept switching between her yokai and human forms and was shockingly nimble and evasive when she wanted to be.

She also scratched me. That was fair, I'm just glad I couldn't feel the sting properly.

That's when Kuroka walked in, and knocked her out with a flick to the head, citing Senjutsu and that's it.

Ugh.

At least I managed to tie her up after that.

I've got Uzume watching over her now, she's going to stay tied up like that with the super special magic rope until this is over.

The reason I went through all that trouble is to make sure Kunou doesn't show up and try to do some shit, like attack Mt. Ōe with Kuroka and I or, even worse?

Help against the tomato man himself.

Pretty sure Yasaka would have my head if I let her, so this is for my safety just as much as it is for hers.

I give a long protracted sigh as I look up at the massive Japanese gargoyle, an onigawara, statue.


When I say massive, I mean massive, it looks about 5 meters tall and is made of solid smooth stone and metal, carved into the impression of some sort of western gargoyle and Oni hybrid.

According to all our sources, and Kunou, this thing is the gateway to the 'real' Mt. Ōe, the mountain the Oni truly inhabit, similarly to Urakyoto.

Shockingly enough, this place isn't exactly hidden; the statue is in front of a museum.

The Japanese Oni Exchange Museum to be precise.

Which I didn't learn existed until a few hours ago.

Also, yes, it's run by the Oni of Mt Ōe and is located at the base of the earthly mountain.

Despite that, we haven't run into anyone, Oni or otherwise.

What with Kuroka's cloaking and the museum being closed, supposedly having been closed the past week for 'maintenance and cleaning', I shouldn't be surprised.

But still, being a little paranoid is never a bad thing.

One just can't help but think there might be something going on when there aren't even guards at the door.

"So," I start, still staring up at the statue, "how do we get inside?"

"Ah~? Well, that's rather simple if what I know of Oni-specific Youjutsu is true, nya~!"

I raise an eyebrow to that, "Really? How simple?"

"Just punch it!" She exclaimed whilst comically swinging, punching the air.

I blink at that, several times.

"Okay, pull the other one, how do we really get in?" I tried again, exacerbated.

At that Kuroka huffs, "I'm being completely serious, darling! Watch! Nyahh~!"

With that, she leaps forward, and full-on punches the gargoyle statue in the nose.

Now, it's not a normal punch, as soon as her fist connects with the statue, space seems to ripple as a purple Youjutsu symbol gets stamped into reality.

As Kuroka lands, I merely gape at the statue, then at her, then back to the statue.

No fucking way that's actually how you're supposed to go about this!

"Nya~!" Kuroka shakes out her hand, "Every Yokai uses Youjutsu slightly differently! Nekomata draws symbols, and Oni punches them out! Although the effects are mostly the same…" she sighs, "Oni Youki is better for this than Nekomata, or in my case Nekoshou, Youki…so this might hurt a bit."

She turns back to me, "Nori-kun~! You promise to give my hand plenty of kisses after this right~? For going through all this, nyah~?"

I gave her a small smile, "Of course kitten, that's the least I could do." I affirm.

"K-Kitten~? Mmm~!" She stammered for just a second, flushing before flashing me a wide grin, "Alright! Let's do this! Nyaahh~!!"

She jumps up one more and goes to punch the nose some more.

Not going to lie, it feels kind of weird flirting like this before assaulting a place specifically to take some guy's head and mail it.

Gets even weirder because that's probably not going to be the only Oni I kill today.

I don't want to genocide the Oni here or anything, but killing the strongest guys here at least is a must.

Unless I want history to repeat itself, of course.

To be fair, it’s not like the romantic vibes lasted long either.

Kuroka is basically pulling a Dio on the statue’s nose at this point.

“Nyah Nyah Nyah Nyah Nyah!!”

Well, in her way, I suppose.

Just how locked up is it that she needs to punch the sucker that many times?

After a little while of just watching her go at it, I sort of went under a trace, of sorts? It was mesmerizing in a way, watching her go at it.

Then all of that stopped when the statue’s eyes suddenly started glowing an angry crimson red, and a purple aura erupted off the thing in a wave of purple haze.

Kuroka yelped as it happened, the Youjutsu symbols on its nose continuing to flicker and cycle through even as she stopped punching it, and was knocked away from it by the said wave.

I stepped forward and caught my cat before she hit the ground, and we both watched as the mouth of the statue slowly started to open.

With a sound like a deep dry breath, a spiraling black and red portal formed within its maw.

Kuroka rubbed her hands tentatively as she looked at it, “That should be our way in…” she suddenly started shaking out her hands, “They had it locked up really well, so this better have been worth it! My poor hands, nyah~!”

Kuroka continued to shake her hands out, making light whining noises all the while until I leaned down and kissed one of her hands gently.

“We’ll make sure it was worth it, alright?” I muttered to her softly.

Kuroka simply stared at me for a moment, before nodding with a light blush on her face.

Then she looked at the portal, and then back to me.

“Carry me, nyah~?”

Bloody. Cat.

I rolled my eyes at her, but then an idea occurred to me.

“You know what? Sure.” I start with a smirk, “Get on my back, and let’s do this.”

Kuroka smirked right back.

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

Mt. Ōe has another name, the Demon's Cavern.

Aptly named, as the mountain is shadows over perpetually as if hidden in a cave.

The only light was an eerie reddish-yellow glow from a fake sun to spite fake suns, seemingly set in a permanent sunset in the sky whilst also being eclipsed, covered by a boulder-shaped object in the sky, the source of the perpetual shadow.

The real Mt. Ōe, being the home of the Oni, has several villages dotting the path leading up to the peak, where lies the Iron Palace, the home of the Fierce God.

Aptly named due to it looking like a palace made of wrought iron, beyond being where the Fierce God lives it's also where he rules.

His throne sits there, empty as he is away, but not unguarded.

In the past, Shuten-dōji had Four Guardian Kings with him atop Mt. Ōe.

They died long ago, in the same battle that saw their original master sealed, but here the current Fierce God seems to have continued the tradition of his old master.

Around the massive stone throne of the Fierce God, only two Oni stood.

One stark, almost bleached albino-like white, with three horns crowning his head and a bear skin cloth draped down his waist.

The other is obsidian black, sharing the same number of horns and cloth, yet this one visibly held a club lazily over his shoulder, while the other remained unarmed.

The Second Generation Star-Bear and Bear Demons respectively, bestowed upon them the names of the old generation by the new Fierce God himself.

Hoshikuma and Kuma.

They guard the throne while their master is away.

That is their only job.

After all, if the weak trolls leading up the mountain can't take care of a couple of intruders, what purpose do they serve?

"Oi." Kuma suddenly grunted out, tapping his club impatiently against his shoulder, "You think they can go any faster? Gettin' real bored, sittin' here watchin' the iron rust."

Hoshikuma merely huffed and closed his eyes, denying his fellow Guardian answer.

Truth be told? Hoshikuma doesn't know for certain.

As the strongest Senjutsu and Youjutsu user amongst the Guardians, he could sense the portal to Mt. Ōe being forced open, and he could feel the intruders once they entered.

Two of them.

But after that? His sight became…foggy.

One of them must be an incredibly talented and powerful user of Senjutsu, to be able to mask their auras from even him.

While that mention got Kuma, the dumb brutes, blood pumping, it slightly concerned Hoshikuma.

Judging by the dropping of several auras of Oni who he assumed were attempting to jump and stop the intruders, he can only assume they are heading straight for them.

Yet, he can't understand why that is. True, Mt Ōe is weak right now, with the majority of their forces concentrated in Urakyoto for the Night Parade

But without the master here nothing was worth destroying. Not a tactical advantage, nothing valuable or worth taking.

Well, unless the goal was to piss off the master, but what kind of suicidal imbecile would do such a thing?

Ugh. Sometimes, Hoshikuma envied his brothers, like Kuma, who had their instincts hold them constantly.

Thinking hurts, and he'd rather not deal with the headaches when he could help it.

Ah.

Hoshikuma suddenly perked up, opening his eyes and looking intently at the massive double iron doors, "They are close." He stated aloud.

"Finally!" Kuma stepped forward, a wicked grin on his face as he patted his club against the palm of his free hand, "Let's have a hell of a time! It's the least we can do after the master took us and left the others!"

Hoshikuma decided that pointing out that this was their job since they first earned their titles for the umpteenth was pointless.

Ah, there's that headache coming on.

At least being able to hit something will shut Kuma up for a while, perhaps?

One can hope.

Say, isn't it getting…warmer?

That's when he noticed it, the bottom half of the iron doors before them slowly turning color, turning yellow and red, then slowly beginning to liquefy and fall apart.

Intriguing. Especially as the culprits, the intruders, walked in, finally revealing themselves.

A…human male, and a three-tailed nekomata female?

No, assuming the girl is masking their auras, even from him, means it's more likely she's a three-tailed Nekoshou.

Was the human male then the one to melt the doors? He was the one to walk in, with the girl on his back after all.

Thankfully, it was the intruders who spoke up first, stopping just before the doors as they saw them.

"These the two you sensed?" The male turned his head to address his backpack, giving her a questioning glance.

"Mhmm~!" The cat hummed out in confirmation, "These two are the strongest here by far! They gotta be important, nya~!"

So she could sense him then? Despite his protections?

Nekoshou then. Definitely.

Yet, what about the human…?

"Oi." The human turned back to face them, "Mind telling me who you lot are before we take you out?"

They're here for them?

Surely not, they don't even seem to know who they ar—

"Kuma-dōji!!" The obsidian Oni roared heartily, "The Right Leg of the Fierce God!" He pointed his club at the intruders, a vicious smile on his face, "You've got a fair bit of nerve comin' in here, saying stuff like that, with a hot piece of ass on your back like that, human."

At that, the human's eye seemed to twitch at Kuma.

Ugh.

Of course, that's the first thing he mentioned.

He should have seen that coming, Kuma really can only think with his dick and with his club.

Though he likes calling them the same thing.

Doubt he knows the difference, now that Hoshikuma thinks about it.

"Kuroka." The human spoke again, addressing the cat, "You take cliche Oni guy over there, I'll take the other, alright? I'll try and kill him too fast otherwise."

Kuroka is her name, hmm?

That sounds oddly familiar. Though he can't quite place it.

"Okay, nyah~!" She kisses the human on the cheek, "Have fun, darling~!" Then she hopped off his back.

And Hoshikuma froze.

Holy Spirit Power. He sensed it now, coming from the 'human' in droves.

It was like he was suddenly standing in front of a shrine.

Yet, this man is not a Kami. He knows that, deep down. He still feels like a man as well.

Most intriguing.

His gaze locked upon the 'human' as the Nekoshou walked off.

Off to the side, he could hear Kuma spouting shit and nonsense once more, but it was muffled so focused his gaze was.

In this haze, he felt a flux of power, and Kuma stopped talking, those two presences shifted away from them.

His attention snapped back into place, as the man before him spoke once more whilst walking to stand some distance before him, "And what about you Clorox? Got a name?" He asked dispassionately.

Clorox?

"Hoshikuma-Dōji." He answered promptly, "The Left Leg of the Fierce God. And you?" He asked back in turn.

The man let the ghost of a smile grace his lips, as he reached behind him and took hold of the hilt of his sword, strapped upon his back.

"Noriki Kusanagi."

It suddenly clicked inside Hoshikuma's mind.

This is the Arahitogami. The one the master wished dead. The one whose father trampled upon this very same mountain.

"I see." Hoshikuma mused coldly, "Then die."

Hoshikuma stomped the ground and the floor rippled as if becoming water, a purple Youjutsu symbol burning itself into the floor to make it so, although he felt no difference himself.

The Arahitogami wrapped himself in power and Hoshikuma grimaced to himself as he felt the boy's Holy Spirit Power push out and fill the palace.

He snarled as the boy proceeded to dart forward, running across the liquefied floor toward him as if it were still normal and solid.

Light boomed as he drew his sword, the boy was fast, but not the fastest.

The inevitable swing came for his neck, Hoshikuma raised his fists into a boxing stance and punched out just as quickly as he slashed.

His blade did not meet his flesh, as just before it could, a Youjutsu symbol burst into existence, holding back the blade.

He heard breathing, a lone deep breath before the boy moved one once more.

Several bright white slashes followed unperturbed, and Hoshikuma followed suit, punching out each one in the order in which they came.

Several white slashes met purple flashes and ceased.

Then the boy breathed out, and what came out wasn't merely air, but fire.

Hoshikuma suddenly felt himself engulfed in flames, yet he scoffed.

He is no mere door.

He clapped his hands together, a Youjutsu symbol roaring forth between his palms sparking violently as it brought forth booming demonic thunder, dispersing the flames around himself.

The shockwave continued to ripple out, blowing apart the liquid ground around him and sending the boy flying into the air, wherein a halo manifested at his back to suspend himself in the air.

But, where there is thunder, there must be lightning.

Hoshikuma punched out in the boy's direction, quick as a snake, stamping his Youjutsu into reality with his fist.

Said stamp turned into a forking stream of purple lighting, flickering into existence with a snap of the fingers, the boy barely had time to dodge it as he veered wildly to its right.

Another punch, another blast of lightning.

Another dodge, this time to the left.

And again, and again, and again.

Until a lightning storm filled the palace, the bolts flying every which way, bouncing off the walls like spears of violet light.

The boy still weaved his way through the electrical storm, albeit just narrowly, until he reached the back wall and leaped off it.

Dozens of images of his opponent filled his vision and promptly surrounded Hoshikuma as he looked around.

The images flicker, vanishing when struck by his lightning.

Speed clones, he recognized.

Now where is he going to come from?

Better to be safe.

He stomped the ground once more, and with his spell, its nature changed.

Iron spikes and barbs ruptured from the ground all around him, coming out in a wave.

Every single speed clone was caught in the mincing wave, whilst the real one took to the air once more.

Only, for the spikes to flash with symbols, and draw the lightning in the palace to them like conducting rods.

Lightning finally struck true, striking the boy in the back when he least expected it, prompting an electrical explosion in the air.

Hoshikuma wouldn't say it out loud, be he begrudgingly admits respect for the boy, who didn't fall from the sky after taking one of his demonic lightning blasts.

Instead, he floated there, steaming, the top half of his robe burning and falling apart as he looked down upon him.

"Well, that hurt more than Baraqiel's did." He started with a click of his tongue, though Hoshikuma had no idea who that was, "Say. Clorox?" He pointed his sword down at him, "I've been wondering, why didn't you two come down to stop us when we broke in? You didn't seem so shocked to see us here, after all."

The Arahitogami smiled at his words.

Did…did he just pun?

Disregarding that before he gets another headache.

"That is not our job," Hoshikuma answered stoically, "our job is the protection of the Iron Palace. Nothing more. If those ogres and trolls beneath us can't protect their own homes themselves, they deserve nothing less than a cave…if that, to dwell in."

The boy blinked at his words but didn't seem to have much of an emotional response to him, "An Oni cultural thing, then? Every man for himself? Huh." He said mostly to himself.

"Ah, well…thanks for that. Honestly, I was wondering why there didn't seem to be a coordinated effort against us…not like the meager forces left here could sense our arrival, anyway. It was honestly kind of disappointing." He sighs, pupils in his eyes…spinning?

"But as much as I would love to solo a small army, fight through them all to get to you guys, and have a big climatic battle all night long, we just don't have time for that."

Light burst from his blade, rolling off it with bright flickering sparks.

"Sorry about this." He suddenly apologized.

Hoshikuma blinked as he realized something amiss, the Holy Spirit's Power in the air, pushing down upon him to weaken him, was somehow focused on his head.

With a flex of his Youki, he purged the mental intrusion.

Just as the Arahitogami moved, blurring forward with a trail of light behind him like a comet.

Seeing that whatever he had tried to do had failed, he goes on the attack instead, is it?

Confused, but undeterred, Hoshikuma moves to intercept, punching out to meet the almost choreographed downward slash.

In a haze of brilliant light, he brings his sword down…right before his fist?

What?

Then his hand fell off, cut at the wrist.

Hoshikuma could do nothing but stare, even as the searing, burning, pain shot up his disabled limb.

"Man." The Arahitogami said solemnly, "I don't like dirty tricks like this…"

What tricks!? He purged the mental intrusion! Unless he didn't?

He flared his Youki, both to check again for an intrusion and to defend himself, bringing up his only hand left to go on a counterattack.

Holy Spirit Power thrummed off the boy right before him in droves, violently and suddenly smothering his Youki, as he spiraled into the air, lashing out once more with a single light-filled stroke.

His fist went out to meet it, Youjutsu springing forth to shield against the attack, but weakened under the veil of Holy Spirit Power surrounding them and facing a power further opposed to it, it shattered.

As the blade drove itself through his fist, cleaving through his hand and arm like butter, Hoshikuma couldn't decide whether or not there was a trick being had here, too.

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

With a sigh, I behold the body of the large white Oni lying on the ground before me.

Half of his arm had been severed from my slash, and my blade continued, gouging out a bit of his chest and shoulder to finish.

I hate tricks. So much. Especially for a fight I could have enjoyed if I had let it drag out like I normally do.

Genjutsu into Solar Heat Haze. I knew this Oni seemed more put together than the rest, I knew he'd likely discover the little mind manipulation, and he'd dispel it.

Not like I'd be able to really mess with his head, he's too strong for that, but he wouldn't know that.

Solar Heat Haze looks like an illusion, use that right after, and any smart person would second guess what the hell is going on.

All I needed was that little moment of doubt, and then it was all over.

The guy was stronger than Baraqiel, too, what a waste.

Though I don't think he's dead yet, Oni looks about as tough as they are, turns out. Probably just very light-poisoned.

Let's go see how Kuroka is doing.

I turn in the direction of their battle, only to find Kuroka standing on the ceiling above the black Oni, cackling, as the poor guy is pinned to the ground by several magic circles and Youjutsu symbols.

She's throwing spells at him semi-regularly, but judging by the fact the guy isn't dead yet, but is howling like a madman, I think she might be using him as a guinea pig right now.

I slowly shiver and look away from the scene.

Damn, kitty. I know cats have an instinctive drive to inflict suffering on others, but still.

Deciding doing anything else would be a good idea, I quickly create, then disperse, a clone, wincing as I do.

Just sending a quick message to all the clones still out running negotiations, that they can disperse now since it's mostly over.

It wouldn't shock me if some Oni felt the need to attack this place after we did, 'Dog Eats Dog World' for the Oni and all that.

The clone sent to talk to the Bureau still hasn't dispersed…and that's probably the most important job besides what we are doing here.

Without the Bureau, we're kind of screwed, and I'd have to improv, read, bullshit the rest.

"Ohhhh darling~!" Kuroka called over to me, a sly grin on her face as she weaved another Youjutsu spell, "We've got stragglers coming up to the palace, think you can handle it, nya~?"

I wave her off, "Right right, I got it."

"Thank you~! I'll take care of these two, nya~!"

I shiver once more at that.

Well, at least she doesn't derive sexual pleasure from blatant torture.

There's always that, right?

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

Nurarihyon thinks this whole Night Parade thing has been fairly lucrative.

For his stomach, anyway.

Sitting in his nice cushioned seat, using his Youjutsu to lean against the air, the gourd-headed Yokai watched in amusement as dozens of Yokai 'Leaders' gathered in Urakyoto and argued amongst themselves.

Meanwhile, the real players merely stared at each other.

Ibaraki, the Fierce God of the Oni, watched everyone with mild contempt equally.

Well, besides Yasaka, whom he sent a scathing glare now and again.

Not like the Kyuubi Daiyokai cared overtly, giving an impassive stare to everyone.

Well, besides himself, who she ignored purely because he was staring at her.

And only her.

For reasons.

Bha! If she didn't want people looking then why show almost half a full tit each?

To his right, Magari, the Nekomata Yokai Leader sat in her Yokai form, a calico cat with seven tails, disinterested in practically everything around her.

At this point, Nurarihyon is just trying to figure out when Ibaraki is going to get up and start telling everyone why he called for a Night Parade in the first place.

The small fellas flocked to join because where there's a Night Parade, there's usually 'glory' to be had.

Well. Blood. More so blood.

He only agreed due to curiosity, though he had an idea of what this was all going to be about.

Also, the food is nice. Very nice.

Yasaka probably agreed because she liked to play peacemaker. It wouldn't shock him if she went ahead and agreed only to ultimately try and stop it.

Well. Guess they'll see.

Ibaraki slowly stood up, tapping his club once against the ground.

The loud echoing thud sent everyone into silence.

Nurarihyon snorted internally.

Here we go, the old red Oni is going to try and make a speech, which is just him saying he wants everyone to kill…someone, and that'll be it.

Then the sheep around them will go do as he says, no matter how much Yasaka says otherwise or leans over, and that'll be the end of it.

Or at least, that's what he thought was going to happen.

Next to him, Magari suddenly twitched, opening one of her eyes, she slowly looked up.

The only thing Nurariyon caught was a black shadow crossing the ceiling, then something fell.

A box, a plain yet sizeable cardboard box, seemingly haphazardly taped together.

It fell right before Ibaraki.

Even he could only stop and stare at it, along with everyone else.

Seeing as the thing hadn't suddenly blown up, Ibaraki went down and picked it up.

The oaf didn't even stop to consider where he was before he tore it open.

And out fell two heads. Oni heads. One black, one white. Along with a single note between them that simply read.

"Ready to reconsider?"

Ahh~...Nurarihyon thinks he gets it now.

Leaning over to Magari, he muttered to her, "I call the front-row seats, I'll save you a spot if you bring the popcorn!"

Magari didn't even have time to respond, verbally or otherwise, before the Fierce God's murderous intent and bloody red Youki filled the entirety of Urakyoto.

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

Chapter 24 End


So it begins. Or ends? Beginning of the end?

Interlude this weekend. Nori meets the other side of his family finally.

Doing all this research on Mt. Oe and the Oni makes me wanna do a Yokai story now too, with an Oni MC and such, ugh. Be still my beating muse.

View Post

A New Sun Chapter 23

Chapter 23

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

Huh. You know, I didn't want to assume anything, because that would feel rather…

Hmm. How do I say this without getting canceled on Twitter?

Or whatever non-social media platform is the thing in this world.

Eh, fuck it!

Oni in their human forms? They look like a bunch of typical Japanese gang members, yakuza, and the like.

Leather. So much fucking leather. All of it is black and has assorted red, gold, and blue Oni designs plastered across the back.

As if they weren't making it obvious enough, of course.

Their hair looked like it was torn straight out of the last decade, all styled up and over the front of their heads.

My bet? It's likely to hide their horns.

Now I don't have much evidence to go off that says their human transformation is incomplete, that too is also an assumption.

One that is based on the fact that it would take way more than five of these guys to challenge me, more so kill me.

So essentially, I'm calling them stereotypical and dumb.

Wait. Isn't that last bit also part of the stereotype?

I raise my hand to catch a studded club, an Oni kanabō, just before it smashes into my face.

The sheer force behind the thing blows apart the little booth around the bus stop bench I was sitting in, exposing me to the late morning sunlight.

I sigh.

"The shade was nice, now look at what you've done." I wave idly to the destruction around us with my free hand, my other still holding the club.

"Ya thinkin' we gon give any sort of flying fuck what ya think little bitch!? Geddup! Now!" The human-disguised Oni spits out.

Hmm. This guy is the one with a gold Oni design on his jacket, the rest have red, blue, green, and pink respectively.

He also sounds significantly more composed than the rest.

"Ya, ya! Yawl tell thuh coward!" Red cried out, almost in reverence.

"Thets whut hay gits fahwar ignorin' us!" Green screeched almost immediately after.

"Hit em' lahk dat, wun more tahm!" Blue hooted and hollered, almost like he was trying to egg on Gold.

"Oh, oh! Let may at em' next!" Pinkie jumps up and down, all excited, as if this was a game.

Ugh. They even all sound the stereotype.

Also, I amended my earlier statement, these guys are all very dumb.

These fools have been at this for the past fifteen minutes, they walked up to me and instantly started talking shit.

That was the first attack they've tried to whole time.

I could've killed them all, easily, but that wasn't what I was out here for.

Though in that respect, they're very lucky I suppose. Their shit-talking and general appearance were very good at clearing the area of civilians.

If they had attacked right away, I would've reacted appropriately.

As it stands though, instead they helped my little kitty and bird set the place up, just for them.

Wonderful. I'll have to thank them later.

First though, a confirmation.

I looked up at Gold blankly, ignoring everything he just said as he tried to pull his club from my grasp to no avail.

"So," I start evenly, "since you're here instead of your Lord, I assume he didn't like my challenge?"

At that, all the Oni looked various amounts offended and seething with rage.

None more so than Gold, it would appear.

"Like? Like!?" He gave a bestial snarl as his teeth suddenly sharpened, his canines elongating, and his leathers began tearing at the seams as his height and muscle mass grew.

Seconds of this passed until the yellow Oni stood before me in his true Yokai form, several meters tall with a bald head, save for a single yellow horn.

The only thing covering his ogre-like appearance is a single oversized black leather loin cloth.

"Lord Ibaraki laughed at your request!" He continued, although he sounded more threatening without the accent, the poor guy still couldn't pull his club away from me, "For you, the five of us should be more than enough! The Night Parade? Bah! Who needs it for one lone weakling like you!"

Various rounds of cheers and hollering resound behind him at that proclamation.

When they started talking again, I immediately toned them out.

See, they may not be able to deal physical damage to me, but mentally?

That's a whole other story.

One can only take the Japanese version of a Southern or Texan accent for so long, turns out.

As stated, I sent a request off to the big bad Fierce God himself for a fight.

And this is the guy's response, pretty much in line with what Kunou thought it was going to be.

A mid-class and a bunch of lows. An insult.

Though I'm pretty sure he knows I'm stronger than these guys, he sent these guys practically saying, 'This is what I see you as.'

Dick move, sending off your people to die for an insult, but for the Oni, it's a cultural thing. Apparently.

Been learning a lot about these guys lately, huh?

My second hand comes up, blocking a yellow fist from impacting my face.

"Stop! Ignoring us!!!" Gold roared in a frothing rage.

"Okay."

"Yo- Huh?"

The idiot seemed dumbfounded for a moment.

Until I breathed a fireball out onto him, and the four stooges behind him, then he screamed in pain and anguish as he and the other Oni were blasted out and sent sprawling into the road.

It was a simple fireball too, didn't even put much effort or power into it.

With a sigh, I stood up and walked over to check on my freshly roasted boars.

All five lay around, groaning and spitting various insults.

All five were now in their true Yokai forms as well, yet despite that, they all seemed a little more tanned compared to the usual vivid colors Oni had.

Wonder how that happened?

"Hmm, I've decided!" I announce aloud, "I don't much care for roasted pork!"

Gold snarled, trying weakly to reach for his club.

Which I casually kicked further away from him.

"How about you, Kuroka-chan? Suzaku-san?" I call out.

I had to stifle the urge to laugh, as though they obviously didn't know who Kuroka was, the moment I mentioned the big tiddy birb they froze as their expressions morphed into one of fear and abject horror.

Appropriate, but also misplaced.

From atop a nearby tree, a lone black cat morphed into the curvaceous woman I know very well, as she lay on her side and wrinkled her nose down at us all.

"Nya~? Roasted? Smells more like burnt to me, Nori-kun~!" She gives a fake cough as she clenches her nose and sticks her tongue out in faux disgust.

"I'd have to concur there…" Suzaku walks out from behind a nearby building, a dainty hand over her face as she gives a half-lidded stare down at the Oni, "such disgusting creatures, especially like this."

At her gaze, the poor Oni seemed to almost whimper and try desperately to move to crawl away.

Ah. There's that bit of Akeno inside of her. Though without the whole sadomasochistic shtick.

Suzaku turned to me and gave a weary sigh, holding up her phone to give it a little shake, "This should be sufficient to convince the rest of the Clans of the Oni's intent for you."

I nod and hum happily, "Thanks for showing up personally, you know you could have just sent someone, right?"

Suzaku just shakes her head, "I wanted to see it with my own eyes…I had my suspicions, but to think the Oni would…" she blinks, then sighs, "No, they would do something this stupidly drastic, I apologize." Her gaze shifted to behind me, "Also…" she trailed off, as Kuroka stalked down the tree and towards us.

Turning, I see Kuroka focusing intently on Suzaku, her eyes slit, as she approaches.

"Ah." I exclaimed, dully, "Cat."

I look at Suzaku.

"Bird."

Damnit Kuroka.

At least Suzaku seemed mildly amused as she giggled lightly at my realization.

"Also," she continued where she left off, waving to Kuroka, "not many in the Clan would be so receptive to Yokai quite yet. Especially one that's Reincarnated Devil. Nor a stray, and Underworld criminal."

Ah, is that a hint of disapproval there, big bird?

I give her my best customer service smile, "Oh well. They'll have to learn, I suppose."

Translation.

I don't give a fuck what you think about this.

I'm not even too sure why she'd specifically care about this, to be honest.

Suzaku mirrored my smile back to me as Kuroka finally came up to my side.

"So then, Suza-chan~!" She purred out with a mischievous gaze, "Where are we gonna store the bodies, nya~?"

Suzaku's smile twitched a bit at Kuroka's complete sledgehammering of basic Japanese edict.

When I called up the Himejima, or Suzaku specifically to tell her what was going on and see if she could help with all this, I told her about Kuroka, who she was to me, and that she would be doing some stuff.

The two's first meeting went fine, but I've got an increasing gut feeling that leaving these two alone for an extended period would lead to some interesting results.

Probably nothing instantly violent, I don't recall Suzaku having anything against Yokai or Devils as a whole, beyond the standard loathing most share with the Underworld for the Evil Pieces.

I know Suzaku also didn't like the Grigori much, but not much else beyond that.

Suzaku turned to Kuroka, and hummed, "We have several old storage facilities we used to use for our tea houses, that should be sufficient, yes?"

Kuroka smiled widely, "That would be perfect! Thank you, Suza-chan, nya~!" She leans over to me, and kisses my cheek, "I'm gonna gather up the test subjects, then we'll be off, alright darling~? I can't wait to see what I'll learn, nya~!"

Kuroka. Why do you seem oddly enthusiastic about human experimentation?

Uh. Yokai experimentation?

Good enough.

Also, did you just wink at Suzaku there when you kissed me?

I pat Kuroka on the head, prompting a light purr from her, "Okay? Uh, have fun? I think?"

Kuroka perked up, "I will, nya~!" And with that, she skipped away and started dragging the downed Oni around.

Suzaku gave Kuroka a bland look as she did so.

"Hmm…so, since Kuroka is calling you Suza-chan…" I let the unspoken question hang with a small amused smile.

Suzaku turned to me slightly, her smile becoming a smile, "What was that, Lord Noriaki?"

Pretty sure she's trying to set me on fire via sight alone.

Pretty sure she can actually do that, too.

Lucky for me? I'm immune to fire!

I eye to eye smile right back at her, "Nothing at all, Suza-chan."

Her eye full-on twitched to that.

I think I may have an issue when it comes to teasing people.

Specifically when it comes to teasing girls.

Kuroka is enabling me, promise.

We let our impromptu 'smile off' hang for what feels like several long moments, and just as Suza goes to say something, Kuroka pipes up to the side.

"Done~!"

We turn to see that Kuroka has stacked the Oni in a haphazard pile of bodies. All groaning or trying to wiggle their way free or lose.

Turns out, being several meters in height, or a few feet taller than your average human, with far more muscle and mass to go along with doesn't make the trusty old body pile any more comfortable.

At least she realized that, and put Gold on the bottom of all that. He can handle it!

I think. He's looking a lot more blue and purple than gold right now.

With a sigh, Suza turns back to me, "I suppose I and the Nekoshou should be going then."

I chuckle and nod to her, "Probably. Before she gets too excited and starts doing stuff to them in the middle of the street." My smile morphs into something more sincere, "Thanks again, by the way, for showing up and helping on such short notice. I said it before, but I mean it. If you need something, anything, just call."

Suza hums at that, giving me a thoughtful look, then a pretty smile as she nods, "I think I'll take you up on that sometime, Lord Noriaki."

With that, she walks off to Kuroka.

Well. That's not ominous.

Still completely worth it though, no matter what the price may be.

I simply don't have the room or means, either here at my place in Kyoto, or in Kuoh, to strap down and hold a few Oni for whatever the fuck Kuroka has to do to make Youjutsu that fucks up Oni specifically.

Time is of the essence right now, we still don't have an exact date for the Night Parade, although we should once Kunou gets back.

Anything that makes the process by which Kuroka can make her Oni poison Youjutsu thing faster, is worth it to invest in.

A flash of light draws me from my thoughts, as it envelops and takes away the poor Oni, Suza, and Kuroka.

Moments after, the barrier the latter two set up cracks, and shatters.

The booth that was destroyed earlier was suddenly 'repaired', or more accurately the booth in the barrier was the one that was destroyed, not the one in real life.

Quickly, I move off the road as people begin to trickle in and start heading back home quickly.

Speaking of the little fox princess, she should be back soon, if not now.

Sent her off back to Urakyoto to secretly deliver my message and check in on her mother, and that was pretty early in the morning.

Time to hustle it back!

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

Almost as soon as I got home, I had to swat away a ball of blue fox fire before it struck my face.

"Well," I snort, waving the residual fumes out of the air, "nice to see you got back safe and sound, Princess."

Kunou poked her head slightly out from behind the couch, using said furniture almost like a barricade or shield.

She stared at me intently, before turning up her nose at my comment and huffing haughtily, "As if any of those brutes could detect me with their meager senses."

"Aww!" I slowly stalked over to her, "Someone wants some praise? Maybe some ear rubs?" I ask, grinning widely.

"E-Eh?" She yips out, "Wait a minute! H-Hold it!" Her hands ignited with fox fire, "You come any closer, and I'll throw!"

You know, she's been very trigger-happy when it comes to those flames since this morning.

Even though they don't affect me at all, and Kuroka is simply too strong for them to work their magic on her, she won't hesitate to light either of us up.

Like she did right this early morning.

All we did was pet the fluffy tails and scratch the ears!

Also like what I'm going to do when I get my hands on her.

"Oh really?" I hum out unperturbed as I crawl over the couch, prompting her to scamper back and off the couch, "You know that won't do anything~!"

"If I keep throwing it, maybe it will!" She rebukes, even if she doesn't sound all too hopeful.

I fake a dark chuckle, "Just give in, accept your fate! I will give those ears rubs."

She shivered at my tone, "N-No! Stay away you big jerk!"

Yet still, so defiant?

Very well.

I move.

She blinks as I seemingly fade from her vision, but can't see as I appear behind her.

Although the way her hair suddenly stood on end, I think she may have sensed the danger.

Regardless, it's too late, I snatch her right up.

"E-EHHH!? W-Wait!!" She cries out, the flames in her hands sputtering out as I launch us onto the couch, her in my lap.

"Nope. No wait." I deny.

"B-But! You can't ju—Hnnnnghhh~!!" She bites her bottom lip, suppressing what I honestly can't tell is a moan or a purr, as I begin giving her ear rubs.

Well. Foxes don't purr, technically, but they do something similar.

"You did a very good job, Kunou, very good…" I praise her, entirely sincerely as well.

Truly, I was originally going to have Kuroka sneak in to deliver my first challenge, and then have her rush to the 'meeting' spot.

But Kunou insisted she could do it, knowing Urakyoto inside and out as she does.

Kunou's ears and tails fluff out slightly as she quivers in my grasp, looking down, I can see her flushing just a tad.

She looks down as she bites down what I know this time is a moan, "Of course I did! W-What do you take me for…" She tries to princess it up, but it's oh so weak.

Hmm. Kunou has a praise kink.

I will remember that. For reasons. Later.

My response is automatic, "A Princess."

"S-shut up!" She whines, squirming in place, although it does a very poor job of hiding the fact that she's only pushing against my hand more.

I chuckle, and just let the moment draw out.

Her ears are very fluffy. Stress relief without copious amounts of coitus is always welcome.

I end up leaning back into the couch just scratching her ears, and she ends up leaning against me while I do that.

After a good long moment of that, and with a deep sigh because I, unfortunately, can't do this all damn day, I suddenly ask softly.

"So, anything interesting that happened while you were out?"

Her ears perk slightly at that.

"Ah, mhmm." She hums softly in response, "Mother found me, of course, she's the only one who could. I told her what you were going to do, and uhm…"

I blink at that, "And…what?"

Her face flushed before she promptly covered it, "She said things I'd rather not repeat out loud," she uttered in slight horror, "especially to you!"

I could almost feel the accusation in her tone.

I, meanwhile, felt this.

"Told you so."

If I recall correctly, this guy has been a massive pain whenever he comes to Urakyoto, right?

How horny would Yasaka be if I killed this guy, I wonder?

The answer? Probably very.

A ball of fox fire splashes against my face.

"Don't…! You start!" Kunou's voice shakes as looks back at me, my smug smirk becoming visible and beaming down at her as the flames clear, showing me in turn her very angry, yet very cute, flushed face.

"Hmph!" With a huff, she looks away, forward once more. "But…yes, she's fine. I managed to get some stuff from my room before leaving as well, not like any of that's for you to know."

So then why even mention it?

"And, ah…" she continued, somewhat solemnly, "the Night Parade, it's tomorrow night. The Onigami has been pushing for it much more fiercely than before, so the time has moved up a bit."

Oh?

"I see," I hum out, considering it, "which means if I plan this out correctly, I'll be fighting a very pissed-off Daiyokai…what, two days from around now?"

"That…" she turns, looking back at me stunned, "you aren't scared? At all? Isn't that too little time!?"

I wave her off with a smile, "No, that's more than enough, truth be told. I was planning on going in tonight if I had to."

Now she's just looking at me lost.

"See," I explain, "I was originally going to send out my clones when I got back, attack Mt. Oe tonight, stuff the head of the strongest Oni there in a box, and send it to the guy!" I pat her on the head as I notice her cringe at the whole, stuffing heads in boxes thing, "But now I can move that all slightly back, and try something with this last day or so remaining before I send out my clones."

"Try…something?" Kunou muttered back at me.

I nod down at her, "Yep! It's what I'm going to use to kill the guy. I haven't had much chance at all to practice it, so we'll see how it goes."

She tilts her head, seemingly still confused.

"We talked about it yesterday." I deadpanned down at her.

Suddenly, it seems to click, as she perks up, "Ah, right! That state whose power is based on the sun's height…weight." Her eyes goggle at me, "You haven't practiced it much!?"

I chuckle wearily at that, "Kuroka said it was uncontrolled, and it is very recent. That's why I haven't been able to without someone strong enough to knock me out in case I go bonkers or something."

I flick her on the nose as she opens her mouth, likely to tell me what I already know.

I smile at her indignant yip, "Don't worry, I'm not going to try and use the stronger version, just want to see if I can get somewhat of a handle on the weaker variations first. That shouldn't be too bad, I think."

"You think." She drawls back at me with a deadpan stare.

"Mhmm!" I nod enthusiastically.

Recalling my fight with Vali, I know I can hold it back somewhat, I was doing it until the bastard punched me in the face.

So, I should be fine.

Not going to say will be fine.

Trying not to get pegged by Murphy here. Not now.

With a groan, I stretch out slightly, before looking toward the window and giving the time a considerate hum.

"Bit too late in the day to try now, though, so!" I pat her on the head, "I'll try later when the sun is going down. You wanna watch?"

She huffed at that, crossing her arms haughtily, "...not like there's much else to do around here."

"If you don't want me to call you Tsun-Tsun Princess from now on you'll just say yes like a normal girl~!" I sang out.

"T-Tsun!? As in tsundere…? Y-You!!" She growls at me, "F-Fine, yes, I'll watch…geez."

"Also, for the record," I add on, "there's plenty to do here! Like watching TV, playing video games, training, and…uh…" I scratch the back of my head as I try and think of anything more, "well damn."

Kunou looks back at me, way too smug for her own good.

"Oi. Don't look at me like that," I narrow my eyes right back at her, "what could you possibly do for fun, hmm?"

"Well—"

"That isn't just some offshoot of your Princess duties, whatever those are."

"W-Well…Mother and I—"

"I specified just you. Doing stuff with your mother doesn't count."

She pouts at that. "Now that's just being unfair…" She whines lowly.

I merely chuckle as I stand up with her, "Have you ever even tried playing a video game before?"

She pointedly looks away from me at that, crossing her arms with a huff.

I snort at that, "Alright, Princess. With that response am I also supposed to assume you're not hungry as well?"

Her ears perk slightly at that.

"Breakfast would be…nice." She mutters under her breath.

I set her down on the couch and started walking off to the kitchen, calling out, "What was that~?"

"Hnnnghh! Breakfast would be nice!" She says again, at a much louder volume.

"Oh? What's the magic word?"

She turns and I can feel her deadpan, even if it was a thousand yards away, "You're kidding, right?"

"Hmm…not hearing the magic word. Shame." I give an exaggerated sigh as I make a show of rifling through the kitchen, "We've got all this stuff here that could use making, like, bacon, sausage—"

"F-Fine!!" I hear her call out from the other room, almost desperately, followed by the rapid patter of her small feet across the ground as she runs up to the door, and peaks in with a tiny blush on her face, "P-Please…May I have some f-food?"

That was quick.

Also very cute.

Nice to know my assumptions about foxes having a thing for meat held.

I'm just on a roll with the stereotyping today, huh?

"Good girl, see? You can do it!" I coo at her, "I'll get right on it, okay?"

"M-Mmm…" the praise kink Princess shivers at being called a good girl, of course, before blinking as she realizes what I just said, "Wait, you can cook?"

I blink right back as I turn and set the stovetop, "Yes? Why do you sound so surprised?"

"It's just," she starts, unsure, "you have a maid, right? Who is…?" She looks around with an eyebrow raised, "Wasn't she here when I left?"

Ah. Right, right. I see what she's getting at.

"Didn't always have a maid," I state nonchalantly, "and remember how I told you I was technically a Prince? I sure as hell didn't grow up like one."

"Oh." She replied dumbly, looking down almost as if ashamed, for some reason.

I wave it off, "Hey now, don't worry about it. As for where my maid is right now? Well. I sent her off to talk with someone after you left."

Kunou looked away bashfully as I finished, at which I had the extreme urge to throw a mini sausage at her, for some reason.

Didn't quite think it'd take this long though for Uzume to do her thing, but it makes sense I suppose.

When the person you're trying to get a hold of to talk to is likely one of the busiest in all of Japan, it would take more than a hot minute, wouldn't it?

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

Uzume never liked the Earthly Shinkai all that much.

Compared to the splendor of the Heavenly Shinkai, the Earthly was also just so…not necessarily bland, but just not as bright, she supposed.

The Heavenly Shinkai, Takamagahara, the High Plane of Heaven, is one supermassive traditional Japanese megacity that stretches on and on, forever into the distance.

It's awash with golds, reds, silvers, and blacks, always bustling with the Heavenly Kami going about their business.

Meanwhile, the Earthly Shinkai by comparison was much more mute, as it were, in activity.

It made up for that with so much more color.

As she stood before the Inari Shrine, looking out at the world, seeing the white wispy winds whip through the bamboo forests as the golden skies of Heaven thrum above her is always quite the sight.

From here, if she squinted, she could even see the broken tip of the Ame-no-ukihashi, the Floating Bridge of Heaven, that connected the Earthly and Heavenly Worlds, once upon a time.

Now? It's nothing more than a spec of milk and sparkles in the grand golden sky.

It's been a while since she has last been there.

She doesn't plan on going back anytime soon.

"Uzume."

"EEP!!" Uzume jumped, and spun around on her heels at the simple call, only to behold the exact person she'd been waiting for.

Inari, in her shrine uniform, and she could tell it was the real Inari…not because she was glowing or anything like that, no.

It was because of the severe bags under her eyes, and the general droop she had as she stood there.

It's as though she was tired just standing there.

"What?" The pink-haired Kami gave a small tired smile, "Did I catch you reminiscing, Uzu?"

Uzume merely blinked at her.

Oh yeah, she's very out of it. She's usually not this mellow. Or nice!

To her anyway.

"Did I…call you at a bad time, Inari?" Uzume asked worriedly.

Inari waved her off, "No, in fact, I was looking for an excuse to take a little break~..." she walked over to Uzume's side, and slumped against her, using the purple-haired Kami like a cushion, "Ah. That's nice…"

"How long have you been…working?" Honestly, Uzume was scared to find out, but she'd never seen Inari quite like this before.

"Hmm…" she hums lightly, "how long has it been since I last saw you and Noriaki? That long. However long that is."

"Inari…!" Uzume half chastised, half whined.

"Oh don't start Uzu…this isn't my longest continuous time on the clock. But it certainly is my," sudden yawn, "ugh…most important, you know?"

Uzume twitched at that.

"I know…but ah, things are about to get a tad more…hectic." She started uneasily, not unsure of what she was speaking of, but not entirely sure where she should take this.

See, Noriaki sent her here to, one, tell her what's going on, and two, get her in on his plan in some way.

"Oh~?" Inari mused, "In what way, Uzu?"

There's also a big part of her that also wants to ask Inari for help.

But seeing her like this?

She sighs, "Everyway. Nori is doing some…stuff. If it all works out, things could start changing across supernatural Japan. And, well, he heard about how overworked you are—"

"Not overworked," Inari huffed in haughty, tired, denial, "just…I have a lot on my plate right now okay?"

Uzume rolled her eyes and continued anyway, "So he heard about how much you have on your plate," she parroted back at her, "and he thinks that if you could get in on this, it might lighten your load."

Uzume squeaked as a pair of hands, Inari's hands, suddenly grasped and held her tightly.

She didn't even see Inari turn to face her, to look her in the eye very intently.

"Tell. Me. Everything." Inari commanded, eyes shaking with the intensity of her focus.

She may be in just a little danger now, isn't she?

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

Chapter 23 End


Well now. Hello there everyone.

I've had a painfully busy week since last I posted and as a cherry on top of this stressful and shitty sundae, my internet is being stupid as fuck.

It won't let me connect on my laptop, what I use to post and format stuff, so instead I'm posting on my Xbox.

If the formatting looks off, that's why. If it is off, I'll fix it as soon as my laptop stops being a dick.

In other news, Makin' Waves. Chapter 1 is a little over halfway finished. I had to rewrite the intro several times until I settled on something I liked.

Holding back my worldbuilding boner is a pain in the ass for that story thus far, but it's coming along.

Next chapter, the assault on Mt. Oe.

Till then, I hope you all have a stress-free week, hell, month before Thanksgiving, yeah?

View Post

A New Sun Chapter 22

Chapter 22

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

"He's after you!?" My maid screeched in abject horror after the situation was explained to her, prompting me to wince.

Getting back to our apartment in Kyoto after leaving that interdimensional city was a breeze with teleportation.

Kuroka made sure to teleport multiple times across the city before finally heading back here, just in case the Oni had a way to track such things.

Regardless, we made it back just fine. Although I'm still a tad dazed from my little stare-down with the molding tomato.

Of course, our entrance awoke Uzume, who we got right into telling her what happened, and now…

"Noriaki!" She called out, grabbing me by the shoulders, "Are you even listening right now!? This is bad, really really bad!" She looks down at me, her face tense with worry, "And you…don't even seem concerned!"

"I am." I refute with a grunt, gently pushing her away, "I'm just not screaming at the top of my lungs about it, I'm thinking."

"About moving back to Kuoh and bunkering down for the next several centuries?" Is my maid's automatic reply.

I click my tongue, "No. About how I'm going to go about killing him."

Kuroka, who was in the kitchen, sighed at my words.

Uzume meanwhile looked outright floored.

"Noriaki Kusanagi." She started with a smile.

Ah hell no.

I nearly snarl at that, "You don't get to pull that card now of all times. Don't try to act like my mother. You aren't."

Uzume, to her credit, doesn't back down.

"Well someone has to!" She cries indignantly, plopping down right next to me on the couch, "Listen, Noriaki! Ibaraki is an ancient Oni, he's been around for a very long time, he served as the right-hand of the Daiyokai and Fierce God Shuten Douji back when he terrorized Japan before the Clans sealed him away!"

I snort at that, "Of course. Leave it to the Clans to put down one threat and let another take its place—"

"That's not the point!" Uzume shouted, hushing me by putting a finger to my lips, "The point is, he's strong, far stronger than even Shuten was in his prime! If you fight him, you'll die!"

My eyebrow twitches at that.

"Like I haven't heard that before." I respond evenly.

"Yet you still want to fight him!?" She responds much less evenly.

And this time, I do snarl.

"Well? What other choice do I have!?" I shout as I jump to my feet, whirling around to face her, "What!? Do you want me to call up Inari, and have her kill the big bad tomato God?"

"Yes." Uzume states simply, unperturbed even as my height looms over her.

I feel my face twist itself into an ugly scowl.

"No." I deny just as soundly.

"And why not!?" Uzume buffs out.

"Because it's not her fight. Not the other Kamis. Certainly not the Yokais or Clans," I intone, "my fight. Mine to finish."

Uzume has the gall to scoff at that, "Just because he's strong doesn't mean you have to fight him!"

"That's not why." I deny briskly.

"Eh?" That seems to halt her train of thought as she stares back at me dumbly.

"He's after me because of Dad." I state that simple fact, "He's my problem to clean up now. Nobody else."

Uzume opened her mouth slightly, then shut it, repeating this several times, before she slowly sunk back into the couch and looked down.

"But he'll kill you…" She managed to finally whimper out.

I sighed, deeply, reaching over and patting her head, "Yeah. If I try to fight him head-on without a plan." I start, slowly, "Look, I'm not the smartest, but even I get that…if it's gonna be me that fights him, it'll probably be under the sun…" I frown slowly, "but that's not really 'me' either, huh…" I trail off.

Kuroka chose that moment to bound on in from the kitchen, wearing nothing but her underwear and that 'top' that truly shouldn't be called a top.

"Don't worry, Uzui-chan~!" She practically jumped on my poor maid, wrapping an arm around her shoulder as with the other hand she held a milkshake.

Pretty sure in one of our teleports, we appeared inside a restaurant, and she got it there.

Honestly? At this point, I'm numb to her antics.

"You don't have to worry, I'll be with him every step of the way, nya~!" She rather proudly proclaims.

Nevermind.

But, before I could even say anything, a cold finger was jammed into my face.

Including a shake.

"Nope! No buts! You promised a while ago, and if you need to rationalize it yourself, well~..." Kuroka purrs pleasantly, "I am yours, so my helping is like you using a tool, darling, nya~!"

I frown at that behind her hand and drink, "I didn't like that at all you know, you're not a tool." I mumble into her hand.

She merely winked at me, "In that case, I'll beat you up, and you'll have to accept my help regardless because you can't say no, nyahahaha~!"

My frown deepens, "Kuroka…"

"Be stronger, then maybe you wouldn't have to worry about it, nya~?" She retorted with a smirk.

Ooof. Okay. That stung a bit. My pride!

Ugh. I taught her that though, didn't I? She sat in on all the times I curb-stomped Shirone in our gaming sessions, after all.

"Been working on that…" I trail off dejectedly.

"I know!" She pets Uzume's hair idly as she goes on, "But sometimes, darling, you need a little help…and you can get help, without having others do everything for you, ya nyah~?"

I bite back a very stupid retort that I know would get nowhere.

Why?

Cats are stubborn. And I did promise to let her help next time something comes up.

I like to try and keep my promises, thank you.

Ah. That reminds me. I still need to get around to railing Sona's Pawn and Knight.

I click my tongue, sitting back down whilst crossing my arms to not pout.

"Fine." I concede.

"Nyahahahaha~!!" Kuroka cat cackles in victory.

Uzume gives a small smile to all this, and I just sigh.

Right then.

I turn my gaze to our fourth occupant in the room.

Kunou is just kind of sitting there, very awkwardly to herself in a chair, her hands grasping her knees as her gaze seems to find the floor very interesting.

So interesting that she's been staring at it ever since we got here.

And she hasn't said a word since.

"Oi. Princess." I call out, prompting her to twitch slightly before her gaze snaps to me, her eyes widening in shock.

Then she slowly frowned as she realized what I called her.

Ah, so she is alive over there, hmm?

I chuckle before continuing, "What are you still doing here? Thought you would have gone back home by now?"

She twitched again at that, before crossing her arms and huffing, "I was going to explain that a while ago, but as soon as we arrived here you started arguing with the maid!"

That prompted Uzume to twitch and give a low embarrassed chuckle.

I merely blinked at that little statement.

Does Kunou not recognize Uzume as a Kami? She isn't hiding her power at all!

Granted, Uzume is pretty weak in the grand scheme of things, but still!

This is hilarious, and I'm going to use this later.

Like yes, Princess, I have a literal Goddess as a maid. What about you?

Anyways, where was I? Right.

"You know you didn't need to sit there and watch us go at it from your little chair, right?" I deadpanned at her, before pointing to the door, "Doors over that away, and don't worry, I cleared the door for midget use so you can reach the handle. I think."

That bit was mostly added for Shirone, but it works out here as well.

"I'm not short!" She flushed and shouted indignantly.

I snorted, "Could have fooled me. You barely reach beneath my chest."

"T-That! Nnmghhh!!!" Her tails swooshed rapidly behind her as she looked away, ruffling her hair with her hands, "Mother. Why? Why did you make me do this!?"

Damn, she sucks at whispering.

With a deep huff, she finally turns back to me, and points.

"I—"

"Rude." I automatically cut her off, staring at her finger.

She stares, her mouth open half-lidded.

Then she growls and stands up, her fists clenching as they ignite with pale blue fox fire.

"Shut up! Shut up shut up shut up! Or I'll eat you!!"

Huh?

"Nyah~?" Kuroka tilts her head at that.

Uzune blinks, "Huh." Her voice pierced the thick as of fuck silence, "Ancient threat. Haven't heard a Yokai say that in a long time."

Kunou meanwhile, stared dead ahead in abject horror, the flames around her fists slowly petering out.

"I…" Kunou started again, seemingly in a daze, "J-Just ignore that! Okay? Okay!" She answered for herself.

Hmm. You know, I don't get it. Was that supposed to be some big threat? A slur?

Didn't get that feeling to be honest.

But maybe that's because Kunou is just that cute, she can make it sound adorable rather than offensive.

Hmm.

I nod, completely serious, "Okay. Gotcha."

She blinked at my words, and eyed me wearily, disbelief clear in her eyes, "...really?"

"Really." I nod again.

"O-O-Okay…" She stammers, taking a long, deep, breath. Then she answered, straight to the point.

"I can't go back home for the time being."

And now, it's my turn to blink at her, "...why not?"

She sighs, "The Oni. Whenever they visit Urakyoto, Mother always sends me away. They tend to get…rowdy. In numbers."

"Ah," I rub my chin as I ponder that, "so like, egregious amounts of alcohol, violence, and fucking then?"

At my ask, Kunou looks down, her face flushing at my 'vulgar' language as she gives a meek nod.

I follow up with, "So then you're still here, specifically, because…?"

"The Oni are coming for the Night Parade, obviously, and a good chunk was already in the city…we knew the rest, and the Onigami himself would show up soon, so the plan was, before then…" she gets ever quieter, "was for Mother to ask you to..erm, take me with you when you left the following day."

I blink at that, as the words pass through my head.

Then I nearly snort aloud as I finish processing it all.

Yasaka. Really? Whose side are you on? Do you wish for your daughter to be relentlessly bullied?

Because I can grant that wish, early peasy, don't worry.

But also, if the point of sending her away when the Oni shows up is to keep her from being exposed to violence, drinking, and sex then this is probably the last place on the planet Yasaka should send her to.

My response isn't even words, just a pity-filled stare that makes my newest pet princess wiggle in place.

"I need to thank Lady Yasaka for this opportunity, Kunou, you will be the perfect stress relief princess to ever exist. Promise." I tell her honestly.

"E-Eh…?" She looks at me, no no, stares at me after I say that.

Her face slowly flushes a bright rosy red as her tails puff out behind her.

Wait wait wait. Hold everything.

Does this mean I get to pet fluffy tails?

Yes.

All's right with the world.

Now then. Kunou is sputtering about…something?

"Y-Y-You…!" She points at me again, looks at her finger, puts it down, and then stomps the ground in my general direction, "I am a t-the Princess of the Kyoto Yokai! You can't use me as mere stress relief as if I was some Red Light Nekoshou in their mating season!"

Wait. Mating Season? Red Light…?

Oh. Ohhhh.

She thought I meant…ah.

"Kun—" I try, but she keeps going.

"B-Besides, I'm much too inexperienced in c-courting rituals at the moment to have any worth in that regard…" She states somewhat lamely as she looks down.

"Oi. Kuno—"

"And a-also!" She keeps on going, looking at me once more, "A big jerk like you isn't worthy of having one such as I j-j-join you in your bed!"

"Kunou. I'm not—"

"And another thing!—Ow! Owowowowo!!!"

I halt her rambling by grabbing one of her fluffy ears and giving it a light tug.

"Kunou." I state, my smile straining my face.

"I…y-y-yes…?" She mutters back, her voice way too soft for the situation, and dripping with trepidation.

"I'm not going to fuck you." I spell out, crystal clear.

"You…aren't?" She asks, quizzically.

You know what?

I'm going to pretend, pretend, I didn't hear a hint of disappointment there.

Nope. I didn't hear that. Not at all.

"No." I reaffirm. "But. I am going to bulli you relentlessly."

She whimpers, slightly.

"Especially after all that."

She full-on whimpers at my words there.

"Correction~!" Kuroka pipes up behind us, "We're going to bulli you relentlessly, nya~!"

Ah. My communist cat strikes again.

After pondering for a second, she also adds, "Say, doesn't this technically mean we get to keep her for now, darling~?"

I hum, "Guess that does, hmm?" I look at Kunou intently, "We're gonna need to get you a collar, huh?"

Kunou, of course, yipped at that.

Ah. We're going to need to think of something to get Yasaka for this wonderful opportunity.

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

"Okay then everyone!" I clap my hands together as I take a seat before the giant map, stretched out across the table that Uzume set out a while ago.

Also, yes. I stuffed the map with pins. My half-monkey brain approves of this decision.

"I would like to figure out at least some sort of course of action before I take a really, really long nap." I state, face drooping slightly as the girls all sit around the table.

Kunou is clinging to Uzume right now as if that will somehow protect her from bulli.

Futile. But cute.

Speaking of! I focus my gaze on Uzume specifically.

"First things first, do you know how specifically my Dad's meeting with the tomato bastard went?" I ask.

Context. I need context here beyond him just being mad and salty that he got his ass handed to him.

Uzume hums for a second, before starting, "It's not that complex from what I recall. Your father went to Mt. Oe, challenged Ibaraki, and humiliated him."

"Is…is that it?" I ask, nearly at a loss for words.

"Hmm…ah!" Uzume perked up, "I think, at first, Ibaraki refused because he was human and all that."

Oh?

"So then how did he end up fighting the big guy? Did he just jump him?"

"What? No, no…" She waves me off, "Your father wasn't so crass. I think what he ended up doing was challenging the weakest Oni he could find, then working up the ranks so to speak until Ibaraki had to accept."

Kunou blinked at that, before suddenly adding, "He did the equivalent of taking all their pride and stepping on it, then? Hmm…a mere human…if it were another Oni, what he did was tantamount to taking over the Oni itself." She shivers, and looks at me, "No wonder the Onigami really wants you dead. For him, he won't be the Onigami again truly until he slays you."

What.

Dad. What the fuck did you do.

"What do you mean, Princess?" I ask tentatively.

She bristles at that, but continues, "It all comes down to Oni pride. In the eyes of the Oni, the strong rule. So him and everyone else losing to your father is the ultimate show of dominance. By beating them, he is their leader…but, he didn't kill them, or at least the Onigami, which is also the ultimate insult and slap in the face." Kunou huffed, "It's like saying, 'You're so weak, you're not even worth killing!' that type of stupid stuff."

Ah. Well. Shit.

Uzume hummed in agreement, "Mhmm. That fits with what I've known about them!"

"Joy." I state blandly.

So this isn't just irrational hatred and anger. It's a matter of pride.

A dangerous combination.

Then, a thought occurred.

A very simple thought.

"What if," I start, trying to form the sentence right, "I challenge him to fight, just like Dad did."

Almost as soon as I said those words, Uzume went to speak, loudly.

I quickly added before she could, "Specifically right before noon."

And whatever she was going to say, died in her throat.

Kunou just looked confused, however, "What would the time have to do with anything?"

"You remember the video right? Of my fight with the Juggernaut Drive?" I ask Kunou right back with a smile.

Her nod and crimson blush confirmed it for me, so I continued.

"During that fight, I entered a state powered by the sun, its strength determined by the sun's height in the sky." I explained simply.

Kunou quickly caught on, as her eyes widened, "So then, by challenging him near noon..."

I nod, "I'd be at my strongest in that state, yeah."

"You'd also be at his most uncontrolled, nya~!" Kuroka added suddenly, "You've never pushed that state so high before and that power in and of itself is still recent, you know?"

"Yeah, I know." I smile solemnly, "But it's probably my only real shot at fighting him, no?"

My Ara-Mitama is still nowhere near controlled. It's like an alter ego at this point.

Not me.

"Even so," Kunou starts once more, "I don't think he'd accept an invitation to fight now."

Eh?

"Why not?" I turn back to her, befuddled.

She grimaces, "He saw you run away from him. His pride wouldn't let him accept a request from a coward."

Double shit.

"Not only that," Uzume pipes up, "but if you're going to use that, we don't know how much destruction you'll cause at that level, so we'd need to trap the both of you in a barrier space for the fight, and, well…" Uzume gives a nervous laugh, "I don't know any barrier space creation techniques that also let in natural sunlight."

"Neither do I, nya~!" Kuroka chimes in.

Kunou shrugs, "And I usually have servants who take care of such things for me…" she finished.

Triple shit sundae.

I groan and lean back in my chair.

Barrier spaces are meant to isolate everything within from outside. It makes sense a specialized one would be required to let certain things through.

"Then who would? The Five Clans?" I ask the three.

Uzume answers first, "Perhaps…but the Bureau is more likely to possess the means, I believe."

I click my tongue at that.

I've been meaning to contact them after I met with Five Clans and the Yokai.

Although I guess, technically, I have now, hmm?

But I didn't expect all this to suddenly erupt in my face during it.

I grit my teeth.

"How would one go about getting into contact with them?" I suddenly asked Uzume.

She blinks at me, before gapping at me, "Nori…really?"

"Yeah. Really." I huffed, "If they're the only ones that can make it happen, then I don't have a choice."

Uzume chewed her lips for a second, before eventually sighing, "The Bureau is under the purview of the Imperial Family. Just…head over to the Imperial Household Agency building in Tokyo, the moment you set foot on the grounds of the Imperial Palace…they'll know." She finished rather ominously.

Kunou looked between me and Uzume, clearly confused about what all that was about.

Meanwhile, Kuroka was humming pleasantly.

"You know, darling, if you're going to get help from your extended family…why not try and go all the way, nya~?" Kuroka began slyly.

I gave her a weary glance and a tired sigh, "Do I wanna know?"

"Why not get into contact with as many groups as possible," she continued unperturbed, "and see just how much help you can gather all at once, nya~!"

I felt my eyebrow twitch at that as I sighed, "Who do you recommend…?"

Kuroka's eyes lit up, as she started spewing groups and factions all across Japan.

My first thought? She must have gotten into Uzume's notes because there's no way in hell this cat knew about half the people she was listing.

My second thought? She actually might have a point with a few of these groups.

The East Yokai Faction hasn't shown up yet, getting their input and perhaps their support alongside Yasaka's would be a bone, even if it's in word only.

She notes several small Yokai Factions, largely made up of specific species of Yokai. It wouldn't shock me if one or two hated the Oni enough to play ball.

Gathering the support of the rest of the Clans wouldn't be a bad idea either, I was going to do that anyway, and with Suzaku's help that shouldn't be too hard.

Holy hell am I actually considering this?

"Whoa whoa whoa!" Kunou cried out, stopping Kuroka and making us both look at her to see her eyes practically having swirls in them, "Getting more people on your side is great and all, but you don't have time to be rushing around the country looking right now!"

Kuroka looked back at me, a cheeky smile on her face.

I merely sighed, getting at what she was insinuating with her eyes alone.

In the next moment, a little around half a dozen clones poofed into existence behind me.

Kunou stared half in wonder, half in sheer bewilderment.

Especially as the clones began waving at her and shit.

"Let's just say I can be in more than one place at once, okay?" I gave her a similarly cheeky smile myself, and dispelled all the clones, holding back the wince of their memories hitting me all at once.

"W-Well…alright…" Kunou began again, "Still, assuming you get all the help you need, how are you going to make sure the Onigami accepts your challenge? Like I said, he likely thinks you're a coward!"

I shrug, "Then let's force him to accept, just like dear old Dad did." I stand up, looking over the map.

And the map doesn't have Mt. Oe on it. It's just outside of Kyoto.

Neuron deactivated.

I sigh, waving to the map in general, "I presume the guy didn't bring all his Oni to Kyoto, no? So. How about we pay Mt. Oe a visit, and I show that old molding tomato just how much of a coward I am!"

Kunou stared at me, absolutely stunned.

Likely also thinking I have a death wish, but eh, who doesn't think that of me at this point?

Kuroka cat cackled in her seat at my little proclamation, "Ah~! Darling? May I come with you on that little trip? I have something I'm working on that requires an Oni or two to lend some…assistance, nya~!"

Hmm. Suddenly, I feel much worse for the Oni still on that mountain.

"Sure kitty, whatever you want," I pat her on the head, "just try not to play with your food too much."

"Nyah~!" She purrs at my touch, tails waggling back and forth before she winks, "No promises~!"

Uzume just gives a tired sigh, "I really should have seen all that coming," she muttered, "well, with Kuroka there, it should be fine…" she trails off.

Kunou, meanwhile, looked between all of us like we were insane.

To be fair, it's not like she would necessarily be wrong thinking that.

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

It took a little while after that to narrow down where exactly I was going to send my clones off too.

One for the Bureau, one for the East, another for the Clans, and the rest for various smaller factions across Japan.

With all that taken care of and a general game plan for what's to come next, you'd think it would be naptime right?

Nope! There's one last thing to take care of!

We've got a guest, a Princess to be exact, and it's not like we have guest rooms here in this apartment for her.

Wasn't expecting additional company beyond Uzume after all.

…where does Uzume sleep, anyway? The last couple of times I made her sleep on the couch, but this time she just kind of left.

Kuroka went to the bedroom after we broke the meeting, but where did Uzume go?

Hmm. I'm just going to chalk it up to Kami stuff.

For now, though.

"Are you sure you wanna stay here in Kyoto?" I ask the very pouty Princess, once more, who's crossing her arms and looking away whilst sitting daintily on the couch.

Trying to convince this very stubborn, very cute, fox that staying at my place in Kuoh for a bit isn't working out all too well.

"I'm not leaving the home of my people." Was her curt reply, "Or Mother."

I deadpanned at her, "Even if you've gotta sleep on the couch here?"

She twitched at that.

"You know, while we're at it, let's get this out of the way." I continue, "I honestly think your Mother would probably prefer if you stayed out of…all this. You don't need to help, or fight, any of that."

Kunou scoffed, "Perhaps. But Mother also said she would help you, and for her dreams…" She looked at me, resolute, "If it's for Mother, I'll do it."

"Really? That's it?" I plop down next to her lackadaisically, "So if your Mother told you to try and seduce me into marriage, you'd go for it? No questions asked?"

She blinks at that, then shivers as her face flushes, "I expected you to say something like that, but n-not that specifically…how am I supposed to answer that properly!?"

"I dunno," I hum out, "technically, you know, I am royalty. A prince. Kind of. Not officially. Dad was the Crown Prince of the Imperial Family, so, you know~!" I give her a sly grin, "Could happen, just saying~!"

"E-Eh?? I suppose that explains some stuff from earlier…hey, w-wait a minute now!" She cried in outrage, "That l-lineage may have been a big deal back before I was even born! But nowadays it isn't all that!"

"Point." I concede, "But consider this. The Imperial Family's power back in the day was garnered from their lineage to Amaterasu." I lean back casually onto the couch, "Now, who am I again?"

"You're…A-Ah." Kunou blinked, several times in fact, before sputtering and promptly shutting up.

Ah. The pain of being raised royalty.

I chuckle, "Of course, if your mother wanted me in the family, pretty sure she'd just seduce me herself."

"E-EEHHH!?" Kunou practically squealed, "Y-You? With M-Mother!? You aren't worthy to—"

"Pretty sure she already tried in fact." I continue promptly, ignoring her, "Well, kind of, maybe more like testing the waters. She certainly gives off that unrepentant flirt energy though, doesn't she?"

"Mother isn't! Er, she…Nmgh." Kunou quickly quiets down, wiggling in place, "Can we please stop talking about this now? Please?"

I hum, "Well hold on now, I didn't get to finish. You wanna know why she would probably rather do it herself?"

"W-Why?" Kunou grumbled uneasily.

"Because she wouldn't want to force you to do anything you don't wanna do."

Kunou paused, and I reached over and patted her head.

"You're lucky, don't you know?" I continued softly, "Having a mother that cares about you in more ways than just what you could be used for. Not a lot of Princesses get that luxury, so aren't you the spoiled one, hmm?" I chuckled as she grumbled and blushed.

"If what you truly wish to do is see your mother's dream and words through, who am I to say that's wrong? It's what you want, after all." I yawn, scratching behind her ears idly as I do, prompting her to make a sound reminiscent of light purring, "Just, try not to get caught up thinking everything your mother wants is what you want, I guess. You're two different people, you aren't her clone. You can have wants beyond her."

"I-I…guess." Kunou mutters, before finally realizing what I'm doing, and promptly batting away my hand with a huff, "I…haven't been outside Kyoto before. I suppose…it would be nice to see outside the city for once?" She tried, almost scared, like what she was suggesting was illegal.

Hmm. That can be arranged.

"Still don't wanna stay in my other place, with your room and everything~? You really wanna stay here with all of us?" I ask her once more.

"D-Did you not already hear me?" She stammers, yet still looking straight at me, "This is all for Mother!"

"Oh~? Not because you like us?" I coyly respond.

"No. Not one bit." She huffs, crossing her arms, "You're a big jerk. Your cat is too h-horny. Your maid is…adequate, however."

"You're just saying that because you haven't seen enough of her yet." I roll my eyes, "Trust me, that opinion will change."

Kunou eyed me in confusion for that comment, before yelping as I suddenly stood up.

"Well! If you're staying with us, then I suppose it's only right that a Princess such as yourself gets the correct commendations." I announce stoically.

Immediately, Kunou tensed, weary of me.

"...I have a feeling I'm not going to like where this is going." She states, uneasy.

And she was instantly proven right, as I picked her up.

"Which is why you're going to stay with us. In the big bed." I further state.

"Eh?" Kunou stares at me, half-lidded like she can't process what I just said.

Then as I started walking toward the bedroom, she started gaping and flushing like mad as she sputtered out, "E-Ehhhh!? Hey now! I didn't agree to this! The couch is just fine! Promise! P-Promise!!"

I smirk, "It would be rude to have one such as yourself sleep on the couch, wouldn't it?"

"N-No! No, it wouldn't! I insist!" She pleads desperately.

I open the bedroom door, revealing a Kuroka, hiding under the blanket with a cheshire grin and glowing yellow eyes.

Kunou grabs onto the door frame for what could be seen as dear life.

"Please! You're not a big jerk! I didn't mean any of that stuff I said! I'm sorry, I'm sorry!!" She continued pleading.

All for naught.

"We will have fluffy tails." I intone as I pull her off the door frame.

"N-Noooo!!!" She gave one final squeal as she was pulled in.

Honestly. I don't know what she thinks is going to happen, I just brought her because I wanted to pet fluffy tails. And ears.

Might need to bring out the spray bottle and the rolled-up newspaper in case Kuroka tries getting handsy, but we aren't going to torture her or anything.

Besides, I need to fill the fun quota as much as possible right now.

There isn't long before the Night Parade begins, and if I have my way?

I'll be sacking a mountain while the yokai dance, and by morning, a very pissed-off Daiyokai to kill.

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

Chapter 22 End


Fuckin' love writing Kunou. Also want to lewd her so damn bad, but like, plot and development first. Then petting can be petting if you catch what I mean.

In the meanwhile, we are getting to this arc's conclusion fairly swiftly. 

Like, within the next three, fourth, fivish chapters. Because I'm thinking of putting the clone meeting with the Bureau/Imperial Family in its own Interlude.

I won't show all of the clone's interactions with the factions, just the Bureau/Imperial Family as they're the most important story wise.

View Post

"Makin' Waves!" Concept Post

So, I'm sure everyone's seen the Poll, yeah?

"Makin' Waves!" won, and honestly? I'm kinda shocked.

Totally has nothing to do with Serafall lewds, bet.

Anyway, this post here is for showing a smidgen of what you signed up for...as well as to give you lot a place to pitch ideas into my face that I may have not thought of.

This post was originally supposed to come out a few days after the Poll ended, but I ended up struggling hard on what to include here.

I wanted enough so you all get the idea, but not enough that I spoil the whole story ya know?

In the end, I said screw it, I'll put out what I put out. Don't wanna hold off on this for weeks upon weeks.

I've divided this post up into a few sections.

I've got character images and bios, a tentative peerage listing, and a bit of trivia.

And perhaps, by the end of this week, I'll have at the very least the draft for Chapter 1 as well.

Ready? Here we go!

Dramatis Personae

Laplace Sitri (The Main Character of Makin' Waves)

(Kid)

('Canon' Start)

"Born from the union between Lord Kunrex Sitri and Lady Ellaruth Sitri, the couple's second child after Serafall Leviathan, and the new Heir of the Sitri Clan. Born possessing both the Sitri Clan Trait and Stolas Clan Trait has led to Laplace focusing nigh obsessively on his Magical and Demonic Powers. His drive to improve these aspects of himself has led to the attention of the Satan Beelzebub, much to his sister's chargen. He is to be hailed as one of the Strongest Young Devils and has garnered the attention of his fellow young Devils in some...interesting ways."

Serafall Leviathan (Devil King of Foreign Affairs)

"Formerly known as Serafall Sitri, she is the first child of Lord Kunrex Sitri and Lady Ellaruth Sitri, the elder sister of Laplace Sitri, and the Devil King 'Satan Leviathan'. She was once the Heir of the Sitri Clan, having given that title up to become the Leviathan that she is today at the conclusion of the Devil Civil War centuries back. She is renowned across the Underworld as the Strongest Female Devil, surpassing even Sirzechs Lucifer's Queen, Grayfia Lucifuge, with her mutated Clan Trait that grants an incredible affinity for Ice."

Lord Kunrex Sitri (Lord of the Sitri Clan)

"He is the Father to both Serafall and Laplace, and the current Lord of House Sitri. During his time in the war, he was called what humans term a 'Punch Wizard' in the modern era. His fists, clad in torrents of fast flowing water and Demonic Power earned him renown, albeit lesser compared to his daughters. Those who knew the Lord and his daughter would remark that Kunrex was likely the one to pass down Serafall's original 'punch first, ask questions later' attitude she held for so long before the birth of her younger brother."

Lady Ellaruth Sitri (Lady Consort of the Sitri Clan)

"She is the Mother of both Serafall and Laplace, and the current Lady Consort of House Sitri. Formerly Ellaruth Stolas, she married into the Sitri Clan thousands of years ago, an act that likely saved her life as her old clan fell into ruin during the Devil Civil War. Her power, the Stolas Clan Trait of 'Ritual Magic' isn't deemed very useful in combat applications, instead being mostly used in elaborate ceremonies to restore the life to the ground and blasted battlefields of the Underworld. Nowadays, Ellaruth is critical in supporting the Sitri Clan with her Rituals, enabling the fast and healthy growth of numerous plants and herbs essential in the creation of herbal medicines for Sitri Clan Hospitals and Clinics, along with upkeeping the Clans many nature perseverations and habitats."

Fooden Dantalion (Heir of the Dantalion Clan)

(Kid)

('Canon' Start)

"The Heir of the Dantalion Clan, one of two Clan allied deeply with the Sitri Clan. A quiet child ever since he was born, as the Dantalion Clan Trait ran deeper within him than most. His Clan is renowned for being inspired by the modern creation of humans, forswearing the feudal castles and villas for modern mansions and architecture. His Clan is also known for being hordes of books and knowledge of all kinds, with the largest libraries and repositories of knowledge and history sitting within their lands, with the largest being known simply as the 'Biblioteca'. Fooden is a minor rival of Laplace of sorts, in that one another try and see who can read the most books by the time they turn 20."

Vulthie Shax (Heiress of the Shax Clan)

(Kid)

('Canon' Start)

"Heiress of the Shax Clan, one of the two Clans allied deeply to the Sitri Clan. Don't let the cute/pretty face (and large chest once she's grown) fool you, this perverted little shit is an absolute menace with the Shax Clan Trait. Her Clan generally isn't trusted as far as you can throw em', yet they picked the right side during the Devil Civil War, so here they still stand. The Shax aren't known for their lands, their holdings, their businesses, nor their wealth, instead they are known for the services they sell, to both human and Devil alike. As thieves, assassins, spies, smugglers, you name it, a Shax has probably done it. Vulthie is a little shit in Laplace's side most of the time, and fuck buddy when she inevitable gets caught. Usually on purpose. Serafall doesn't like her much, obviously."

Rias Gremory (Heiress of the Gremory Clan)

(Kid)

('Canon' Start)

"Heiress of the Gremory Clan, and although not allies by virtue of contract, marriage, or anything of the sort, her mother is deep friends with Laplace's mother. Therefore, the Gremory and Sitri are friends as well. Rias is the second child of the current Lord and Lady Consort of the Gremory Clan, the younger sister to the current Satan Lucifer. Although her Clan isn't anywhere near as wealthy as the other Clans, even the Sitri, they do hold vast territory and swaths of businesses. Their stalwart reputation as a loving Clan that treats their servants as family, and respectful and clean record when it comes to deals in the Underworld makes them a fairly attractive business partner in secular dealings by merit alone. As children born around the same time, both younger siblings to Devil Kings, Rias see's Laplace as a rival. A Devils whose nigh insane drive for power will get in her way of achieving her dream of becoming Rating Game Champion. It's a shame that her...er, fixation on certain media has skewed her perceptions as to what a rival should be, hmm?"

Sairaorg Bael (Heir of the Bael Clan)

"Heir to the Bael Clan, although it wasn't always this way. Sairaorg Bael was originally cast from his rightful position due to lacking the power intrinsic to Bael Bloodline. He would return from exile and reclaim his birthright with his fist alone. The Bael Clan is renowned as the 'Great King' generally thought of as to be the strongest Devil Pillar amongst the remaining, with its feet in a little bit of everything that makes the Underworld run. Absurdly wealthy, absurdly powerful, with it's ancient ancestor still wide awake and active to this day. Along with Laplace, Sairaorg is seen as one of the Strongest Young Devils. Is it any wonder, then, that Sairaorg sees the Sitri Clan Heir as a true rival? Born twice blessed in blood, a focus on oceanic amounts of Mystical and Demonic Power? Polar opposites. A match up for the ages."

Of course, there are others waiting in the wings that have yet to be seen...

Of course there's more. But the above are a pretty good starting point of character that will be seen.

You know, speaking of characters...

Tentative Peerage List

Mostly locked in, albeit not entirely final.

Queen: ???

Rook: Loup Garou

Rook: ???

Knight: ???

Knight: Bennia Orcus

Bishop: Valerie

Bishop: ???

Pawns: Genshirou Saji (x2, maybe 3?), ???...

Trust me when I say, it was a very hard debate between Kuroka or Valerie. But "A New Sun" already has Kuroka as part of the harem/main waifu, so, as to not be repetitive, Valerie won out.
As can be seen, the only real holdovers from Sona's Peerage are Genshirou, Bennia, and Loup. Why? Because they are the most interesting with the most potential, that's why.
Also leads to this funny situation where a lot of his peerage members end up being half breeds.
I haven't completely finished filling it out, although, I'll admit, I'm hiding certain picks here with the intention of not spoiling the story. (For instance, his Queen and Bishop I have a pretty good idea of already who will fill the slot.)
But! Feel free of offer suggestions, I'm taking both guys and girls, not gonna make the entire Peerage into a harem. That'd be way too much.

Trivia

Naming Conventions

Ishibumi, the Author of DxD, has some...interesting naming conventions. So, for the purposes of making the OC character fit more into the world, I'd tried to adhere as best as possible to them.

For instance!

Kunrex Sitri's name is fashioned the same way as Zeoticus Gremory's name is, by yoinking bits off Gundum character's names. In this case, I specifically yoinked the unused bits from Zeo's own namesakes.
Zeoticus from Zeon Daikun + Marticus Rex.
Kunrex from Zeon Daikun + Marticus Rex.
I originally tried other combinations, like Daimar, Kunmar, Marrex, and so on. Honestly, I almost settled on Dairex, but settled on Kunrex in the end.

In a similar vain, Ellaruth Sitri's name is styled after Venelana Gremory's name. In this case, simply by combining two preexisting girl names.
Vene Lana.
Ella Ruth.

Laplace's name was a bitch in a half to settle on. Sona's name is funky, it's supposed to mean "blue" to compliment Rias' "red", but no where can I find anything about this making sense. At all.
Sona's name apparently means gold, or wisdom, not blue.
But! It is taken from a blue Pokemon, in this case Wobbuffet's Japanese name, if you can believe it.
So, I settled on doing the same for Laplace, with his name taken directly from Lapras' Japanese name.
Honestly, it's almost like the perfect storm. Lapras, a blue, water-type Pokemon, who's Japanese name was in and of itself directly yoinked from some pretty smart guy.

Fooden and Vulthie's name are also derived from a Pokemon, like Latia and Iryuka's are. Albiet, Vulthie's is from the English name of the Pokemon so I didn't start both the new OC's names with "F", and so as to try and make a name that sounds feminine.

Clan Trait Origins

Although I won't say outright here what specifically each Clan Trait is, I will say that the Clan Trait's I made for Astaroth, Shax, Dantalion, and Glasya-Labolas are based off their demon's descriptions in the Ars Goetia.

Not alot of trivia, mostly because the story hasn't been written yet, and anymore that I would want to put here right now would be a bit too spoilery (for instance, the inspirations/names behind a bunch of magical stuff/spells Laplace makes.)

Maybe, once I start the story up, I'll come back and add more stuff to this section as time goes on.

Regardless, that is all I have for right now. May the discussion commence!

View Post

A New Sun Chapter 21

Chapter 21

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

I'm honestly surprised Kunou hasn't jumped me yet.

Kuroka and I took our seats across from the two Kyuubi, and one of them was still simmering while the other looked on with a sly smile.

I get the feeling Kunou would love nothing more than to pack all that fire up into a ball and punch me in the face with it.

Yet I also get the striking feeling that Yasaka wouldn't let that happen.

Pretty sure Kunou knows that.

So, I wave at the bonfire princess, and simply state, "Toasty."

Kunou snarls at me, or at least I think it was supposed to be a snarl.

Honestly, it sounded more like a soft whine, but eh, I got the intention.

I turned back to Yasaka, bowing slightly to her, "I thank you, Lady Yasaka, for welcoming us into your home. And for allowing our brief time here to be so comfortable." I give Kunou the side eye as I say that.

She gets the message, huffing indignantly as she snuffs out the foxfire around her.

Yasaka's smile never wavers, even as she waved my words off, "It's no big deal, Lord Kusanagi, we aim to please. Isn't that right, dear?" She turns her gaze to her daughter slightly, her smile curving up even more so.

Kunou scowls and grumbles something like an affirmative.

Think I heard something about 'even for big jerks' there.

Cute.

Yasaka giggles lightly before turning back to me, "Now then," and then her look sharpens, and despite not even being the victim of the gaze, both Kunou and Kuroka seem to instinctively straighten their postures, "for what reason do we owe the pleasure of seeing you here today, Lord Kusanagi?"

Ah. No more playtime then? Damn

Well. For now anyways.

For my part, my posture remains relaxed, an easy smile on my face as I meet the older foxes' gaze.

No point in letting this drag out longer than need be, and besides, with Yasaka I might be able to confirm Uzume's suspicions about the cause of the Night Parade.

"I'm not going to continue where my father left off." I start simply.

Much to Kunou looking at me in sheer confusion, and Yasaka looking suddenly positively blindsided.

Blinking the look off her face, Yasaka eyes me curiously, "I…see. Is that all you came here to say, then?"

I shake my head, "No, if it was that simple I never would have showed up at all."

"Truly?" Yasaka hummed out, "Then since you showed up at all, I presume it's because you have a different idea?"

Now at that, I nod and give her a grin, "Yeah, I do. And I think it is one you personally would be most agreeable towards."

"Is it now?" Yasaka practically purred out, "Well, I was certainly curious before, now I'm interested. Your father's attempt at a kingdom, an all-new united Faction for Japan didn't stick, although it was fine for as long as it lasted. What do you propose to replace it with?"

"Peace," I state, "for the whole of Japan."

Yasaka merely stares at me. "I'm going to need a tad bit more than that, Lord Kusanagi." She responds curtly.

To which I hummed, thinking of the best way to articulate my current plans.

See. Unlike in canon, the Three Factions Peace Conference? The Kuoh Treaty? I have severe doubts that anything like it will happen soon.

This means I don't have a point of comparison to draw on when I pitch this, beyond maybe the Yokai's 'peace' treaties with the Clans.

Those treaties that the Clans already broke with the East Yokai.

Good job, morons.

Pretty sure they would have broken the treaties with the West too if they didn't all live in the same city.

Internally, I sigh.

Outwardly, I start with, "The Peace Treaties between the Yokai and Five Clans are like the half-measured version of the premise I speak of," I raise my hands, spreading them out as I continue, "peace, not in a mere 'we won't attack each other' sense. But in a form where all the supernaturals of Japan can get along together, help and support each other unbidden from conflict from each other."

I take a deep steady breath, "No more should the Clans hunt Yokai for sport, no more should the Yokai hunt humans for sport. My father tried to bring everyone together via force, and you saw what happened. As soon as he left, everything went back to as it was. But, if everyone came together willingly, then…" I trail off, eyeing the Kyuubi before me.

"Something might finally stick." Yasaka finished my speech with a murmur, "I see what you meant, this sounds made to appeal to me specifically, Lord Kusanagi. A pleasant dream, if nothing else~..." she trails off with a giggle.

Ah, a dream?

"Is it truly just a dream when one of the Five Heads already supports my idea?" I ask rather plainly.

Yasaka stops giggling, her eyes widening slightly at me.

"Which one?" She asks, almost urgently.

"The Himejima." I state simply.

Yasaka's breath hitches at that.

The Himejima, after all, is known for being the most die-hard traditionalist of the Five Clans, even to this day.

"I am rather certain I can convince the rest to come on board with the idea," I continue, "either with words, status, or sword, I will." I intone.

I highly suspect I'm going to have to wave my sword around threateningly and quite possibly kill a lot more old men.

That thought really should make me feel something besides cold indifference, yet I know full well that nothing of value will be lost.

"That of course, leaves the Kami themselves, and the Yokai." I continue unbidden, "I have an idea or two for the Kami, but, as for the Yokai? Well—"

"If you can do as you claim," Yasaka interjects firmly, "then you have I, and the Wests, full support."

I blink at that, absolutely stunned, "...Just like that?"

"Just like that." She nodded with a small smile, and then her face fell as she sighed, "For the longest time, I have been trying to do something like you have described, albeit, not so connected as you are pushing for. But the Clans, always the Clans, kept pushing back on it. If you could handle them, then things might change for once."

Huh. I probably shouldn't be so surprised, out of all the Yokai, Yasaka is the most peaceful and cooperative by far.

Yet that sentence. Out of all the Yokai.

"And what of the other Yokai, the other factions?" I ask wearily. "What would they say to all this?"

At that, Yasaka grimaces, "The East can be convinced, but the others…" she trails off thoughtfully.

Ah yes. Others.

The Yokai situation in Japan is much less orderly than with the Clans.

Or I suppose to be more on par with the Yokai, I'll say humans instead.

With the human side of supernatural Japan, you've mainly got the Five Clans controlling everything, then beneath that there are the smaller exorcist families, beast keepers, Shinto artifact retainers, such as Holy Spirit Swords, and the like.

The only real outlier to all the above is the Bureau of Onmyō, who heed only the Imperial Family, but both strictly stay out of supernatural matters.

Otherwise, the Clans control pretty much everything. The lesser families heed them, and all goes on.

With the Yokai, however? Well…

Generally speaking, the Daiyokai, or Great Yokai, are meant to be the 'rulers' of the Yokai.

What instead ends up happening is several dozen different Yokai Factions spring up, all across the country, all claiming independence from the big Yokai Factions, while also all claiming to represent the entire species or group of Yokai they are made up of.

Needless to say, it's all a massive cluster fuck.

Leaders of these various groups change at the drop of a hat. Their ideology, goals, allies, and enemies change along with them.

And this isn't even taking into account the various smaller groups of Yokai, outright hidden villages and such, spread across the country.

The reason this happens is due to Yokai being so intrinsically different from humans.

They're more like Kami in that regard. Fleeting spirits of nature that stick to their roots. The human emotions, natural phenomena, or other various ways the first Yokai were created.

Some Yokai are perpetually tricksters. Some are forever horny. Some straight up need human flesh to live.

And everything I say right now isn't even wholly confined to these lesser groups, not even the big Yokai Factions are safe from this.

For instance, the East is a relatively new creation that came out of several smaller factions banding together.

There used to be a North and South Yokai Faction, but the South got Murica'd and scattered, while the North fell to fighting with some native mythology called the Ainu up on the northernmost island.

It's a testament to the stability the West has that Yasaka, its leader, went and raised a child in Kunou.

Some might even call it a miracle.

Yet, no amount of miracles will likely ever get one true Yokai Faction created. And it certainly wouldn't let such a thing ever stick.

In the end, the best that I could probably ask for is a good majority of the bigger factions being for it, and willing to join up.

Then, maybe, with cooperation, those Yokai who can't join due to extreme circumstances such as requiring humans for food, or their almost alien or fey-like thought processes, can eventually be included.

But that's so very far off from the here and now, isn't it?

For now, focus on the now.

"The upcoming Night Parade." I interrupt the fox's thought process as I speak up, "Am I correct in guessing that my reveal to the world was the cause? That these other Yokai called for it in response?"

Yasaka gave a solemn frown to that, "I wouldn't be surprised if that was the case. I can think of a few who might resent your father enough that it slid off onto you." She gave a tired sigh, "The one who originally called for it, Daiyokai Ibaraki Doujou, the Fierce God of the Oni, I could see him easily being one. He didn't take the beating your father gave him well, I heard," she chuckles lightly, "and the Oni especially are notorious for their pride and temperament."

I narrow my eyes slightly.

That name. I don't recognize it from canon.

And he's a Daiyokai too? Which means around Dragon King level at least?

In summary, Kuroka and I are fucked if we run into him.

Of course, she didn't outright say that this guy wanted me dead, but calling for an event that is historically known to be the Yokai equivalent of a crusade doesn't make me think this guy is open to talking.

Well. I might have a chance if the sun is up, but at least here in Urakyoto, there isn't even a sun to begin with.

Also, It's night by now, so I'd be fucked regardless.

I gave a weary sigh to that, "I would be very thankful if you could tell me who else might be interested in trying to kill me. For future reference, of course."

"It would be my pleasure, Lord Kusanagi." Yasaka nodded with a light smile.

Hmm, you know what? Just to confirm it.

I follow up rather blandly, "I'm probably going to have to beat back and kill quite a few Yokai if I want to see my idea through to completion, aren't I?"

"Most likely." She instantly confirms with an amused grin.

Joy.

Also, oi. Don't look at me like that. I don't find this fun at all.

Mostly. Besides the Daiyokai fight, maybe.

If I don't die instantly, which has a very high probability of occurring.

"Of course, defeating an opponent of significant strength, such as the Fierce God, would likely force the rest into submission." Yasaka adds on with a hum, "So it might not be so bad, who's to say?"

I deadpan at the fox milf for that, and she sends me a cheeky grin right back.

Slowly, Yasaka suddenly rises from her seat, taking everyone in the room by surprise.

Yet she still had that cheeky smile on her face, and her movement lacked any sort of urgency.

Kunou especially seemed surprised, though admittedly I wasn't following her expression before this so I couldn't say anything before now.

"Mother…?" She trails off inquisitively, almost, worryingly.

Yasaka waves her off for now and continues looking down at me intently.

"Well, it's been a long night, hasn't it Lord Kusanagi? I wouldn't call it heavy, but important talks like this certainly can't happen over one night, no?" Yasaka starts lightly.

Kunou, behind her, seems to be getting increasingly more pale and worried.

"Which is why I think it would be a good idea to pack it up for the night, perhaps continue tomorrow?" Her eyes narrow, beaming a smile with both her eyes and mouth down upon me, "And of course, I wouldn't be a proper host if I didn't invite you to spend the night!"

Ah. Back to playtime!

Kunou promptly gaped at her mother's back, fox ears pinned to her head, body shaking slightly.

I grinned, slowly shifting my body over slightly so I could look at her, right in the eyes.

She stops shaking, staring back at me pleadingly.

Sorry fluffy tails, no mercy.

I shift back into place, looking up at our most generous host, and nod to her curtly.

"And I wouldn't be a proper guest If I didn't graciously accept your kind offer, Lady Yasaka."

A low, whining cry emanates from behind her.

We, of course, ignored it.

"M-Mother…" Kunou picked up her voice again, "does this mean the m-meeting is officially over?" She stammered out, hope laced in her tone.

"Hmm…I suppose it does, dear." Yasaka affirmed after a second of thought.

Her smile turned rather amused, as her daughter poofed into a small nine-tailed fox and promptly booked it out the door in a blur.

Behind me, I could hear Kuroka's light chortling at the scene, and I chuckled a fair bit myself as I rose to my feet to stand before Yasaka myself.

"You did all that on purpose, didn't you?" I accused her with a stupid smile on my face.

"I have no idea what you mean," Yasaka denied easily, "I was just being courteous, that is all."

That smile on her face soon broke into a small fit of giggles herself.

Her meager attempt at covering her mouth with her hand did nothing to stop us from seeing her laugh.

"Ah~..." Yasaka gave us a content sigh, "It's been so long since I had something to tease my adorable little girl with, and then you came along. Truly, aren't you the gift that just keeps on giving?"

She reaches over and pats me on the head, a pleasant smile etched on her face all the while.

It's during this time that I notice something I'm shocked I didn't see sooner.

Yasaka is about as tall as me, I'd say a hair shorter or so.

And in my old world's freedom units? I'm about six feet tall.

Everyone in this world is short. Damn.

Can't believe I just realized that.

It takes a second, but I find the words to respond to the woman before me, "Eh, don't think anything of it." I wave her off her words, not her hand though, it feels nice, "It was instinct to tease the fox princess."

Yasaka hums pleasantly at that before removing her hand from my head, much to my sadness, and clapping twice.

Suddenly. A small childlike kitsune girl just appeared next to us.

"Yes, my Lady?" She asks softly, barely above a whisper.

Hey. Wait a minute. Isn't this the same girl from earlier? That informed me that Yasaka was ready for a meeting?

Yasaka waves towards the two of us, "Please, show these two to a guest room won't you?"

The little kitsune bows deeply, "As you command, my Lady. It'll be done."

Yasaka patted her on the head, before turning to us once more, "I should probably go find my daughter before she gets into the kitchen in her Yokai form again…last time she did, she ate all the sweets in the pantry!" She recalls out loud.

Damn. Now she's just giving us free material. Aren't you supposed to be on your daughter's side? At least a little?

"If you need me, merely ask a servant for me," Yasaka's smile turns sly as she trails off, "although I doubt you'll need me tonight, hmm~?" Her gaze shifts between Kuroka and me.

I swear to fuck. If any of these perverted foxes try to catch a glimpse of us tonight I will…probably not try anything, because I likely wouldn't even know who did it.

If they ever did.

Fuck.

Although, for a split second, I did consider flirting back. See if I couldn't get Kuroka and Yasaka in my bed tonight.

Why?

'Hey Kunou, guess who railed your mom silly last night!'

Ultimately, I decided not to. As one, an impromptu threesome after a date night without Kuroka being involved in the decision is kind of a dick move.

And two, those jokes are basic as fuck. Completely unoriginal. I can do better than that!

I nod and give her a simple smile right back, "I think we'll manage, yeah."

Yasaka almost pouted at that, I could see it, like a reflex that she suppressed almost immediately.

Almost.

So that's where Kunou got it from, hmm?

"Very well you two," Yasaka nodded back, "try not to be too loud, okay~? Have a good night!" She waved off at us as she walked off in the direction Kunou bolted off in.

As soon as she left, the small kitsune turned to us and gave us an impassive stare.

"Follow along. I shall show you to your room." She stated barely above a whisper.

And as soon as she finished, she turned and strutted off unperturbed, deceptively fast for her size.

Leaving us to have to quickly dash forward to keep up with her, Kuroka quickly clung to my arm once more, a smirk across her face as she eyed me expectantly.

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

Huh. Well. This didn't take long at all.

"Nyah~...you really should have tried to get her to join us, you know~? Mmmm~!" Kuroka moaned into my neck.

I merely deadpan down at her, driving my fingers into her needy folds with spiteful vigor.

"Somehow, I'm not surprised you'd say that~! Horny cat~!" I held back a low grunt as Kuroka mewled lewdly against me, one of her glowing dainty hands wrapped around and stroking my shaft with just as much vigor, merely lustful instead.

I would love to describe the room we were lent for the night, but beyond the big bed, I can't honestly say I've seen much else.

As soon as we got in and the door closed behind us, Kuroka dropped her kimono and jumped on me.

And so, here we are. Kuroka plastered to my side, face against my neck, and her ample bust smashed into my chest.

Unfortunately, I didn't want to pound her into the bedsheets because Kuroka has a thing for being loud. Even if I covered her mouth.

Fortunately, Kuroka had the solution.

Her glowing hand signifies her use of Demonic Power. I don't know what specifically she's doing, but it's making her hand very soft, very slick, and very warm.

Of course, seeing this, I instantly stole it and copied it.

Using my Holy Spirit Power to make my hand hot, it was very easy to simply reach down behind her, find the lips of her womanhood, and return the favor.

Mostly because Kuroka is very short. I have nearly a foot over her.

Almost a shortstack. So very close!

"Myah~!" Kuroka sticks her tongue out, breathing hotly against me as she shivers, "Not, horny, just curious~! Mmmh~! Weren't you? Just a little, nyah~?" She gives my neck a nice slow lick, prompting me to shiver as well.

"You know, curiosity killed the cat~..." I reply gruffly, reaching over with my free hand to cup and play with one of her plush breasts.

Kuroka moaned softly into my neck, "Mhmm~...but come on, Nori-kun~...weren't you wondering~? Just how does that fox keep those big juicy melons up all the time~?" Slowly, she goes up to my ear, her handle on my length quickening, "You can't lie and say you weren't~, nyyaahh~!"

In response, I roughed up her insides just a little bit harder, cursing my inability to make my fingers just vibrate.

Now that would really mess her up.

"Kuroka~...!" I groan out from a disheveled breath.

"C~Come on, think about it~!" Kuroka continues unperturbed with a lewd smirk, "Getting to inspect those things, right up close~! You know she wasn't wearing a bra, just like me~! Then just to m~make sure, you could shove your nice fat cock, right up between those mounds~..." she practically moans that into my ear.

"K~Kuroka~...!!"

"Have her squish them together," she continues softly, almost in a pleading-like manner, her hand no longer pretending like it's trying not to milk me, "and let you pound away into them, just to make sure they aren't illusions or anything of course~!"

"F~Fuck~!"

I tilt my head toward her and capture her lips with my own. A low, yet very loud groan passes through my throat at just that moment as Kuroka gets what she seems to want, my cum.

Unfortunately, unlike my groan which I used Kuroka herself to muffle, my seed shoots out of my rod unbidden, like a water fountain or hose, yet nowhere near as voluminous.

At the same time, Kuroka's body quivers into her own climax and she moans loudly in response to my fingers finding purchase in her deepest parts.

Slowly, I pull back from her lips and look her right in the eyes, "And here I was, thinking after a night like that you'd appreciate some alone time, hmm~? Then you have to go and suggest that~..." I give a fake dramatic sigh.

Kuroka winks at me and continues lightly stroking my hard-on, which of course refuses to go soft. With a small flex of her power, the little mess around her hand and my lower abdomen vanishes.

She gives my cheek a small peck, "I appreciate the thought, nya~! But still~!" She whispered sultry, "It is rather hot, isn't it~?"

My member responded for me, twitching and heating up in her hand, prompting Kuroka to let out a lewd giggle as she continued to try and rub another one out of me.

"Besides~!" Kuroka continued with a purr, "The past three days, with training from sunrise to sunset, and your nights being taken up by the redhead, I figured I could use a bit of help to relieve your backup, nyah~!"

"Hmm~?" I reach over, petting her head, scratching behind her ears, "Well now~, someone's trying to earn the title of good kitty~..."

"Earn it~!?" Kuroka whined in indignation, even as she leaned further into my touch, purring sensually, "I already am a good kitty~! No~! Best kitty~!"

I huff, "No, Shirone is the best kitty, you're a naughty kitty." I refute her easily.

Kuroka stops and blinks, before smiling softly, "That's not fair, using Shirone like that!" She faux whines, "I'll have no choice but to concede that, nya~!" Then she slowly smirks, sitting up to move down my body, dragging her mounds down my chest, my abdomen…before finally settling at my cock.

Wherein, she wraps them around my length, her bosom squishing around my hardness like marshmallows.

"...And show you just why I'm naughty kitty, nya~!" Slowly and methodically, Kuroka starts bouncing her chest up and down, squeezing them together around my shaft as she does.

With a wink, her tongue flicks out, licking the tip of my rod, before eventually, her entire mouth comes down upon its head, gobbling it up.

I don't even respond to her beyond a low grunt, just letting her do one of the things she does best.

Originally, I wanted to talk with Kuroka about the day. I noticed that during the talk with Yasaka, Kuroka didn't say or do anything, and I wanted to ask what she thought of all this.

But now I realize something.

I seriously doubt Kuroka herself cares about any of that stuff enough to have legitimate thoughts beyond how cute Kunou is, or how ridiculous Yasaka's chest is.

Also, she's right, I am a tad backed up right now.

The talk went fine, it was a tad on the short side, but that's fine considering how late we showed.

Don't know how Yasaka plans on giving her support, but we can hash it out tomorrow.

For right now? This is a good way to end the night.

Yeah, I don't think anything can ruin this, things are going just fine.

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

We awoke to the Palace shaking.

I sat up, ramrod straight, in an instant.

After Kuroka practically drained me dry, I decided to sleep with her properly, cuddle, and all that. Cute couple shit.

What the hell is going on!?

Kuroka groggily gets up beside me, rubbing her eyes as she does so, "Hmm? Nori-kun~? What's the matte—"

Kuroka stops suddenly, her face rapidly going pale.

It takes a second until I feel it, but when I do, I join her.

A thick, malevolent spirit, nearing Yasaka's own in power yet completely opposite in nature, crashes through the palace like a bloody tidal wave.

And with it, a singular roaring voice, that shook the palace once more with its sheer hatred and wrath.

"Where is he!?"

Somehow, I get the feeling he's talking about me.

But holy fuck do I hope he's not!

Suddenly, the doors busted open, and I just about grabbed my blade and started slashing until I saw who it was.

Kunou?

Huh. White pajamas. Cute.

Damnit Nori! Not now!

As soon as she saw us, whatever she was about to say died in her throat as her mouth, which was open, suddenly clicked shut.

She stared at us dumbly, her face beginning to glow red.

Ah. Right. We're still both very naked.

After a brief moment, Kunou found her voice, kind of "W-Why are you naked!?"

Albeit, it came out as some sort of low squeak rather than an actual question. Still, at least it was understandable.

"Why aren't you?" Kuroka answered dryly.

I snorted at that, as Kunou yipped indignantly.

Then the palace shook again, this time violent enough to throw objects to the ground, and nearly made Kunou herself hit the floors.

I shake my head to them both, "We don't have time for this." I state solemnly, getting up on my feet and grabbing my sword, which was propped neatly against my side of the bed.

I walk over to Kunou, who quickly covers her very flushed face as I do.

"I presume you're here to lead us out of here, right? Some sort of secret passage or some such?" I ask her plainly, to which Kunou nods her head rapidly.

"Neat. Take it yourself, and get out of here."

With that said, I turn, and prepare to head on out.

I see Kuroka blink at that off to my side, bewildered.

A moment later, I hear a squeaking, "W-What!?" behind me, before something grabs my sword.

Truly, it was nowhere near physically strong enough to stop me, but I halted so I didn't drag the poor girl with me.

I turned, looking dead at her, just as she began speaking.

Shockingly, she managed to look me in the eyes, even though her face resembled a tomato over flesh.

"Are you crazy!?" She starts, "This is the same guy Mother mentioned earlier, and although Mother is the strongest, the Fierce God is still strong! You'll be pasted before you can draw your sword!"

"Ok? And?" I bite back.

Kunou flinched at that, a scowl crossing her face, "W-What do you mean 'and' you stupid jerk, you'll die!"

"So what?" I repeat like a mantra, "This guy, he came here for me, right!?"

Those Oni that were just walking around the city. The same Oni that looked at me all pissed off, they told him about me, didn't they?

Fuck!

"W-Well, yeah?" Kunou stammered out.

"So I'm just supposed to run away? Let someone else fight my battles for me!?" I practically snarl out.

Right before Kunou could start yelling something back, a plush and soft body gently pushed into my side.

"Yes," Kuroka muttered, taking my free hand, my gaze snapped to her, but before I could even say anything a finger went to my lips, "you'll die, darling. Not even I would be able to save you. If you don't come willingly, I will drag you out of here myself."

I click my tongue and grit my teeth.

"Besides," she boops me on the nose, "didn't you promise Uzume we'd run if something like this happened?"

My eyebrow twitches, and I give a deep, long sigh.

"Fine." I turn back to Kunou, "Let's move."

Slowly, Kunou lets go of my sword sheath, "I-If it makes you feel any better, my Mother is the strongest!" She states resolutely, "She'll be fine, the city will be fine, this isn't the first time he's come here and gotten…uhm…rowdy."

I hum absentmindedly to that, slinging my sword over my shoulder.

Then I reached over with my now free hand, and patted her on the head, prompting her to freeze completely at my touch.

"Thanks, it does," I confirm slowly, "at least a little bit."

Kunou blinks up at me dumbly, her eyes slowly moving down my form, before shooting back up to look at my face as she starts batting the absolute hell out of my hand.

"Stop! That! And put on! Some clothes!!" She quickly cries out after each bat.

I snort, turning to Kuroka, "Clothes us, and let's get moving."

With a quick application of her magic, our clothes are thrown haphazardly onto us, and still very red Kunou leads us away.

Kuroka clings to my back like some sort of super horny backpack, this time she confirmed that she is indeed masking my power with her own.

Kunou led us out of the back of the palace, and all the way there, the place seemed eerily empty.

Out back, there is a secret entrance and exit from the city, used exclusively by the East's leadership, her servants, guard, and so forth.

A swirling portal of deep purple and black energy, or Youki as both Kunou and Kuroka called it, hidden in the haunted and empty-looking traditional Japanese outback.

But of course, as if leaving can ever be so simple.

Just as we reached the portal, the entire courtyard shook, and behind us…seemingly coming from right out front of the palace, a massive column of black and red power erupted into the sky.

Within it, a figure.

Or, no, it's more apt to say the column of power was the figure, coalescing into one.

A mountain of a man, bigger than the castle-like structure of the palace itself, he towered over it.

Crimson red skin, five bony horns crowning his head, and angry golden eyes, burning with ferocious power.

He looked over the palace, no, the whole fucking estate, a low growl on his lips.

Until he saw me.

And I knew he saw me, because the moment he did, the moment those eyes landed on me…

It felt like the world slammed down onto my back.

As if the very world wanted me dead, wanted to crush me like a can beneath its foot.

I heard voices, I think, to my sides. But they were muddled, I couldn't make out who was who.

I could only stare up at those eyes that promised death, that wanted me dead.

And yet, I smiled. My legs started to buckle, the metaphorical weight physically crushing me.

Yet I smiled with glee.

"F-Fuck you, you molding tomato bastard," I bit out through clenched teeth, I could feel sweat forming across my brow, "taking it all out on me because my dad was too much for you…how pathetic is that."

The talking around me ceased.

The Oni's eyes narrowed.

Maybe he's good at reading lips, or maybe he got the spirit of what I said.

Doesn't matter. The point is, he got it. I know he did.

A purple aura seeped from his skin, but before it could do anything, a fiery blue explosion blossomed right in front of him.

The weight lifted from my shoulders, and I gasped for breath I didn't know I so desperately needed as I fell to my knees.

The next thing I know, I'm being pulled into the portal, watching on as a giant nine-tailed fox forms from the fire, longer in width but smaller in height, and promptly pimp slaps the Oni in the face with its paw.

And so begins the Yokai Kaiju battle.

Shame I won't be there to see it.

Now.

How the fuck am I supposed to kill that thing!?

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

Chapter 21 End


Hmm, posted this slightly later then I usually like. Why? Cuz I ended up not liking the version I original writ, wherein Nori and Kuroka actually fight the big fuck off Oni literally named the Fierce God of the Oni.

It wasn't so egregious, they didn't actually damage him at all, but I realized I had him job so hard during the fight it didn't make any sense.

Logically, the guy would have just murdered Nori on the spot. No need to prove anything, that's just kind of how Oni are. He wouldn't have jobbed, that's a Nori/Vali training thing.

Therefore, the only option? Run.

Also this way, I can have bonfire princess come with them! Muwahahaha! The bulli never ends!

View Post

A New Sun Chapter 20

Chapter 20

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

A few days rolled past in what felt like moments.

After waking up the next day, finally dispersing my poor clone, and seeing all that, we jumped right into the grind.

And by that I mean, Kuroka somehow managed to convince Koneko to come on over when she could, so the two of them could use me as cat toys.

Not in a sexy way, either.

So, I spent the next few days specifically training against a peak ultimate class Kuroka, and Koneko who's finally learning Senjutsu.

Now, leaving the fact that Kuroka herself matches Vali in his Balance Breaker, let me just say, Koneko is bullshit at Senjutsu.

Like. According to Kuroka? She has better potential with it than even her.

Which fits, considering how fast Koneko got her third tail.

And this Koneko is jumping right into learning Senjutsu from her sister, albeit hesitantly and purely to beat me up better.

Not like I didn't try to make them work for it, but hey, only so much you can do in like three days.

At least Koneko and Kuroka got sister bonding time.

In a way.

Yeah. That's good.

My days were spent being a cat toy, and my nights were spent chugging along with Rias in multiple anime marathons.

I'm so glad I don't require sleep to function.

But! All 'good' things must come to an end, and now it's time to head out and visit the Yokai.

Specifically, the West Yokai Faction under Yasaka.

Now. I would like to wax on about the Faction's current deal and stances, but. Well.

I've got a maid and or secretary fussing over my attire right now.

"Uzume," I say suddenly, sternly, as the purple-haired kami is rapidly patting down my dress clothes as if they're filled with wrinkles or folds, "It's fine, you can stop now."

They are, I swear, she's been at this for half an hour.

She jumps at my voice, and stops to look me in the eyes, "Noriaki, Goshujin-sama," she said just as sternly back, "with all due respect, this meeting is important and thus you must dress your best!" She boops me on the nose, causing me to flinch briefly, stunned, "This isn't like the Clans where you can walk up in a bathrobe and they'll throw themselves at your feet! You must pay proper respect!"

"I know that!" I retort, muttering through rubbing my poor nose, "But you're worrying a bit much, don't you think? I look fine!"

Dare I say, dapper even.

Turning my head to the side, to look at myself in the full-body mirror, I see a young man clad in a white suit jacket over a crimson red dress shirt, with the outer robe of a black kimono, embodied with red and white flowers, falling upon my shoulders. Night black pants, and matching dress shoes finish the look.



Damn, I look fine.

And this was all Uzume's idea, truth be told.

I was planning a basic bitch formal kimono, but it was Uzume who insisted upon a mix of modern and traditional.

Although, I will admit, having the dress shirt open to expose my mark, and having my sword slung across my back, also kind of makes me look like some yakuza boss.

Still, very good-looking, very cool.

"Nyaah~? You better watch out Nori-kun~, the maid is calling you master!" Kuroka gives an amused chuckle where she lies, sprawled out across the couch, "You better listen to her, nya~! That's how you know maids are getting serious!"

I deadpan back at her, "You know, I didn't drag the couch back into the living room just so you can be cheeky and mess up your outfit, you know?"

"Hmm? Messing it up, nya~?" She sits up, leaning forward slightly as she smirks, her red, black, and gold formal kimono nearly falling over her chest as she moves, "You sure about that~?"



My eyebrow twitches, "I'm going to spank you when we get home, I hope you know."

Kuroka hums, leaning back and raising one of her legs, revealing that she is wearing underwear for once, "Looking forward to it, nya~!" She winks.

"Hmm. A six-out-of-ten tease. Should have worn lace rather than plain black." I state plainly.

Kuroka flinches, "Nyyaaahh~!? A six!? Nori-kun!" She cries out indignantly.

I turn back to Uzume, promptly ignoring the cat.

That's what you get when you don't wear underwear for so long, you forget what sexy underwear looks like.

"Can we leave yet, Uzume?" I ask her with a huff.

Uzume stares back at me for a moment, before relenting with a sigh, "Okay…fine…" she reaches out, patting my suit a couple more times absentmindedly, "just, be safe, alright? Don't do anything stupid. When your Father visited, he left Urakyoto as the only place he didn't have to fight to get people to agree to his demands. But who's to say they haven't changed their minds since…?"

I reach out, giving her a small smile as I pat her on the head a couple of times, "You don't need to worry so much, alright? We can handle ourselves just fine, and if something happens, we'll book it, okay?"

Uzume doesn't meet my smile, a slight frown on her face, "...promise?" she asks tentatively.

I smile wider, "Promise." I affirm.

A small smile slowly crosses her face, as she steps back, and bows slightly, "Then I will await your return, Goshujin-sama."

Damn. Who taught her to be a maid?

I nod at her, before walking over to Kuroka and holding out my arm, "Ready?"

She smiles prettily right back, before taking my arm as she stands up, "For a night on the town, yes! But, not so much for the politicking, nya." She sighs.

I chuckle at that, "Well, if all goes well, maybe we can come back again, none of that second part included?"

"That sounds lovely, nya~..." she snuggles into my arm as we head on out.

It took her a bit, admittedly, for her to finally ask the question I've been waiting for her to realize she should probably ask.

We were halfway to walking to our destination like a lovey-dovey couple by the time she finally asked.

"Hmm~...say, darling~?" Kuroka murmured in realization, "How are we supposed to meet Yasaka and her Faction, in the first place? We don't know where the entrance is, and it's not like you have an official channel with them, nya~?"

I merely smile a truly face-splitting grin, right back at her.

"I've got an idea or two."

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

Sitting in between three separate shrines is a rather small lake, or perhaps a pond.

Specifically, the Inari Taisha, Takakura-okami, and Kumataka Shrine.

Pretty significant shrines, if I do say so myself. Of course, you've got one dedicated to Inari, the primary one, but a minor one to my Mother as well?

Seems like a perfect place to make a phone call.

As we left late in the evening, there were bound to be very few people around this time of night.

Well, mundane people, anyhow.

See, the Yokai in this city are very peculiar.

Turns out, Yasaka isn't on the Devil's side, or anything of the sort. She merely has a history of playing peacemaker and negotiator, using Kyoto as a sort of neutral ground to facilitate interaction across various groups for Japan.

Therefore, all the Devil businesses.

There are likely several other supernatural-backed businesses from all sorts of factions across the world here, it's just that simply wouldn't have been able to catch them, not knowing what to look for all.

But, that leads to why the Yokai here are odd.

Due to Yasaka's stance, the Kami, more specifically Inari, actually has some form of working relationship.

That merely being guarding the shrines in Kyoto, those not manned personally by the Clans, anyway.

Which leads to now!

Me and Kuroka, floating above the pond between the shrines, as I prepare my call.

A little ball of sparking Holy Spirit Power sitting on the tip of my finger.

Kuroka floats there in front of me, deadpanning at me and my little firecracker orb.

"Nori-kun." She starts, blandly.

"Yesss?" I drone out, focusing intently so the orb doesn't burst prematurely.

"This is your master plan, nya?"

"Yesss."

She sighs, "And you say I'm terrible at plans, nya!"

"Well, hey! It was either this or walk straight up to the Inari Shrine itself!" I point my finger up, "And grab their attention with something that doesn't induce good first impressions!"

"Like threatening to set the forest on fire, nya?"

I blink, "Eheh...no?"

Kuroka facepalms.

Okay. To be honest, I kind of procrastinated this, so this isn't the most well thought out plan.

But I'm only really doing this because I have heavy doubts they'd just come out if I asked them, the first time around with the ice cream seemed like a joke, truly.

I need to get their attention.

This should do it.

I launch the orb straight into the sky, sending it whizzing up into the late sunset like a rocket.

As it climbs further and further, its structure destabilizes rapidly, sputtering out before popping like a firework.

A bright, golden, crackling firework. With my Holy Spirit Power as the boom.

There we go, a non-threatening way of getting certain people's attention.

I twitch a bit, as my Holy Spirit Power bursts out, and a good distance away the power within the Takakura-Okami seems to fluctuate slightly.

Or, to put it bluntly, I think my mother felt that.

Oh well.

Kuroka sighs, before floating over to my side, "Well, you got a fair few people's attention with that one. All Yokai, ones vastly stronger than the rest, get ready, nya!"

Hmm? Vastly? Perhaps a higher-ranked Yokai then, like a commander?

It doesn't take long until I get my answer, as we are quickly not so much surrounded by Yokai, but more like confronted.

Mostly by Karasu-Tengu, bird people with big black feathered wings, like a Fallen, with the head of a crow.

Pretty much all of them wore typical mountain hermit attire and wielded thin staffs for weapons.

Well, sans the few slightly fancier-looking guys wielding scepters around whom Kuroka claimed to be vastly stronger than the rest.

It's not a Tengu and not someone I expected to meet so soon, that's for sure.

"You there!" Their clear leader pointed, right at me, her golden eyes narrowing as her nine-tails swished behind her in irritation, "You were here the other day, weren't you? Don't you know it's rude to let out your powers like that!?" She immediately starts chastising us, as the guard around her point their very small sticks at us.

Hmm. Okay. So, thing to note.

This is Kunou. Definitely.

But uh, she's...well.



A tad older. As in, if I had to guess, Koneko's age.

The thing is she sure as hell looks like she grew into it as well.

Her Shrine Maiden outfit looks a tad too small for her, straining against her thin yet curvaceous form, especially against her chest.

Although it's nowhere near the size of her mother's, it's going for it.

Still smaller than, say, Kuroka or Rias, but probably bigger than the Church Girls, I'd say.

So. Basically, fluffy-tailed shortstack Kunou.

Is the universe trying to tell me something here?

"Well!? What do you have to say for yourself!" She crossed her arms suddenly and glared at me, expectantly, in an almost pouty manner.

Shit. Did she keep going? Whoops! Wasn't paying attention, too busy processing all…that.

Now, Nori. Here's the thing, she looks very bulliable.

Don't do it. I know you're thinking about it, but don't.

I point up to the sky, where my makeshift firework went off, and give a happy-go-lucky smile, "You know, technically, as long as it's not explosive, fireworks are allowed in Japan, right?"

Damnit.

"Bha!?" She exclaimed and flinched, her mouth gaping in confusion at me for a second before she returned to glaring, "T-That has nothing to do with what I was just talking about!? Were you even paying attention just now!?"

I hum, non-committal, "You sure? What else could you be talking about? There isn't a rule against the Kami letting out their power here, could there be? After all, all the shrines are doing it, why can't I?"

Kunou blinked at that, looking legitimately bewildered, "T-That's not…that's not the point!" She suddenly decides, and if I had to bet, she'd probably stomp her feet if we were standing on solid ground right now.

She points at me again, "It's rude! Doing that all of a sudden! Every Yokai on the mountain felt and saw it!"

"You know it's also rude to point at someone, right?" I respond easily back.

"E-Eh?" She weakly stutters, her finger slouching, before deciding to ignore me and keep up the pointing, her finger shaking as her face flushes in a small amount of anger, her pout returning full force, "You…!"

So. Fucking. Cute.

Although I think I may have broken her.

Ah well~!

I should probably wrap this up before the girl decides to order an attack on me or something.

I chuckle, waving off her words as I float slightly forward, bowing slightly to the congregation before me.

The action causes the Kyuubi Princess to once more cease, staring at me in sheer confusion.

"Ah, but I forget my manners, before I tease you more, I should state my name and purpose, no?" I begin, formally and regally.

"Ah!? Teasing!? So all that was on purpose!" She cries out indignantly.

I ignore her, of course, and carry on, "My name is Noriaki Kusanagi, Arahitogami, Son of Amaterasu and Kunihito. I have come looking to talk with your Mother, Princess," I look straight at her, "supposedly she should be expecting me, but I don't quite know where exactly to go to find Urakyoto myself."

I smile simply, "Figured flagging the people put in charge by Lady Yasaka to guard the shrines and asking would be a pretty good way to remedy that."

Kunou blanches at my words, but only slightly, "The Omikami? So that's why it felt so…" she mutters, trailing off, before shaking her head and narrowing her eyes at me, "I am aware of who you are, Lord Kusanagi, but not of your intentions. Why should I show you where our home is? Where Mother is?" She crosses her arms and glares at me.

I deadpan at her, "You act as though your mother wouldn't just squish me to death if I tried anything. I am strong, but your mother is vastly above me and my companion in terms of power."

Kunou gave a satisfied smirk and nodded smugly at that, "Very true indeed. But that brings up another point, your…companion…" she strained the word out, "is a known criminal. That doesn't paint a pretty picture for you by association, you know?"

"On the Devil's side," I argue with ease, "do the Yokai here have a problem with her? Is she wanted in the West?"

Kunou blinked at that, narrowing her eyes in thought for a moment, "I…guess not…" she started slowly, before clicking her tongue and huffing, "Hmph. Okay. Fine. I'll concede that, but this is still incredibly suspicious. Mother never told me anything about suspecting you…"

I hum, before stating, "Parents don't often tell their children everything."

"I know that!" She snaps back, "But this seems important enough that she should have least mentioned it!"

I smile, widely, at that, "Important, huh?"

She freezes at that.

Then huffs and looks away.

So she does know who I am, and that I likely wouldn't try anything, or at least believes that I won't.

Then, logically, she's only holding out on us because…

I shrug, "Well, I suppose then we can float here all night, Princess, and I can continue to tease you." I smirk as her expression grows incredulous, "Certainly wouldn't be a waste of the night, would it Kuroka?"

"Nope, nya~!" Kuroka purrs out in affirmation.

Kunou's eyebrow twitches, before she gives a long, defeated, sigh.

"Everyone." She suddenly speaks, all the Tengu parking up at her address, "Please return to your duties at the shrine. I'll escort our guests to Urakyoto personally."

"Yes, Lady Kunou!" All the Tengu shout as one.

And at her command, they scatter to the wind.

Slowly, Kunou floats up to me, her arms still crossed as she glares right at me.

I give her a stupid smile as Kuroka floats to my side, "We will follow your lead then, Princess."

Her eyebrow twitches at that.

"I am Lady Kunou. Daughter of Lady Yasaka of the Kyoto Yokai." She speaks plainly, "Don't call me Princess."

I nod, "Got it."

She sighs in relief.

"Princess."

Her sigh strains as the last whisps leave her mouth, and she scowls at me.

"You're just a rude man in general aren't you?" She huffs out, disgruntled.

"No no," I deny rather easily, "see, I only tease cute Princesses, that makes you special!"

"Eh?" Her face blanks out for a moment as she processes what I just said, "C-Cute!?" She suddenly stammers, her face flushing as she looks away from me once more.

It takes another good moment, but eventually, she composes herself and huffs, still looking away, "Cute? I'm far more than that. I am my mother's daughter after all! There is none more beautiful than us." She states as if fact.

I want to pat her head.

I want to do it, so fucking bad.

I want to scratch behind those cute little fox ears and call her a good girl.

But I do have some self-control, you don't touch a girl you just met like that.

Hell, you don't touch anyone you just met like that.

So. I'll wait.

For now.

I chuckle at that, "Fine then, Princess. You're more than cute…" I smirk as I see her eyebrow raise at that, just barely, "you're adorable."

She tries to look away further, but can't, so I'm treated to a full side view of one of her cheeks flushing full before she finally decides to turn around, breathing out an annoyed sigh.

She flicks her tails at us, not looking back as she says, "Follow me, you two. Let's make this quick."

She starts floating away, rather quickly, but we easily keep pace.

Kuroka leans in, and mutters into my ear, "I kinda wanna keep her, nya~!"

"Same~!" I whisper right back with a chuckle.

Kunou's ears twitch at that, and she speeds up just a tad more.

Hmm. Well. It seems like the operation, 'don't bulli the fluffy-tailed shortstack' has failed successfully!

Now to make sure Kuroka doesn't actually try to kidnap the girl, the damn cat has less impulse control than I do.

Off to Urakyoto, we go!

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

Kunou just about slammed the doors to her home closed as soon as she stepped inside.

It was a close thing, as right before she did, she stopped the doors and closed them gently, not wanting to be scolded by her mother over something so trivial.

Then she stood there, right at the entrance, reeled back her head, and let out a frustrated scream.

The fox Yokai guarding the doors flinched at that, looking on at their young Princess with worry.

Meanwhile, Kunou herself was, for lack of a better term, seething.

As soon as they reached the city, those two jerks gazed at the place in awe.

Good. That made her feel all proud and smug. Her mother's city is the greatest gathering of Yokai in Japan, after all!

Then, the big jerk - because she refuses to acknowledge his status as long as he teases her like that - simply asked her if she could inform her mother of their presence.

He stressed that she shouldn't be pressed to see them too quickly, as they did just kind of show up unannounced.

Instead, as they waited to see her, they wished to use that time to explore the city for a bit.

Well. At least they knew their place there.

Understanding that her mother is far too important to just drop everything at a moment's notice for them earned some respect.

Then they went and wasted it by calling her Princess again and saying they'd see her late.

It took everything in her power not to blow the two up with foxfire.

Not like it would probably affect the big jerk at all, judging by who he is, but it's the thought that counts!

Taking a long, deep breath, Kunou rubbed the bridge between her eyes and shivered as the frothing boiling rage left her, replaced by an endearing determination to get back at them.

Somehow. Also mostly the big jerk, his accessory cat girl just nodded along and played off whatever he said the whole time.

She bristled slightly as she started walking, remembering what that cat girl said the moment they started their little trip.

Keep her? She is not some pet, damnit! She's the Princess of the Kyoto Yokai! Daughter of Yasaka!

His agreement didn't make that statement any better!

Especially coming from him!

That train of thought prompted her to blush profusely and scowl.

Wording it like that leads to ideas she'd rather not think about.

Bah! Puberty. At least she isn't like those cat yokai with their Mating Seasons.

Especially like his hanger-on cat. You'd think she's perpetually on her Mating Season the way she clung to him.

But it's further exacerbated since she's already seen him under most of those clothes.

To be fair, who hasn't at this point? It's all over the internet, but still.

That doesn't help. At all.

Stop thinking about that!

Stop thinking about how he called you cute, while you're at it as well!

He's a teasing jerk who should explode!

She didn't even realize she had made it to her mother's room until she had, on autopilot, swung open the doors.

Sitting at a desk in the far corner room, the only occupant perked up as the doors slid open, her ears fox ears twitching and nine-tails swishing as she looked up from some book and saw her.

The warm smile her mother sent her as soon as she laid her eyes upon her burned away any tumultuous emotions she had left.

Kunou smiled back, as Yasaka stood up from behind her desk, closing her book as she moved, giving her daughter her full attention.

"Kunou, dear?" She began, walking over to her and patting her on the head, "Aren't you supposed to be watching over the Fushimi Inari Shrine? Did something happen, or," her smile turned much more sly, "did you perhaps forget your pass, again?"

"Eh!?" Kunou blinked, "No, no! Mother! Nothing like that! Besides! It was one time! One!" She exclaimed in response.

Really! After the first time, she made sure to never forget it again.

Holy Spirit Power, as it turns out, is very corrosive to Yokai. She was lucky being hit with it only made her extremely sick and weak for a month, rather than turning her to ash.

Well, luck, and she is a Kyuubi, a nine-tailed fox! Something like that wouldn't kill her outright!

Her mother merely chuckled down at her, giving a pleasant hum, "So then, something happened?"

Kunou cleared her throat, before nodding and explaining in detail what had occurred thus far this evening.

By that point, Yasaka had sat down on her bed, with Kunou right beside her.

By the end of her explanation, her mother was humming thoughtfully, tails swaying side to side.

"Hmm, that man's son is here? Curious." Her mother mused, "I figured we would see him eventually, but most likely a while after the Parade, not right before." She suddenly starts chuckling, holding a hand to her face, "Still, like father, like son, I suppose, hmm?"

Kunou tilted her head in confusion, "Both of them couldn't just knock politely and ask to enter normally?"

"I suppose not." Yasaka smiles with mirth, "Though I will say, although both may have had…unorthodox methods of entrance, I vastly prefer the son's way over the father's."

"Huh." Kunou blinked, "How did his father get in, then?"

Because, personally, in Kunou's opinion, she can't think of anything worse than what she just had to deal with!

Yasaka grimaced, but still held her smile as she explained, "He found the pocket dimension Urakyoto resided in, and cut a path in with his sword."

What.

Kunou's eyes widened into saucers, "H-How!? That doesn't make any sense!" She exclaimed, jumping back to her feet and gaping at her mother.

"Oh dear," Yasaka reaches out, patting her gently and soothingly on the head, "there are few things those blessed by, or those of the Gods, Kami, and Buddha can't accomplish. That, I get the feeling you will be learning quite soon with your own eyes."

With a hum, Yasaka stood up herself, "Speaking of…Kunou, dear?"

Kunou perks up at that, "Yes, mother?"

"You should go change, perhaps into that pretty pink kimono we had made for you for more formal meetings?" Yasaka smiled slyly, "You'll be joining me for talks with him after all."

Kunou clicked her tongue, crossing her arms and looking down, "...Do I have to?"

"Kunou, this meeting is important…" Yasaka walks over to her desk, pulling open a drawer or two and rummaging through them, "this one especially. And as my daughter and heir, this makes it even more important for you to be there as well."

"B-But…Mmmm…" Kunou shifted from side to side as she gave a nervous hum.

Yasaka looked over to her, eyebrow raised, "Is something the matter dear?"

"Mmmgh!" Kunou huffed, throwing her arms up, "But he's a big jerk! I don't want him to see me looking like…like that!"

Yasaka stilled.

"Oh?" Her voice had an unusually cold edge to it all of a sudden, "A jerk, hmm? How so? What did he say?"

Kunou blushed profusely, "H-He…he called me cute! And he outright admitted to teasing me because of it!"

Even though she couldn't see her mother, she could feel her gaze boring into her back.

Then her dear mother started giggling.

A small, soft thing, before it eventually evolved into a chuckle, then a truly pretty laugh.

Well. If it wasn't directed at her.

"Mother!!" Kunou half cried half whined back, turning to see said mother covering her mouth with a dainty hand as her laughing trailed off.

"Oh, Kunou, dear. It'll be fine," she walks back over, grabbing her little cheek, much to Kunou's indignation, "he's right after all! My daughter is very cute!"

Kunou blanched at that, "M-M-Mother!!! Stoooppp!!"

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

Today has been a good night so far.

Even if Yasaka denies seeing us, or is evil now or some shit, I can confidently say all this was worth it regardless.

Urakyoto is…stunning.

A traditional Japanese city, straight out of olden times, but lit up and brought to life by the supernatural inhabitants.

Despite everything feeling old, it also feels alive.

And considering how varied the Yokai are as a species, I wouldn't be shocked if some of the buildings here were just straight-up Yokai.

Just walking around, we saw shit like a literal living thundercloud, a naked lady intertwined with a wheel, and a flying head!

It may be because of the Night Parade coming up, but we also saw a lot of Nekoshou, which Kuroka noted is unusual around here, along with Oni, Kamaitachi, and more.

Also more than likely due to the Night Parade, the city had stores and vendors set up in droves, with all sorts of Yokai foods.

Kuroka just about bought out the Nekoshou food vendor, poor guy.

She's said it's been years since she's had proper Nekoshou food, although, to me, all of it just looked like normal stereotypical stuff cats like.

Eh. Who am I to judge?

Another shocking thing is that we haven't been bothered, at all.

Well, more specifically I haven't. Kuroka is fine since she lets her ears and tails out and fits right in.

But I certainly don't look, nor feel, like a Yokai.

I could maybe see Kuroka masking my power with her own, she has been clinging to me all night after all, but it's still a shock I haven't been accosted, not even given real funny looks.

Well. Besides the Oni. But they seem perpetually angry no matter what, so eh.

We're also being followed, but I'm not exactly shocked. Be kind of dumb to leave outside guests alone to wander the city.

All in all, a very lovely night.

As we walk through the crowd of Yokai, Kuroka happily holding my arm and clinging to my side, I feel someone brush against the other side, as a small, feminine whisper enters my ear.

"Lady Yasaka will see you now."

I almost jump, I barely have time to turn my head to see a fox yokai, a small kitsune girl in a shrine maiden's outfit, as she walks off, vanishing into the crowd.

I didn't even sense her, holy fuck.

And judging by Kuroka still being all lovey-dovey right next to her, she didn't either.

Well. That was a message with a subtle double meaning if I ever saw one.

Still a great night though, heh!

I tilt my head down to Kuroka, briefly telling her what just happened, she seemed startled and apologized that she didn't sense the girl at all.

I just kissed her and told her to not blame herself, before we headed up to the Palace.

If the city was alive, then the Palace, a traditional Japanese castle manor, looked positively haunted.

In a good way. As it was glowing a soothing blue light.

We were met at the doors by a pair of Kitsune, not guards, more likely attendants as they didn't carry weapons, who led us throughout the Palace, straight to where I could feel the absurdly monstrous power of who I assumed to be Yasaka.

When the attendants opened the final door, I expected some sort of throne room.

What I didn't expect was a fairly modest tatami room, with a few zabuton cushions laying out, four in total.

Two of which were already occupied.

Okay. So look.

I knew what to expect, and I was still floored.



Yasaka is, of course, gorgeous.

But how in the fuck does she see her feet with those watermelons in the way!?

Her specialized shrine maiden attire straight from canon was sure as shit not helping keep those in and up, either!

Hell, even Kuroka looked floored, not even jealous of her chest, just like, confused?

Ain't no amount of Senjutsu and Youjutsu should physically help with that, especially when she sleeps.

Sitting right next to Yasaka in her own little cushion, was Kunou, with a bit of an outfit change.



A pretty pink kimono, with a flowery yellow sash and cute red ribbon, now adorned her form.

As soon as we entered, Yasaka gave us an inviting smile.

While Kunou pouted, puffing out her cheeks and looking away.

Fuck it. I can't.

I look straight at Kunou, give her a silly smile, and a thumbs up, "Very cute now, Princess!"

Kuroka, bless her heart, nodded along with me, humming in agreement.

Kunou blinked.

Yasaka blinked.

Then, she slowly smiled slyly.

Kunou, meanwhile—

"Ughhh!!" Threw her arms into the air, and groaned in absolute seething anger, "See, see Mother!" She points at me, over and over, "He's a jerk! A very big jerk!!"

Yasaka hums to that, "I don't know, dear, he does have a point…you are very cute like that!"

Kunou cried out once more.

And promptly burst into blue, fox fire, becoming practically a roaring bonfire within seconds.

Much to Yasaka chuckling.

You know what? I think this is going to go just fine~!

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

Chapter 20 End

Ahem.

Fluffy Tails.


Big thanks to Lulu over on QQ for the AI images.

View Post

A New Sun Interlewd 2

Interlewd 2

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

Be Advised: This chapter is non-canon to the overall story of "A New Sun" and an alternative take on Interlude 4 in specific.

"Could you use your eyes to hypnotize her into stopping?" She says all at once.

I simply give my smallest smile towards her.

Then, I turn for the door.

"Nooopppee~!" I call out as I reach for the handle, only for my hand to be grabbed, and yanked back.

"Please!" She pleads, practically begging at this point, "I'll let you take me, right here, right now, as payment!"

I stop.

And slowly tilt my head toward her, mouth slightly agape like a dumb fish.

Before she can say another word, I flick her on the nose, prompting her to yelp.

"Yeah. Right. Don't say shit like that." I chastise her, "Especially when you don't mean it."

Of course, I say that out loud.

But inward, a tiny part of me suspected otherwise.

After all, this girl did jump on Issei's dick to try and get out of her marriage with Riser.

Say. Now that I think about it, if I were to pound her right here, wouldn't that help take care of two of her problems right now?

Rias, slowly, begins unbuttoning the top of her shirt, and with the most determined look I've seen yet today, she says, "I'm dead serious."

Fucking. Murphy.

By the time she's finished talking, half of her cleavage is exposed.

And, well.




She's got all the assets like Kuroka, just taller, and while Kuroka actively tries to be sexy all the damn time, Rias is more perpetually cute.

Until the moment she starts showing skin, when she asks to get fucked, all that cute seems to naturally turn into needy.

Rias, who was staring at me unperturbed, suddenly looked down slightly and let out a light squeak in shock as her face flushed out once more.

I blink at that before I feel what she's looking at in the form of overwhelming tightness in my pants.

Hmm. You know what? Fine, Rias.

Let's see how you handle this.

Casually, I turn completely towards her, and step right back up to her, getting just like how we were before.

With her tits smashed against my chest, and bodies in general pressed against each other.

Except now, she squirms slightly in place, her face heating up as my little buddy down below presses up against her stomach.

I reach around her, my arms wrapping around her waist to pull her snugly up against me, and I look straight into her eyes.

"Rias~," I start huskily, down into her ear, feeling her shiver around me, "you sure you want this? You say take you, but I hope you understand that I will fuck you, right here, right now, in this closet. Is that really how you want your first time to be?"

"A-Ah, well~...I never really cared much about my first, anyway?" she stutters a bit, but then I freeze, as Rias' hand finds its way down and against my pulsing bulge, stroking it gently through the pants fabric, "So as long as you help me? Do with me what you will~..." she murmurs needily.

Well, if she insists, who am I to say no?

In the next moment, I push and pin her against the wall behind her, prompting a surprised yelp from the redhead.

The first thing I do is hook a finger under her bra and pull it up, freeing her mounds to the world.

Then secondly, my other snakes down her front, just like hers did earlier, finding and going under her skirt directly to her still panty-clad crotch.

My fingers almost instantly start returning the favor from earlier, moving to rub her entrance through the cloth, but not as gently as she was before.

"Ahn~!?" Rias gasped as my fingers started doing their job, "Noriaki, what are you~...?" she breathly asked, before trailing off into a low moan.

My response was curt.

"Getting you ready."

I felt her shiver as soon as I said the words, one of her hands once more reached out, finding my imprisoned hard-on, only to resume stroking it just like before.

I smirk at that, before reaching up with my free hand and grabbing one of her breasts.

She whines softly but quickly transitions into a full-on unrestrained moan as my mouth clamps down onto her nipple.

"Nnnnhhh~!?" She slams a hand over her mouth to stop most of the noise, and just as she's about to pull her hand away, I run my tongue across her nipple, prompting a repeat performance.

I look up at her slowly, my mouth temporarily letting go of her nipple only so I can smile at her.

"Someone is very sensitive, huh~?" I note lightly.

"S~Shut up, nnghhh~!!!"

I prompt her to shut up instead by claiming her breast for my mouth once more.

Rias is very sensitive, it's actually kind of sad.

My fingers slip past her underwear into her folds, I can feel her beginning to get well and truly wet before my fingers enter her, but as soon as they do, it's as though a metaphorical balloon has popped.

She arches her back against the wall and her eyes widen as I begin to ruthlessly pump my fingers up into her.

Her wanton whines and moans are muffled behind her hand, each one making me increasingly needy myself, but I don't give in until she's well and truly drenched down there.

Fortunately, it didn't take long for that to be the case.

When I finally pulled my fingers out of her, she was quivering, I'm fairly certain she was near release herself, and my fingers were coated in her juices.

I, on the other hand, was impossibly horny.

Her face was actually about as red as her hair as she moved her hand to say something to me, only, I interrupted whatever it was she was going to say, as I grabbed her and turned her around.

"Huh~!?" She whined, "Noriaki~! What are you—"

I hike up her skirt and pull down her underwear as I bend her over, and spank her ass as soon as I see it, prompting her to stop and yelp.

"You're ready now~," I say gruffly as I grab a fist full of her hair, and release my rod from its confines, pressing it up against and in between her plump cheeks, "it's time~..." I confirm deeply.

She shivers as my throbbing hot member contacts her skin, then gasps softly as I slowly lower it and press it right up against her entrance.

One of her hands braces herself against the wall, while the other moves to cover her mouth.

I quickly reach down and snatch that hand with a wide smirk.

"H~Hey~! Why would y~you—" Rias starts to whine softly.

Only for me to interrupt her with, "I'm going to hear you while I fuck you~." I state simply and huskily.

Rias flinches at that, her face flushing more, but before she can move to argue against me, I push forward.

Hard.

My member slides into her folds with ease due to her sheer wetness and within a moment I'm hilted inside of her completely.

And within the next, Rias is shivering, quivering around my cock, as all that build-up from my fingers finally gets released.

"A~Agghnnnn~!!!" She cries out, nearly screams, "H~Hahnn~!! Noriaki, wait~! What if someone hears~!?" She whimpers urgently.

I shrug, and merely say, "Maybe you shouldn't have asked to get fucked in a broom closet then, huh~?"

I don't even give her the chance to be sheepish, as I immediately start moving.

There's no point in going slow to start, after all, I warned her.

She's getting fucked.



So I move as such. One hand holding her arm back, the other firmly holding a handful of her ass, I start rutting into her like an animal.

"Ah~! A~Ahn~!! Annghh~! Nnnghh~!!"

Rias responds in kind, wantonly moaning like a bitch in heat.

Every so often, she'd try and grit her teeth, try to stop making a sound.

"Mmmmnnn~!! Aahhnnn~!!"

It always resulted in her breaking and coming back much louder though.

I don't particularly feel like playing around much with her, just giving her what I said I would.

So beyond the raw, animalistic fucking, there isn't much else I do beyond drink in her moans and inability to say anything.

Well, until we reach the part where I cum.

It doesn't take particularly long, after a while of rutting into the redhead, I feel the pressure building up rapidly in my member.

Only then do I decide on a position change.

Pulling her up by her arm, so her back is flush against my chest, I finally free her arm only to reach up and grab her throat instead.

Holding there, I mutter huskily into her ear, never letting up on pounding into her as I do, "I'm gonna cum~, Rias~! Where do you want it~!?"

"Ahhnmn~! Ahnn~!! Agghnnn~!! Inside~...!" She practically begs, reaches up, over her shoulder, her hand landing and grabbing on the back of my head, "Inside~! Ahhmm~!! Just like this~! Like this~!!"

I wrap my other arm around her waist, as I pick up speed rapidly, the pressure inside me breaking at her words.

Within a few breaths, I'm holding on tight to her body, slamming my cock as deep inside of her as it'll feasibly go.

And erupting inside of her as I cum, prompting the redhead in my grasp to shudder and arch her back, desperately pushing her ass back against my rod, as if she's trying to take more of it inside.

"Mmmnn~...Noriaki~..." Rias quivers, rubbing her head against my chest, "I guess this did turn out to be a hentai after all, hmm~?" She notes sultry.

"Wouldn't be a hentai if I only shot once though, would it~?" I respond in kind.

"H-Huh~?" She stammers in response, her eyes widening quickly as I suddenly grab one of her titties, pull back my still very hard length, and ram it back into her, "Hannggh~!!!"

Holding her chin, I make her tilt her head back to look me straight in the eyes.

"We aren't done, till I say we're done, yeah~?" I state huskily.

She swallows thickly, before giving me a slight nod, "Y~Yes, like I s~said, do as you will with me~..." she responds breathily.

Needless to say, I never did end up making it to the Student Council room.

I don't think it was much of a loss, though.

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

Interlewd 2 End


Lel. In before this all turns out to be a genjutsu Nori cast on her in order to prove a point.

This was, actually, originally how I (read: my dick) wanted Interlude 4 to end, with Nori using Genjutsu on Rias to prove how fucked it would be to hypnotize some one else.

By hypnotizing her.

Yeah, the logic didn't pan out, even if it is hot. So it's here instead!

View Post

A New Sun Interlude 4

Interlude 4

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

I stand within a cramped, lightless, broom closet.

Now, it wouldn't be so cramped, if only the voluptuous redhead who dragged me in here wasn't so damn voluptuous in the first place.

Rias Gremory stands right in front of me, hands firmly holding the sides of my shoulders where she grabbed me mere moments ago to drag me in here.

As her body is practically glued against mine to accommodate the space, I can feel her as she heaves slow, deep, breaths, as if she just ran a marathon to get here.

Her blue stare, pleadingly, up into my golden ones as I stare back dryly.

On one hand? I didn't exactly sign up for this when I was made.

On the other hand? This does seem like the start of a hentai.

Heh. Prime Noriaki is going to get a big kick out of this~!

Ah, but first.

"Rias," I start, incredulously, throwing all of Japan's social norms into hell, "the fuck."

"E-Eh! Shushshushshush!!!" Rias scrambles out and quickly removes her hands from my shoulders, slapping them over my mouth with enough force to nearly make me poof.

"She's coming." She whispers in pure unadulterated terror.

Huh? The fuck?

Outside, I hear footsteps walking by. Short, curt, footsteps.

They pass by without any fanfare, but it's only when the footsteps vanish completely that Rias relaxes against me slightly and removes her hands from my mouth.

With a sigh, she slumps slightly, lowering her gaze to my chest, "S-Sorry, about that, and…all this." She waves belatedly to the closet around us.

I continue my dry stare, "Okay," I respond curtly, then reiterate, "the fuck is all this about then!?" I hiss out with a bit more force.

Rias flinches slightly, "R-Right, right! I've been meaning to talk to you, you know? Call you down to the old school building, but well, ever since school started back up again, things have been…different?" She tries with a grimace.

"Different, how?" I ask with a raised eyebrow.

"I…uh…" she slumps down even more, likely trying to hide her flush of embarrassment that I can rather clearly see regardless, "I…have a minder now?" She sighs and bites her lip.

I blink at that.

"Huh." I muse aloud, "Neat?"

"Huh!?" She perks up, and suddenly looks at me again, "N-No! Not neat! It's infuriating! For the past week, that demon has been scheduling and clocking everything me and my Peerage do, and I'm sick of it!" She starts full-on ranting, indignant.

Damn, Rias. Chill.

"Like, with the weekend coming up, I thought we'd have a break, but nope!" She continues, growing louder, "She's started scheduling my anime watch times! Can you believe it!? Two hours of anime on the weekend, max! What else am I supposed to do!?"

"Touch grass?" I chime in.

Rias looks at me, before slowly looking away, her face flushing rapidly, "I'm not that bad…" She defends herself, weakly.

"Mhmm." I hum, looking around, "Yeah, you didn't kidnap me just to rant about your anime watch time being limited then?"

"N-No?" She tries with a wince, then just sighs, "Okay, yes, that did feel good to get off my chest. But, beyond that, I need your help."

I merely stare at her.

"I…feel like I'm going to need actual details. Like, how this happened, who's doing this, how could I possibly help?" I state plainly.

Her eyes light up slightly with hope, "Right! So, about a week ago, my parents sent over my fiance and his Peerage."

I raise an eyebrow at that, she sighs, "Yeah, marriage contract, I didn't choose to marry him, everyone knows I don't want to marry him, yet they sent him over anyway." She looked down with an annoyed frown, gritted her teeth, and clenched her fists slightly.

"Ah," I hum in faux understanding, "Devil politics?"

Rias seems to snap out of her little funk there, looking back at me and nodding with a displeased sigh, "Correct, unfortunately. So, when he got here, I told him I didn't want anything to do with him, and, well…" she trails off, her voice getting smaller and smaller once she continues, "he…uh, left? And put his little sister in charge?"

I stare at her, for a good long moment.

Then I snort, which quickly evolves into a chuckle as she pouts, her cheeks puffing out as she looks away as much as she can.

"And, ah, who's his sister?" I ask, amused, though I already knew of course.

"Ravel Phenex." She answers curtly.

"Year?" I follow up.

Rias winced, then answered slowly, "...First."

I couldn't help it anymore, I full-on laughed.

"H-Hey…" Rias starts, weakly, giving me the side eye, "It's not that funny."

"Oh! Oh, Gremory-san—"

"Rias." She interrupted with a pout.

My train of thought stops, "Huh?"

"Rias. Call me, Rias." She says again, "You already practically saved our lives, including mine, you should be allowed as much. Besides," she points at me, "you already called me my name, no takebacks!"

I deadpanned at her, "I did that for a different reason."

"Hmm? Oh really now? What for?" She asks, curious.

I shrug, "Thought I was in a hentai there for a moment, so saying your first name would just be hotter."

She blinks.

Then looks at her chest all squished against me, at just how close she is in general.

At the very tight broom closet, which, coincidentally does provide just enough room for me to thrust properly if we did go at it.

She looks up at me, right in the eye, and for a second I see the gears turning in her head before she suddenly blushes as red as her hair.

"Oh." She replies dumbly.

I shake my head disappointed, "And I heard from my adorable little kouhai that you're supposed to be a weeb," I click my tongue, "for shame, Rias, for shame. Not recognizing the tropes as you do them."

"Shut up…" She whines lowly as I merely chuckle.

Then I stop, clear my throat, and go back to when I was rudely interrupted.

"Anyhow, Rias, it is very funny!" I start explaining, to an increasingly distraught Riss, "See, you're getting bossed around by a little girl two years your junior, when you could have dealt with your fiance, who while he might be a jerk, probably isn't a hyper manager. See the funny?" I ask with a raised eyebrow.

"Please, just, stop…" she whines further, "I get it, alright? I've been dealing with her for a week. I get it…" she trails off, rather pathetically.

I bite my tongue, and sigh, before reaching over and patting her on the head a bit.

She stops and blinks, befuddled.

"Yeah, alright. I hear you. Sorry, being pulled around like this just makes me irritable." I add, my tone softening, "I was already in a sour mood before you ran into me, Sitri called me to the Student Council Office right before lunch started." I finish with a sigh.

Rias blinks at that, "Oh, uh, my bad, then?"

I snort, "Nah, I'd prefer this," I pointedly look down at her chest, "than…whatever is waiting for me up there."

Rias gives a small smile at that.

I followed up shortly after with, "Also, you gave me the perfect excuse to show up there late, so thanks!" I give her a thumbs up, and she chuckles.

But that eventually slowly trails off nervously, as she starts talking again, "So. Like I said, I'd like your help?"

I nod, "That you did, although, I don't see how I could here?" I ask, quizzically.

Seriously. I don't think I have anything that could—

"Could you use your eyes to hypnotize her into stopping?" She says all at once.

I simply give my smallest smile towards her.

Then, I turn for the door.

"Nooopppee~!" I call out as I reach for the handle, only for my hand to be grabbed, and yanked back.

"Please!" She pleads, practically begging at this point, "I'll let you take me, right here, right now, as payment!"

I stop.

And slowly tilt my head toward her, mouth slightly agape like a dumb fish.

Before she can say another word, I flick her on the nose, prompting her to yelp.

"Yeah. Right. Don't say shit like that." I chastise her, "Especially when you don't mean it."

Of course, I say that out loud.

But inward, a tiny part of me suspected otherwise.

After all, this girl did jump on Issei's dick to try and get out of her marriage with Riser.

Say. Now that I think about it, if I were to pound her right here, wouldn't that help take care of two of her problems right now?

Rias, slowly, begins unbuttoning the top of her shirt, and with the most determined look I've seen yet today, she says, "I'm dead serious."

Fucking. Murphy.

By the time she's finished talking, half of her cleavage is exposed.

I flick her on the nose again, prompting her to yelp once more and cease.

"H-Hey!" She whines, grabbing her nose, "Stop that!"

"I will once you stop trying to get some guy that you barely know to fuck you to convince him to hypnotize some first-year girl!" I say, exacerbated, grabbing her shoulders, "Do you not see how fucked that is?!"

Rias blinks, and raises a finger, "But the girl is that demon, so it's fine?"

I sigh. Deeply.

Fuck this shit, I'd rather deal with Sitri than a crazed, anime withdrawal-laden Rias.

I huff, then start an idea I just thought about, "How about this? I summon you, via Devil summoning slip, either separately or with Koneko next time contract time comes, I presume she has a time slot for that?"

Rias nods along with a raised eyebrow, "Yes, most of the night is time for Devil jobs, why?"

I nod, "Good. So, I summon you, and you can watch anime all you want with me. That'll be your contract with me. How's that sound?"

Rias blinks, once more, I see the gears turning once more, and then her eyes start sparkling.

Like. Sparkling with Demonic Power, red and black as she smiles widely.

"Noriaki-kun. I could kiss you right now." She says almost like in a daze.

You know. I don't think I permitted her to call me by my first name, but at this point, I don't care.

I just really want out of this damn closet.

"So, sounds like a plan, tonight?" I ask with a raised eyebrow.

"Mhmm~!" She hums, nodding dreamily.

"Great!" I let go of her, then turn, grab the door handle, and fling it open, "See you later then, Rias!" I call behind me as I power walk out of there.

Honestly. I'm shocked it took this long for some bullshit like that to happen.

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

I stand now in an airy, well-lit, office room.

Behind the desk across from me, thankfully not pressed up against me, are Sona and Tsubaki.

Sona, who has bags for bags under her eyes, and seems so tired she can't even muster a professional expression.

Instead, she levels a rather deadpan glare my way.

To my surprise, Tsubaki, standing off to Sona's right, isn't glaring at me with hatred or some such.

Instead, she looks terrified, the poor girl looks like she's barely keeping herself from shaking.

Well. The last time we officially met, I did hit her with a fire dragon.

And she has been avoiding me ever since.

"Kusanagi-san," Sona begins curtly, "what took you so long?"

I mirror her deadpan stare with my own, and simply reply, "Rias."

She blinks at that, before sighing and asking, "I see. I presume she asked you for help regarding her…problem?"

"Yup." I confirm easily, "And I gave her a solution that didn't involve me hypnotizing little girls or using her body as payment, so all is well. I think."

Don't quote me on that, Murphy you little bitch.

Sona leans back in her chair and groans with exacerbation.

"Damnit, Rias…" she murmured, then leaned back forward, slumping slightly, "Well, regardless, it's been settled. I hope. Now as for why I called you here…" she slowly looked to her right, at Tsubaki.

Who instantly bows so quickly and so deeply that she almost slams her head into the side of the desk.

Wait. The fuck?

"I'm very sorry for how I acted in our first meeting!" She calls out, loudly.

I merely blink at her, and give a curt, "Okay? Uh. Thanks, I guess?"

I watch her strain herself to bow deeper, her body shaking, "I compared your conduct to some unsavory people from my past, and let my emotions get the better of me, I am well and truly sorry!" She continued, sounding increasingly distressed.

Hmm. So I was right back then, huh?

I should probably stop her before she flies off the handle, though.

I hold my hands, placatingly, though she won't yet see them, "Shinra-san, please, raise your head before all your blood runs to it." I command softly.

Tentatively, she raises her head back up.

"You're forgiven, alright? Calm it down a peg, your King looks like she could use you, properly, right about now." I idly note, pointing at Sona.

Tsubaki turns her head, her eyes widening slightly as she sees Sona resting her head in her hand, her eyelids half closed.

"Ah, it would appear so, Kusanagi-san," Tsubaki notes, shuffling around the desk to another nearby door, opening it to reveal a closet, "she has been getting increasingly drained dealing with her 'minder' as of late, I suppose."

"Sitri too, huh?" I murmur to the room, prompting a nod as Tsubaki comes out with a blanket, "Is she gonna be alright?"

After all, continuing our game while she's like this wouldn't be very fun.

Tsubaki gives a small smile as she throws it over Sona, "She will be, she just needs rest is all."

She reaches into a drawer and pulls out a sheet of paper, setting it on the table, she beckons me over.

"The reason you were called her, officially, is because of this," she taps the paper, "your, ah, club is getting a new teacher sponsor." She grimaces as she finishes.

I hum, looking over it with a raised eyebrow.

Hmm. Teacher's name?

Sera Shitori.

Gee. I wonder who that could be!?

I slowly look back up at her, and Tsubaki gives me a helpless shrug.

"You did bring this upon yourself." She oh so helpfully points out.

I sigh, picking up the paper, "Fair." I concede, "When will I see her?"

"Next week, no doubt." Tsubaki sighs in turn, "It's lucky, due to her existing responsibilities, she won't be here all the, but when she does…" she trails off, slowly looking over at Sona.

I wince at that.

Damn, what is this? Feeling bad for Sona?

Shit, I'm going soft.

I hum, "Well. Damn. If you don't mind, I'd like to enjoy what little chaos-free time I have left, then. Got barely any time for lunch left now…" I trail off, looking pointedly at Tsubaki.

She perks up, nodding, "Right, right. You're excused, Kusanagi-san."

I bow slightly, more like a nod, before turning myself and stepping out.

Making my way to the school roof where all the cool anime characters go, I can't help but crave the time Prime Noriaki calls me back.

Let him deal with this shit, I don't wanna!

Surely, he won't miss the recall this one time.

Right?

Right?

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

Interlude 4


Ah, clone Nori, your valiant sacrifice won't be forgotten. 

Btw, if you're wondering why Clone Nori doesn't just release the jutsu himself, it's because they put a policy in place that, unless it's very important (like with Issei) only Prime Nori can release the jutsu.

Just so the flood of new memories and shit doesn't fuck him up during a fight or some such.

Anyhow, Interlewd 2.

The reason this interlude is releasing slightly passed the weekend.

See, I'm sure you all noticed, but there's a specific scene in here that made me feel a little something for Rias.

Problem was, the original Interlewd was supposed to be with thigh highs, and I don't know which one to do anymore.

A Rias Interlewd at this point probably wouldn't be canon, while thigh highs would.

So, I decided that since I've been on a democracy binge lately, I'll let you lot decide.

Don't need a poll, just say how you'd rather see lewded in the comments below, and I'll tally up who gets mentioned the most or who's comment gets the most likes, stuff like that.

I'll be watching over, see who gets pushed for the most, and throw the Interlewd out later today.

View Post

Story Poll 1

Why hello there!

I have returned, as said in New Sun's Chapter 19, to deliver this Poll to you all!

Rather simply, this Poll will be used to push me towards which story I should write next, as I have way too many ideas and got indecisive.

I know, I know, it's all DxD. I do eventually want to, and will, write for other settings, but for now we'll stick to DxD. There are plenty of other stories to tell from other perspectives there, after all.

Feel free to ask questions about the choices, either here, or in this wacky new Patreon chat I'll set up shortly after this post goes live.

Ready? Let's begin!

View Post

A New Sun Chapter 19

Chapter 19

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

"Hmm. Well. Can't say I expected that reaction." I state, plainly, while staring up at the ceiling.

Uzume, still sitting in my lap, deadpans at me as she replies, "You don't say?"

The reaction?

Kuroka, having flung herself up and onto the ceiling, clinging to it upside down.

Somehow. Probably magic. Because I know she doesn't have real claws!

Her hair stands on end and her pupils are dilated, she lets out a low, terrified hiss down at us as her ears pin to the back of her head.

"Kuroka." I call up, blandly, "Kitty. Get down from there."

She hisses at me, not an angry hiss, but like a threatened hiss. Scared.

I frown. "I will come up there you, don't make me!"

"You know, besides the Mating Season," Uzume muses aloud, "Nekomata and Nekoshou don't take behavioral patterns from normal cats otherwise."

"So she's faking it." I simplify.

"Yeeeep~!" She pops out cheerily.

Kuroka blinks, and points at Uzume, "You bitch, nya~!"

As Uzume fakes a dramatic gasp, I call out once more, this time a touch more firmly.

"Kuroka. Down girl."

"No!" She fires back, clinging to the ceiling tighter, "I don't wanna! You can't just spring that on me like this, I'm not ready!"

"Bullshit," I spat out right back, "you just want the free, dramaless cuddles from your sister to continue, Chom-chan!"

"So what if I do!?" She fired back, "It's been years, okay!? I miss her! At least like that, I can be around her! Get affection from her! Hug her…" she trailed off brokenly, "I don't want that to end."

I sigh, patting Uzume on the back to grab her attention before pointing to the kitchen.

Giving a curt nod, Uzume hopped off my lap and lightly jogged off.

I stand up from my seat, staring at her firmly, "That's part of why we need to get this out of the way, so you don't become attached to seeing her like that, so you don't start thinking that is the only way to see her."

Slowly, I start floating up to her.

Kuroka avoids my gaze, her tails swaying weakly.

"But what if it is." She mutters quietly.

"It isn't." I state succinctly.

"But we have other stuff to do." She tries again, straining slightly.

"It can wait." I state once more, "The Yokau called something over for me, that'll happen in a few days. We can't stop that, and the West Yokai aren't going to become violent overnight."

I finally reach her, putting a hand on her head.

"We have time, and I'd rather use it to, firstly, get this over with before we end up pushing it back because something happens," I huff out, "and second, prepare for when that something does happen."

"With training?" Kuroka adds, almost amused.

I nod sagely, "So she learns. Don't forget the copious amounts of sex too!"

And at that, she rolls her eyes, and a phantom of a smile thinly forms as she leans into my hand more.

Only for it to slowly fade once more into a broken, sad frown.

"Nori-kun," she turns to me, eyes misting over rapidly, "please don't make me…if she doesn't believe me…I don't know what I'd do…" she pleads through slowly forming tears.

Which I reach up and slowly wipe away, with a soft smile.

"Then I guess you better be very convincing and show her just how sorry you are, right?" I gently respond to her, cupping her cheek with my hand, "Kuroka. You can't keep doing this forever. Hiding away, not saying anything. It's not good for you. And it's especially not good for Shirone. She needs to know."

I reach up, gently pulling her off the ceiling and into my arms, "You need to at least try." I finish softly into her ear.

Kuroka wraps her arms around me, barring her face into my chest as she clings onto me, almost desperately.

"I know." She mutters against me, barely audible, "Please don't make me."

"If I don't, kitty, you'll eventually come up with some hair-brained scheme," I gently pat her back with a playful smirk, "like, say, oh I dunno. A plan to ambush and kidnap your sister and force her to be a family again because talking sucks and is hard?"

She balls her fist before bringing it down upon my chest with absolutely no strength whatsoever.

"Shut u-up, you stupid man!" she cries indignantly, "That was one time, one time!"

"Ho?" I snorted, "Pretty sure the chair leg I ripped off to smack you with when you suggested it way back would say otherwise."

A buzz signaling pain strikes and sticks to my chest.

Blinking, I slowly look down.

Only to find Kuroka has sunk her fangs into the space between my pectorals like some sort of heaven-damned vampire!

I stare down at her, positively offended.

She doesn't have time to react, I don't give it to her, as I grab her arms, a confused yelp emanating from her as I pull her up.

And return the favor, chomping down on her shoulder in much the same manner.

"Nyyyaahhh~!?"

The mewling shriek, half indignant, half lewd, was glorious.

"You! Y-You! Norrriii!!!" She cries out, even as I let go of her shoulder.

"Yes. I am indeed Noriaki." I confirm blandly.

Just as she's about to make the mistake of biting me, again, Uzume's head pokes out from the kitchen.

"Alright, you two, how does breakfast sound?" She calls up, unsure.

I turn and smile back down at her, "Sounds lovely, Uzume, thank you!" I call back down, upbeat.

With a nod, Uzume pulls her head back in.

It's not long before the familiar scents of breakfast, such as bacon, eggs, pancakes, and such begin to waft up to us.

I watch as Kuroka shifts against me, her pupils dilating as the scent reaches her, and I simply chuckle.

Patting her on the back, I catch her chin with my finger and look down into her eyes.

"How about this? We eat as we discuss how we are going to go about doing this?" I offer simply.

"That…" she swallows thickly, "sounds lovely, and also…familiar?" she affirms, confused.

"It's much easier to talk shop over a good, hearty meal. It calms you down, relaxes you," I kiss her on the forehead and run my hand soothingly in her circles around her back, "helps you think, rather than freak, turns out."

She blushes mildly, before mumbling out a soft, sweet, and simple.

"Yeah."

And going straight back to holding onto me.

Albeit, now it's like a tight hug rather than a desperate cling.

Much better than before.

"You'll get through this Kuroka," I speak softly into her ear as I descend back to the floor slowly, "I know you can do it."

Kuroka's ears perk and she snuggles against me harder, but otherwise, neither confirms nor denies my words.

But I know for certain.

It's only a matter of time.

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

It's mid-afternoon now.

After breakfast and our little planning session, we took a small cat nap until the afternoon, then set out to put The Plan™ into motion.

First things first? Buying stuff for a picnic!

That's right, the plan is a picnic!

See, food always smooths things over, but beyond that, there's the environment of all this taking place that's important.

I don't want to summon Koneko in my room, and the first thing she sees is Kuroka just sitting there.

That sounds like a great way to have the cat girl jump to conclusions.

Beyond that, the room being rather closed off doesn't help either, and would only help along the 'oh shit, I'm trapped' mentality.

Thus, a picnic.

A nice little picnic outdoors in Maruyama Park, to be precise.

The place is the foremost site for Hanami, or flower viewing, in Kyoto.

Specifically cherry blossom viewing!



The time frame could be a bit better, admittedly, as the park is a tad more packed than I'd prefer.

Doesn't help that it's a weekend, either.

Still, finding a place somewhat private and away from everyone else wasn't the hardest thing in the world.

The most difficult part was setting up the picnic without Kuroka trying to stress eat all the food.

Pretty sure I spent more time holding Kuroka back from eating the pastries than actually getting anything set out.

I didn't have Uzume make anything for us this time around, instead, we went around picking out stuff from good stands and stores.

Ended up leaving Uzume home to rest, I practically ordered her to go back to bed since the moment she woke up, she jumped right back into work earlier.

This damn culture, I swear.

Moving on, the stage is finally set.

Now, it's all up to Kuroka to talk properly.

I sit, cross-legged on our picnic blanket, idly messing with my phone, waiting for Koneko to respond to my text.

Of course, I already contacted the little white cat after breakfast, and she was all for it.

I even told her there was someone I wanted her to meet, albeit I didn't specify who.

Still, she's expecting someone, and that's all that matters.

Beside me, Kuroka lay on her side, her head resting on one of my legs. She's unnervingly still, but it's easy to tell she's only like that because she is nervous.

I reach down and scratch her head absentmindedly, as we are in public somewhat, Kuroka has her tails and ears put away for right now.

With a hum, I suddenly ask, "You ready?"

"No." Is her almost instant reply, followed by a sigh as she sits up on her knees, "But…I don't have a choice anymore, do I?"

"Nope~!" I pop the word out cheerily and lean over to kiss her on the cheek, "Just remember what I told you, Kuroka. Don't fake anything, don't put on a mask, don't hide anymore." I say so incredibly softly, "Just state the truth, say what happened, honestly, and admit to it. She may not be happy to hear you're as big of an idiot as me, but I think it'll be mellowed somewhat by finding out her sister isn't a violent psychopath."

Kuroka pouts a little, crossing her arms and looking away.

"No one is as stupid as you, you stupid man, nya." She murmurs, I can practically hear the blush even though I can't see her face.

My phone dings and Kuroka's breath hitches as her body goes completely still.

I stare down at the screen, reading the message from the lock screen with ease.

After all, Koneko doesn't say all that much in a text.

"She's ready." I state aloud, giving Kuroka one last pat on the head, before pulling out Koneko's summoning slip, "Deep breaths, kitty. I promise this won't take too long, okay?"

Slowly, Kuroka finds it in herself to move. Stiffly, she turns to me and nods, swallowing thickly.

Pushing down the nervousness building in my stomach, I take a moment to breathe deeply, before tossing the slip out.

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

Koneko has decided she's never telling the others when she goes out.

Ever. Again.

As soon as she had told her President earlier this morning that Noriaki asked her out for a picnic, she regretted it.

Why?

Because, for the last several hours since morning, her redheaded bimbo of a King thought it was a great idea to get her to try on several different outfits.

All for her date.

Very fucking clearly, it wasn't a date. Judging by how he had indicated he wanted her to meet someone.

Koneko may not be the most…informed, about romance.

But she's fairly certain that doesn't happen on dates.

Yet, no matter how many bloody times she told her that, she just wouldn't let up.

It got worse when the perverted black-haired bimbo caught word and joined in!

All in all, she decided that by the start of next week, going stray is worth it.

Now, how to go about slipping holy water into those two's tea…

Oh. Don't forget to kick that useless smiling oaf of a Knight in the knob on the way out.

He just sat there, nodding along, always giving a thumbs-up the whole time, watching her suffer!

Although looking in the mirror now?

She guesses, begrudgingly, that the final outfit they settled on was kind of cute.



Kind of.

Not like she'd say that out loud.

The damn skirt is still too short for her tastes, but guess who's fault that is!?

Sighing, she looks down at her phone, seeing that Noriaki has yet to see her message.

At around the same time she told him she was ready, she also texted the rest telling her she was leaving.

Now, she's silently praying to any god that would listen to her that he summons her before the peerage inevitably tries to 'send her off' before then.

Which sounded like a great way to make her think straying now would be a good idea.

It was a close thing, though, as out in the hall she heard the running towards her room, instantly putting her on edge.

Then, just in the nick of time, she felt that familiar tug, and she let herself get pulled away, the summoning circle she haphazardly drew beneath her glowing to life as she did.

Her door flung itself open at exactly that moment, and the red-headed bimbo whined loudly as she was enveloped by that sweet, freeing light.

Of course, she also made sure to flip her off as she vanished.

She would have also told her to 'get fucked' as well, but it kind of slipped her mind at the moment.

Oh well, she'll do it later, then blame all her language on Noriaki being a bad influence.

Once the light around her faded, and she blinked the resulting spots out of her eyes, she was momentarily bedazzled to see just where exactly they were.

Sat atop a healthily flushed green plain, slightly elevated compared to the rest of the park.

From here, she could look out and see all the cherry blossom trees, see the blurred people gathered around and walking amongst the small veritable forest of them.

To say it was beautiful would be an understatement.

So, this is someplace in Kyoto, huh? Noriaki had told her he had come out here, though he didn't say why, and she didn't care either for the reason enough to ask.

Normally, she'd have to wait another year before going on the annual second-year field trip here.

She almost feels bad for the rest of her first-year peers.

Almost. They can suck it right now.

Turning to finally face her summoner, she finds him, sitting there leaning against a normal tree, a small smile on his face.

The rather large blanket and numerous food baskets sit underneath said tree, perfectly in the shade.

Ah, and there's someone else—

Golden eyes meet golden eyes.

Koneko freezes.

And simply…stares.

As does she. She doesn't know what she sees in those eyes.

Idly, Koneko spreads her senses out, as fast as she possibly can.

There are no barriers, no wards trapping her in here. Merely an illusion in place to keep the mundane from looking or heading this way.

She could run, if she wanted to.

But, the way Noriaki just sat there, slightly more tense now sure, but rather unperturbed…

So he's not a hostage then? This isn't a trick by her then!?

What…what is this?

Neither of the girls would speak, not even move, so Noriaki seemed to take that as his cue, beckoning her over.

With a simple wave of his hand, her attention snaps to him, yet her eyes don't leave her, "Hey there, Koneko-chan~!" He says in his usual, stupid, cheerful voice, "Please, take a seat?"

After a moment, she stiffly obliged, walking over to the blanket, and sitting right at the edge, nearly on the grass.

Noriaki chuckled half-heartedly, and rubbed the back of his head, while her gaze merely turned a degree more pained, something she recognized, finally.

Good.

Noriaki fake coughed, before clapping his hands together, "Well. This is certainly…going, I think?" He starts, unsure, "At least the first thing to happen wasn't violence." He stresses.

"Senpai," Koneko began, it was automatic at this point, "the fuck?"

Both of them flinched at that.

Truly, it was. Why does every single time they see each other, he does something that makes her think he wishes for death by cat girl?

Truly, out of all things, this probably takes the cake though.

Wisely, Noriaki decided to keep his fucking mouth shut and waved to her.

Her sister.

The source of, at least as far as she can remember, everything first going wrong.

Hesitantly, her eyes flicker between them before she meekly starts, "S-Shirone, I—"

"And you," she spat out, interrupting her with ease, prompting her to flinch violently, "what the hell are you doing here…?"

Honestly, it's surprising to her, just how little fear she feels right now.

It's not like it's completely gone or anything, it's still there, biting at the back of her mind.

But really, the one thing she feels right now at the forefront?

Overwhelming, sheer spite and hatred.

For the 'sister' who killed their master, their kind master who took them in, then abandoned her to die at the hands of the devil government.

Maybe it's because Noriaki is here. Maybe it's because, for some reason, she just can't see the woman she saw that day across from her right now.

She still remembers it, her sister, coated in the blood of the household and other peerage members, turning to her with that sly bloodthirsty grin.

She didn't say anything before she left, not that she could remember, all she could tell besides her was the sheer amount of blood.

Compared to that image, the black-haired, golden-eyed woman right across from her might as well be a different person altogether.

She merely stared at her once more after her question, her lip quivering, eyes positively shaking.

She was about to call her out, say exactly what she saw at the moment, a very pathetic woman who really should leave.

But then she moved.

Koneko's eyes widened into disks, as her sister practically leaped for her.

Noriaki's eyes widened all the same, and he quickly moved to get up, but he wouldn't make it in time.

All at once, all of Koneko's hatred, her anger, her spite, erupted and turned into fear.

Truthfully, she thought it was over.

It was all a trick. She's done.

But instead of more blood like that night from so long ago coating her vision, softness impacted her face.

Koneko snapped back to reality, pushing past her emotions as she found her face smooshed into her sister's chest, her arms wrapped tightly around her small back, clinging onto her desperately.

But then she began to speak.

"I-I'm sorry, I'm so, so sorry…"

All she could do was sit there, staring vacantly into her sister's chest as her broken mumbling filtered through her head.

At first, it was apologies. Constant and what felt like unending.

But eventually, after what felt like far too long, she started talking about something else.

"The experiments, Shirone…he w-was going to try and experiment on you, and I just…"

Huh?

It felt like a waterfall was crashing down upon and around her.

And she's not thinking that because her sister is practically crying and sobbing a waterfall's worth of tears.

Those words, like freezing water, doused her emotions still.

What the hell is she going on about? Their former master? Experimenting on her? That's not…

Somehow, somewhere, Koneko found some strength and managed to reach up to grab her sister right back, halting her constant stream of word vomit.

"That's not true!" She managed to croak out and fire back, "He took us in, he wouldn't have done that!"

Her sister flinched as if struck, her face shifting between pain, sadness, and anger.

"Shirone…how much do you remember of h-him?" She bit back out, through gritted teeth, her composure barely contained.

She instantly opened her mouth to speak, only to find whatever she was about to say died before it could truly take shape.

Her earliest memories are of living in their King's Estate, but, most of that time was spent in a room, with her sister.

She doesn't remember much about him, hell, they barely talked, and what little they did interact he treated her with polite distance.

He was always so busy, something about his work.

A pang of deja vu hit Koneko hard in the chest, yet she couldn't get why that just happened.

"He was never interested in taking us in out of the kindness of his heart," her sister spat out, "in the end, all he cared about was completing the research our parents started." She let out a choked sob, "A-And I didn't figure that out until it was far too late."

Their parents?

She doesn't remember her parents, she was far too young.

Still, that doesn't help anything! And, besides!

It was Koneko's turn to grit her teeth, as the next thing to come to her mind spilled unbidden.

"So what if you did," she cried out in cold fury, tears for some reason pricking the corner of her eyes, "if that's so true, why did you abandon me!? You left me there to nearly die!"

She knew she shouldn't feel so good about the sheer pain those words etched into her sister's face, but she did.

"After I killed them all, Shirone, I knew I was going to be h-hunted down like some rabid animal, and I didn't want that life for you…" she explained, brokenly, solemnly, "I didn't think they'd try and make you pay for my crimes, I'm s-sorry…" she trails off repeating, over and over again.

Koneko merely sat there, her mouth half open, gaping up at her in sheer…she doesn't know anymore.

Because that sounds reasonable, yet, still!

She didn't want to think anymore, she didn't want to feel anymore. This day has been annoying since the sun rose, and now this!?

How the hell is she supposed to deal with this? Think of this? Make of any of this!?

She wants to call her sister a liar. Write it all off, and go right back to hating her.

Yet. Thinking about it, even for a second, it makes sense.

And Noriaki, senpai, he's not objecting to any of this.

That has to mean something, right? At the very least, she isn't insane, bloodthirsty over her power, trying to kill everyone in the park.

She's just broken. Sad. A little pathetic right now.

Honestly, she doesn't know which personality she'd prefer more right now.

Both sisters suddenly pause momentarily as a pair of arms wrap firmly around the both of them.

"It's alright, you two, this is a long time coming," Noriaki says softly and soothingly down between the two, "so I know it may be hard for either of you to think right now. But, it's okay to just cry it out, you know?"

Her sister already had a head start in that department.

Yet, Koneko found that she didn't need to.

Right? Why would she?

It's just her big sister, her big sister who left her several years ago, and she hasn't seen her since.

Her big sister, who was the only one actively taking care of her from her earliest memories.

Who would curl up around her when she was scared at night when she'd have trouble sleeping. Who was always there when she was hurt, or sad, or hungry, or…or…

Why is she shaking?

Why are there tears suddenly streaming down her cheeks?

Why can't she let go!?

Needless to say, Noriaki was soon patting and rubbing the backs of them both, as the sisters' crying synced up and resonated with each other.

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

Well, that happened.

As I hold two crying cat girls in my arms, I can't believe it went mostly non-violent.

I expected Koneko to be terrified and attack at first or something, but she just went right in on the offensive fearlessly, huh?

I sigh internally at it all.

I wish this could been made simple, what with Koneko's artificial Super Devil research hairpin.

Showing her that would have proved what Kuroka was talking about instantly.

But I can't know about that, and it's not like she wears that same hairpin around all the time anyway!

I distinctly remember how the hairpin her mother gave her was stored away for safekeeping, and how Rias made replicas for her.

Considering how often Koneko's clothes get blown off during a fight, it was probably for the best.

Granted, that doesn't solve everything, there are still abandonment issues and the fact that she nearly got killed because of Kuroka's actions.

But it would have been a start.

I don't know how long it was exactly I just sat there, holding the two.

But eventually, around the same time, the two finally ran out of tears.

And for a long, eerily tense moment, the two didn't say anything to each other, or even move.

Then Koneko drove her fist into Kuroka's gut.

Ah. There's the violence.

Kuroka gasped and keeled over slightly, the punch wasn't all that fast, so I knew Kuroka saw it all coming.

She didn't seem surprised, just resigned.

"I…deserved that." Kuroka admitted tersely.

"You deserve more than that," Koneko bit back, "but nothing I do will truly hurt you, so it'll have to do, for now."

Kuroka blinked at that, "For n-now? Shirone, does that mean—"

"Don't get your hopes up." Koneko interrupted curtly, as she gently reached up, and started pushing Kuroka off her.

I quickly let go of both of them and after a moment of intense hesitation, Kuroka let go of Koneko as well.

"Also," she huffs, continuing, "don't touch me without permission, got it?

Kuroka gave a pained nod at that and started muttering apologies again.

Only to get a small sigh from Koneko as she pinches the bridge of her nose, and looks up at the sky.

"Yeah. I don't know what to think or do about this situation." Then she turns to me.

I already knew what was coming.

My head snapped backward as her small fist impacted my nose, cracking it instantly.

"That's for putting me in this situation, idiot senpai. And probably other things I'm not thinking of at the moment." She explained rather curtly as she cracked her knuckles.

I grimace, then nod to that, as my nose cracks again upon fixing itself.

She then turns her head back to Kuroka, staring dead at her, "I…don't know if I can forgive you, big sister."

Kuroka's eyes started watering again at that, but before she could do anything, Koneko continued.

"But, at the very least, you don't seem like a bloodthirsty psychopath, so…there's that at least." She adds plainly, "In fact, you seem kinda pathetic right now."

Damn, Koneko. Even I winced at that. Kuroka just seemed stunned.

"But…I am willing…to see how it goes…seeing you again…" Koneko said slowly, painfully, "And we'll see how it goes from there, alright?"

Kuroka's forehead practically hit the floor immediately after Koneko finished speaking.

"Thank you." On mumbling repeat, was all Kuroka could muster after that, I think.

Koneko gave her sister a pained look, before sighing and looking at the picnic baskets, "Food sounds nice right about now."

"That it does." I agree easily, sliding back over to my spot and leaning against the tree.

I prepared myself for the most awkward picnic of a lifetime before coming here, but damn I don't think I prepared enough.

I certainly wasn't prepared for Koneko to get up, and follow me, before plopping down right in my lap.

Kuroka just stared off to the side, a sly yet tired cat-like grin crossing her face for a split second.

Then Koneko shot her a glare, basically saying, 'Come on, tease me bitch, you won't.'

In the end, the small white cat won, and Kuroka aptly decided not to try anything.

For now, I bet. Just wait until she gets more comfortable.

I, meanwhile, looked down at the cat in my lap stunned, before Koneko tilted her head back slightly and looked up at me.

"Feed me." She commanded rather simply

I chuckled, "Fine fine, Princess, whatcha want?"

Koneko gave a short sniff to the air, her eyes narrowing slightly before stating, "The chicken."

"Ho? Got a craving?" I ask as I reach over for its basket.

Koneko glares off into the distance, "You could say that."

I chuckle as I bring it back, opening it up, I begin, "So, Koneko? You wanna hear about the stupid shit your sister has been up to ever since I met her?"

Kuroka, who was halfway through opening a basket of her own, no doubt to begin stress eating the sweets finally, suddenly stopped and shot me the greatest look of betrayal I've ever seen.

Rule number whatever when it comes to making something less awkward?

Insults, jokes, and shit-talking. Great way to break the ice.

Koneko's lips twitched between a steady frown and a stupid smile, "That's rich, coming from you, senpai."

See? Koneko gets it!

"But sure, why not?" She eventually decides, to a grief-stricken Kuroka rapidly eating off to the side.

Hmm, where to begin then? Should probably leave out all the copious amounts of sex and stuff…

Suddenly, Koneko leans herself up against me, and I hear a soft, "Thank you, senpai."

It was so quiet, I thought I was hearing things, only when I looked down and saw Koneko gazing off at the cherry trees in the distance, a small blush on her face, I know she had said it.

With a small smile, and holding a piece of chicken up to her, I begin to regale the tale of Kuroka, and the broken off chair leg.

Much to the subject of stories dismay.

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

It wasn't quite dark by the time we arrived back home via teleportation, but it was most certainly a few hours.

Almost as soon as we were inside, Kuroka whirled on me, leaped onto me with enough force to nearly knock me down, and held onto me for dear life as she started…making several different kinds of noises.

How does one describe a cat being depressed, hopeful, and horny all at once? That noise. Whatever that sounds like.

As for why she's like this? Well.

Koneko, after I regaled her with the tales of Kuroka continuing to make dumb decisions, seemed to 'take pity' on her sister, and let her have her phone number.

I grabbed Kuroka's waist, holding her still as she was practically rubbing all up against me.

"Well," I start simply, "what do you think, Kuroka? About all that?"

"I think it went way better than I thought it was going to go!" Kuroka started, a big grin across her face, "You were right, and since you were right, I want you to fuck me into a coma tonight, got it nya~?"

I simply stare at her.

Ah, sex does always help when one doesn't want to deal with emotions, huh?

"Also! We need to pick up the pace, after all, it's pretty clear Shirone has a thing for you, you know?" She rubs my chest as she continues, her grin turning lewder by the second, "And I don't plan on losing out you know?"

"Oh?" I lower my grip, grabbing her ass as I bring her over to the wall, and pin her against it, drawing a shocked lewd mew from her, "Losing out on what?" I start, huskily into her ear, "You think I'm going to take Shirone eventually as well?"

Kuroka shivers, "All strong beings in the supernatural world have harems, Nori-kun~...it's only a matter of time for you~..."

"Hmm, you know. If you told me you didn't want me to have one, I would be fine with that, right?" I say right on back.

Kuroka blinked, and softly breathed out, before giving me a genuine smile, "That's nice of you, Nori-kun~, but…I want you to have one."

"For your sister?" I guess aloud, "You wanna be sister wives?"

Kuroka shivers at that, as her smile grows.

Yeah, that figures.

"That's part of it," she confirms, "otherwise, I just don't care, as long as you don't stop loving me of course, and I trust you know your limits, Nori-kun~..." she starts kissing my cheeks softly, slowly going down to my neck.

So, don't pull an Issei, and I'll be fine?

Also, the lewd cat just said something sweet without prompting, holy shit.

I reach up with one hand, cupping her cheek and pulling her into a kiss proper.

Idly, as I began pulling off her clothes, I remembered that there was something else I was supposed to do this morning, but didn't as I got caught up in everything else.

Ah. My clone at Kuoh.

Eh. It'll be fine, I'll dispel it later, doubt I'm missing anything truly important anyhow.

After all, I have something far more important in my arms to deal with right now.

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

Chapter 19 End


There we go, depressed horni, as it should be. Kind of. More hopeful depressed horni then anything else.

That, for the most part, ties up that loose thread. Now it's up to Kuroka alone to talk with her sister make up completely.

This weekend, Interlude 4, and maybe Interlewd 2 to go along with it. That clone at Kuoh has been through some stuff. Poor guy.

Then, next week, fox MILF, and shit well and truly hits the fan.

By the way, before I head off, I should tell you all, I have my own little corner on Shiro's Discord Server...which was much easier to get then making my own server, for now anyways. Find me under Author Studios, Karmatic's Courthouse.

Come hit up a chat with me on there if you can, I'm free to talk about whatever over there, and in the pin messages I also have future story ideas and such posted.

I recommend at least checking those out, because soon I think I'm going to do a poll over here for the next story I'm going to write. Way too many ideas, not a lot of direction, and I think you all could help with that.

Till then, tho? See ya.

View Post

A New Sun Chapter 18

Chapter 18

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

Back in the same chamber where, just the other day, I killed a man.

Sat at the same table, the same chairs, teapot, even the smell of the tea.

Only differences? The cups are different and significantly fancier, and the other occupant isn't an old guy this time.

"Can I just say," I begin after taking a ginger sip of…whatever kind of tea this is, I don't know, but it tastes impeccably sweet, "you fill this room out much better than the old guy did."

Suzaku giggles lightly at that, "My, isn't someone a flirt."

I shrug at that, "I just state the truth when I see it."

Suzaku had long since sent the people she called back to the compound away from this building, so I do not need to hide anything in particular.

"Speaking of old guys," I continued, "Suou Himejima. I killed him. He told me he sent a bunch of the other elders away to this Inner Sanctuary before I arrived here, though." I raise an eyebrow at her, "You know about any of that?"

Suzaku gives a short hum, "I was aware of those elder's survival, yes. Shame that."

Damn. Not even going to try and be coy now?

"But, I wasn't aware of your killing of that man in particular. Did he offend you in some way?" She asked, intrigued.

I stare at her, blankly, "He knew what he was doing was wrong. Yet he still did it anyway."

She grimaces at my brief explanation, "Yes, his more…cowardly insistence on holding to tradition for fear of any sort of backlash was a big pain point for me as well."

I was very tempted to bring up the marriage interview stuff, but really, that sounds like a great way of pissing her off.

No real way to bring up something that sensitive in a joking manner.

"Ah, but if you did kill him, does that mean I'm to assume you mean to follow your father's footsteps?" She inquired, "After all, if I recall correctly, he did much the same upon his introduction to the Clans, just on a much bigger scale."

I snorted, "Depends. Ultimately, nothing he did changed anything. After he was gone, everything just kind of fell back into place."

Look, I'll be frank.

"And me? Well, I heard he tried to start and run a unified supernatural Japan. A kingdom." I point to myself, "I have absolutely no fucking clue how to rule. In that sense, I'd probably do worse than even he did."

I chuckle a bit before thinking aloud, "Unless it's common sense, I can do that. Telling other people not to do stupid shit would be quite easy, I think."

Suzaku nodded and chuckled along with my words.

Honestly. Back when I confronted Suou, I said I wanted to do better than my father did.

I said it because it felt right to say that, and I do want to, ultimately.

Then I sit here and realize, I'm so far out of my depth in that regard it's hilarious.

And kind of sad.

Suzaku gives a lovely hum, "Is that so? Truthfully, I thought you were here in part because your mother ordered you to come take over the part your father played."

Really?

Wait. Is that what everyone is going to think when I go to them?

That's…annoying.

I deadpanned at her, "I haven't even spoken to my mother. Across my entire life, in fact." I shake my head, and press on, "I originally came here just to learn about what supernatural Japan is like, beyond what my sources could grant."

Though at this point, I think I've kind of veered off the path of my original purpose, haven't I?

"Also, allies would be nice, I'd like to have those as well." I shoehorn in.

Suzaku, meanwhile, is just staring at me, "You haven't spoken to your mother, ever?" She utters, clearly in disbelief.

I shrug nonchalantly, "Yup. I came here all on my own."

"I…see." She finally says, a thin frown on her lips, "I truly didn't expect that, not at all. We as well, of the Five Clans, share a similar problem as well. Never hearing from the gods in any direct manner was actually why your father had support at all."

I raise an eyebrow at that, "Really? That's…interesting."

Somehow. I don't doubt for a second that the Kami leave these guys out to dry beyond giving blessings and probably some vague sense of their wills.

She sighs solemnly, "It's a pain, is what it is. Imagine, trying to do the will of your patrons when they won't tell you what they want, explicitly."

I cringe at that.

Damn. Right on the money, huh?

Would now be a good time to bring up that I have Uzume as my maid?

Or that I've met Inari before?

I kind of want to see her reaction to all that.

Hmm.

Nah. I'll save it for later.

"But, getting back on track," she shakes her head and continues, dropping her frown and replacing it with a slight sparkle in her eyes, "I'm actually quite glad you came here of your own volition. We here of the clans are servants to the gods, not seeing another is a nice change of pace."

I give a happy hum at that.

"And I'm pretty glad you're doing what you're doing," I waved my hand to the compound outside, bathed still in the sweet summer night, "with all of them, the Clans, the Himejima especially. I heard about the Clans before coming here, and admittedly, another part of the reason I wanted to come was to help against all the ultra-traditionalist bullshit going on getting people exiled and killed."

That sparkle in her eyes only seems to grow stronger, "Really now? Well, I certainly wouldn't be opposed to a little help, here and there. Being able to say that actions taken are ordained by the gods is an excellent hand waver to get things done."

I take another sip, another chuckle escaping my lips, "You wanna use me like a very handsome stick to beat down certain very stubborn elders, huh?"

The smile that sprouts on her face is poorly contained behind her teacup, "Whatever could you mean, I wonder?"

Very, very, scary indeed.

"Well, apologies, I'll help. But I won't be used." I wave off, unperturbed, "I'm not that dumb, I have agency and my own goals."

"Hmm. As you say." She says simply after taking a sip herself, "So then, what are those goals, Lord Kusanagi? If you aren't going to follow in your father's footsteps?"

"Hey now," I smiled right back, "I never said that, I said it depends."

Her smile turns cheeky, "On?" She inquires.

"Whether or not I could change anything, long term, even if I did manage to gather everyone together," I answer just as cheekily back, "and luckily? I do have some ideas on how to make it work."

At that Suzaku blinks, her head tilting cutely with genuine intrigue and slight surprise.

Anticipating her asking for details, I continue before she can speak, "I won't give away much, since I'm still working out the details, but it involves a more…permanent peace."

As Suzaku's eyes widen slightly as she considers my words, I chortle internally.

The idea only came to me recently, very recently, but I stole it from the Three Factions Peace Conference.

Which I doubt will happen at all here, since there are only Two Factions now.

But in effect, I want to see if achieving a more permanent peace and cooperation between Japan's supernatural factions is possible.

Not the sham peace the Clans have with the Yokai, which was already broken with the East Yokai Faction.

I want something between the Kami/Clans, and Yokai proper, where they all work together rather than trying to murder each other.

The idea is that everyone can collaborate, and use their resources together, to make Japan a better place.

Sounds simple, but I have a very intense feeling it's going to be a pain in the ass to pull off.

For one, convincing the die-hard traditionalist clans to do it sounds like hell, and I heavily doubt the Yokai have the same baseline respect for me that the clans do from my heritage.

That's all assuming I don't come in with a fat stick and start swinging, but I'm nowhere near strong enough to make that method work, unlike my father.

Also, that method didn't end up sticking, so I doubt it will again.

Hmm, it's going to be something I have to build up towards, then.

Help the clans with their stuff, and when the Hero Faction comes around, beat them down and win the West Yokai Faction's favor, that's a good start.

After I'm through here, I need to head back and have a talk with Uzune about stuff. See what's viable and not.

"That's certainly an idea, Lord Kusanagi," Suzaku eventually slowly states, "definitely an idea I've never personally entertained."

I nod, "That's fair, I only recently came up with it myself," I admit, "but I think the idea has a good foundation. Though beyond trying to make it happen, I'm still not entirely sure of my role beyond that."

Suzaku nods pleasantly, "Then may I ask you to keep me informed on your plans? I'll admit, while I never entertained the idea myself, it does sound interesting."

She smiles sweetly as she continues, "A greater, more permanent peace would be amicable towards and help my personal goals for the clans."

"Got a phone number so I can contact you whenever?" I ask with a raised eyebrow.

"Mhmm~!" She hums pleasantly, "But oh my, Lord Kusanagi, asking for a young lady's number so easily? So casually?" She gives me a very cheeky grin as I smirk right back at her, "Aren't you bold?"

I chuckle, "Not so bold, it would be an insult were I to assume a beautiful young lady like yourself doesn't have anyone pining for your attention. No boyfriend, no marriage lined up?" I play along, putting on a distinguished noble-sounding voice.

"Ufufufu~! Beautiful, hmm?" She hums good-naturedly, reaching for a napkin on the table.

It was a quick thing, but I did notice something else.

As soon as I said the word marriage her smile strained. Heavily.

It was so quick, I almost did miss it, but I caught it, and holy fuck am I glad I did bring up the marriage thing earlier more directly.

Dodged a nuclear missile, I think.

Still, four years, and Tobio hasn't done anything about this?

There's only loving your childhood friend, and then there's leaving several girls out to dry for years, including said childhood friend, because you're an indecisive pushover.

Granted, I don't know what's wholly going on behind the scenes, and another man's love life, or lack thereof, isn't my business.

Still. It's just sad.

A burning smell draws my attention from my thoughts, and I see Suzaku carefully burning a message into a napkin.

Flexing her mastery over her power, she writes her phone number down perfectly. I don't even see any fire come from her finger as she writes, just the faint heat haze.

And as she hands it off to me, I finally the makeshift note merely warm to the touch, with no damage marring it beyond the intended burned-in numbers.

"There you are, Lord Kusanagi!"

I give a thankful nod as I take it.

"I'll send you a message when I leave here tonight." I pocket the napkin, before adding, "I suspect we might be talking to each other extensively."

"Oh?" She raises an eyebrow slightly, "Whatever for?"

"Well, unless you're gonna tell me everything you need help with tonight." I start, "Also, unless you plan on telling me about supernatural Japan all right now to go along with it. Seems like a fair bit, taken together, right?" She gives a rather sheepish nod to that.

"Also," I tact on, "friends are nice. More of those is always good."

Seriously. I've got like. Three.

Uzume, Kuroka, Koneko.

Uzume only sort of counts, but we don't do friend stuff, Kuroka is…Kuroka.

Koneko fits though. Though I highly suspect she'll be going the way of Kuroka in the future.

Suzaku's eyes widened slightly, "Friends, hmm? Well, if you're looking for more of those, may I recommend a place where you could meet more? They are joining us under the umbrella of Shinto, after all."

I blink at that.

"Ah, right," I hum out, "the Slash Dog Team is being transferred over. Suppose I should go visit them. Know anywhere I could meet them?"

Suzaku chuckles, "They usually frequent a bar, perhaps sometime I can take you there, and introduce you?"

I grin, "My oh my!" I play up and exaggerate my voice, "Asking a young man to a bar, so casually?" I try, likely failing, to bat my eyelashes, "How bold." I finish with a smirk, to Suzaku's giggling.

"Am I to take that as a yes, then?" She asks between giggles.

"Yeah, that's a yes." I chuckle, "I've been to a bar before, got so shit-faced drunk it's still just a haze to me. Think it'll be different this time."

"If the bartender will serve you underaged," she gives me a slight grin, "which he won't. I know the bartender personally, he's far too straight-laced for that."

I sigh, and wave it off, "Well, that's good at least. Means I might remember my time there."

She smiles and nods, "That it shall. Although we will have to go after this mess is over, I'm afraid."

I give a simple nod in understanding.

Then, taking a quick look outside, I find the darkness outside has faded slightly, purple and black pulling back like a curtain to reveal a slight blue glow just beneath the horizon.

Damn. All night? Really? Doesn't feel like it.

I down the rest of my cup like a shot, and place the cup back gently.

"Well~!" I stretch out in my seat, before slowly rising with a protracted groan, "Ah. I think we covered just about everything, no?"

Suzaku followed my gaze for a moment, before chuckling at likely the same realization I just had.

She too rises curtly, a small smile across her face, "I believe it does, yes."

I give a content hum, "I'm not too sure when I'll see you again, sometime before or perhaps during the Yokai's Night Parade, when the Clans have their gathering?"

"I doubt I'll be able to input any of my plans before then," she waves my first notion off with a sigh, "so during the Clan gathering, most likely."

"Any idea when that'll be?"

She thinks for a moment, "A few days at most, I'll send you specific details before then."

I nod, before giving her a slight respectful bow. "It was a pleasure meeting you, Lady Himejima, despite the circumstances."

Suzaku chuckled, before bowing as well, although hers was much deeper, "You as well, Lord Kusanagi. Although," she raised her hand back up, "if we are to be friends, shouldn't we drop the pleasantries?"

"Ah! How bold~!?" I exaggerated exclaimed in response, to sweet giggles.

I smile, "That's alright with me, Lady Suzaku."

"Well then, Lord Noriaki," she smiles right on back, "be seeing you in person again quite soon."

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

I was feeling much better on my journey back home.

And why wouldn't I? I got to headbutt Baraqiel in the face. Peak emotional venting.

The talk over tea went well too.

Suzaku was a touch more ruthless than I originally imagined, admittedly.

But when the girl grew up in the Himejima and specifically took the Vermillion Bird on to enact change, what should have I expected?

Speaking of…

As I walk down the street, I mess with my phone's contacts, trying to think of a good nickname for her.

Ah.

I type the first thing that comes to mind.

Tiddy Birb.

Perfection.

Saving that, and sending her a quick message stating it's me and this is my number, I quickly filter through one last thing.

The memories of my clones, specifically. As it turns out, they didn't end up doing much beyond cleaning up.

Not like I could do much else, I'm not a carpenter.

But none of that was important.

What was is the memories of how the other clan members reacted to the clones being there.

See, Suzaka had called everyone back to the compound and sent people to start repairing the damage from my fight with Baraqiel.

And the guys that were sent over? Well. I'd describe their reactions to me as they revered me, practically on sight.

Much the same way that those mystics at the temple did.

I could hear talk, sporadic, here and there about how I came to kill the bastard crow and free them, like a divine gift or some shit.

It irked me, slightly, I recall. To have my agency reduced to being told to come save them by my mother or something.

So one of my clones told them off. That I wasn't sent, that I came of my own will, just like I had told Suzaku.

Somehow, that made them only revere me more.

Rolling my eyes as the memories pass, I continue my rather lackadaisical walk across the city.

Then I realized I burned my bagged sheath off and was freely walking around with a sword strapped to my back.

Thank fuck it's still super early out, and I'm not exactly anywhere near where people would be out so early.

So I picked up my pace, leaping high into the air before flying off.

The view here is nice and all, but I can't help but loathe my luck when it comes to just taking a walk so far.

Specifics shalt not be named, lest I incur the wrath of Murphy.

Nothing interesting happened on my flight back home, although seeing the city eerily devoid of people at certain places from up above was pretty cool.

Rather than enter my apartment via the door, I simply floated in through a window.

Which was open, for some reason, even though I don't recall opening one before I left the other day?

The reason as to why quickly became apparent.

That was, the complete reorganization of my living room into a veritable command center, complete with a big ass table in the center where a map of Japan sat.

Around it, were the boxes from the other day, opened and seemingly organized completely within judging off a cursory glance.

The source for the remodeling overnight?

Uzume, standing there in a tight black skirt and white sleeveless blouse, looking over everything with a finger to her chin, humming pleasantly in agreement with…herself?

My first thought was, damn. Fuck the maid outfit, she fills out a secretary outfit way better.

My second thought was, "Where did all the furniture go?"

"EEP!!?" Uzume jumped in her spot, flipping back around to look at me, "Nori!?"

"Yes. I'm Nori-kun." I confirm blandly.

She stares at me a moment, before huffing and pouting, "Why did you come through the window?"

"Because it was open and more convenient?" I state, looking around for a chair to sit on, "Why did you leave the window open?"

"Ambience," She responds as if it answered everything, "and air."

"Ah," I hum in confirmation, walking over to and grabbing a kitchen chair, "that makes sense."

With that, I take a seat. And pat my lap.

Uzume looks on, blinking slowly.

"Nori-kun, what are you…?"

"Come." I command, "Sit."

"W-What!? Why!" She exclaimed, her face flushing.

I roll my eyes, "Because someone moved the couch, so I have to do this instead. Come on!" I continue patting my lap.

Slowly, she waddled over and gingerly sat on my lap.

I grabbed her waist, and pulled her closer, prompting her to wrap her arms around my neck and squeak as if I was suddenly about to drop her.

I take a deep, non-combat oriented, breath.

"Uzume." I start plainly, "When the fuck did I say you were done resting?"

"E-Eeehh? That's what you start with!?" She exclaimed, prompting a very deadpan stare straight into her eyes.

"The fact that you did this anyway, expecting me to have an issue with something, but did it anyway concerns me." My lips twitch, as a thought occurs, "Did you…want me to punish you?"

Uzume immediately starts squirming in my grasp.

Eventually, she stops, refusing to meet my gaze.

"Maybe." She says quietly, so very quietly, I could hardly pick up on it.

But I did. So I smacked her on the ass.

"AH~!? Mmmm~! Nooori~kun!" She shuddered before she started whining.

I give her the blankets of stares, "Maybe later. First, what's all…this?" I wave off to the former living room.

"Nmmmm!" She huffs, I can feel the urge to pout at my denial radiating off her in waves.

Shockingly, she managed to push it and answer me properly.

"It's a planning center," She explained curtly, "I gathered up everything I brought, organized it, set out maps and charts and the like relating to everything. The works."

Slowly, she looks at me, a nervous smile on her face, "Is…is that okay?"

I let out a tentative sigh, "Honestly, I'm more concerned about you doing all this after I told you to rest than anything else."

Mostly because I'm going to pin the hell of that map, put string between the pins, and stuff like that.

Make it like one of those investigator boards, or one of those war maps!

I don't know why, but something about doing that just makes the neurons active in my brain.

"So you're not…mad?" She asks tentatively, and…

Bitch why the fuck do you sound disappointed!?

Then a core memory in my head replayed itself.

At that time she compared my mother's temper tantrums to her siblings.

And found that hot.

In one perfect moment of understanding, I contemplate the secrets of the universe.

And found that it's the horny.

It all boils down to the horny.

The disgust that slowly etched itself across my face at this enlightenment, told Uzume everything she needed to know about what I think of that.

"Eh? Nori-kun!? That face! N-Not that face again!!" She cried out, weakly trying to shuffle out of my grasp

But I refused, holding her tighter.

Her cries are only stopped as the bedroom door opens, and a mewling yawn echoes across the room.

"Nyah~...it's too early for all this noise, you know? What's going on—" Kuroka, who was wearing barely anything save a very short top and underwear, stopped at the door and stared out into the living room.

She tilts her head at us, "How long was I out, nya?"

"Just the night," I responded easily, "the secretary did all this overnight."

"S-Secretary!?" Uzume repeated, scandalized, "I thought I was the maid?"

I deadpanned at her, "You can be both."

Kuroka stalks over, a sly smile on her face, "Honestly, I think she looks better in a secretary outfit than a maid outfit, nya~!"

Uzume, reflexively, tries to shuffle away from her, but I hold her still.

I chuckle, "I know right?"

Uzume gives an anguished cry as Kuroka comes up, grabbing her with a low purr, causing the poor goddess to be sandwiched between us.

"Well you did say you wanted to be punished, Uzume…" I trail off with a silly smile.

"Not like this!" She cries out in response, muffled due to being pressed into Kuroka's bust.

Both of us chortle like actual cats as Uzume flails around between us.

I click my tongue though, as I realize what I'm doing.

Damn. The urge to bully the Uzume is just too strong, huh?

Gently pushing Kuroka away, much to her slight confusion, I freed the purple-haired kami.

Who instantly gasped dramatically for breath.

"Haaahhh~! Freedom!" And immediately tries to wiggle out of my grasp and escape completely.

With a long dead stare, I hold her in place and start.

"As fun as this all is, I just came back from talking with the Himejima. We can continue the bullying later," I state, "for now, we have a little talk to do."

Uzume suddenly perked up, looking on much more attentively, while Kuroka merely tilted her head in curiosity.

Not wanting to drag this out for the entire morning, I kept the events fairly brief.

Kuroka already knew about Baraqiel's, but Uzume was still out like a light then, so talking about those events was really for her benefit.

When I finished giving a general overview of that event, Kuroka chuckled, as she had yet to hear about how I handled him.

Uzume had a markedly different reaction, shivering after all was said and done.

"So it's already begun, huh?" She worryingly states, "Still, to think one of the upper echelons of the former Grigori would do something like this at all…"

"He was an idiot, and a coward looking to die early," I state simply back, "I hope, wherever he is now, he realizes that and tries to live for something now."

"We can only hope." Uzume replies in kind, though she doesn't exactly sound hopeful.

"Did you get a picture after you headbutted his nose in?" Kuroka interjects with the important questions.

I facepalm, "Damn! Knew I forgot something!"

Kuroka sighed sadly, while Uzume shook her head in exacerbation.

After a short chuckle, I continued.

Describing the events of my talk with Suzaku, my idea for peace, and the upcoming Night Parade.

"Nyah~? My my, Nori-kun, getting a girl's phone number on the first meeting? How bold~!" Kuroka exclaimed, wrapping her arms around my neck and leaning into my side.

Of course, that's what she focuses on.

Sometimes, we do share the same wavelength.

I snort and smack her on the ass, prompting a yelp from her.

"Not like that, you."

"Mhmm~!" Kuroka hums out, "But for how long, I wonder, nya~?"

I blink. Lowkey expecting I'll get a harem, huh?

Uzume, meanwhile, didn't look nearly as embarrassed as she usually is when we got up to our stuff.

Instead, she looked twitchy, worried, fumbling with her fingers.

"Hyakki Yagyō, huh?" She murmurs, "It's been a long, long time since I last heard of one of those happening. Not since the original Daiyokai, I think." She shivers, and turns to me, "Nori."

"Hmm?" I look at her, meeting her gaze.

The slight fear pricking her voice draws my complete attention and makes Kuroka halt her horny. For now.

"I think, if you really want this peace idea to get going, you might have to visit at least one of the Yokai Factions before the Night Parade starts." She begins urgently.

I raise my eyebrow, "Let me guess, the parade is more than just a meeting, isn't it?"

She nods, solemnly, "Originally, it was used as a warcry. When the original Three Daiyokai wanted to cause chaos and kill lots of people, they called for a Night Parade. And the timing, so soon after your existence came out?"

I blink, a thought playing through my head.

They all may expect me to come trying to do what my father did.

Ah. Fuck.

"So this is a reaction to me then, you think?" I ask, and Uzume nods slowly.

"It seems most likely, I can't think of any other reason they'd suddenly do this." She elaborates further.

"I…I see."

Well. That changes things.

Bursting in on that kind of party sounds like a quick way to get killed, then. Even though I was just kind of thinking of sending a clone.

"We've still got a few days until it well and truly begins," I huff out a tired sigh, "I think, I'll take a visit to the West Yokai Faction before everything hits the fan then."

Uzume nods, approvingly, "The West would probably be the most accommodating to you, yes. They're generally the most peaceful of the Yokai Factions, and their leader prefers peaceful negotiation over conflict."

I give a slight hum, before turning back to Kuroka, "Kitty, would you like to come with me?"

Kuroka blinked at that, "Really, nya?"

I chuckle, "Well, yeah? They already know you're here, I bet. And they don't seem to care overtly about your wanted status, judging by the fact they haven't tried anything or told the Devils. So why not?"

"Huh," Kuroka stared at me for a moment, before a pretty smile spread across her face, "alright then, nya~! It's a date! I've never been to Urakyoto before!"

I chuckle at that, "Not even sure there's date stuff to do over there, but I guess we can see."

"Yaaayyy~!!" Kuroka snuggles into my side, purring all the while as I pat her on the back.

Uzume merely sighs, "You two…" she intones dully.

I pat her on the back too, just to be a good sport.

Ah. An idea forms.

"You know, we've got a bit of free time before we have to go." I start with a sigh, "I think it's about time we get a little something done before then."

I look to Kuroka, who's still snuggling into my side.

"I doubt this will take the whole day, we can even do this today. Kuroka?" I grab her attention lightly, causing her ears to perk.

"I think it's finally time for you to have a little talk with Shirone."

The way she stilled like a deer caught in the headlights would have made for the perfect picture if only the reason behind it wasn't so damn sad.

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

Chapter 18 End


I get the feeling next chapter might be a long one. Always is when Koneko comes up.

Uzume and Koneko, I don't know how or why, but these two really fun to write. Not to say Kuroka isn't, she's horny fun, but Uzume and Koneko are really fun.

I figure, we may as well get this over with before we get the Yokai proper. No point in holding it off any longer beyond Kuroka just being scared. 

View Post

A New Sun Chapter 17

Chapter 17

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

I didn't stop swinging my sword until night fell.

I knew that logically, I should be sitting down, meditating, and advancing my Senjutsu.

But I just wasn't in the mood for it.

Too…I wouldn't call it pissed off.

Moody, maybe?

Done.

Yeah, that fits.

I was too done to sit around and take in the world's ki at the moment.

So, I spent the entire beating up myself, several times over, as I tried to get down and incorporate the Flower and Mist Breathing forms into my repertoire.

Due to me no longer sending three clones to the Academy, only keeping one at Kuoh now, I could summon somewhere around six for the practice.

An additional help was only needing to push for two rather than four, which means I could assign three clones to each and have them go at me.

Pop them, reform them with newly found insight, and repeat.

Due to Flower and Mist being derivatives of Water and Wind respectively, I had a pretty decent baseline.

The problem that I didn't consider until trying to learn them is just how much more highly specialized the forms were.

Still, with my rather sour mood being hell-bent on slicing something, and my clones sharing the sentiment, I think I got a good grasp on the basics.

Nowhere near enough to roll the forms' techniques into my fighting style, yet.

Give it a week or two more, and I think I could do it.

Then, I need to focus fully on upgrading from the Dance to Sun Breathing proper.

That should complete my swordsmanship unless I can think of something else to add later.

Now then.

I lay in a crater of my design, inside the confines of one of the Himejima Clan Training Halls.

The place looks a lot like the dojo on my estate if I'm being honest, just with a lot fewer red and bird symbols everywhere.

Oh! Also, this place is far less durable than my own.

Seriously, I created this crater when I kicked off the ground.

Wasn't even a particularly strong kickoff.

To say the rest of the Training Hall is faring any better would be a bold-faced lie.

So, yeah, the rest of the hall is just fine.

Just like the other, uh, seven I believe there are?

Were. There were seven.

I am very done, alright? Not my fault their training halls are made out of cardboard!

Regardless, none of that matters, as for this one moment, dull of action and anything to do, I turn to what all young adults my age do at these times.

Lay on the ground with my phone in one hand, and a cup of tea in the other.

Yes, I raided their storeroom.

Also yes, they didn't have any soda, and I'm contemplating mass murder.

I texted Kuroka and told her what was going on.

She thanked me for telling her ahead of time what was going on and told me I could handle a ten-winged Fallen Angel.

She confirmed something I wasn't too sure of myself, that the Fallen are weaker than their pure counterparts, even if their number of wings is the same.

An Angel with ten wings can supposedly body a normal ten-winged Fallen, even beat down a twelve-winged Fallen unless it's Azazel.

This just makes me wonder how the hell the Grigori only just recently got torn apart, if true.

Not like Kuroka has any reason to lie about any of that.

She also sent me good luck nudes.

Which shockingly didn't replace my old mood, just added on top of it.

Fuck.

Beyond chit-chatting with my kitty, I also finally got around to combing through the internet about my appearance.

And shitposting.

So much shitposting.

None of it helped me feel better, but fuck if it wasn't fun.

Generally speaking, general reactions to its appearance were, 'Holy fuck. How did this guy get conceived', and memes.

Some motherfucker made a gif of that part where the dragon blew off my clothes with an aura blast and sent my body ragdolling through the air.

Made that shit my profile picture.

What? It does look pretty damn funny if you zoom in on it hard enough.

You can make anything look funny if you zoom in enough or pause at specific frames.

Glad to see the internet hasn't changed, no matter the universe.

Or at least, that's the feeling I got while reading through

With one last sip to finish my cup of, admittedly pretty damn good tea, I set the now useless cup down with a pleasant sigh.

Just on time too.

It's time.

Supposedly, every night, well past midnight.

A little over two, right on the dot.

Minutes ago, the night sky was like that of a dull summer night. Warm, clear, and sparkling with stars.

But now?

Gray storm clouds seem to spiral into existence, converging on the compound from all around, out of nowhere.

As a single life force, stronger yet darker than any I've felt so far, slips passed the border and onto the grounds.

Even so far away, I can feel it, feel him.

An old dark soul, rumbling like a distant storm.

It's Baraqiel. It has to be.

I sigh, shooting one last text to Kuroka simply stating that my fight is here, before setting my phone on silence and putting it away.

My halos flicker into existence as I float up, out of my crater, and casually open up the window.

I don't attempt to hide, there's no need.

I'm not going to assassinate the dumbass, beat the hell out of him if I have to, but not sneak attack him.

In fact.

I want him to come to me.

So, to announce my presence, I flare out my power like a beacon as I take to the sky.

The life force I felt had started moving toward the big building I was in earlier, but as soon as I flared my power, it stopped.

And started moving towards my location.

Albeit, at a much slower speed than when it was b-lining straight for the big building.

Even then, it didn't take long for him to get here.

He stopped a good bit away from me, yet even with the distance and darkness suffusing the area, I could still see him.

A tall, large man, with ten stormy black feathered wings, sprawled out behind him.

The rest of his body was clad in a rough and ragged dull tan cloak, from head to toe.

I couldn't see his face until he tentatively pulled back the hood, and dropped it to his shoulders.

The Fallen simply stared at me, stone-faced.

I'd say I couldn't read his expression, but he doesn't make an expression at all, so eh?

It doesn't take long for the meandering silence to be broken.

"Are you here to kill me?" Baraqiel intones before I open my mouth, gruffly.

"Maybe." I hum out, dryly, "But I don't truly plan to."

The man lets out a sigh, "Good. That's good. Then my quest-"

"Is done." I finished for him.

"I…what?" He grunts back lowly.

"Suou Himejima is dead," I state the facts, "I killed him myself earlier today."

Ah, there we go, his facial expression finally changed, his forehead creasing upwards as his eyebrows lifted slightly.

"No, I may not be here to kill you, but I suppose for you it might feel the same." I continued, "Your daughter–"

His wings start sparking.

I smirk, "You're going to talk with her and stop killing old men. There are no more excuses anymore." I follow through, unperturbed.

For what feels like a good, long moment, he merely stares at me.

I see his hands tense and grip into fists, several times, rustling his cloak.

His jaw works itself like he's trying to think of something to say.

Finally, he settles on, "You know her?"

"A bit, not personally," I confirm, "but we're in the same class at school."

"I see," He grumbles, "yet you know of our story?"

"I did kill Suou, after all," I wave off, "probably would have killed the other elders too, just like you have been. Your situation isn't exactly unique, it's fucked, and neither one of you has been helping fix it."

"I…" the man looks away with a huff, "this situation isn't yours to mediate on, boy."

"Ah! But it is!" I start floating toward him, "See, you got free from your responsibilities to the Grigori and the first thing you do is try to get a little revenge!"

"What of it?" He bites back.

"You didn't, oh, I don't know." I hum out, "Try and look for your daughter again, try and see your daughter again, try and…oh, I don't fucking know? Try and comfort your daughter after she and the town she was living in nearly got blown to pieces?"

"That…!" he rumbled out, his wings sparking slightly more, "She doesn't need me anymore. My organization nearly caused her and her new family's deaths," he ground out, "now, of all times, she probably wishes not to see me the most."

I snorted, "You're a crock of shit." I refute back.

To his positively dumbfounded look.

Now, I float right before him.

"You think she blames you? Specifically? I doubt that, and if she does, I'll slap that dumbassery right out of her head."

My Touki flares abruptly, my mark burns into existence on my face, and my eyes spin into their activated state.

My hand comes up, clad in my power, catching the longsword of golden light aimed at my neck.

The air cracks and roars as its movement is halted.

Baraqiel stares down at me, eyes now properly open with a mix of rage and surprise, his arms trembling with exertion as he still tries to make the blade carry through.

"Hmm?" I raise an eyebrow at him, "Someone is eager to protect someone from the littlest threats, huh?"

"You will not," he grinds out through gritted teeth, "lay a hand on my daughter."

I give him a toothy grin right back, "Well, someone has to be her Daddy if you aren't."

Hmm. You know.

Maybe I'm not the greatest choice for trying to talk down someone or de-escalate a situation.

But, at the same time.

Was this really going to turn out any other way, at least at first?

His longsword roars as golden thunder bursts into existence across the blade, coated with sparks of pure cyan light.

I let go, just in time, shooting backward as he completed his swing and filled the entire area I was in, from the sky to the ground, with a wall of Holy Lightning.

Chuckling, I reach to my back and draw my sword.

As the wall of lightning falls apart, I see Baraqiel standing there, now holding a second light-made longsword, both coated in Holy Lightning.

"Take it back." He states, coldly.

I smile, "For a man that's too much of a coward to face his daughter? For a man who was planning on ultimately dying here, in the end, being unable to face her?"

He flinched at that.

I figured, from the moment he started talking about how Akeno wouldn't want to see him.

What did he come here for, ultimately? It wasn't revenge.

It was to die.

Revenge was more like a cherry on top. He could finally end who tore apart his family, then he could get himself killed, and finally free Akeno of his existence.

Or something along those lines, I'm not in his hand, but something like it I bet.

He probably expected it to be Suzaku, in the end.

Unfortunately for him, I'm not going to let him take the coward's way out.

"No. Never." I conclude succinctly.

His face turned into a deep frown, "So be it," he mumbled, before slowly starting to float towards me, "then I shall make you."

His body blurred forward in a haze of coiling thunder.

My sword ignites, and I breathe, slashing up to meet both his descending swords.

Fire and lightning hiss and bash against each other, neither overcoming the other.

Midair, we push against each other, with him steadily yet slowly pushing me back.

I click my tongue and twist.

Hinokami Kagura—

His eyebrows raise rapidly as fire erupts around my blade, swirling and devouring the meager amounts of lightning around his swords.

Burning Bones, Summer Sun.

My blade spirals out, flames booming with it.

Baraqiel quickly backpedals away from the raging blade and flames and is just as quick to move to his next attack.

Holding one sword out, I watch as it explodes with Holy Lightning, shifting into a lance larger than he is tall, made entirely out of his unique element.

Then, he throws it, the air cracking at the might of his toss.

I flow into the next stance quickly.

Flame–

A flame-clad vertical stroke cuts the lance of lightning clean in half, directing its two smaller parts around and behind me.

Another explosion. Another crackling thunderous lance.

Dance.

A flame-clad horizontal stroke follows, and like the previous slash, sends the second lance around me just the same.

Four explosions, four thunderous crushes behind me, as I look up and see Baraqiel darting higher above.

Thunder rolls between palms facing each other, kept close between his palms.

Even though the crashing and cracking of lightning, I could hear it.

"Resound, Thunder."

Two words, uttered in the ozone-baked wind, as they ignite the heavens.

Baraqiel claps, and the sky shudders and booms with a mass of Holy Lightning, coming down in the form of several large thunderbolts.

I spiral to the ground, narrowly dodging the first one to fall, before hitting the ground and exploding across it in movement.

Fake Rainbow.

Lightning rains as if hail, peppering and beating the ground.

My afterimages and I blaze through the maze of lightning, dancing through it all.

This guy, he's weaker than Juggernaut Drive, but not by an insane amount.

This is doable.

Baraqiel himself joins the party of electricity, a spear made of lightning firmly in hand, and a deep frown upon his face.

He crashes down with his storm, piercing the ground with his spear, and drawing all the lightning to it like a beacon.

The ground rumbles as static shock waves begin to burst across the ground from the spear, radiating out like ocean waves.

I grimace as all my afterimages pop to the newly electrified ground.

Before it can hit me properly, I take to the now free sky once more, a single seal forming with my free hand.

I inhale, deeply, mixing it with the power in my body, before roaring out a mass of flames in the form of a comet.

Baraqiel grunts, holding out his other hand almost dismissively, forming a greenish-yellow Fallen Angel magic circle.

The comet-shaped fireball crashes into the barrier circle, causing Baraqiel to stumble slightly under the sheer force behind the attack.

His circle starts cracking, and I keep the gout of flames up for just a little longer.

Until he finally wrenches his spear from the ground and collects all his lightning into it.

I smirk and shoot straight down at him, riding my torrent of flames like a wave, wrapping it around my blade.

I spiral like a wheel down upon him, crashing and cutting through his magic circle, slamming and slashing through the ground in front of him.

Caking the entire area in front of him with flames.

He growls, raising his spear to bring it back down, this time on me.

No.

Beneficent Radiance.

I spiral into the air, fire following my blade as I slash up into the spear, cutting in twine.

Making it promptly explode with thunder all around us.

I pour out my aura, my Holy Spirit Power, into the sheath of flames around my body, bolstering it against the torrent of power.

And with a stomp of my foot, I explode my fire and power out all around me.

Fallen, too, are weak to holy aura after all, just like Devils.

Baraqiel tries to step back, cloaking himself in the wild surge out around us for protection in much the same manner as I am with my flames, but I won't let him.

All it takes is a step, and I'm past his guard.

With my blade, arching out to his defenseless center.

Dancing Spirit.

Several flaming arched slashes lash all around his center, a combination of Thunder Breathing's Rice Spirit helping Dance strike more than once, quickly, continuously!

Each strike is taken, but not by his body, but by his wings.

Wrapping around protectively, his wings tense up like blades themselves, and lash out at each incoming slash.

The sheer force behind each attack cracks the ground beneath us, sending out waves of fire and thunder in equal measure.

I huff out flames, break my form, and flow into another to break the stalemate.

Sunflower Thrust.

My blade spikes out, tip poised for his center, coated in whirling flames.

His wings come down like a shell, wrapping around my blade, trying to stop it.

Only for my blade to promptly, point blank, erupt with fire as I pour my power into it on mass, shredding and scorching his lightning cloak.

A wave of crimson fire blasts forth, picking up and carrying the former cadre, dragging him along the cyclonic spiraling flames straight into the training halls.

Former training halls. As the fires tear through and blast the entire building apart with an explosion.

Emerging gruffly from the burning wreckage, Baraqiel reveals himself quickly.

His cloak has been completely burned off, leaving him in a…male version of the church exorcist uniform.

Huh. Okay.

Several of his wings are practically destroyed, with most of the feathers being burned off, and spines cut up and dripping with blood.

The rest of his body isn't doing the greatest, but still far better, only seemingly splattered randomly with minor burns.

With a sly hum, I stab my sword into the ground and lean against it, crossing my arms and smirking at him.

"Damn. I'm doing more work beating you for your stupidity than your Daddy's ever done, huh?" I state, looking over him.

Baraqiel merely stands there, face hard, before finally managing a cold, "Why."

I blink at that, "Hmm? Why, why what?"

"Why go through all of…this." He waves a sparking hand around us, "It's not any of your business, boy. You even said you don't know Akeno personally. So why."

My head tilts slightly, "Do you need a reason to want to repair a broken family?"

At that, he simply stares at me, incredulously.

Ah. I suppose he truly wouldn't get it, being Fallen and all.

The first broken family, biblically anyhow.

"Speaking of," I go on, "are we done here, or do you need me to legit punch you in the face to finally get it through your fat skull?"

The Fallen grumbled at that, then harrumphed.

Then the sky fell atop me.

A massive surge of Holy Lightning came crashing down upon my shoulders, filling my vision until all I saw was gold.

My entire body was set abuzz, but shockingly, heh, it wasn't that bad.

The holy light part wasn't all that effective against me, I think.

As soon as the surge subsided, all I could smell was ozone, charred ground, and smoke.

I was full-on smoking as if I had just been cooked alive.

Suppose technically I just was.

But to Baraqiel? Judging by the look of abject surprise on his face, it may as well look like I took no damage at all.

Honestly think his face might have taken more damage than I did, if he keeps moving it who knows? He might break it!

I huff, momentarily, I recall that moment just a little while ago when he waved his hand.

Ah. That's when he set up the attack.

I crack my knuckles and get off my sword, leaving it stabbed into the ground.

"Alright," I grunt out, "one punch to the noggin, coming straight up."

With that, I charge.

Baraqiel quickly forms light swords, grits his teeth, and swings out one of them.

I easily flip over it, over him, completely, and lash out a kick down at his head.

He blocks it with his second sword, only for me to use it as a platform to kick off and land behind him.

As soon as I hit the dirt, light explodes from my feet.

Much less messy than fire, but still not easy to control without a focus.

Regardless, I'm counting on that.

Baraqiel turns to meet me, only to be greeted by a flashbang as I blast toward him, coating my fists with the same explosive light.

He grunts, his eyesight cut out as it may be, but he still manages to bring both his swords down upon me.

Fuck it.

I grab both of them with my light-covered hands, caring little as the meeting of light destabilizes both powers.

Focusing on him, I see that he's too damn tall to reach his head like this, so I do the first thing that comes to mind.

Break his bloody kneecaps.

My foot lashes out once more, straight into the offending knee with an audible thwack.

The strike barely makes him flinch.

Ah, right. Masochist. Pain won't do it.

I need something more.

I look up at him, seeing him grunt and shake his head as his vision returns.

Our eyes meet as he finally opens his eyelids, but unlike his, my eyes are spinning.

A big proper Genjutsu won't stick, he's strong enough, and my eyes weak enough, that it just wouldn't take.

But! Shoving absurd amounts of Holy Spirit Power into his brain to trick it into not enjoying pain?

I can do that. I think.

Holy Spirit Power suddenly bellows out from me, Baraqiel flinches, his eyes dulling rapidly as my power presses down upon him.

"Hnnn?" He groans out, confused, as for one perfect moment.

He doesn't like the feeling of all his injuries.

My foot comes out once more.

Crack.

He howls in pain as his attacked knee buckles.

As his concentration is fucked, I explode the light around my hands, shattering his light swords before grabbing his uniform, pulling him down the rest of the way.

His head comes down.

My head goes up.

And slams right into his nose.

The most glorious crack and pop noise echoes out between us, as Baraqiel falls directly back and hits the dirt.

A big, bloody spot, right in the center of his stiff stoney face.

I, meanwhile, stagger back, my head abuzz from forehead to back.

Man's face is about as hard as it looks, it turns out.

"Not exactly a punch, but same idea," I grumble out, "you get it yet, old man!?"

"Oh, I think he gets it, Lord Arahitogami~..." a voice, a very feminine voice, suddenly speaks softly right into my ear.

I whirl around, blinking wearily as I think I see someone else. But the rather piercing red eyes give her true identity away.

"S-Suzaku…" Baraqiel mutters groggily, having lifted his head slightly to see her.

She certainly does look like a more mature Akeno.

"Hmm, hmm!" She hums, looking around at us.

Then the destroyed area around us, the demolished and burning building beneath us, and the grounds scarred with craters and cracks.

I point to Baraqiel, "He did it."

Baraqiel wheezes, "Hnn!? B-Brat! You!"

"Well, he did everything around the building." I relent easily, "I blew up the building itself. Already wrecked it training all day beforehand."

I put my hands together apologetically.

"My bad."

Suzaku merely looked over at us amusedly.

Then she sighs, deeply. "Boys. Hah~. Alright, first things first." Suddenly, she held her hand up, poised like a finger gun.

I barely had time to blink, before she made a firing motion, before suddenly, Baraqiel exploded.

I gape in his general direction, as the equivalent of a firebomb suddenly goes off right in front of me, centered on the man.

"You—" I turn towards her, only for Suzaku to wave me off before I can even begin.

"Wait a minute." She interrupted curtly.

I huff and turn back towards the rapidly settling flames.

Which, now that I see I'm looking carefully, I see aren't even burning the ground it's touching.

With no fuel, the flames quickly disperse, revealing a very alive, yet also very knocked out Fallen Angel.

Who also wasn't any more burned, at all.

She just used the force of the attack itself to knock him out.

I turned back to her, "Show off."

Still really cool, though.

Suzaku merely giggled at that, before bowing to me slightly, "I thank you, Lord Arahitogami, for not killing that very stupid man."

I waved her off, "No need to thank me, I figure, I did what you were going to do already, right?"

She raises her head, before tilting it, "Hmm? Whatever do you mean?" She asks so incredibly sarcastically, so fakely, that I almost cringed on the spot.

I merely deadpanned at her, "You were just using Baraqiel here to clean up the clan, weren't you."

She hums and looks away with a simple content smile on her face.

What was it that the new head of the Nakiri said about Suzaku again?

Ah. Right, he called her scary. I could see it.

"I will neither confirm nor deny such accusations, Lord–"

"Noriaki, or Kusanagi if you must be so formal." I curtly interrupt her, saving her tongue from more of that.

She nods, "Lord Kusanagi. But! What I will say is, thank you for subduing the Fallen, I do believe he will be much better off in a certain someone else's hands."

"Ah, care to share whom exactly?" I ask knowingly.

"Well," she begins, "the Gremory Family is known to be rather agreeable, and with all the change going down in the Underworld, another Fallen wouldn't be outside of the norm."

She saunters up to me, "Of course, to the rest of the Clan, said Fallen did die tonight. With only two people knowing his real fate, yes?"

Cheeky minx.

Very scary indeed.

"Of course," I smile easily, "I see no reason to speak up otherwise."

"Hmm~!" Suzaku hums happily, walking right past me before waving for me to follow, "Come along, Lord Kusanagi, let's have a chat."

Almost off-handedly, she pulls a small paper figure from her pocket and drops it onto Baraqiel.

The little paper man suddenly gets up, on his own, looks down at Baraqiel, and seems to sigh before flashing away.

Taking the body with it.

That was a Shikigami, I believe. A paper familiar imbued with a little bit of the maker's spiritual power.

Putting that out of my mind for now, I follow Suzaku, jogging to her side.

"I'll be brief, and honest, to start with," She begins with a sigh, "I wasn't planning on coming back so soon, you know? But when I caught word you had shown up, I figured I couldn't exactly wait any longer."

"Ah?" I blink at that, "I'm sorry? Granted, I did originally come here to meet with you in the first place, so, mission accomplished?"

She chuckled weakly at that, "I suppose so, Lord Kusanagi. It's been a very busy, and rather stressful few days, what with everything going on, everything changing…" she trails off, "new developments keep springing up, even as we speak, I bet."

"Ho? Such as?" I inquire.

"One of the other reasons I had to return sooner and get everything back in order faster," she huffed, "the Yokai have called for a Hyakki Yagyō."

Night Parade of One Hundred Demons?

"I'm afraid I've never heard of the term before."

"It's a great gathering of the strongest Yokai in Japan, their people, and factions, all in one place for a grand meeting," she elaborates further, "and in this case? That place is Kyoto." She finishes with a tired sigh.

Fitting for the name, I suppose.

"Ah, I see why you had to come back. If the Yokai are going to pull this united event, then the Clans need to look united as well." I muse aloud.

"Correct, Lord Kusanagi." She confirms easily with a smile. "Fortunately, moving so many Yokai at once can take a little while, so I still have time to clean everything up, before the Clans meet up themselves at the Inner Sanctuary."

She suddenly stops, turning to me, "With all that being said, what do you plan on doing now, hmm?"

I scratch my chin, "Well if it isn't too much trouble, I'd still like to talk shop with you, and while I'm at it, I want to help clean this place up a bit, since I did cause a bit of the damage."

"Ah?" She hums thoughtfully, "Aren't you a sweet one? I don't mind, truthfully, sitting down and talking with a cup of tea sounds positively divine right about now."

"Excellent." I form a lone hand seal, causing a little under several clones to appear around us.

Suzaku blinks, and looks at me, the original me.

I shrug it off, "Kami stuff."

"Ah." She nods, as my clones jump away back to where we were.

"As for after this? Well. If the Clans and Yokai are all going to meet, that saves me tons of time from going to each faction. So," I grin, "may as well crash both parties at the same time, see what's up."

Suzaku chuckles at that, "Well, I suppose I should have expected that. Now then." She claps her hands together, and the sky clears.

Gone is that dull, dreary haze, and back in full force is a true, warm summer night.

"You wished to talk shop, now I believe I have an idea of what you want, but let's see about that over some tea, yes?"

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

Chapter 17 End

Suzaku Supremacy, let's goooo. She's hot both ways indeed.

And Baraqiel is gonna have a fun time when he wakes up. Gonna stuff that into the next Interlude. Man really needed to get his nose broken and actually feel it to finally get it.

View Post

A New Sun Chapter 16

Chapter 16

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

With a light hum, I walk through the streets of Kyoto, bathed in the early morning light.

Clear skies today, just the right amount of breeze.

You know what that means?

Perfect day to ambush one of the Five Principal Clans!

Well, I say ambush, but all I'm going to do is walk up to their compound and knock on the door.

Of course, I came prepared! Brought my sword hidden in a shinai bag, just in case.

After all, I recall Uzume mentioned that my Dad met these guys before, and the way it was framed, I don't exactly think that meeting ended joyously.

I would have brought Uzume or Kuroka along with me, but Uzume is still knocked the fuck out.

And bringing Kuroka is just asking to get my fade run on, that's like double heretical to them!

Although, maybe I could make it only heretical to them if I could find a way to turn Kuroka back from being a Devil.

Unreincarnate her, is that the term?

Hmm. That's an idea. Still wouldn't stop them from being dicks about her being a Yokai, but that's what my sword is for if they push it, no?

Not like I actually give a damn what they think in the first place, just didn't think bringing her would be a good first impression.

But, beyond that, turning Kuroka back into a pure Yokai might help get the Underworld off her ass, too.

An interesting idea, though admittedly I have no fucking clue how I'd go about it.

Need to talk with her about that once I get back.

Also, going to have to talk about finally revealing herself to Koneko. Since I finally got her to open up, that time is approaching as well.

Shaking off those thoughts, I continue my lackadaisical walk across Kyoto.

Specifically, I'm making sure to head to the South Side of Kyoto.

Because that is where the Himejima Clan compound is located.

Unfortunately, I can't ambush all the Clans at once, as each clan makes a specific 'direction' in the city their territory, so to speak.

The Himejima Clan of the Southern Guardian, Vermillion Bird.

The Kushihashi Clan of the Eastern Guardian, Azure Dragon.

The Doumon Clan of the Northern Guardian, Black Tortoise.

The Shinra Clan of the Western Guardian, White Tiger.

And lastly, but certainly not least, the Nakiri Clan of the Center Guardian, Yellow Dragon.

Technically speaking, when the Five Clans need to act as one, it's the Nakiri who usually represent them, but otherwise, each clan may as well be a separate entity.

With distinct traditions, worship of specific gods, training regimes, and so forth.

Though they are still bound by their shared exalting of the Shinto Gods beyond all others, of course.

If I wanted to be practical about who I choose to visit, the best choice would probably be Nakiri.

Not only do they tend to represent the Clans as a whole, but they are also the laxest traditionally, shockingly enough.

It's such a small difference when spoken, but the Nakiri teach and practice Onmyoudou, Shinto, and Shugendou Magics.

Onmyoudou also has stuff related to Buddhist and Taoist practices, so they branch out quite a bit!

Compare that to say, the Himejima, who would throw you out for practicing just Buddhist Magic.

Hell, from what Uzume gathered, the Nakiri still have ties to the Bureau of Onmyō despite the fact the other Clans cut them out when the Imperial Family stopped exerting its influence over them.

Wild.

With all that being said, it's actually why I decided against going there, at least right this second.

The Nakiri are slowly on their way to growing out of the rest of Clans hardline traditional bullshit.

The new head, the current host of the Yellow Dragon, is a young but good guy. If I recall correctly, he wanted to make some vampire girl one of his wives.

A vampire.

The balls on that kid.

Yeah, they'll be fine.

It's the Himejima Clan I'm most worried about.

They are the most hardline traditionalists in the Clans. Even with the current Suzaku heading them the way she is, clan structures tend to favor the 'wisdom' and 'guidance' of the elders.

The people who hold significant influence in the Clan, and who I have no doubt are pushing back hard against the direction Suzaku wants to take the Clan in.

And Suzaku's taking over of the Clan only happened very recently, as in only within the last few years or so.

The former head, a stubborn old fuck by the name of Suou Himejima, was only ousted from the position after his deal with the Gremory Family came out over Akeno, and his poor handling of the Utsesumi Agency four years ago.

Even then, he kept his position for another year, and past that he's still alive, still an elder, still in a position of power.

Completely wild to me.

And what with this whole thing with the Grigori being disbanded, and Team Slash/Dog being fully incorporated under the Shinto banner, I can only assume the members of the Clan have some…opinions.

Which Suzaku has to deal with. All at the same time.

Poor girl.

And, not going to lie, but I do feel slightly responsible for the stress likely thrown upon her.

I figure if, beyond everything else I set out to do here, I could also help her out.

That would be nice.

And no. Not doing this because her nickname may as well be Better Akeno. She already has a thing for Tobio, and I'm not into NTR.

Even if that dark, devilish voice in the back of my head says Tobio doesn't return her feelings, that's incomplete information.

It's been four years since the events of those Light Novels. I seriously doubt his relationships are that stagnant.

Although…

She also said she was going to marry him back then, and from what I've heard and what Uzume gathered, she is still single, supposedly.

I nearly stopped walking and slapped myself in the middle of the street at that thought.

No. No NTR. Bad Nori.

But if…

No. Keep walking. She's hot, but you still don't know her personally.

No harem unless Kuroka approves, and you, you know, catch feelings?

By the way, another thing I need to talk to Kuroka about still, damn. Keep forgetting to bring that stuff up.

Not that I think she'd have a problem with it.

Something something, 'sister wives' I bet.

Okay, now I'm just rambling about shit in my head.

Time to pick up the pace!

Taking a quick look around, I find no one close enough or looking in my general direction, and so I step into action.

Kicking off the ground at speeds a normal human would think I simply vanished, I launch myself up into the air.

My halos flash into place behind me as my upward momentum halts, and I find myself floating in the sky, eyes narrowed and looking toward my target destination.

I don't know exactly where the Himejima Clan Compound is located, but I have a general idea.

The Clans don't exactly hide away in some pocket or alternate dimension, like the Yokai City Urakyoto or what I presume the Kami Shinkai is, but that doesn't mean they are broadcasting their existence either.

With a tentative sigh, I bask in the nice weather for one more moment before beginning my search.

Steadily, I float through the sky, and for my first stop?

The Gokōnomiya Shrine.

See, each Directional Guardian is supposed to have a specific temple in Kyoto dedicated to it, headed by their Clan of course.

The Gokōnomiya Shrine isn't the Vermillion Bird's Temple, not truly, the original one was abandoned by the Himejima because they are Shinto hardasses and refused to share with Buddhists.

Regardless, this particular shrine is the one the Himejima looks after in the Vermillion Bird's name, so it only makes sense to start there.

It's not too far from where we were yesterday, near Inari's Head Shrine.

It's also a shrine dedicated to giving blessings related to childbirth.

Kuroka must never find out this place exists.

Making a point to fly there, over the Torii Gate at its entrance to not accidentally pass into another Shinkai.

So imagine my shock as I press against something regardless.

And slowly pass through a different film, a different type of barrier.

This one felt like passing through a shield made of innumerable small rocks or chips, I could feel them part around me as I floated on through, and popped out the other side.

I blink as I stare down at the Shrine below.

Not because there's anything wrong with the shrine, no, the woodcarving dotting the structure is just as magnificent as I had heard.

Instead, it's the several dozen people staring and blinking right back at me.

And most of them are wearing what I thought is, not going to lie, Klan outfits.

Luckily, I also quickly caught the differences…but still.

That similarity is going to stick with me for a bit now.

Thank fuck I'm not allowed to ruminate on those thoughts.

All of a sudden, several of these guys practically leap forward onto their knees, slamming their heads to the ground, all facing me.

"Oh divine exalted Kami, please save us!!!" They all collectively shout to the highest of Heavens.

I merely stare at them, schooling my expression from my knee-jerk reaction of, 'the fuck?'.

What the hell did I just float into this time!?

Ah. Right.

Anime bullshit.

I floated down from the sky, and almost as soon as my feet touched the ground everyone started talking at once.

It was all a jumbled mess. The only thing I could get was that the compound was being attacked by…something.

I haven't even said a word, these guys just started going on, and on…

"Enough!" I call out, my voice rumbling above the crowd. For effect, I let a splinter of my Holy Spirit Power out as I speak.

I knew they both heard and felt me, as they all clamped their mouths shut and stood straight and still.

"Better." I huff out.

These people think I'm a Kami, which is…fair. They probably don't know the exact details of my birth.

Well. If they expect a Kami, I have no reason not to give them one, I suppose.

I eye the gathered crowd of Shinto Mystics, slowly dragging my gaze across them, drinking in their appearances.

My eyes stop as they land on someone who looks significantly fancier than the rest, gold and red cloth interlaced with the pure white that most are wearing.

I point to him, "You." He flinched and stood straighter, somehow. "Tell me what's going on, succinctly."

"Yes, my L-Lord!" He stutters quickly, before taking a deep breath, and beginning, "It's started ever since Lady Suzaku left on business a couple of days ago! A Fallen Angel, one of those scum," he bit out with hate, "attacked the Clan Compound, killing a select few and injuring badly any who tried to stop him."

Lady Suzaku? Ah, so these are Himejima Clan members then? Good.

"Ever since then, he'd return every night, at a very specific time, and repeat the process. He's been terrorizing us for days!"

He practically throws himself at my feet, grabbing my pants leg as he looks up at me in sheer unbridled desperation.

"Please Lord, save us! There's no way a mere 10-winged bastard crow could fight someone who killed a Heavenly Dragon! Please!"

I cringe internally at that.

That Juggernaut Drive was nowhere near Ddraig's true power, I would have fled otherwise, but I guess on a screen it is kind of hard to tell, huh?

Honestly, I'm more surprised these guys have phones.

Wait.

10-winged Fallen?

Tentatively, I ask, "Who has the Fallen mainly been targeting?"

The mystic gives a sad sigh, "Mostly our elders, and their followers…just last night, the crow tried to kill our former head! We barely managed to sneak him out!"

My eyebrow twitched at that.

How unfortunate.

"And did the Fallen use any sort of special powers beyond their light?" I follow up.

The mystic thinks for a moment more, before shaking his head, "No Lord, I don't believe so."

Huh. Really?

Well, that would have been an easy way to confirm my suspicions.

It would make sense for this to be Baraqiel exacting revenge for his wife and daughter, Holy Lightning would be an easy way to confirm it.

The targets match his motive if it is him but without exact proof, I can't say for certain.

Would certainly explain where he went after Grigori got disbanded.

"Hmm," I hum out, "I'll…look into it." I decide, prompting the guy to utter rapid thanks into the side of my leg.

And for a chorus of relieved sighs and thankfully prayers to be uttered around me.

Meanwhile, I'm conflicted.

I don't give much of a shit for these Clan Elders, for obvious reasons, all truth be told.

And it doesn't seem like whoever's attacking them is trying to destroy the clan.

If they did, they would have just killed everyone.

No, it's just the elders and their supporters, or at least so this one guy claims.

"Please let go of my legs." I sigh out, prompting the mystic to scramble back, rapidly apologizing.

I ignored him, and pressed on, "The elders, I presume they all were evacuated, yes?"

At that, he grimaced, "Er, well…No. They refused to be moved from their ancestral home," the mystic sighed, "I admire their courage, Lord Kami, but their lack of life preservation makes my job suffering."

Oh damn. Poor guy.

Wait.

"So, your former head, he…?"

He nods, solemnly, "Yes. Moved right back in after we pulled him out. He refused to move elsewhere."

Fucking hilarious.

Still. Poor guy.

"Point me in the direction of the Clan Compound, and I'll check it out." I sigh, a plan already forming to ambush this guy during his timed attacks.

The mystic perked up, "Ah, of course! Right! Ah, by the way, Lord Kami, if you find anyone injured…please bring them here as soon as you can, the healing springs will hasten their recovery."

Oh yeah, this place also has those as well. Neat.

I'll make a note of that just in case I need to visit. Probably won't need to because I have a healing factor, but who knows?

Ah. One more thing!

"By the way, my name…" I trail off in thought.

What name do I use for this? My Kami name would fit more with the whole godly image, but my real name is still my real name.

"Noriaki." I decided, "Just call me Noriaki, or Kusanagi if you must be so formal."

"Right, Lord Kusanagi!" He bows to me in response.

Huh. You know, you'd think I'd start feeling off about being called 'Lord' this, and that, and such.

But I don't dislike it.

In fact, I kind of like it.

That sounds like something an upcoming anime villain would say, isn't it?

But fuck it. It sounds good to me.

Shortly thereafter, the mystic points me in the direction of the compound.

It is at the southern tip of Kyoto, right at the border so to speak.

Makes sense, feel stupid for not thinking of it sooner.

I asked a few other questions, like the exact time when the attacks happened, who in totality has been killed and injured, and so forth.

Several of the mystics present started praying to me specifically, right as I was leaving.

It was strange because I could feel it, but not hear what they were praying for exactly.

The act made the miniature sun in my chest throb, it didn't grow stronger or anything, at least I couldn't notice anything, but it did feel weird.

Is there a handbook or instruction manual for Kami? Or is my existence just that different that there isn't one?

Joy.

With that cheery thought, and a sigh as the sun in my chest throbs more, I leave several praying mystics behind, and fly off towards the Himejima Clan Compound.

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

The Vermillion Bird represents fire. The midday. Summer. The color red.

Burning passion for life, when it thrives most under my mother's sun.

And yet, as I float before the crimson gates of the clan compound, the atmosphere, the weather?

It all feels like shit.

Getting here, once I knew exactly where it was, wasn't difficult.

The only barriers around this place were the ones put up to keep mundane humans out.

If there were any protective barriers, they are surely long gone now.

The sun still easily breaks through into this place, but it feels like it's filtered through a gloomy film.

This weakened light is beaten down upon a sprawling but empty compound, dotted with crimson buildings of old Japanese architecture for as far as the eyes can see.

The grass, trees, and flowers seem to be in a perpetual state of full summer bloom, filling the gardens bountifully.

And yet, beyond all that, the few trashed buildings that look like they just exploded make the place seem all the more desolate.

Nearly haunting.

I float down to the gate doors, embroidered with the Symbol of the Vermillion Bird, and easily push them open.

No guards, no defenses.

The place feels like a ghost town, but with my meager sensing abilities, I know there are people here, albeit few.

With a deep sigh, I land on the ground lightly and start walking.

But it's a slow, thoughtful walk. Towards the largest, grandest building in the compound.

At the southern end of the compound, I can see it, even from here. It looks almost like a shrine, it's where I can feel those life signatures, albeit barely.

I'm taking my time, partly because I'm not too sure what I want to do here.

Do I just ignore the people there, wait for night to fall, and for the Fallen to arrive?

Or do I go in, and have a chat while I wait?

I'll be honest, I get the feeling if I do go in, I'll do something stupid. Incredibly stupid.

Like, kill the fuckers in there myself levels of stupid.

But a part of me can't help but think, why?

Why be such a trash human being that you'd throw out your sister? Chase and try and murder a child? After you just killed the child's mother…

I stopped walking, and released a deep breath, pulling back my raging power, which was leaving melted stone steps in my wake as I walked.

I get the intense feeling I won't like the answer.

But that isn't how I wanted my first meeting with the Clan to go.

I doubt Suzaku would like that all too much, even if it would ultimately be a favor to her.

And yet.

My feet pick up their pace, heading toward the building once more.

My father came here once, didn't he?

He came to all the clans, once.

I don't know what he did.

But whatever he did, didn't work.

Canon still occurred. Whatever he did, didn't stick.

The Utsusemi Agency was still formed, as the Clan threw out their members in droves.

Be blessed with a different skill? Learn a different magic?

Tossed.

Be born with a special tool randomly?

Banished.

A child lost their mother and a family, no several families were destroyed. Continued to be.

And for what? For him to get jumped by a bunch of Fallen and Devils?

For everything he did to mean nothing!?

I didn't realize I had practically run to my destination until I reached it, my hands pushing open the double doors with ease.

Ah.

I finally realized something.

That's why when Uzume mentioned him some time ago, what he was doing, was meant to do, I felt…off.

Pissed off, almost.

What was his name, again?

I do a quick search through my memory.

Kunihito.

Well, Dad.

I don't know much about you, I was never told much.

And I didn't ask, either.

That's my fault, I suppose. Sorry.

But, I guess I'm about to find out, huh?

If you're watching me right now, give me the strength to not chop this idiot's head off the moment he speaks, alright?

Being as close as I am now, sensing where everyone was in this building was fairly easy.

My skill wasn't great, differentiating lives is something typically out of my reach for now, but you don't need to be a master to find an old soul.

An old soul, wrapped up in a layer of fire. The Shinto God of Fire's blessing.

Kagutsuchi's blessing.

I recognized it almost immediately for what it was as soon as I felt it.

And I frown as I feel how fake it is.

Don't get me wrong, it's still a genuine blessing from a Kami, I know that.

But it feels artificial. Somehow.

I don't know how to describe it perfectly. I've never even come across something like this before.

Vaguely, I recognize that those mystics from before likely had something similar, but they were weak enough, and my sensing ability was not strong enough, to pick up on it.

I shake those thoughts out of my head.

More pressing matters to attend to.

As I approach the location where I sense the old man, aptly in the building's southernmost chamber, I can feel the other life signatures fan out around the building.

I don't hear, or even see anyone else, but others are certainly around.

Still, I can tell they aren't that strong, compared to the old man anyway. If they try to ambush me, it won't turn out well for them.

Steadying myself and slowing my stride to something less stomping, I reach a set of magnificent doors, the old soul sitting just beyond.

I put my hand against the wood, and take a deep breath.

I'm not too sure what kind of man I expect to see on the other side.

But in the end, I don't think it truly matters.

I push open the doors and gingerly step in, my expression preemptively steeling itself.

I'm not shocked to find the ancient old man sitting there, already facing my direction.

Slumped forward slightly in his chair, sitting in an open-air chamber with no windows or even walls, merely red cloth curtains flowing gently in the wind.

I'm sure the place would look positively dazzling, if whatever spell over this place hadn't ruined the general atmosphere.

The old man sat at a nice redwood table, with an extra chair on the other end opposite to him.

A steaming teapot with cups is the only thing that sits on the table.

"Suou Himejima." I began, neutrally.

He gave me a bemused, once over. "...Arahitogami. Of our Lady Amaterasu Okami, no doubt. I never thought, in my old age, that I'd ever see one of you."

I blink but am not particularly surprised he knows what I am.

It would be disingenuous to call this man not learned. Cruel, for what he's done, sure.

But when you're in his position for so long, you likely pick up a lot regardless.

"I would have your proper name, boy. Then we can chat." He somehow manages to snort out softly.

I bite back an immediate snarky response, and instead state the truth, "Noriaki Kusanagi." I grit out.

He raises an aged eyebrow at that, "Not…Norihito? Huh. Curious."

Before he can add something else, I take a seat in the free chair and glare at him.

"But still, ever like your Father, aren't you?" He waves off, "Maybe not in looks, but in temperament. He came here once, marched in through the gates, didn't take no for an answer, didn't grant any due respect, didn't say his name until the end, right before he left."

"With all due respect," I say with the kindest smile, "respect isn't granted freely, but earned."

The old man merely scoffs at that. "A principle to hold, I suppose. Well…" the man's gaze turns and looks outside as he trails off for a second.

"We all, each of the Clans, and likely the Yokai as well, expected you to show up eventually." He muses, "Although I must admit, I can't tell if it's a curse or blessing, that you arrived here when you did."

"I am aware of your little Fallen problem," I state, "though I'm unsure whether or not to make it my problem as well."

"I figured as much."

He paused, reached out, and took his teacup from the table, taking a ginger sip before continuing, "Then what did you come here for? Although, I suspect I already know your reasoning."

Well. I came here, broadly, for information on Japan as a whole.

But seeing as the Clans and maybe the Youkai are expecting me for some reason, I should have bigger questions.

And yet, for this man in particular, I can only think back to my original thoughts coming here.

"Why." I utter, nearly silent as a breeze.

The old man stops midway through his next sip, and stares at me, gently lowering his cup.

"I…beg your pardon?" He tentatively responds, his befuddlement easy to feel.

"Why send your sister away?" He flinches at that, "Why kill your own? Hunt your own? Banish your own?" I hammer in, each question like a nail driven into his gut.

Flinch after flinch.

"I'm not sure what my Father came here to do exactly, said here, tried to do. But clearly?" I wave my hand to the outside, to the empty haunting compound, "It didn't work. So. Why?"

It was a strange thing, watching the sheer pain and sadness blooming in those old eyes.

And feeling no sympathy at all for the man.

"It is…tradition," the old man began, pained, "tradition that has been carried on for over a thousand years. All Clans follow it, and all Clans maintain it, in some form. For the Himejima?"

He holds a hand out to the side, a small ball of flame appearing in his hand.

"No Magic, beyond that granted by our gods. No tools of a pagan god, no other powers." He snuffs out the flame by squashing it between his fingers, "We were blessed with these gifts. We need no other, to gather otherwise would be…" he grimaces, "heretical, to our patron gods."

Ironic. Considering who he's talking to.

"And yet, when my Father came to you, with my Mother's blessing, and said otherwise…?" I'll trail the question off to him.

He snorted at that, "He implied such a thing, that what we were doing was wrong," he stressed, "but the offer he gave to fix it? To swear fealty to him and serve directly under him and the gods once more? Well. It didn't fix anything, in the end. Didn't even get a chance to tear down our traditions, before he…you know."

"I am aware." I huff, "But that's it, then?"

"Hmm?" He hummed out, befuddled once more.

"You did all of that because of tradition?" I elaborate, "That's it?"

The man didn't meet my gaze, instead focused purely on the teacup in his hands.

"Without our tradition, we are nothing." He stated solemnly.

"With your tradition, you lost family." I refute right back.

The old man cringed and gave a long sad sigh, pointedly not responding to that.

"You know," I began, dully, "the mystics over at the Gokōnomiya Shrine seem to think you're staying here out of stubbornness and tradition, but that's not it, is it?"

The old man looks further down.

When I came here, I didn't know exactly what to expect from this old man.

"You're here because you feel like you owe the Fallen attacking here something, right?"

Maybe somewhere, I expected the stereotypical angry hardline traditionalist.

One of the ones with a ten-meter-long stick up their ass, who can't get their head out the past.

But instead, as this old man finally looks up at me, eyes dull, dead, and broken, I know who I sit before.

A coward.

A coward who couldn't handle the weight of the duty his station brought.

Who knew, knew, what he was doing was wrong but didn't dare to stand up and say no!

Because of tradition. Because old men older than him would disagree.

What a fucked up situation.

"Yes." The old man murmured, "I am sure you're aware, at least somewhat, but I took the one who he loved away. Tried taking his daughter away too. Now that that man is free of his duty, he has nothing left but revenge I suppose."

So it is Baraqiel.

And that's a lie. He still has a daughter to make amends with.

"So you're offering yourself up?"

He nods, "I managed to convince the other elders to go to the Five Clans Inner Sanctuary and seek refuge there. I, and the most stubborn of brats, are all that remain."

I hum at that. "I'm shocked that Suzaku hasn't come back to fix this mess herself yet."

"Hah!" The old man chortles, "Are you kidding? This can only help strengthen her position. It wouldn't shock me if she was intentionally dragging her feet on getting back. Beyond that, she probably still holds a grudge against me specifically!" He takes another much longer sip this time.

I tilt my head. She would? Why?

"Ah," he waves me off, "Some four years ago, I had a marriage interview with the brat she wanted to marry. I shot it down after."

Oh. That's what happened with Tobio and Suzaku's marriage here, huh?

"What happened?" I asked quizzically.

"The boy didn't love her back." He shrugged.

I winced at that.

Sounds like Tobio alright.

Does that mean they've been doing harem shenanigans for the past four years?

Damn.

Finishing his tea, the old man placed his cup back on the counter and sighed.

"Well, boy? What are you going to do now? I don't presume you harbor any notion of saving me," He sighs out, "so I'm dead either way. I suppose the question is, by your hand? Or the Fallen?"

He suddenly chuckles mirthlessly, "Back in the day, when your father did show up, he chopped off the heads of several elders and nearly took the necks of three of the heads for what they did. So here's a better question, I suppose."

He looks directly at me, "Are you going to do what your father did, all those years ago?"

"No." Was my automatic reaction and reply, "I want to do better."

The old man snorted, and lowered his head, "Good answer, Lord Kusanagi."

My hand was on my back before I even realized what I was doing.

Crimson flames roared forth, torching the fiber of my bag, my hand cleanly sliding through the ashes and grasping the hilt of my sword.

In one single moment, when the flames stopped burning, and my blade left its sheath, there was silence.

Until the dull thud of a headless body hitting the floor tarnished it.

The doors behind me exploded.

I turned slightly, just enough to see more of those Shinto mystics, each holding numerous talismans in their hands.

Before they could utter a sound, my chest pounded, and a wave of Holy Spirit Power crashed into their senses, halting their movements and words in equal measure.

Light bloomed in the chamber, as my halos came into being, and I watched half-lidded as they all seemed to stiffen.

"Clean this up." I commanded them, dryly, waving at the body, "Give him a proper burial, as expected for this Clan."

A clean death, a clean grave.

I'll give him that much at least.

The mystics, after a moment of staring at me dumbly, hurriedly nodded.

"When that's done, show me to your training grounds, and leave. I have some steam I need to work off, and a match to prepare for later." I added simply.

Baraqiel. I hope you're ready. I'm about to beat the coward out of you and make you talk to your damn daughter already.

Instead of doing all this!

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

Chapter 16 End

Well, looks like someone already ambushed the Clan before him.

Speaking of, while writing this chapter, I had to read Slash/Dog and do a bunch of research over the Clans again.

As a result, it kind of made me want to try my hand at another story with the MC being a FPC member, inheriting a Sacred Beast, and such.

I'd probably go with the Azure Dragon, personally. The I could have the MC pull a Kaido. Would actually be kinda fun me thinks.

View Post

A New Sun Chapter 15

Chapter 15

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

Moving to Kyoto, I honestly expected something anime to happen, you know?

The examples are too many to list, but the expectation was there.

Is it kind of sad that I'm disappointed nothing has happened yet?

Kuroka didn't have much to pack, I didn't care to pack all that much stuff, so we were able to leave pretty quickly.

Of course, not before I left behind a clone to keep up with the going ons at Kuoh, the club for school, and such.

Said clone will be dispelled and a new one sent back off to Kuoh every day.

It's also there to tell Uzume what's up…whenever the hell she gets back!

Side note? Starting to get a little worried there, I wouldn't have the first idea of where to even look for her!

Moving on from that, for now.

I'm not entirely done with Kuoh, beyond just the chance Kokopuffs shows up, I still have to visit Genshirou's siblings and get them sorted.

Not looking forward to it, I'll admit. But I want to make sure they're set and not thrown into Japan's shitty foster care system.

Once Kuoh is finished building back up, I'll swing back by personally for them.

Upon actually making it to Kyoto things have been, as I said, rather mundane.

We found a place pretty quickly, a nice apartment looking over the city that Kuroka picked out, and I threw money at the poor guy selling so we could get in quickly.

He didn't seem to mind though.

After breaking in the bed, and not actually breaking the bed thankfully, we've been doing what all people visiting a new place for the first time do.

Exploring!

And by that, I mean walking.

A lot.

Or, in Kuroka's case, she's practically skipping right now, humming pleasantly while holding my hand as we ascend a particular mountain.

Around us, and continuing for heavens knows how long at this point, are hundreds of thousands of Torii Gates lined up in a row to create an almost tunnel-like structure.

You'd think I'd feel something coming from these gates, considering who I am and what they represent, but really, the only thing I can feel is the Shrine that we're heading towards.

That crushing, near suffocating Holy Spirit Power it emits, I can feel it, and Kuroka should be feeling it as well.

And yet, as soon as we started climbing, the Shrine seemed to recognize us and specifically didn't try to smite Kuroka.

I've never visited a Shrine before, especially never a Head Shrine before, but I'm fairly certain this is only happening because the owner knows us.

The Fushimi Inari-taisha. Inari's Head Shrine.

I figure, if there is someone who knows where to find my wayward maid, it'd be Inari.

Also! Kuroka and I kind of just wanted to explore, I don't think either of us has been to Kyoto before, and it is a really beautiful place so far.

Helps that I…don't have any concrete plans right now beyond, 'get to Kyoto!', and now that I'm actually here?

I'm kind of left scratching my head, looking around like a poor kid of lost his parents in a crowded airport in a foreign country.

Like, what I wanted to do was solidify some plan of action once Uzume got back with the information I asked her for.

I'm not going to make plans based on little to no information at all, look how planning with faulty info went!

So really, at this point, just trying to find stuff to fill the time.

Do you know what also helps?

Yes. Those pants are sinfully tight.

Also yes, she has clothes, and they somehow only sexualize her more.

I don't know how she does it, and I don't think I want to know.

"Nyah~...Nyah~...Nyah~!" She hums, skipping lightly as she tenderly licks the ice cream held in one of her hands.

Her eyes dart over to look at me, and the little tease smirks before she takes a slightly longer lick.

Never breaks eye contact, not even a little, as she does so.

I stare at her, incredulously, right back. "Kuroka." I start, plainly, "Do you want me to fuck you in the middle of the Senbon Torii?"

Kuroka gives a drawn-out hum at that, before smirking and saying, "Maaaybee~! Nyahaha~!"

She chuckles, of course, at the absolute deadpan I send her way.

"I'd rather not give Inari a front-row seat to something like that," I state simply, "but! Don't worry!" My deadpan slowly turns into a smile, prompting Kuroka to pause at my sudden cheer.

"When we get home, I'll make sure to give you plenty of…attention." My smile arches sinisterly, and Kuroka shivers, her cheeks flushing slightly.

"Looking forward to it, nya~!" She winks right back.

My smile drops, my expression neutral, as I add. "After I eat all those damn fortune cookies I bought for you."

"Wha!?" Kuroka blanches at that, and practically clings to my side, letting go of my hand to grasp the side of my jacket, "Nori-kun noooo!! Why would you be so mean!?"

I chuckle light-heartedly, and take a bite from my ice cream, promptly ignoring her.

Seriously. First shops before climbing the mountain? Sweet shops. They got everything over there, but they're mostly known for their fortune cookies.

Damn cat filled her purse with a whole bunch of them after we tried one.

Admittedly, they are really good, if I had a man purse most definitely would have done the same thing.

Kuroka finally gives it up, letting go of my side to pout instead.

And for a single moment, blissful silence reigns.

Until it doesn’t.

“So! Nori-kun~?” Kuroka suddenly pipes up, “Not that this isn’t fun and all, but why are we in Kyoto nya~?”

I blink at that.

Huh. Guess I didn’t tell her anything, did I? Just kind of dragged her along.

“Ah, shit…” I rub the back of my head and sigh, “sorry kitty, I did drag you out here without saying anything, didn’t I?”

Kuroka waves me off with a smile, “Nya! It’s fine, I always wanted to visit Kyoto without being attacked, you know? And with a big strong famous man like you around, there’s no chance of that happening!” What followed was a streak of cat-like laughter, while I bristled slightly.

Kuroka. Please. You can only tempt Murphy so much.

That does bring up something I was just thinking about though, but first things first.

I bonk her on the head, prompting a whining mew to replace her laughter as she reaches up and puts a hand on the strike zone. “Nori-kun~!!”

“Don’t tempt Murphy,” I scold her with a huff, “as for why we’re here? Well…” I trail off with a hum, thinking about the best way to answer this.

“For one thing,” I settle on this start, “it’s basically the center of Supernatural Japan. From what little I know, the West Yokai and Five Principal Clans both make the city their base of operations. And as you already know, Inari’s Head Shrine is here as well.”

Kuroka scrunches her nose slightly at the mention of the Clans, “Agh…those guys, nya? Do you have to deal with them, Nori-kun?”

I shrug at that, “Do I have much of a choice? My parentage alone is probably enough to get their attention but with my reveal to the world going the way it went…” I leave that statement open-ended, as obvious as it is.

She huffs at that, returning to pouting kitty mode, “Bunch of boot lickers going to come steal my Nori-kun away, I won’t let em’, nya~!”

I can’t help but chuckle at that, and pet her on the head, chuckling harder as she starts full-on purring and leaning into my touch.

The world, I think, already considers me part of the Shinto Faction in some way.

I haven’t gotten around to reading the general response the world has had to me yet, definitely something I should do, now that I’m thinking about it.

But, what with my reveal, I’m fairly certain I’m going to start getting invites to join various groups.

Hell, I already did with Vali’s, and I expect I’ll be approached by the Clans and maybe even the Yokai at some point.

But, I don’t want that.

I’m not going to wait around and be picked up by some group, especially when I’m missing a lot of key info about said groups.

For instance, Yasaka and the West Yokai. I’m pretty sure she has ties with the Devils in some way shape, or form.

Why? Well. It took longer to find a good place to stay that wasn’t owned by said Devils than it was to actually buy and move in.

Which was slightly worrying, with various implications.

It means either Yasaka and the West Yokai have ties with the Devils, or Yasaka doesn’t truly rule Kyoto.

Judging by how she was readily willing to lead an army in support of the Underworld during the Demonic Beast Riot in canon, I’m willing to bet the former over the latter.

The problem is, I don’t know the full scope of their dealings if there are any at all.

And do I even need to get started on the Clans?

“I think I’ll be fine, kitty.” I scratch behind her ears, prompting her to mewl with delight. “All these important groups being in one place is rather convenient because it lets me get what I sorely need right now,” I continue, “information.

Kuroka’s ears perk at that, “Hmm? What kind of information, nya?”

I grin, “All of it.”

Kuroka blinked at that, and tilted her head slightly, looking at me with consideration.

And so I continue, elaborating, “So far, I’ve been living in a bubble, not even acknowledging that the wider world around me exists. But it does, and I live in it, here in Japan. If I’m going to be a part of it, truly, then I need to know all I can. Beyond that?” I huff.

“I have no fucking clue.”

Kuroka’s head tilts comically. “Nya?”

I shrug, “What? It depends on what I find out. I sent Uzume off to be my little information gather, but she hasn’t come back yet, so I haven’t made any plans beyond that quite yet.”

Slowly, she sighs and shakes her head, “And here I was, thinking you started sounding profound, nya~!”

I snort, “You know, that should be an insult coming from a Senjutsu Master, but from you?” I pat her on the head, “I’ll take it as a compliment.”

Kuroka sputters on the spot before returning right back to pouting kitty mode.

Meanwhile, an inkling of a memory springs itself up in my head.

From around a month ago, when Uzume was first telling me stuff, the more general stuff, I specifically recall the conclusion.

My new home is kind of shit, isn’t it? And my Dad tried to fix it but failed.

Hmm. I’ve been holding off thinking about it, but I suppose soon would be a good time to bring it up again, huh?

With my thoughts and Kuroka being a pouty kitty, I didn’t realize we had reached the end of the Senbon Torii until we finally did.

And stood before the Inari Shrine proper.

“Hmm, time sure does fly when you’re lost in thought, huh…” I mutter, before looking over at Kuroka who’s looking past the final gate with slightly unease.

I take her hand into mine once more, and give it a light squeeze, “Hey?” I say softly to her, “It’ll be fine, been fine the entire way here, you’ll make it through, okay?”

Kuroka looks at me, a small smile etching onto her face before she nods lightly back at me.

We take a step forward, passing under the gate-

And it feels like I step through a film.

I come out the other end of the gate, alone, not even my ice cream came with me, the world around me has shifted.

The colors are brighter, nature especially, even the cold unalive stone somehow feels alive.

I can see the air, wafting gently like a clear white mist, as it goes through my hair, and as I look up, I see the sky has become a whirling spiral of golden power.

My gaze is suddenly snapped away from the sky by a sly giggle, coming from the shrine itself.

All around it, spectral pink foxes come strutting out from seemingly everywhere. Everywhere, except from inside the shrine itself.

No, the fox that comes from there is golden, and I know instantly who it is.

“Inari…?” I breathe out, my voice reverberating and echoing throughout this place.

The golden fox hums, and sits down on the offering box, before emitting a bright flash of light that makes even me narrow and close my eyes.

Once it’s cleared, my question is answered, as Inari sits there in the golden fox’s place.

Although she seems more…ghostly than I recall? She looks the same as last I saw her, in her shrine miko outfit, but she’s translucent and almost entirely see-through.

“In a sense,” Inari? giggles in amusement, “I suppose you could call me that. I am part of her, but not the whole her.”

Ah. Kami or deity bullshit, then?

She spreads her arms out to the Shrine and space around her, “Well, allow me to be the first to welcome you then, Noriaki-kun, to Shinkai…the World of the Kami!”

Ah, yeah. Kami bullshit specifically then.

What do I say at times like this again?

Ah, right.

“I have several questions.” I very intelligently say back.

The part of Inari, who I’m just going to call Inari from now on, giggles at that. “I figured you might!” She claps her hands together, and looks at me with a sly smile, “Unfortunately, this time, I can’t exactly answer those questions.”

“Huh?” I blink at that, “Uh, why not?”

“I can answer that!” She points at me, “See, I’m more like a fragment of the real Inari’s power, molded into…I guess the modern term would be software program. As the Inari in the Head Shrine, I manage all the other Shrines, therefore I’m more self-aware than the others…but I’m still merely a facsimile of the real thing.”

Well, that kind of sucks. Though, with how busy Inari seems to be, I suppose something like this should have been expected.

“So, I suppose you couldn’t answer why Kuroka isn’t affected by the Shrine’s Holy Spirit Power?” I try anyway.

And I’m not shocked when Inari just sits there and stares at me, her eyes becoming eerily unfocused even as she smiles.

I sigh, and walk up towards the offering box, “Well, this is still here, guess I can do my wish while I’m here.”

The light in her eyes suddenly returns, “Offering?” She says quickly, before scrambling off the box and behind it, poking her head out slowly to stare at me still, eyes sly smiling at me. “Go ahead, please~!”

Okay. Now I’m just a little creeped the fuck out.

Tentatively making my final approach, I pull out a yen coin and hesitate significantly as I see Inari’s vision suddenly laser focus on the thing.

Fucking hell Inari, what do you program these things to do exactly?

With a flick, I toss the coin in, thankful to all hell and back that the Inari behind the box didn’t moan or some shit, before putting my hands together, tilting my head forward slightly, and closing my eyes.

I make my wish and keep it simple, that being?

Make Uzume give me a phone call. That’s all I need, to at least see if she’s good, and what's going on.

The Inari behind the box suddenly snickers, “Ah, that’s all?” She hums, “Yeah, yeah…I can do that!” She claps her hands, and suddenly, the Shrine pulses.

Holy Spirit Power roars out from the Shrine, twisting and turning in the air, molding into the world before seemingly vanishing from my senses entirely.

I stare, half-lidded at her.

She merely smiled back at me.

“Thank you for your patronage!” She pipes out.

“...you could have at least warned me first, you know.”

“Thank you for your patronage!” She repeats, like a broken record, her smile turning slightly more sly.

I sigh, deeply, and end the offering by clapping my hands twice-

I am sucked through the film again.

And find myself standing back in the real world once again.

Kuroka, standing right next to me, her eyes slowly opening to turn and look at me.

Before I could even say anything, she summarized that whole…thing, with three words.

“Kami bullshit, nya?”

I nod sagely, “Kami bullshit, nya.” I say right back.

She reaches over, and pats me on the back, “Well, that was a moment kind of ruined…along with your ice cream, by the way.”

I give a long, pained filled sigh at that, which she nodded to.

“I already made my wish, so we can go somewhere else if you like, nya~!” She pipes up.

I hum at that, “Sure thing, but first,” and narrow my eyes at her, “what kind of wish did you make.”

Kuroka smirks at me, “Why, Nori-kun~! Don’t you know that telling someone else your wish makes it so it won’t come tru-”

“You know Inari is the Goddess of soil fertility, not female fertility, right?” I cut in easily.

Kuroka blinks, “Nya?” She utters, dumbly.

“Mhhmm~!” I hum, turning away, and leaving it at that.

It took her a few seconds of staring at my back before she finally started sputtering incoherently.

Ah, I’d say it was a shot in the dark, but truly? With Kuroka? It’s more like a mild shade.

“Nyaaa! Are you even listening to me!?” She cries out while jumping onto my back and clinging on, “I want a refund! I call false advertising! Nyyyaaa!!”

I reach around, chuckling, as I grab her legs to hold her and start making my way down with her on my back, babbling all the while.

According to that Inari, I should be getting a call from Uzume eventually, she didn’t say when, but judging by the fact that she could make the wish, I presume Uzume is fine.

That’s a little tension off my back for the day, at least.

Hmm, one last thing I want to test.

At the gate to the shrine proper, I pick up my fallen ice cream, or what I can with the cone.

Holding it up I begin, “Sorry about that, think you can handle this for me?” and with that, I toss it into the air.

As soon as it reaches its peak, I catch a bird-like shadow flash overhead, once it’s clear, the ice cream has seemingly vanished into midair.

I grimace.

Yeah, of course, we are being followed the whole time. I do recall Kunou leading an attack on Issei and co here, after all.

Hell, they might even be the ones that take care of the shrine itself while Inari is away.

Kind of shocked someone came out for that, though. Judging by Kuroka staring up at the air where it happened with this outright floored look, I think she was too.

“Well,” I continue into the strange silence that followed, “that happened.” I state, a matter of factly.

Then look over my back at Kuroka, “Wanna go get some udon and eat all the fortune cookies?”

Kuroka suddenly wraps her arms around my neck, her look completely shifting from incredulous to intrigued in a literal second.

“Udon?” She parrots with a hum, “Hmm, that does sound nice!” Deciding that, she points forward, down the path, “Away we go, Nori-kun~!”

Ah, cats. It’s always food with cats, huh?

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

Later that day, we’re back in the Kyoto Apartment, I’m sitting on the couch, with Kuroka lying her head in my lap.

Honestly, I feel cheated, shouldn’t this be the other way around?

Regardless, I’m softly petting my very full kitty, as she purrs lightly in her sleep.

She ate a ton of udon and half the damn fortune cookies.

Didn’t know she had a bottom to that seemingly endless appetite, but I suppose it had to end at some point, huh?

Only so much can go to her chest after all.

With a soft hum, I take a once over the apartment, still getting used to the new layout.

While my house outside Kuoh is of the more traditional style, this place is more modern luxury, while still retaining a dash of some old Japanese aesthetic.

Kuroka picked the place out herself, and I will once again admit to her having some taste.

Just that, some.

It’s late evening out, I’m full, Kuroka’s full. I think it’s about time I put the cat to sleep and find a place to train.

I would just have Kuroka teleport me back to my estates dojo, but well, already know why that isn’t happening.

Tomorrow, I need to start getting into the habit of dispelling and remaking my clone and have Kuroka teleport them back.

Gently now, I move Kuroka’s head off my lap, drawing a whining mewl from her that sounds way more cute than it should.

I pick her up, and carry her off to the bed, leaving her there all nice and tucked in, before heading to the living area.

Once there, I get the idea to try training my Senjutsu a bit, since I figure it may be just a tad bit important here, you know?

I couldn’t sense anyone following us the whole day, I assume Kuroka could, but didn’t care because they weren’t going to try anything.

Maybe they were using their own Senjutsu to mask their presence even harder, but still, it’s a weakness I need to see about overcoming.

And until I find an open enough free space that’s durable enough to handle mountain-busting level attacks at minimum, harder training regimens might be off the table for right now.

Or until I can teleport back to the estate, but it would probably be better to just find a place here.

It’s as I’m moving the furniture around to clear out a mediation space that I finally hear what I’ve been waiting to hear.

A phone call.

From guess who~?

With a hum, I answer the call.

"Hello–"

"Noooriii!!" Uzume, on the other end, interrupts with a long groaning whine.

Damn, she sounds out of it.

"Yes?" I affirm soundly, "It is indeed me, Uzume, what's up?"

"What's up? What's up!?" Uzume parrots, almost maniacally, "Everything's up, down, twisted, and sideways! Every time I think I'm done, something new gets added or changed! Things are constantly shifting! I haven't slept in…awhile!" She full-on rants, and I blink, mouth half open trying to think of something to say.

"What…happened?" I settle on, tentatively.

Uzume sighs loudly, "Ama happened. And the Devils didn't feel like stopping her."

"Specifically." I stress in response.

A moment of silence passes, before Uzume just says, "The Three Factions became Two."

I stare out the window at that.

Well. Shit.

"Uzume?" I start, simply.

I can almost feel her blink at my tone, "Yeah?"

"Come on back," I tell her, and before she can interrupt, I add, "I'll send you the address for our place in Kyoto, it's where we're at now, okay? You've got enough for now, I'm guessing. So get on back."

"B-But…"

"No buts." I shut her down, "Come on back, alright?"

"I…" Uzume stifles a sigh, "Okay. I'll see you soon, Nori…"

I hum in acknowledgment, "Good, see you soon."

And with that, I hang up the phone, text her the address, and throw it on the table.

With a deep, anguish-filled sigh, I push the furniture back into place.

I'm no psychic, but I get the feeling I'm going to need it.

It took shockingly little time before I could sense her incoming, her Holy Spirit Power even felt sad and spent.

As soon as she appeared, I was at the door. Before she even got a chance to open it, thankfully.

Because what greeted me wasn't my very tired maid, but a stack of boxes hiding said maid.

"Mmmm!" She mumbles behind it all, "Hi…"

"Hi?" I look over the stack of boxes, then blink and tilt my head slightly, seeing even more around her. "Need a hand there?" I tentatively ask.

"Please." She breathes out softly, nigh brokenly.

Damn girl…

Gingerly, I take what she's holding, and set it down next to the entrance, so I can finally see her.

She refuses to meet my gaze, and the new bags under her eyes practically have bags themselves.

With a huff, I go straight up to her.

"Huh?" She perks up as I approach, "What are—EEP!!" Then full-on squeaks as I pick her up, princess-style!

"H-Huh!? Nori! N-Nori!? Why are you-"

"Shush," I quietly silence her, "you need rest, and you're getting it."

I walk straight over to the couch and sit down, laying her head in my lap.

Her confusion is very much palpable as I do, but she starts humming softly into my leg as I pet her hair regardless.

"B-But I…didn't…" she weakly tries, I think, to shame herself, but she trails off tiredly before she can say it.

Still, I'll take a guess.

"You got enough for now," I mutter softly down to her, "you did real good, you deserve a break, okay?"

"O-Okay…" And just like that, poor girls out like a light.

Damn.

Tomorrow, we may need to talk about not working yourself to death.

Granted. Judging by where we are, I should have seen this coming, so I guess that's on me.

With a thought and a hand seal, I create a few clones that head off silently to go bring everything Uzume had in.

And then, of course, start speeding reading with the eyes activated.

I assigned one clone, specifically, to look over what would be the results of the Juggernaut Drive talks.

That takes precedence, of course, I needed to know what the fuck happened there yesterday.

Quietly, I pet Uzume's rather luscious purple hair as my clones get to work.

The only time I deviate from this action is when the clone assigned to the aforementioned task pops, and I flinch.

Huh. The Grigori just…doesn't exist anymore.

Also, the Grigori was shockingly small, like, damn.

Okay, where to start?

Leadership is a good one.

Azazel himself was chased out of the Grand Ise Shrine, where the talks took place, by Serafall after they were done.

Serafall had made an ice shiv, and was chasing the Fallen down threatening to, 'put some ice in his eye'.

Yeah, that sounds about right.

No idea if she caught him though.

Knowing Azazel, he probably pulled out some tool or whatnot that let him escape.

Beyond him, Shemhazai left to go live with his Devil wife and start a family proper.

Good for him, the poor guy deserves to live happily after all the shit Azazel made him do.

Baraqiel and Penemue just straight-up vanished. Odd. I kind of expected Baraqiel to join up with the Devils to try and get closer to his daughter.

Armaros, the now Head Researcher of Anti-Magic, took his subordinates and joined the Magicians.

Sahariel, the now Head Researcher of the…Moon? Took his subordinates and went to Romania.

Huh. Well. At least that fits, I suppose.

The list continues, on and on like that, for several researchers and executives.

Most just ended up leaving and going off where they can continue their research and business ventures.

Speaking of, Tamiel, the Head of the Business Department, took what was left of Grigori businesses, real estate, shipping, and so on, and formed 'The Watchers Conglomerate'.

A large world-spanning corporation, that has its toes in a little of everything. Neat.

The Nephilim Institutes across the world were handed off to associated Factions in the region like the Institute here in Japan being handed off to the Shinto.

Ah, and that's not the only thing!

Several Grigori Teams were handed over to other Factions.

Well, they were given the choice to either freelance or join up, and most did.

All of these teams are squads of Sacred Gear-wielding humans, the only one I recognize being Team Slash/Dog, who did join the Shinto officially.

Double neat.

Accordingly, businesses and other ventures were handed over to other Factions, and seeing that list almost made me snort.

All the Grigori's stuff in Japan was handed over to Inari, even the stupid shit like the 'Oppai Clubs' I vaguely recall from canon.

The full list is ridiculous, I know she's already busy, but…damn.

I wonder if there's a way to help her out with this workload. Uzume is not the only one working herself down.

Moving on. I do snort lightly at the next bit.

Kokabiel, he's gon dun a thing, of course.

See, most of the Grigori's stuff in the Underworld was handed off to the Devils.

I think the idea was, to have the remaining Full, Half, and Quarter Fallen population in the Underworld follow Shemhazai, and try to integrate.

But of course, everyone knows how the Devils treat their Half Breeds and Reincarnated Devils.

I'm not even the slightest bit shocked to find that, once the Shinto Shinigami pulled out and handed control of the Headquarters to the Devils, Kokabiel raised a ruckus and led a massive uprising personally.

I'll be honest here, Kokabiel, you crazy mad fuck, I don't like you. But damn do you have balls of brass.

Man supposedly tried to ambush Falbium, nearly succeeded, but got countered by the Satan before fleeing with a drove of supporters.

Kokabiel hasn't officially said anything, but the consensus is that there are two 'Grigori' now.

One was led by Kokabiel, and the other trying to get started with whoever was left under Shemhazai.

Who really would rather not do that shit, turns out, but the Devil Government is pushing for it.

Neither have names yet, unfortunately.

I can already tell, just from a bit of light reading, that Kokabiel is trying to catch that Fallen 'spirit of rebellion' and start up some sort of manic combination of a civil war amongst the Fallen, and straight war against the Devils.

Luckily, the Devils sealed away the Fallen's point of access to Earth, which means for now, Kokabiels Rebellion is stuck down there.

Which means I probably don't have to worry about him for a little while.

Fuck…that's a lot of stuff. And that's not even everything. Just the more important bits.

Of course, that's when my other clones decide to pop, and I grab my now buzzing head with a huff.

Those two were tasked with reading about the Clans and the Yokai.

And I think I know who I want to visit first now.

No, who I need to visit first.

The Five Principal Clans.

Supposedly, over the years, they've gotten better.

Remembering the events of Team Slash/Dog, I suppose it only makes sense.

But progress is slow, even with the new heads and heirs working on it.

Beyond that though? The Clans are the most knowledgeable regarding Japan's factions, supernatural beings, and their abilities.

Very interesting indeed.

Now, how does one go about setting up a meeting with them?

< ~ A New Sun ~ >

Chapter 15 End

Originally, I was gonna pull a Kyoto Arc start from canon, and just have them get attacked by Oni this chapter.

But its a tad too soon for that, and the Oni aren't that brutish.

Five Clans first, then the Yokai.

His Dad made a...lasting impression, on the Clans. Wonder if history will repeat itself, hmm?

View Post